JP2022190104A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a crime prevention performance of a game machine comprising a game setting change device.

SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a frame or box-shaped fixing part (outer frame, body part) which is stationarily attached to a game machine installation part in a facility; a door frame 3 which is formed to cover a front face of the fixing part and rotate in a single swing state; and a body frame 4 which is positioned on a rear side of the door frame 3 and rotate in a single swing state to the door frame 3 and the fixing part. The game machine has a game setting change device for changing a game setting of a winning probability by lottery in a prescribed range. Some of change operation means (power source switch 630a, setting key switch 131Xa, setting display part 131Xc, setting switch part 131Xb) for changing a set value of the game setting change device, are provided on a rear side of the door frame 3 and/or front side of the body frame 4, and residual parts of the change operation means are provided on a rear side of the body frame 4 and/or the fixing part which is a rear side of the closed body frame 4.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 249

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

A pachinko machine, which is an example of a game machine, is provided with a game area on a game board surrounded by rails and covered with a window in front. When a game ball enters a specific receiving port or the like in the process of flowing down, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) as a prize for the entering ball, while a game ball that does not enter the receiving port It is designed to be collected to the island facility side (game hall side) through the out ball port.
Then, when the game ball enters the starting winning hole, which is one of the specific receiving holes, a lottery is performed to determine the hit or miss by the game control device (main control board) attached to the back of the game board. , After the lottery result is displayed in a special pattern display device (7 segments, etc.) for a predetermined period of time, the special symbol corresponding to the "loss" (eg, segment display of "-") Alternatively, a winning special symbol (for example, segment display of "7") corresponding to "winning" is displayed.
When the result of the lottery is "big hit", the special symbol is hit on the special symbol display device and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the closed variable prize winning device is controlled to open for a predetermined time to open the variable prize winning device. When a ball is entered, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15×the number of entered balls) are provided (released) to the player as a prize.

Thus, in current gaming machines, the probability of winning, which is a game setting, is fixed to, for example, 1/300. As shown, there is also a game setting changing device for changing the game setting within a preset range.

JP-A-4-2382

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is provided with a game setting change device in a well-known back mechanism that includes all main parts such as a ball tank and a prize ball payout device, and the setting is performed by rotating the back mechanism. Changes can be made. Normally, this back mechanism is attached to the rear side of the door frame which is formed on the front surface of the outer frame so that it can be rotated in a single-sided manner. It is possible to operate the game setting change device provided. From a different point of view, by simply rotating the door frame, it is possible to peek at the game setting values and change the setting values by operating the game setting changing device provided in the back mechanism. Of course, the door frame is locked by a locking unit, so it cannot be opened easily, but there is a possibility that it can be broken depending on the organizational strength of the person plotting fraud or the skill of the criminal method.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above, and its object is to improve the crime prevention performance of a game machine having an operation unit related to settings.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention
A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole and executes a predetermined winning game when a winning result is derived as a result of the lottery,
a setting-related operation section that can be operated by an administrator;
setting determination mode generation means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining a setting value related to the probability of deriving the winning result based on an operation on the setting related operation unit;
with
The setting-related operation unit is provided on the back side of an opening/closing unit having a back surface that cannot be touched by the player,
The setting determination mode can be started when an operation is performed on the setting-related operation unit when the opening/closing unit is opened and the game machine is powered on,
During the setting determination mode, a specific sound is output from a predetermined sound output unit, and a specific external signal is output via a predetermined external terminal plate,
The setting value is determined and the setting determination mode is ended, whereby a game becomes possible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the crime prevention performance of a gaming machine having an operation unit related to settings.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is at the raised position; It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a body frame and the body frame is opened from an outer frame; FIG. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame, showing another form. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the outer frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of an outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from below. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the lid member removed. FIG. 38(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX. FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view; FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is a vertical cross-sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view of the same. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) and (b) are enlarged views of essential parts of FIG. 45 showing the normal flow of game balls (foul balls), and (c) is an enlarged view of essential parts of FIG. . FIG. 4 is a plan view of the foul cover unit; FIG. 11 is a plan view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; FIG. 11 is a longitudinal front view of the foul cover unit showing another tampering prevention means; (a) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a foul ball passes. 49(a) and 49(b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line is disabled. (a) and (b) show a state in which the operation line disabling member is motorized, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z section in FIG. 49 showing the state in which the operation line is disabled. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of a main part showing another form of the operating wire disabling member; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, viewed from the rear. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a plate base unit in the plate unit; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit in a dish unit from the forward-backward direction of the production|presentation operation part button unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front right. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit, viewed from the front left. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit of the production|presentation operation unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the production|presentation operation button unit, and was seen from the front lower side. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion; (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation portion of the pressing operation portion. is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in . It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the body frame in the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting device. (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction; (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball removing movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 4 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational positions of the dispensing blades; It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball dropout prevention. It is a modified example of the dispensing device. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full-tank ball path unit; It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. Fig. 120(a) is exploded and is an exploded perspective view seen from the front; It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side. FIG. 118(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 118(a). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). It is another configuration of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. 132 is an enlarged front view of the main part of the game board of FIG. 131; FIG. It is an enlarged front view of a main part of the game board showing another form. It is an enlarged front view of a main part of the game board showing another form. (a) and (b) are enlarged front views of essential parts of the game board showing other forms. It is an enlarged front view of a main part of the game board showing another form. It is an enlarged front view of a main part of the game board showing another form. 138 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. 137; FIG. 133 is an enlarged front view of a main part of a game board showing a modification of FIG. 132; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 10 is a schematic view of a function display unit mounted in the upper left corner of the front component outside the playing area; It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; It is a schematic perspective view of internal structures, such as a back left movable decoration. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit; It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view along line XX of FIG. 148; FIG. 149 is a view in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 148; It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the structure of a frame ground substrate; It is a schematic diagram of how to handle a conductor floating with respect to the ground provided in various production units provided on the game board. 2 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply substrate; FIG. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 156 is a view in the direction of arrow B of FIG. 155; Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 1). Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 2). 1 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of a discontinued electronic component; FIG. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage measure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. FIG. 4 is a block diagram for explaining electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits; It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. 168 is an enlarged view of part D of FIG. 167 viewed from the non-LED-mounted surface; FIG. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the second embodiment. It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the third embodiment. FIG. 171 is an enlarged view of the D′ portion of FIG. 169 or the D″ portion of FIG. 170 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; It is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 173 is an enlarged view of the D''' portion of FIG. 172 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface; FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate including a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 175; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 178. FIG. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing subsequent to FIG. 179 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a central vertical cross-sectional view of the game board including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of arrow Z1 part of FIG. 192 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 192 is an enlarged view of arrow Z2. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XX of FIG. 191; FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the Z3 section of FIG. 195; It is an end face front view of the game board cut in the middle of the thickness direction of the light guide plate. It is the front view of the game panel and center member which abbreviate|omits the back decoration member, and the front view which disassembled and arranged. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the base panel and front enclosing member of a game panel. It is a perspective view showing a base panel and a back decorative member of the game panel. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a base panel and a back decorative member of the game panel; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a production unit. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of the production unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a drum unit of the production unit; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the rear cover of a production|presentation unit. FIG. 4 is a central vertical cross-sectional view of a main part for explaining the movement state of the drum; 189 is an enlarged view of the Z4 part of FIG. 188; FIG. It is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the handle unit. FIG. 209 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 209; Fig. 3 is an exploded sectional view showing the handle unit; FIG. 11 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main portion of the door frame showing another form of the handle unit; 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine having two handle units; FIG. It is a perspective view of a door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right side view of a door frame. FIG. 215 is an enlarged view of the Z5 portion of FIG. 214; 214 is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the handle unit on the right side of FIG. 213; FIG. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view taken along line TT of FIG. 217; FIG. 219 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state linearly moved from FIG. 218; Fig. 3 is an exploded sectional view showing the handle unit; 217 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to line TT of FIG. 217 showing the handle unit on the left side of FIG. 213. FIG. FIG. 222 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state linearly moved from FIG. 221; FIG. 223 is a cross-sectional view along line UU of FIG. 222; FIG. 11 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main portion of the door frame showing another form of the handle unit; Fig. 2 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine as seen from the front right; It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the back. It is an enlarged front view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine. It is an enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine. It is an enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper portion of the pachinko machine showing a modified example of the front top plate. It is an enlarged right side view of the main part of the upper part of the pachinko machine showing another form of the front top table. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. 232 is a partially enlarged front view showing the lower half of the game board of FIG. 231; FIG. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. 237 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear opposite to that of FIG. 236; FIG. It is a central longitudinal cross-sectional view including a partially enlarged view. It is a combination flat cross-sectional view in which the cutting position is changed around the lower layer game zone of the game board. It is a perspective view of a third display device. It is a front view of a 3rd display. It is a front view of the 3rd display which shows the changed state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the 3rd display. It is a perspective view showing an exploded lower game zone of the game board. 245 is a perspective view showing the disassembled lower game zone of the game board viewed from a direction different from that of FIG. 244; FIG. (a) is a longitudinal sectional view showing a sorting device of a third sorting unit, and (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the sorting device showing a state of game balls subjected to vibration by an external force. FIG. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of a main part of the ball rolling member showing another form of the ball guiding portion; It is a perspective view of a right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. (a) is a perspective view of the lower portion of the body frame as seen from the left side, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower portion of the body frame as seen from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the door frame from the rear surface side. It is an enlarged perspective view of the main part showing the upper left corner of the game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing D-cut angular positions formed on the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors; 3 is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit; FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of polyswitches; FIG. FIG. 11 is a table for explaining drive management blocks of the first sorting stepping motor; FIG. It is a table explaining the drive management block of a 2nd distribution stepping motor. 1 is a schematic diagram of a method of mounting a field effect transistor; FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a vibration detection circuit; FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
An example of a game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 170 for a pachinko machine 1, and a detailed description of the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment with reference to FIGS. 171 to 189. FIG. For convenience of explanation, the side facing the player of the pachinko machine is called "front" or "front", and the opposite side is called "back" or "back".

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation portion of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. be. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame and outer frame. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

A pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and supporting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. A main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; (See FIG. 106).

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 .

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 are connected to the main body frame 4 and the main body. It is for coaxially supporting the lower frame hinge assembly 520 so as to be rotatable, and attaching the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in front view.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 so that the lower outer frame assembly 40 is part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. By inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 which is an operation medium operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with a performance operating section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player can operate the performance operating section 301 when the player participation type performance is executed. , the player can participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by the operation of the performance operation unit 301.例文帳に追加

The body frame 4 has a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2. Main body frame upper hinge member 510 and main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed, and a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. , a ball launching device 540 for hitting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game balls B supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and the back of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501. A back cover 640 for covering the sides, a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side of the front so that it can be opened and closed. is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player's operation, a front constituent member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front constituent member 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and peripherals arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing movable effect and light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement to change the movement of the game ball B, and a game ball B is received to play the game. Acceptance openings such as a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004 and a big winning opening 2005 that provide a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B payout) to the player, and a game A gate unit 2003 that provides a predetermined privilege (for example, enabling the player to enter the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period of time) when the ball B passes through, and a gate unit 2003 that allows the game ball B to enter. A disadvantageous first inlet 2006 (described in detail below) is provided that is not benefited by. The general winning opening 2001 , the first starting opening 2002 , the gate portion 2003 , the second starting opening 2004 , the big winning opening 2005 and the first receiving opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000 .

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the handle unit 180 for player operation to perform game input for adjusting the hitting force, thereby hitting the game ball B with arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a, and the disadvantageous first receiving opening The player can be entertained by the operation of hitting the handle 182, such as not allowing the ball to enter the entrance 2006.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image, or the reverse effect unit 3100 to display a predetermined effect image, or a movable effect or A player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the player rotates the handle 182 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 201, which will be described later, the ball launcher 540 produces a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (the amount of operation of the handle 182). A game ball is launched at , and the game ball is guided into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 through the shot ball passage formed by the shot rail 544 , the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 . be. Then, when the game ball hit into the game area 5a is received in the general prize winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened by a payout device 580 described later according to the received winning opening. are dispensed onto the upper tray 201 from the top.

It should be noted that, due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, if the game ball fired with a strength that cannot reach the game area 5a, that is, with a weak launching force, does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, it falls into a foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the end (terminating end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (starting end) of the outer rail 1001, and is returned as described later. A foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 forming the passage portion 1014 receives the foul ball, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 is a right side view of the outer frame. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the main members of the outer frame, viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 together, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

The outer frame 2 forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 when the main body frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2 , the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. A left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2 . It is for attaching the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 .

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 includes a concave portion 11a that is flat and concave to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a portion that is opposite to the concave portion 11a on the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of vertically extending grooves on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 to be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 12b on the left side of the portion 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 while the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11 . The upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing portion 12a in contact with the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left side cutout portion 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 13a extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and rightward from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. and a flat plate-like abutting portion 13d that extends short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the contact portion 13 d against the front surface of the bulging portion 11 b of the left outer frame member 11 and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13 b against the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, thereby It is attached to the left frame member 11 . The left lower connecting member 13 has the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the left side cutout portion 41a of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 includes a right outer frame member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side surface of the right outer frame member 21, and the right outer frame member 21. and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side surface.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed leftward at the rear portion of the right side surface that is trisected in the front-rear direction, and a recess portion 21a that is flat and recessed leftward from the portion opposite to the recessed portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and has a reduced weight due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the right outer frame member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces thereof. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10 .

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30 . The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 22b on the right side of the portion 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, and the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the right outer frame member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21 while the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing portion 22a in contact with the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a in the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. A horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing portion, and left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. and a flat plate-like contact portion 23d that extends short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 has the rear surface of the abutting portion 23 d in contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21 b of the right outer frame member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23 b on the left side surface of the right outer frame member 21 . With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligned with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the right outer frame member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21 . The lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a in contact with the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a in the right side surface of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

An outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 to be described later is hooked to the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 . The upper hooking member 24 has a flat mounting portion 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The upper hooking member 24 extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 24a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 24b to which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked is provided.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. A flat plate-like hooking piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction. and a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same lateral length as the lateral length of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 to be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has cutout portions 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 30a on the left and right ends and attached.

In addition, the outer frame upper member 30 has a mounting stepped portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed from the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment stepped portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 which is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and whose rear is open is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped rear panel member 43 extending to the left and right, which is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 a mechanism 44;

The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. formed by The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 has cutout portions 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left and right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into the cutout portions 41a on both the left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the panel rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear in the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. The concave portion 41b maximizes the volume of the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. As shown in FIG.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to the height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the panel front member 42 with the panel rear member 43, the panel interior becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the panel rear member 43. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated opening 42a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front surface near the right end.

The rear panel member 43 extends in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to the front surface of the panel rear member 43 , the panel internal space 40 a that forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is formed in cooperation with the panel front member 42 . The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connection tube portion 43a extending in the left-right direction, projecting upward, and communicating with the inner space 40a of the panel at the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the rear panel member 43 . In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The connecting tube portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the rear panel member 43 as a whole. is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting tube portion 43a. When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection tube part 43a, thereby connecting the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624. FIG.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is arranged such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, thereby preventing the game ball B from being held between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. to prevent it from being caught.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so as to face the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the placement portion 44a, An upright wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear and right sides of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d and having an upper surface inclined upward toward the rear. and a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position coinciding with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size through which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the inner space 40 a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear panel member 43 . Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43. As shown in FIG.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. A standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the vertical wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end projecting portion 44e that protrudes forward provided at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 .

By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen onto the placing portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B tends to stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, there arises a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment, the game ball B dropped onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is discharged through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge. Through the exit 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged behind the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2), and the game ball B can be discharged between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the ball B from being caught.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 arranged on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43 with a left-right spacing, and closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear side. and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which is mounted inside the front panel member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 .

The pair of guide members 45 are in contact with the lower end of the door frame 3 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is made of punching metal with numerous small holes. The port member 47 communicates the inner space 40a (enclosure 624) of the curtain board and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 with two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the low-pitched sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (within the enclosure 624) according to the principle of Helmholtz resonance. , a rich low-pitched sound can be radiated forward of the outer frame 2 (toward the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. and prevents the sound in the enclosure of the speaker from leaking from between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 and viewed from above, and FIG. 22(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 22(a) viewed from below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable. is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30. and a mounting screw 53 for mounting the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 .

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is in the form of a horizontally extending flat plate and extends forward from an upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-like forward extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the forward extending portion 51b to the center of the forward extending portion 51b toward the front and penetrates vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and an end edge extending downward from the left side of the forward extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. A flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d is provided. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a later-described main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band plate-like lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and an operation piece 52b extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It has an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by an attaching screw 53, at a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 , the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the edge of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 . It extends forward so as to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. As shown in FIG. The locking member 52 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 in the vicinity of the front end is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operation piece 52b to rotate the lock body 52a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 has a flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and having a size through which only one game ball B can pass. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with a narrower upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. 60 d of discharge holes are formed in the horizontal part 60a so that it may contact|connect the center part of the front-back direction of the rising part 60b, and may extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal part 60a in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60 d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44 b of the ball jam prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 .

In the outer frame lower hinge member 60 assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is placed on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screwed (not shown). It is fixed to the rear panel member 43 by . The raised portion 60b is attached to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, in the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is separated from the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the ejection hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 60.例文帳に追加

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game ball B to be hit in the game area 5a, and stores the game ball B. It has a handle 182 operated by the player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

The door frame 3 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 closing the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 180 attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame left side unit 400 attached to the tray unit, a door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear, and mounted near the right end on the rear side of the door frame base 101 on the rear side. a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the door frame main relay board 104; The door frame relay board cover 107 covers the rear handle relay board 106, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the handle rear relay board 106 is covered from the rear side. It has a post-handle relay board cover 108 and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to it. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the body frame 4 one by one. In addition, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 by being shot with a weak launching force by the ball launcher 540 to the lower plate 202, It is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 .

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 . The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is ejected into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is intended to be driven into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. FIG. 32(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, and FIG. 32(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 at the left side in front view, and closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so as to be opened and closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a rectangular and flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 with an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting a handle unit 180, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 at the lower right corner in rear view.

The door-frame base unit 100 also includes a door-frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in the rear view of the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101, and a door-frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door-frame base 101. A door frame secondary relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted to the left side of the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side and covering the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable are provided. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame top hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening/closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the handle rear relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the bottom corner of the front surface, a plate unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 400 at the front surface of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame base 101 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape with an inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door window 101a has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery, which are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and a lower side forming the inner periphery extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b, which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted is recessed near the right end in the front view from the front to the front and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder main body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 101e for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 101 penetrates in the front and back at a position near the center in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. a passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper tray that penetrates in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a in the vicinity of the left end in a front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, and a door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a plurality of longitudinally long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper tray ball passage opening 101g) when viewed from the front and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of slits 101i are such that the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is positioned in front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is positioned behind. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The handlebar mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a tubular portion 102a. a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c projecting into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; , and reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

The handle mounting member 102 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with a screw while the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The cylindrical portion 102 a has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 . One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the remaining two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed in the handle base 181 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 102, the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. As a result, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided forward. Through the speaker opening 211b in the plate unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be favorably guided forward (toward the player).

Moreover, the speaker duct 103 has a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board/Door frame secondary relay board/Handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular outer shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 (see FIG. 99). and FIG. 100) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape by combining a square extending left and right on the right side of the upper part of the square extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame secondary relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410 side. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the body frame 4, The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door-frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are arranged so that the vertically extending parts of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 are connected to the door. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107 , and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 .

The post-handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear handle relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, rear handle relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and part of the door frame sub relay board (inverted L-shaped portion extending up and down) can be covered. cover the sides. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and the left side when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door-frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door-frame main relay board 104 and the door-frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door-frame relay board cover 107 and can be opened. A connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side of the housing and connected to these terminals.

The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106 . The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200 with a wiring cable (not shown). It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending in the left and right direction, and has openings formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cables.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that are spaced apart in the left and right direction, and a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 . An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115, which are connected to the right reinforcing frame 112, are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 with a vertical separation therebetween, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 are engaged. and a hooking member 116 that is attached.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically by a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101 . The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted through these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 . The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends in the left and right direction with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101 .

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends laterally with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113 . The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch portion 114a that is rectangularly cut downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end. The cut-out portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper tray ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a pair of rear piece portions which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right direction and formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece portion connecting the front ends of the pair of front extending portions to each other. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112 . A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 .

The hooking member 116 is attached to an insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 . Door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are hooked to these hooking members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching and molding metal plates. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 assembled along the left side, right side, and upper side of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114. , is assembled to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101. As shown in FIG.

[3-1-7. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a locking spring 124 biasing the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like attachment piece 121a that is square in front view, and flat plate-like projecting pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower sides of the attachment piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 at the attachment piece 121a. Hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends upward. The portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 .

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower projecting piece 121 b of the hinge bracket 121 . The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123 .

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is the lower projecting piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is fully extended. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 or removed downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 , so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 . can be supported as much as possible.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 .

[3-1-8. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and rectangular in front view, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. A door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the projecting piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer circumference of the lower end portion is tapered and chamfered. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is positioned coaxially with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the projecting piece 125b. installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 rotatably with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. can be done.

[3-1-9. cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32-34. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650, which will be described later, to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing and locking with. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. and a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

A cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and the rotation transmission member 133 is formed in opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252h of the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 23, etc.).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. FIG. 35(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 35(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 36(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 can be supplied. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222. - 特許庁

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the inlet 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open end and a box-shaped front cover 141 with a closed rear end and an open front, and a game ball entered from an entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying ball B to the ball launching device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extraction member 143 having a partition part 143a partitioning between an entrance port 141a and a ball extraction port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a rear cover 142 for game balls B on the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 one by one. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported about an axis extending vertically between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entry port 141a in a front view, and a ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144 .

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the center of rotation of the ball extracting member 143 on the left side of the ball extracting port 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entry port 141a. And, it is formed so as to close from the rear side the portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball removal guideway 241c.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b on the lower side of the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and the partition portion 143a. Extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball outlet 141b. a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b; and the rotating rod 143b below the operating rod 143c. and a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. An operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35(a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 that moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped cut-off portion 144a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the entrance port 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143, and a cut-off portion 144a behind the cut-off portion 144a. It has a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of the rotation shaft, and a rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Also, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding member 144 rotates about the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is arranged at a position eccentric to the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a feed position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540, and enters the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking portion 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition portion 143a (waiting position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Then, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energization) of a ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip of the ball feeding working rod 146 which swings vertically. and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by movement of the ball feeding member 144 and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 has an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. It is When the ball-feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball-feeding operating rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward (upward) the ball-feeding solenoid 145 due to the magnetic force generated, thereby feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. and return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feed operating rod 146 near the ball feed crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feed solenoid 145 .

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction which can be engaged with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 which moves up and down, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b is disposed on the opposite side of the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the shaft portion 147b extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , and a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36(b)) projecting downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be fed (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633.

Also, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the rotatably supported ball extraction member 143 or the weight 143d. However, the actuating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 may contact the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper dish ball extracting slider 242 which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball extracting button 222 of the dish unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b in a normal state to partition the ball removal port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter into.

Then, when the player presses downward the upper tray ball removal button of the tray unit, the upper tray ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission section, and the operation rod 143c moves downward along with the movement of the operation transmission section. will also move relatively downward. When the operation rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to form a partition. is released. As a result, the game ball B entering from the inlet 141a falls to the side of the ball outlet 141b, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball removal guideway 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

In addition, since the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 formed with the operation transmission part 242b with which the operation rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 abuts is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition part 143a. Even if is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, and it is possible to prevent the ball extraction member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B can be inserted into the partition Rebounding at 143a can be prevented.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular attachment recess 142b (see FIG. 36(b), etc.) recessed forward and to the upper right when viewed from the back of the batted ball feed port 142a in the rear cover 142. An operating wire disabling member 700, which is a first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b so as to be accommodated therein. The operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. there is In addition, disabling the operation wire here means that the operation wire cannot be operated normally by cutting, pinching (pinching), entangling (winding up), or gluing with hot melt etc. It means to put into a state.

The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. A first piece is vertically separated at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance to the left from the right side. A portion 701 and a second piece portion 702, and an inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. and have. The first piece portion 701 of the operation wire disabling member 700 is bent with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation wire disabling member 700 so that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece portion 702 extends on the same plane as the flat plate surface of the operating wire disabling member 700 . As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that widens in a V shape toward the right.

The operating wire disabling member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is positioned inside the ball supply port 142a. communicated with.

According to this operating wire nullifying member 700, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball having a diameter approximately the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-like operating wire (string, piano wire, wire or linear member such as a catheter) is attached. or a synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter) is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper tray 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out on the side of the upper tray 201 attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball path using an illegal ball, or an illegal act such as taking an illegal ball into or out of the first starting port 2002 is performed, the game is played by the ball launching device 540. By the force of the illegal ball fired (hit ball) with a strength that can reach the area 5a, the operating wire attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702. Then, the narrowed portion of the shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 can be cut like scissors, thus invalidating the operating line and using an irregular ball. It is possible to deter fraudulent acts that have been committed.

It should be noted that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the form described above, and may be of another form. For example, if it is configured to deter fraud by cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the illegal ball, the metal plate may be bent in a form different from that described above, or the bent operating wire nullifying member 700 may be used. Alternatively, a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or pinching the operating wire attached to the irregular ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.

Also, if the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (above the partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is moved to the non-contact type (for example, the proximity switch ), and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the illegal ball from being shot. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feed solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feed.

[3-1-11. foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul cover unit. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the cover member removed, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back with the cover member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) that is weaker than a predetermined force (a firing force that can reach the game area 5a). It is for guiding game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached inside to the lower tray 202, and guiding game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. .

As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and having an open front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152 and .

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and has a lower normal dispensing passage 610a of a lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for balls of the dish unit 200. and a through-ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. and a full tank ball receptacle 150b.

In addition, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a; A lower plate ball supply port 211c which is open forward near the lower corner and discharges game balls B received in a full ball receiving port 150b and a foul ball receiving portion 150c forward, and is an opening for balls of the plate unit 200. and a communication passage 150h that connects the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiver 150c. This communication passage 150h is composed of an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball ( The lower passage wall 150j is arranged in parallel with an interval of 1 ball), the starting end opens upward at the downwardly inclined end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving part 150c, and the terminal end is stored. It opens downward to the passage 150e.

A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e to the ball discharge port 150d is a foul ball return. A return passageway section 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passageway 150e having a possible width is provided.

The ball-through passage 150 a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 . The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. As shown in FIG. The ball outlet 150d is formed in the lid member 152. As shown in FIG. A storage passage 150 e is formed by a unit main body 151 and a lid member 152 .

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and the movable piece 153 and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full-tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to the player, the staff of the game hall, or the like, and they can be urged to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the penetrating ball passage 150a. A door opening/closing abutting portion 150f is provided with which the operating projection 613a of the door 613 can abut (see FIG. 109). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b ( front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line nullification member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for deterring fraud by an illegal ball Q to which an operation line L is attached. Operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S, which are third tampering prevention means, are provided in the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between them.

The second operating wire disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is enlarged in FIG. As shown in the figure, the projections 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting hole 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting hole 152h of the cover member 152, and fixed (bonded) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, Furthermore, for safety considerations, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit from the outside so that it is difficult for the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like to come in contact with it.

A specific operating wire disabling member 7000 has components equivalent to those of the operating wire disabling member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. One piece 7010 and a second piece 7020 extending from a convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 form a V-shape opening in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball of the connecting passage 150h. A shearing portion 7000v of is formed.

In the foul cover unit 150 of this embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface and directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k for guiding the operating wire L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and has a folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i facing the lid member 152 side. A first inclined portion 150ka descending toward the operating wire nullifying member 7000 side, and a narrow width toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. and a tapered guiding portion 150k having a tapered second inclined portion 150kb (a shape capable of capturing the operating line L). Then, when the operating line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the irregular ball Q or the pulling from the outside, slides on the guide portion 150k in a winding manner, the tensile force applied to the operating line L moves the first inclined portion 150ka to the second inclined portion 150ka. The operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 so as to slide on the inclined portion 150kb. As a result, the operating wire L can be reliably captured by the operating wire disabling member 7000 . In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of normal foul balls and the guidance of the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to catch the operating line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be curved.

Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is made using the space communicating from the lower dish ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The installed illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L that is projected to the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball path using the illegal ball Q, or It is possible to deter fraudulent acts such as putting the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.

For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the illegal ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter referred to as "fraudulent act"). A”) is played, if the illegal ball Q crosses the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c toward the firing position of the firing rail 544, Pulled by it (loaded with tension), the operating wire L turns around along the folded portion in a U-turn. Then, the operating wire L is guided to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v formed by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally As a result, the operation line L cannot be manipulated, so that fraudulent acts using the illegal ball Q can be deterred.

In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, and one of them is sent from the batted ball supply port 142a to the shooting position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, is used. Even if a cheating act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") of grabbing the operating line L connected to the illegal ball that became a foul ball from the player and shooting the following illegal ball Q into the game area 5a, The operating line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (loaded with tension) by the subsequent launch of the illegal ball Q. L is pressed against the same folded portion, and the operating wire L enters the sheared portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. It becomes possible. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, with respect to the above-described fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullification member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, may not be sufficiently effective against an illegal ball Q that becomes a foul ball (for example, Even if the illegal ball Q is fired with a certain strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasures by the first fraud prevention means. It also has an effect. For this reason, when the fraudulent act B is targeted, the operation line nullification members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line nullification member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means to be described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and a first operation line disabling member 700 and a second operation line disabling member 7000 or third operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S separate from it are provided. It is preferable to provide the pachinko machine 1 together. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are provided together on the side of the door frame 3 and are not exposed to the outside, so they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, anti-fraud information is less likely to be leaked. In addition, since deterioration of the sharpness of the operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 affects the crime prevention performance, if they are replaced together with the door frame 3, the crime prevention performance can be easily maintained.

By the way, the operating wire nullifying members 700 and 7000 serving as the above-described first and second fraud prevention means cut and invalidate the operating wire L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to make it impossible to push or pull the flexible operation line L, or to make it difficult to push or pull the operation line L, making it impossible to easily operate the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L. You can disable it like this:

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operating line nullifying member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion in the enlarged view of FIG. The front half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the tip is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033 , and the rear half of the non-joint portion is a clamping portion 7044 . Such an operation line disabling member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is designed so that it is difficult for an employee or a game machine assembler to come in contact with the hands. and is covered and housed by a lid member 152 from the outside.

According to the operating wire nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operating wire L is pulled by the illegal ball Q, and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion is turned around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operating wire nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-bonded portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is sandwiched by 7044 like tweezers.

As a result, the illegal ball Q flowing back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the above-described illegal act A reaches the firing position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally fouled due to illegal act B. reaches the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line nullification members 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible control line L is pushed in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of operation line L that is extended cannot be adjusted (illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a cannot be adjusted). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter cheating using the cheating ball Q.

In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joint portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joint portion is the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is folded so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the leading end portion of one of the folded plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033 (induction portion). Alternatively, the sandwiching portion 7044 may be the narrow width portion of both plate surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while exhibiting the same effect as the fraud prevention effect described above.

Further, the operation line disabling member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is, although not shown, a gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. to form an adhesive portion, and the operating line L guided to the second inclined portion 150kb is adhered to this adhesive portion so that it cannot move.

Further, the operating wire disabling member 7000 for sandwiching the operating wire L consists of two metal plates 7011 and 7022, but is replaced with a coil spring as shown in FIG. It may be installed and formed such that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and the central axis of the guiding portion 150k are substantially perpendicular to each other. The operating wire L guided by the second inclined portion 150kb is fitted and sandwiched between adjacent coils of the coil spring.

Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, while compression coil springs need to be installed in a compressed state. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.

In addition, the coil spring may of course be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. This is preferable because the entry of the operating wire L becomes smoother. In this way, when the operating wire disabling member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) into the above-described operating wire nullifying member 7000, and the guiding portion 150k leading to the operating wire nullifying member 7000 is blocked by the cell plate. In order to deal with this, further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in the above-described form to deal with this, in the course change part of the return passage part 1014 of the foul ball (in this form, the part corresponding to the lower tray ball supply port 211c), A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). As a result, it is possible to prevent further fraudulent work in which a foreign object is inserted from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k. In addition, as countermeasures against illegal work, such as inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate from the ball opening (lower tray ball supply port 211c) to block the guide portion 150k, inserting a foreign object such as a cell plate into the slit 1015 as described above. Not limited to the one forming the inlet for taking in, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, a configuration in which a projecting obstruction 1016 is provided to impede the reaching of the guiding portion 150k by colliding foreign matter such as a cell plate or the like. As such, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operating wire disabling members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operating wire L and is disabled. , 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D that actively nullifies the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be employed.

49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of a dynamic operating line disabling member 7000D, the operating line disabling member 7000D having a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). (a corner portion corresponding to just above the lower tray ball supply port 211c) is pivotally attached so as to be able to swing.

49, the operation line disabling member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped disabling portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. A shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the invalidation portion 2646 intersects with the invalidation portion 2646, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centering on the shaft hole 2647 protruding to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving posture shown in FIG. It can swing to the release posture. Further, in the operation line disabling member 7000D, a balance weight 2660 is provided on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the disabling portion 2646 with the shaft hole 2647 interposed therebetween. The ball receiving posture of FIG. 50(a) is maintained without external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acting on the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball acts on the ball receiving portion 2645. 50(b).

In addition, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D forms an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture of FIG. 50(b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball enters the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the above-described dynamic operating line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 50(a). It flows down, and immediately after changing the course downward at the course changing section, it rides on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of this foul ball, the operation line disabling member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 50(b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is released into the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by momentum.

In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may occur at once. is stopped by an arcuate ball stop portion 2648, and after the operating wire disabling member 7000D moves back, processing continues. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls occur at the same time, they can be dealt with one by one without any trouble.

Next, the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D is subjected to the above-described illegal act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the batted ball supply port 142a. Then, by intentionally shooting the illegal ball weakly, it is turned into a foul ball and taken out from the ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for balls, and the operating line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped to continue the illegal ball. 51(a), the illegal ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire disabling member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 51(b). At this time, the invalidating portion 2646 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D also rotates, and the intersecting side portion 2651 at the edge thereof traverses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return path, the operating line L also crosses the passage, so the operating line L is caught between the crossing side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operating line L cannot drop, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating line nullification member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is inserted through the ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q stopped at this position will be taken out from the outside.

If the operation line L is made to meander between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 so as to make it difficult to reverse the operation line L, the state of being captured by the operation line disabling member 7000D can be prevented. It also becomes difficult to pull back the illegal ball Q toward the batted ball supply port 142a. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining in the operation line nullifying member 7000D can be saved and recovered as an evidence ball.

The above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D utilizes the weight of the illegal ball Q. However, as shown in FIG. good.

52, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric driving means is connected to the portion where the balance weight 2660 is provided, and the sphere detector is connected to the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line nullification member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. Also, when a game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 descends and the operating line The disabling member 7000D moves back from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.

When a normal foul ball rests on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operating wire nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the foul ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is activated accordingly. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the dead weight operating line nullifying member 7000D.

On the other hand, when an illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation wire invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operating wire. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture along with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 of the disabling portion 2646 and the receiving portion 2652, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. , the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 remains in the raised position because the sphere detector 2655 is not signaled to release. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented.

Note that the above-described dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D cuts and disables the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and/or the receiving portion 2652 of the disabling portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line disabling member 7000D of this embodiment has a function of preventing an illegal ball Q from entering from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104, It can also be used as reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher anti-fraud function is exhibited.

In addition to the configuration described above, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is an intersection side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the intersection side and passes through the movable area of the intersection side. The illegal ball Q after the ball detection is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation part, and the operating line L is pinched or cut at the crossing side crossing the connecting passage 150h. good too.

Also, the dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operating wire disabling member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. FIG. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operating line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, so that the illegal deterrence effect can be reliably enhanced.

FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operating wire disabling member 7000D, which winds up the operating wire L to disable it.

In other words, the operation line disabling member 7000D has a square ring-shaped disabling portion 2646 mounted in the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable about a rotating shaft 2656 perpendicular to the passage. , a motor 2657 serving as an electric drive means for rotating the disabling portion 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the disabling portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 provided downstream from the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. and a ball detector 2655. Each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once.

When a normal foul ball enters the foul cover unit 150 equipped with such an operation line disabling member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the disabling portion 2646, and the ball is detected. When detected by the device 2655, the invalidation part 2646 idles once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.

On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 equipped with the operation line nullification member 7000D, the operation line L is also nullified when the illegal ball Q passes through the nullification portion 2646. Since the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation part 2646 rotates once, the operation line L winds around the invalidation part 2646 because it passes through the invalidation part 2646 . Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stays within the connecting passage 150h, there is no possibility that it will fall into the wrong hands.

The ball detector 2655 for detecting the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operating line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless idle rotation of the operation wire disabling member 7000D for winding the operation wire L can be eliminated.

The above description of the dynamic operating line disabling member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball shooting device for shooting game balls;
a shooting passage portion forming a shot ball passage that communicates with the game area from the shooting position of the ball shooting device;
a return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the shot ball passage and a ball opening for releasing game balls to the outside in front of the machine;
a fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation from the front of the operating line attached to the fraudulent ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation wire invalidation member that invalidates the operation wire by pinching, cutting, or winding the operation wire,
The operation line nullifying member has an intersecting side portion crossing the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersecting side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersecting side portion to operate the foul ball. A game machine characterized in that the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is made to cross the return passage, and the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the crossing side to be invalidated. "

10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third tamper-proof means provided at the above-described foul ball drop opening 1013 is provided at the end (terminal end) of the launch rail 544. part) and an operation line disabling member 7000S provided at the end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, the rail base 1001x made of resin).

The operating wire nullifying member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is formed into a comb-like shape so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. are covered with safety cover portions 1017 arranged in rows. Note that the cutting blade is supported by this safety cover portion 1017 .

Therefore, as described above, a fraudulent act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate into the return passage portion 1014 to cause it to flow backward and send it to the firing position of the ball launching device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls toward the firing position due to the inclination, it pulls (tension is applied) and the operating line L becomes the operating line nullifying member. It is cut by touching the cutting edge of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operating line L, one of which is sent to the shooting position from the batted ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. Even when the illegal act B of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q and shooting the subsequent illegal ball Q into the game area 5a is performed, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage part 1014 is returned. Since the operating wire L touches the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10, 39 and 47, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 is composed of a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape. Protruding.

According to this operation line nullification member 7000S, if an illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is connected to the lower dish ball supply port which is the opening for balls. 211c, when the operating line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the tension causes the operating line L to pull the wires of the operating line nullifying member 7000S. Therefore, even if the force of the hand manipulating the operating wire L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operating wire L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire members of the operating wire nullifying member 7000S. The movement of the hand loosened from the ball is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. In other words, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, fraudulent actions using the illegal ball Q can be deterred.

As described above, the third fraud prevention means is such that the operation line disabling member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side is effective in the early stages of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the side operation line invalidating member 7000S exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line nullification members 7000H and 7000S alone, and the specific nullification members of the operation line nullification member 7000H and the operation line nullification member 7000S can also be used. The forms may be interchanged, or the same disabling member may be employed.

In addition to the case where the operation line disabling members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001 as in this embodiment, for example, the metal plate that constitutes the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Alternatively, a wire rod may be integrally formed with the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a V-shaped groove may be formed at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The clamping portion 7000Sv may be engraved to guide and clamp the operating wire L into the groove of the clamping portion 7000Sv.

Furthermore, the operating wire nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operating wire nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 is provided with a guiding portion 150k composed of a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb.

As described above, the form in which the second operation line disabling member 7000 for disabling the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014. Although the form provided in the drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is of course not limited to the form described above.

For example, in the above embodiment, the operating wire disabling member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The disabling member 7000 may be provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 39), provided at the rear side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 1001 and the trailing end of the launch rail 544, respectively. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is pulled straight by a person. The installation position of the operation line disabling member 7000 of this embodiment is a position that the player cannot touch even if he inserts his fingertip into the ball opening. This is preferable from the viewpoint of crime prevention, which makes it difficult to illegally manipulate the member 7000 itself.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operating wire nullifying member 7000 is provided on one side of the communication passage 150h. A cutting blade may be arranged. 44(a) and 44(b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the beginning portion of the connecting passage 150h are formed into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017 so that the cutting edge of the cutting blade is are designed not to be touched. In this case, the cutting blade of the operating wire disabling member 7000 has a well-known folded blade structure or tip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and is connected to the unit main body 151. A loading port 1019 and a discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blades are pushed out in a rolling manner so that they can be replaced with new ones. 44(a) and 44(b), reference numeral 1021 denotes a clipping split line portion for the operation line L which is cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the clip split line portion 1021. It's like Therefore, even if the operating wire disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operating wire L, the operating wire L can bite into the pinching split line portion 1021 of the bottom wall 150g or the like, so that fraud prevention is assured. improves.

In addition, although the above embodiment shows an example in which foul balls are returned to the lower tray, there are gaming machines that are structured to return foul balls to the upper tray (including cases where there is no lower tray). In this case, a fraudulent act (the above-described fraudulent acts A and B There is a risk that fraudulent acts similar to In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided in a predetermined portion of the foul return path located in the space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. can.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of the second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the form described above are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second shape like the form described above. Fraud prevention means may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of deterring fraudulent actions using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as the second tampering prevention means, but instead of the metal plate, a resin molding having the same configuration is provided. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so that it can function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate, which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment, is not provided, and instead, a tapered shape is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest part (narrowest part) of the guiding part 150k, a slit-shaped capturing part is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage part 1014, The operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q may be pinched by the capture portion, which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to achieve the same fraud deterrence effect as the above-described configuration.

Further, in the above embodiment, the operating wire L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operating wire nullifying member 7000. , FIG. 46 and FIG. 49, an illegal ball Q is prevented from entering through the ball opening (prevents the reverse and reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of normal foul balls. By providing advance prevention means, fraudulent use of an illegal ball Q is prevented.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign object) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the path changing portion (a portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014 In addition, it can be exemplified to provide an attracting part 1022 for inducing the illegal ball Q itself to another passage to block its movement (first illegal ball reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. In addition, at the inlet of the attracting portion 1022, a catch valve (which allows the illegal ball Q flowing backward to enter the attracting portion 1022 to swing only in the direction of entry into the attracting portion 1022 and to A single-opening valve (not shown) that disables withdrawal may be provided, thereby leaving traces of the use of the illegal ball Q and evidence of illegal acts.

Also, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). It is possible (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to prevent a cheating action such as the above-described cheating action A in which an illegal ball Q flows backward without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023. FIG.

Further, it is of course possible to combine both the above-described static operating line nullifying member and dynamic operating line nullifying member.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, an operating wire disabling member other than the first operating wire disabling member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014 . It may be provided between the firing position or between the foul ball drop opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002 .

Further, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

[3-2. glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The glass unit 160 is detachably attached by being inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. As shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front). It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 101h, and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 161 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. and a mounting member 163 .

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 161a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. A mounting piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with a projecting portion 163 b of a glass unit mounting member 163 . The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 116). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 116).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base portion 163a mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a projecting portion 163b. The glass unit mounting members 163 are rotatably mounted outside the two upper corners among the four corners of the door window 101 a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101 .

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101 . After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the projecting portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the projecting portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101 .

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by performing the above-described procedure in reverse order. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is regulated by the projecting portion 163b when the projecting portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the projecting portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally removed from the door frame base 101 .

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 170 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-like rear projecting piece 172 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 .

A main body portion 171 of the crime prevention cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 171 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 171 . Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . A rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 is formed along a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. ing.

In addition, the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball B passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B shot by the ball shooting device 540) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area is It does not hinder the hitting of the game ball B into 5a.

A pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100 .

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000 . . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 54 and the like. FIG. 54(a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54(b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 30 and 32 to 34) of the door frame base unit 100, and is operated by the player to move the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the game board 5. can be hit in the game area 5a.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a handle 182 covering the front end side of the handle 182. A disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration substrate 184 and a handle cap 185 attached to the cover base 183 .

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186 .

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation start point when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to an inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to a transmission gear 188, rotates a detection shaft 189a of a handle rotation detection sensor 189 clockwise when viewed from the front. and an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button 193 attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. and an operation sensor 194 .

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and an inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handlebar mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .

The handle 182 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d which protrude outwardly away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape from the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center from the slit 182e. and a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first projection 182a protrudes so that the side surface of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front bulges outward, and the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side bulges out. The side of the direction is concave (gouged) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second projection 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first projection 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 85 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. protrudes slightly lower. The second projection 182b protrudes so that the clockwise side surface of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the counterclockwise side surface, which is the opposite side, curves inward. and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first projection 182a.

The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most in the clockwise direction at a rotational angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. Both side surfaces of the third projection 182c are inclined substantially linearly, and the clockwise side surface is inclined more gently than the opposite counterclockwise side surface. The portion of the fourth projection 182d that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the third projection 182c that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is further rotated than the first projection 182a. It also protrudes slightly higher. Both sides of the fourth projection 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle shape.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through slits 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within an angle of rotation of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle cap 185 has a round front surface that bulges forward and is translucent. The handle cap 185 is internally provided with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 .

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without any sense of incongruity.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, a strength input by the player.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the player and detects the static electricity acting on the player's handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is fired with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. Firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 has four first projections 182a, a second projection 182b, a third projection 182c, and a fourth projection 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 can be largely rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. so that the game ball B is strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right hit"), the position of the first protrusion 182a when the fourth protrusion 182d does not rotate the handle 182 Since the position is substantially the same as the position of It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by reducing the fatigue of the player.

[3-5. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. FIG. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into the main members and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 includes an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and the upper plate 201 arranged below the upper plate 201 and game balls supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. and a lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower tray 202 attached to the front surface of the tray base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-like dish unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper dish body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and having the upper dish 201 , and a right side of the upper dish body 212 . A mounting base 213 that is attached to and protrudes forward, a plate unit relay board 214 that is attached to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 that is attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, It has an upper tray before ball removal unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213 and an upper tray after ball removal unit 240 attached behind the upper tray before ball removal unit 230. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower part of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. a lower plate ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251; a plate upper left decoration unit 270 attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit main body 252 with a space left and right; A plate upper right decoration unit 275 and a plate lower left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 are provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes, as a performance operation unit 301 operable by the player, a rotary operation unit 302 rotatable by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 operable by the player. The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation section base 320. An annular performance operation ring 330 having an cage rotation operation portion 302, a rotation drive unit 340 rotating the rotation operation portion 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation portion 302. A gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 that lights up the effect operation ring 330, the decoration board cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation part base 320. an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330; and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320. and have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the production operation unit 301 at the center in the left-right direction faces diagonally upward and forward, and the left side of the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface. An upper tray 201 is arranged on the right side of the performance operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower tray 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 under the upper tray 201. - 特許庁As is clear from the description so far, the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like are projected toward the player side in the middle area in the left-right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. Constructs a forward-bulging structure.

[3-5-1. Fine plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward from the left-right center in a front view and opens upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray main body 212) bulges most forward at about ⅓ of the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward as it goes to the right in the front view from the most bulging part, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201 including the guiding passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side of the guiding passage portion 201a in front view is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.例文帳に追加

When the upper tray 201 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper tray 201 is positioned below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, and the game balls touch the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port 211e. It inclines so that it may become low toward the position of a little lower side than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game ball B can be discharged from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

In addition, the guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded to the earth) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B contacts (rolls), the game The static electricity charged on the sphere B can be removed.

[3-5-2. lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58 and the like. The lower tray 202 is arranged below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the horizontal center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in front view. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. - 特許庁The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a through which the game balls B can be ejected through the bottom wall in the vertical direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in a plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom plate 202 is inclined so that its bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is positioned below the performance operation unit 300 in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in the assembled state of the tray unit 200. - 特許庁

The lower tray 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a can be opened. The stored game balls B can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, when the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the ball is moved forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The discharged game ball B can be rapidly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 is a front perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit, and FIG. 60 is a rear perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached on the front surface.

The dish base unit 210 includes a flat plate-like dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper plate main body 212 on the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and protruding forward, and a mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. and a plate unit relay board 214 .

The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball extraction unit 230 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. , and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray ball removal front unit 230. - 特許庁

[3-5-3a. Plate unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends laterally across the entire width of the door frame base 101. box).

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view and extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear, and an upper plate ball supply port 211a which penetrates in the front and rear direction below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached on the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape at a lower portion on the left side of the left-right center in front view, and a lower plate. A notch portion 211d cut in the right side wall of the portion extending cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c to a size through which the game ball B can pass, and a front view upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. an upper tray ball feeding port 211e extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212. - 特許庁

The plate unit base 211 has a mounting projection 211f on which the mounting base is placed, which projects forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and an upper plate portion 211f on the left side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which an operation transmission part 242b of an upper tray ball removal slider 242 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is inserted is passed through the lower part of the plate body in the front-rear direction, and a front-view lower right corner penetrates the plate body in the front-rear direction. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion opening 211h that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the right corner in front view and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. and a mouth 211i.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opened in the rear wall of the upper tray 201 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and its cylindrical rear end through which the upper tray balls of the door frame base 101 pass. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 202 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end that passes through the lower tray ball passage opening 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects with the front end of the ball outlet 150 d of the foul cover unit 150 . As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. A notch portion 211d formed in a cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are released by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222, the upper tray ball feed port 211e, the entrance port 141a and the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feed unit 140, and the upper tray ball feed port 211e. The ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after tray ball removal, and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball feeding opening 211e is positioned in front of the ball receiving opening 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper tray post-ball extraction unit 240 in the state assembled to the tray base unit 210, and the game balls in the upper tray 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 . The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than the center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper plate body 212 recedes rearward as it goes rightward in front view from the most forwardly bulging portion, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The top plate main body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion near the right end, whose upper part is closed, slips under the ball lending operation unit 220 when assembled to the plate unit 200 . In addition, the upper plate main body 212 is formed with an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a in the middle portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open top. The mounting base 213 has an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the right corner of the rear end.

The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is through which the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball removal front unit 230 is inserted. A wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame secondary relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, and the operation part relay board 392. It is for The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. The rear surface of the plate unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211 when attached to the plate unit base 211 .

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 62 and the like. The ball rental operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the attachment base 213 . This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed, and the ball lending machine This is for returning the cash or prepaid card put into the machine after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. - 特許庁

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 attached to the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper tray ball ejection button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper tray ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A translucent disk-shaped ball rental operation base 223 arranged on the right side of the withdrawal button 222, a ball rental button 224 arranged on the front left side of the ball rental operation base 223, and a ball rental operation. A return button 225 arranged on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display section (not shown) arranged on the lower rear portion of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

The upper tray ball ejection button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by being pressed by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 222 . When the ball lending button 224 is pressed after cash or a prepaid card with a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201 . When a return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine and returned. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards put into the ball lending machine is displayed on the ball lending display section. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display section when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before upper tray ball removal and unit after upper tray ball removal]
The unit 230 before ball removal and the unit 240 after ball removal of the upper plate in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. The upper tray ball before unit 230 and the upper tray after ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. It is for discharging the game balls B stored inside to the lower tray 202 .

The upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 . The upper bowl post-ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion behind the upper bowl ball removal pre-unit 230 on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 .

The upper tray ball removal front unit 230 includes a cylindrical front base 231 attached to the front surface of the tray unit base 211 and extending vertically, and a front base 231 inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. and a slider 232 . The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 near the front of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and its upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222, and its lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper tray ball removal slider 242 of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240. It abuts on the top surface.

The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. an upper tray ball removal slider 242 slidably attached to the top, a spring 243 urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241, It has

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, and has a ball receiving opening 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving opening 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b for guiding the accepted game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guiding it backward, and a game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241. A ball extraction guideway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view is provided.

The ball receiving port 241a is installed in the plate base unit 210 and extends forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guiding passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an open position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is positioned at the rear of the lower portion in the assembled state of the door frame 3. As shown in FIG. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper tray 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The laterally extending portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion where the upper tray ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side in rear view. A rear cover 244 closes the rear side of the portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending to the left and right. The upper portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c that extends vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 when assembled to the door frame 3. At the same time, the right end of the laterally extending portion as viewed from the rear is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211 . As a result, the game ball B ejected from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is ejected into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper bowl ball removal slider 242 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an operation receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and a rear surface, which is the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a, projecting rearward. and an operation transmission portion 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a lower surface that extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving section 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion opening 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper tray ball extraction front unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the . When the upper tray ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball extracting member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided on the upper surface. The rod 143c abuts.

The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper disk ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper disk ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper bowl ball extracting slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring 243 .

In the upper bowl ball extraction front unit 230 and the upper bowl ball extraction unit 240, the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper bowl ball extraction slider 242 is moved upward. The front slider 232 abuts on the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a, and the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is positioned at the upper movement end. In addition, since the urging force of the spring 243 positions the upper disk ball removal slider 242 at the upper movement end, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b to separate the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball ejection opening 141b are separated from each other in the ball feeding unit 140, and the ball is fed from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving opening 241a. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the hitting ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring 243, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is operated. The actuating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b, can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partition portion 143a. retreats from between the entry port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entry port 141a through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feed guide path 241b from the upper tray 201 is discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a. It will be done. Then, the game ball B ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b passes through the ball extraction guide path 241c and is guided into the lower dish ball supply port 211c from the notch 211d. The game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the tray 202 and discharged into the lower tray 202 .

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is moved through the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball removal button 222 rises, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c in contact with the operation transmission part 242b, and the partition part 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to its original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is fed to the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before the upper tray ball is removed and the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed. It can be discharged to the lower tray 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the dish decoration unit. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. be. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the horizontal direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire plate unit 200. - 特許庁

The dish decoration unit 250 includes a lower dish main body 251 attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and forming the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211, and a dish unit base covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. 211, a lower tray ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and the trays attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 with a space left and right. An upper left decorative unit 270 and a right upper plate decorative unit 275, and a lower left plate decorative unit 280 and a lower right plate decorative unit attached below the upper left plate decorative unit 270 and upper right plate decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and .

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 . The lower plate main body 251 extends left and right and has a container shape (dish shape) that is open at the top and rear. The lower tray main body 251 is attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the tray unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially quadrangular shape extending leftward and rightward in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes further forward than on the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is formed in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by a lower tray ball removal lid 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250 , the outer periphery and part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 . In addition, the bottom surface of the lower tray main body is located below the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211 when assembled with the tray unit 200. 211c. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200 . The plate unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. The top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward.

The plate unit main body 252 has upper side protrusions 252a which bulge forward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the top and extend downward and are spaced apart from the left and right at the bottom. has a lower front decorative portion 252b protruding forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251, and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box-like shape with an open rear, and are provided on the front surfaces of the left and right plate decoration units 270, 280, 275, and 275, respectively. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b at the right end of the lower surface. In addition, the right upper side swelling portion 252a is connected at its lower end to the lower front decoration portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side swelling portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower tray main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulge 252a.

In addition, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decoration portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. and a bottom cutout portion 252f that is cut at a portion below the . A lower tray ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a handle insertion opening 252g that penetrates the bottom right corner of the front decoration part 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylindrical part 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are central in the left-right direction. A production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled with the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . In addition, when the plate decoration unit 250 is assembled, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is positioned. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are flush with each other.

[3-5-4c. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a, the game ball B is stored in the lower tray 202 and the game ball B is discharged from the lower tray 202. It is intended for

The lower pan ball extractor unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower pan main body 251 and includes a flat plate-like lower pan ball extractor base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower pan ball extractor base 261 . A slider 262 attached to the upper surface of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower dish ball release button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 biasing the slider 262 forward, A lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower tray ball removal cover 265 in an open state via the slider 262 are provided.

The lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom notch 252f of the tray unit main body 252, and is vertically aligned with the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 (lower tray main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower tray ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a projecting pin projecting upward in a cylindrical shape.

The lower tray ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower tray ball removal base 261 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending axis at a position to the left of the slider 262 on the left end side, and is attached to the slider 262 on the right end side. , and the right end side is formed so as to be able to close the through hole. The lower disk ball removal lid 265 is formed with a laterally extending slit into which the projecting pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower tray ball removal base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower tray ball release button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the tray unit main body 252. As shown in FIG. In the normal state, the slider 262 is positioned at the front moving end by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the right end of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is positioned directly above the through hole. and closes the through hole (lower tray ball extraction hole 202a).

In this normal state, the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball extraction lid 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加In addition, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower tray ball release button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is pushed backward to move backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower tray ball ejection button 263. becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower disk ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower disk ball removal cover 265 moves rearward on the right side with the left side as the center. It rotates in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 positioned directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, thereby opening the through hole and opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged downward from the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower tray ball eject button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower tray ball eject button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the biasing force of the spring 264 . As a result, the right end side of the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game ball B in the lower tray 202 is continuously released. It can be discharged downward.

In order to close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, is pushed backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. be. Then, when the pressure on the lower tray ball ejection button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower tray ball ejection button 263 returns to the state in which it is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is positioned directly above the through hole, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202 a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265 . Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

[3-5-4d. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252 a of the plate unit main body 252 . The upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200 .

The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical upper left dish decoration body 271 extending in the left and right direction and having translucency, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration body 271, A plate upper left decorative substrate 273 attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided.

The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper left ornamental body 271 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. The plate upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

The upper left plate reflector 272 is inserted into the upper left plate decoration body 271 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 . The upper left plate decorative substrate 273 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape extending left and right along the upper left plate decoration body 271 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the top left decorative body 271 of the plate can be decorated with light.

The left end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper left plate decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper left plate decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the upper left plate decoration 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 includes a plate upper right decorative body 276 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, A plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is attached to the rear side of the plate upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The upper right ornamental body 276 has a semi-circular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending obliquely to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylindrical shape. formed. This plate upper right decoration 276 is formed in milky white.

The plate top right reflector 277 is inserted into the plate top right decoration 276 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate top right decoration substrate 278 corresponding to the LED. The plate upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the plate upper right decorative body 276 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decoration substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decoration body 276 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is continuous with Since the upper right plate decoration unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the upper right plate decoration 276, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the upper right plate decoration 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Plate lower left decorative unit and plate lower right decorative unit]
The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66 and the like. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side protrusion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively. be done. The plate lower left decoration unit 280 and the plate lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

The lower left plate decoration unit 280 includes a lower left plate decoration body 281 which is semicylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, a lower left plate reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left plate decoration body 281, A lower left plate decorative substrate 283 is attached to the rear side of the lower left plate reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape centered rearward in a plan view. is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. The lower left plate decoration 281 is a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The shaft extends left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The left end of the plate lower left decoration 281 is formed in a spherical shape. The lower left ornamental body 281 of the plate has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. This plate lower left decorative body 281 is formed in milky white.

The lower left plate reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left plate decoration body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 . The plate lower left decorative substrate 283 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape extending left and right along the plate lower left decorative body 281 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated with light emission.

The left end of the plate lower decoration unit 280 is positioned below the left end of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the lower plate center decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. Contiguous with the left edge. Since the left end of the plate lower left decorative body 281 of the plate lower left decorative unit 280 is formed in a spherical shape, the left end looks as if it is hidden inside the door frame 3 . Since the lower left plate decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower left plate decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 are illuminated, the entire front surface of the lower left plate decoration 281 is illuminated. It can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, and can look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate lower right decoration unit 285 includes a plate lower right decoration body 286 which is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a plate lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the plate lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are provided.

The plate lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a rearward center in a plan view, It is attached to the lower portion of the right upper side swelling portion 252a. The lower right plate decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276. The central axis extends to the left and right, and is shaped like a bent semi-cylinder. The right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The dish lower right ornament 286 has a semicircular curvature that changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. This plate lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

The plate lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the plate lower right decorative body 286 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the plate lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plate lower right decorative substrate 288 is formed in a long strip shape extending left and right along the plate lower right decoration body 286 . A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate lower right decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate lower right decoration body 286 can be decorated with light emission.

The right end of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is located below the right end of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is the plate center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the production operation unit 300. is contiguous with the right edge of Since the right end of the plate lower right decorative body 286 of the plate lower right decorative unit 285 is formed in a spherical shape, the right end appears to be hidden inside the door frame 3 . The lower right plate decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right plate decoration body 286. Therefore, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are caused to emit light, the lower right plate decoration body 286 The entire front surface of the display can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70 and the like. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as seen from the forward/backward direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 68(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. The performance operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. It is possible. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250. - 特許庁

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation part 301, the rotation operation part 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation part 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation part 303 is arranged at the center of the rotating operation part 302, and has a central pressing operation part 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotating operation part 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing portion 303b disposed between the inner peripheral portion and the inner peripheral portion.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, an operation section base 320 housed in the performance operation section cover unit 310, and an operation section base 320 mounted on the upper surface. An annular production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation part 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation part 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 , and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation portion base 320 .

In addition, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and a effect operation ring decoration board 352. A decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, a vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330. A performance operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production control unit cover unit]
The effect operation section cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. The effect operation section cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top and rear.

The effect operation section cover unit 310 includes a downwardly recessed hemispherical unit lower cover 311, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, and a unit front cover. A plate center upper reflector 313 attached from behind in the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs attached to the plate center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear in a plate center lower decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a plate center lower reflector 315 attached to the plate center lower reflector 315 to direct light forward. and a plate center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical surface bulging downward on the front side from the center rear side in the front-rear direction, and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252 on the rear side thereof. 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in a slanted state so that the axis perpendicular to the imaginary plane formed on the upper edge extending in a semi-circular shape of the front portion is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 is formed with a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest portion when assembled to the dish unit 200. As shown in FIG.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 when viewed from above. installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a plate center upper decoration 312a in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a plate center upper decoration 312a that extends forward below the plate center upper decoration 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided, the protruding semicircular arc extending in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. - 特許庁The unit front cover 312 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 at the lower end of the plate center lower decorative body 312b.

The upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder of approximately the same thickness (radius) into halves, and extend in a semicircular shape with the divided surfaces facing the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is slightly thinner than the upper plate center decoration 312a. is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the front end of the upper plate center decoration 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the lower plate center decoration 312b. When the plate unit 200 is assembled, the left and right ends of the upper plate center decoration 312a are connected to the right ends of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the left ends of the upper right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, and the lower plate center decorations. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and milky white.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame The distance is about 1/2 of the full width of the base 101 in the horizontal direction.

The plate center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inward). The upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape along the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. is implemented. A plurality of LEDs of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center upper decoration body 312a can be decorated with light.

The lower plate center reflector 315 is formed in a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and is attached by being inserted into the lower plate center decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from behind. The plate center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LEDs mounted on the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking backward (inward). The lower plate center decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semi-arc shape along the lower plate center decoration body 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. is implemented. A plurality of LEDs of the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated with light.

The production operation section cover unit 310 does not have reinforcing ribs in the middle of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semicircular shape. When the LEDs of the upper center decoration substrate 314 and the LEDs of the lower dish center decoration substrate 316 emit light, the whole of each can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission, making it look as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The performance operation part cover unit 310 has a front end projecting farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state assembled to the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加In addition, in the production operation section cover unit 310, the upper plate center decoration 312a is continuous with the upper left plate decoration 271 and the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower plate center decoration 312b is connected with the lower left plate decoration 281 and the right plate decoration. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286 . As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is conspicuous, and the integral decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation section base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation part base 320 is inserted into the effect operation part cover unit 310 from above, and the lower end is attached to the effect operation part cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the effect operation unit of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape with an open top.

The operation unit base 320 includes a body portion 321 that is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and has an open top, and a body portion 321 that extends outward from the upper end of the body portion 321 and has a circular outer periphery. a plurality of (here, four) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321; and a gear bearing portion 325 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward to support the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a rotatable manner.

The operation part base 320 is formed such that the main body part 321 is sized to accommodate the production operation button unit 360 therein. The main body part 321 has a bottom wall to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached from below, and a portion of the bottom surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed to be flat. The bottom wall of the main body part 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibrations from the vibration speaker 354, so that the vibrations can be amplified, and the vibrations can be converted into sounds such as voice and music and output. can.

A leg portion 361 b of a button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 . Further, the body portion 321 has a through-hole formed in the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the body portion 321 . The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the body part 321, and the operating part relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the plate center upper decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . An effect operation ring decoration board 352 and a decoration board cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and a ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation section cover unit 310 .

The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the transmission gear for the operation ring so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the driving side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is positioned at the flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation part base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the flange part 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the upper plate center decoration 312 a of the unit front cover 312 . In addition, in the state where the effect operation unit 300 is assembled, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in contact therewith.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72 and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as seen from above, and FIG. 71(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as seen from below. FIG. 72(a) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from above, and FIG. 72(b) is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation ring viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation portion 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice the size of the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the effect operation ring 330 has an outer diameter of approximately 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushings 333 are attached to the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the ring mounting base 332, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to prevent upward movement of the rotation base 332. and a regulating ring retaining member 334 .

In addition, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and attached to the ring outer upper cover 335 which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side of the ring outer cover 336 forming a part of the rotation operation part 302 and form a part of the rotation operation part 302. and a ring inner cover 337 that is in the ring. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 and an inner diameter substantially equal to the inner diameter of the flange portion 322 . The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 and a boss portion 331b for rotatably mounting the bushing 333 projecting upward from a plurality of (here, four) portions, and a space in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. and through-holes 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of sites. A plurality of through holes 331 c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 .

The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 . The rotation base 332 has a ring gear 332a projecting downward from the bottom surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332 . The ring gear 332 a has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331 , and faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331 when assembled to the effect operation ring 330 . The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring in a state assembled with the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on an outer upper surface portion 335a in which an arc forming the outer and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer upper surface portions 335a are arranged in the circumferential direction. and a plurality of outer cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending toward the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. there is An outer upper surface portion 335a of the upper outer ring cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The upper outer cover mounting portion 335 c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the upper outer surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 .

The ring outer and lower cover 336 has an outer and lower surface portion 336a in which an arc forming the outer and lower portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and toward the center from the inner side of the outer and lower surface portion 336a. A plurality of outer and lower cover attachment portions 336b are provided. A lower outer surface portion 336a of the outer lower ring cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The lower outer cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the upper outer cover 335 of the ring.

The ring inner cover 337 has an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming the inside and upper portion of the circle extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder extending downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a parallel to the central axis. and a plurality of inner cover mounting portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. An inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of ⅛ of a circle is annular. The cylinder surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of the rotation base 332 . The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332. As shown in FIG.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a constitute a portion of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. - 特許庁

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75 and the like. FIG. 73(a) is a front perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the rotary drive unit. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotation drive unit viewed from the front left. The rotary drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and for detecting the rotary operation of the rotary operation portion 302 . The rotary drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 .

The rotary drive unit 340 includes a rotary drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side surface of the rotary drive base 341 so that the rotary shaft protrudes leftward. , a drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of an operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. 345, and a gear cover that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. 346 and .

The rotation drive unit 340 also includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 that are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. and a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open leftward. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The driving gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates together with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. there is A second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with a gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 .

The transmission detection gear member 345 includes a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a left side surface of the gear portion 345a. and a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in a row at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval at which they are separated in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345 b are detected by a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345 b of the transmission detection gear member 345 . The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart in the circumferential direction by an interval different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one detects the detection piece 345b first. It's like As a result, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation portion 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 .

When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the driving side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. engage with. In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 is entirely located inside the effect operation section cover unit 310 in a state where it is assembled to the effect operation unit 300 .

The rotation drive unit 340 is driven by an operation ring drive motor 342 to arbitrarily rotate the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via a drive gear 343, a transmission gear 344, a transmission detection gear member 345, and an operation ring transmission gear. can be rotated in the direction of In addition, the rotary drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby reciprocatingly rotating and vibrating the rotary operation section 302. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the player rotates the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to change the content of the player-participation-type effect according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 .

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotational direction of the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the rotation operation section 302, it is possible to apply a load to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these elements, it is possible to provide the rotary operation unit 302 with an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player-participation type presentation or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Operation ring transmission gear]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation portion base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 includes a bevel gear-shaped ring side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the ring side gear portion 350a that rotates integrally with the ring side gear portion 350a to detect the transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur-gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the driving-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a narrows in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 .

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation portion base 320 so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 . The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by inserting it from above into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 and then attaching the gear mounting member 351 to the operation portion base 320 . be done.

When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged with the ring gear 332a. It meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotary drive unit 340 . Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and can light-embellish the effect operation ring 330 (rotational operation unit 302) by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is formed in a shape as if an annular ring is divided into front and rear parts. It is composed of a rear decoration substrate 352b formed in an arc-shaped elongated band plate. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery of each of the upper surfaces of the front decoration substrate 352a and the rear decoration substrate 352b. A plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is positioned below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300 . The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is covered with a transparent decoration board cover 353 on the upper side. The decoration board cover 353 is formed in a form divided into the front and rear sides, similarly to the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and covers the front decoration board 352a from above and is attached to the flange part 322 of the operation part base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b attached to the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320 to cover the rear decoration substrate 352b from above.

The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331 are passed through the ring outer side of the rotary operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be decorated with light from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a luminous decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotary operation unit 302 .

[3-5-5g. vibration speaker]
Vibration speaker 354 in production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction directed upward, and is capable of outputting vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output sounds such as voice, sound effects, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Also, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation section base 320 . At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 has shaken. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies compared to a vibrating device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide more diverse effects to the player.

The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, in order to resonate, it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the method of attachment. If this is the case, there are cases where vibration cannot be obtained due to non-resonance due to variations in characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb the variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency, but is input as a range of frequencies. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz±2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) 8 times in about 1 second for each period of 1 Hz. This is repeated intermittently by sweeping input for 1 second and then inputting again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the game machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. It is designed to be done based on Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is powered on (or when the gaming machine is powered on while the inspector has operated the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, it performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for inspecting the vibration speaker (operation confirmation). Through this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm not only the sound (sound) such as voice or music from the vibration speaker 354, but also the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 from the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78 and the like. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit of the performance operation unit, viewed from above, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation button unit, viewed from below. FIG. 78(a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the lowered position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation part is at the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation part base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation portion 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation portion 303a. ing.

The performance operation button unit 360 is arranged symmetrically with respect to the button unit base 361 attached inside the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other. Upper base 363 , and between upper base 363 and button unit base 361 , are attached so as to be vertically movable by means of a pair of guide shafts 362 . and a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the lifting base 364 upward.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a cylindrical shape, the upper end of which is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. An operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to protrude upward, a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotary shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and the lifting drive gear 368 are engaged with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevation cam drive gear member rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through the central shaft 366. 370, an elevation cam member 371, which is connected to the elevation cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end and rotatably mounted through a central shaft 366, and rotates to raise and lower the elevation base 364; 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevation cam driving gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom extending vertically with an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base, and is mounted above the elevation base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the lift base 364 and biasing the central button body 373 upward; A central button cover 375 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom and closed at the upper end side, and is attached to the upper end of the central button main body 373 so as to cover the upper side of the upper base 363 . and a center button decoration substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted that are capable of emitting light upward. In the effect operation button unit 360, a central button main body 373 and a central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the center button main body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364. An outer peripheral substrate cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration substrate 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373; A translucent cylindrical perimeter decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the perimeter button decoration substrate 377 on the outer perimeter side and that is three-dimensionally decorated, and lifts up and down so as to cover the outer periphery and upper surface of the perimeter decorative lens 379. and a transparent outer perimeter button cover 380 attached to the base 364 and having a center button cover 375 facing upward at the center. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute the outer peripheral press operating portion 303b.

In addition, the effect operation button unit 360 includes a pressing detection sensor 381 attached to the button unit base 361 for detecting pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303, and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 attached to the button unit base 361. and an elevation detection sensor 382 that detects elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. A base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 . The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevation cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to its upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevation detection sensor 382 attached to its lower surface. is attached. The button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 at the lower end of the leg portion 361b.

A pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a forward and rearward from the center. A pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. A pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366 .

The upper base 363 is formed to have an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and have their lower ends in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and their upper ends in contact with the elevating base 364 . The lifting spring 365 is a spring having a stronger biasing force than the button spring 374 .

The elevating base 364 is formed to have substantially the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 . The elevating base 364 has a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, a central hole 364b having a size through which the elevating cam member 371 can pass, A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the vicinity of the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. there is The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are mounted rotatably around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The lifting base 364 is restricted from moving upward by contacting the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c with the upper base 363, and a space is provided between the upper base 363 and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 to move. forming. Also, the elevation base 364 is vertically moved by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the elevation cam member 371 .

The elevation cam driving gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevation cam member 371, and the gear portion 370a. and an elevation detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the top and is notched at two locations facing each other and is detected by the elevation detection sensor 382. The elevation cam driving gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevation cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer peripheral surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364. As shown in FIG.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis; a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d; (see Figure 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between the adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364.

Further, the lift cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f that connects with the connecting portion 370b of the lift cam drive gear member 370 at its lower end.

The elevation cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. is formed as By rotating the elevation cam member 371, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 can be guided by the cam portion 371a so that the elevation base 364 can be elevated.

The central button main body 373 has a vertically extending cylindrical cylindrical portion 373a, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the cylindrical portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. 362 is slidably inserted into a pair of guide holes 373c, a central opening 373d passing through the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. A pressing detection piece 373 e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 , and a pair of guide bosses 373 f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373 b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 .

The center button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the lift base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. As shown in FIG. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373 .

The center button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that their lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and screws through which washers are inserted are attached to the lower ends. A washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevation base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the central button body 373. As shown in FIG.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is activated when the bottom 373b (the lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button body 373 contacts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the biasing force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 to protrude downward. This center button main body 373 is formed to be opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs with a weaker biasing force than the lifting spring 365 .

The center button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having approximately the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. The central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373 at the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b.

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the top surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full-color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can light-embellish the center button cover 375 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can light-embellish the peripheral decorative lens 379 and the peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 includes an annular substrate portion 378 a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and is attached to the lift base 364 , and a cylindrical substrate portion 378 a that extends upward from the inner periphery of the substrate portion 378 a to cover the center button main body 373 . and a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The peripheral substrate cover 378 is transparent.

The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 has twisted portions extending upward so as to move in the circumferential direction and arranged in rows at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a of the peripheral substrate cover 378 . The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the lifting base 364 at the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevation cam member 371 from below. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Also, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upper moving end by the biasing force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, when assembled into the effect operation unit 300 , the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly higher than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 , and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 . also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78(a)), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pushed downward to move downward against the biasing force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is pushed downward. is detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is substantially level with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81(c)).

In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. Neither is detected by the detection sensor 381 . That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation drive gear 368 counterclockwise in plan view, the elevation cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevation drive gear 368 . The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the elevation cam member 371 connected to the elevation cam driving gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevation cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. The cam 371b rolls to the left of the engaging portion 371c, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b as the elevation cam member 371 rotates, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d, the second Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is moved upward along the second cam 371d by the biasing force of the lift spring 365. Together with this, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the elevated position, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the state of the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevation base 364 abuts the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevation base 364 is restricted. In addition, in the state of the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (the central depressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral depressing operation portion 303b) at the lowered position is maintained. The entire pressing operation portion 303 including the peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes above the upper surface of the peripheral button cover 380 .

When it is moved to the raised position after being assembled into the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81(b), etc.). reference).

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a ) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 are pressed against the button spring 374 . It moves downward against the force, and the center button main body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 . When the center button body 373 is in contact with the lift base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protrudes downward from the lift base 364. , the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 resist the biasing force of the button spring 374, After the center button main body 373 abuts on the lift base 364, the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, and the lower end of the lift base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the lifting base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the lifting base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the lifting base 364, the peripheral button cover 380 (peripheral pressing portion 303b) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364 and the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the lifting base 364 is detected. is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the central button cover 375 (the central pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force greater than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the state of the raised position, the lifting base 364 moves through the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the lifting spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365 , and the lower end of the lift base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 . In this state, the lift base 364 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in the lowered position. The pressure detecting piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lifting base 364, and the pressure detecting piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detecting sensor 381.

In order to return the central button cover 375 and the peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation portion 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. 78(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364, moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the guide pin 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the elevation cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevation base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves toward the first cam. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the concave locking portion 371c by the urging force of the lift spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the state of the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70 and the like. The operating section relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operating section base 320 . The operating section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operating section base 320 and an operating section relay board 392 attached inside the board box 391 .

The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. The operation part relay board 392 includes the plate center upper decoration board 314, the plate center lower decoration board 316, the operation ring drive motor 342, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevation drive motor 367, center button decoration board 376, peripheral button decoration board 377, press detection sensor 381, elevation detection sensor 382, and plate unit relay board 214 of plate base unit 210 are relayed. there is

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the action of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decoration substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion. FIG. 81(a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation portion is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing portion of the pressing operation portion. It is a front view of a plate unit when an operation part is pressed.

The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player on its upper surface. The effect operating section 301 is composed of a large annular rotating operating section 302 and a pressing operating section 303 arranged in the ring of the rotating operating section 302 . The press operation portion 303 includes a cylindrical central press operation portion 303 a positioned at the center of the rotary operation portion 302 and an annular outer peripheral press operation portion disposed between the central press operation portion 303 a and the rotary operation portion 302 . 303b.

The rotation operation part 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335 , a ring outer lower cover 336 and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330 . The central pressing operation portion 303 a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360 , and the outer pressing operation portion 303 b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 .

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the imaginary plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotary operation part 302 (the effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 arranged in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so that it moves backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). .

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation portion 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 . Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79, etc.).

In this normal state, when the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 clockwise in a left side view, the effect operation ring 330 rotates through the operation ring transmission gear 350 . , rotates clockwise in plan view. On the other hand, when the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 counterclockwise in left side view, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in plan view. .

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeating forward and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotary operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotary operation portion 302 is rotated clockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates clockwise in left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and rotates. When the operating portion 302 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in left side view. This transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348 .

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. FIG. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are spaced apart in the circumferential direction, is greater than the space between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged in rows at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , is an interval that is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, after the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation section 302) can be detected from the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

Since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected in this way, the content of the player participation type presentation can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 . Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring driving motor 342 rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, the operation ring drive motor 342 rotates the rotary operation portion 302 in the direction opposite to the direction of the rotary operation, thereby making the rotary operation heavy or giving a click feeling.

The rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation portion 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the drawing, the rotary operation unit 302 is attached with the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface exposed, so that it is formed in a shape that is easy for the player to grasp. .

As a result, the player can touch the rotary operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 in a way that is easy for the player to operate. is enhanced. Further, the rotary operation portion 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation portion 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. It should be noted that since the lower surface side of the rotary operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes a effect operation ring decoration board 352 below the effect operation ring 330, on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape. Thus, by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 to emit light, the rotary operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission. In addition, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a line are successively arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 can be decorated with light. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that an LED (decoration board) is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302 that rotates.

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is such that, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of a lowered position projecting slightly upward. In this state, the rotary operation section 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward, the upper surface of the central push operation portion 303a (center button cover 375) descends to approximately the same height as the upper surface of the outer circumference push operation portion 303b (perimeter button cover 380), and the push is detected. The pressure is detected by the sensor 381 .

In this normal (lowered position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. The pressure is never detected by the sensor 381 .

In a normal state, when the operation button elevation drive motor 367 rotates the elevation cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view, the guide pin 364d of the elevation base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the lifting base 364 to reach the raised position (see FIG. 81(b)). In this elevated position, the upper surface of the pressing operation portion 303 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 . In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward to a greater extent than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 .

When the central push operation portion 303a is pushed downward while the push operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the central push operation portion 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central push operation portion 303a moves downward. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are at approximately the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b face the rotation operating portion 302. It will be in a state of approximately the same height as the top surface (see FIG. 81(c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and the upper surface of the rotary operating portion 302 are approximately at the same height (see FIG. 81(a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect any pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation portion 303 of this embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed to the downward movement end, regardless of whether the pressing operation portion 303 is in the lowered position or the raised position. there is Therefore, since it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the central pressing operation portion 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , the player-participation type performance can be more enjoyable.

Note that the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier using the pressing operation portion 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation becomes difficult due to the pressing operation portion 303 becoming an obstacle. Therefore, it is possible to change the operability of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby making it possible to enjoy a wider variety of operations.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. FIG. 82(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 82(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, and a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 .

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens forward. The door-frame left-side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door-frame left-side decorative body 404, and is composed of a left-side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. It is A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 402 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame left-side decoration substrate 402 can light-embellish the door-frame left-side decoration body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 is formed with a through hole 403a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 . The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left plate decoration body 271 of the upper left plate decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the top decoration body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end of 453 .

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are approximately the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and looks as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. FIG. 85(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, and FIG. 85(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame right side unit. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. and a plurality of luminous side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and prevents a player playing with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see, and a player's personal space can be formed so as to protect the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface and cylindrically extending forward and arranged vertically in rows, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on a portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 are mounted. and internal reflectors 414 respectively inserted into the interiors of the side window interior decorations 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to a right side reflector 415 that is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the door frame. A door having a through hole 416a that extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front and back direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed with a through hole 417a extending in a shape and penetrating in the left-right direction to constitute the side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side decorative substrate 418 attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the right side reflector 415. and a door frame right side decoration 419 attached to the right side reflector 415 .

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is shaped like a box that opens rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (three in this case) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller on the front end side than on the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. The side window interior decoration member 412 is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416 at the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b. The side window inner decorative member 412 is attached to the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a lower position to an upper position with respect to the center in the vertical direction. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed in translucent milky white.

The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 is formed in a long and narrow band plate shape that extends vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 . is attached to the rear portion of the connecting base 412a. A plurality of LEDs provided on the side window inner decorative portion decorative substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. The side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 has four LEDs arranged in a cross shape vertically and horizontally around the axial center of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at the rear portion of each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. It is

The internal reflector 414 has an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four sections, upper, lower, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape in the front-rear direction that moves forward and then backward from the top end to the bottom end. It is The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a penetrating in the front-rear direction and through which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 face forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and frontward and rearward. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a vertically extending deformed oval shape, and is connected to the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door-frame right-side decorative body 419, and is composed of a right-side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right-side lower decorative substrate 418b. It is A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame right-side decorative substrate 418 can light-embellish the door-frame right-side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a shape in which a forwardly bulging semicircular arc extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415 . As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward.

The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that its lower end is continuous with the right end of the plate upper right decorative body 276 of the plate upper right decorative unit 275 in the plate unit 200, and its upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the right lower end of the body 453 .

The door frame right side unit 410, in a state assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. It looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed like a screen. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be viewed through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (columnar) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending back and forth in the side window 410a. , the side window inner decorative portion 410b can be decorated with light. By luminous decoration of the side window interior decoration part 410b, the inside of the side window 410a can be brightened, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window interior decoration parts 410b. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window inner decorative portion 410b can block the line of sight of a player located nearby. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if he is being watched by other players, so that the other players can play without hesitation. .

Furthermore, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are illuminated by the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can dazzle the inside of the side window 410a, thereby changing the visibility through the side window 410a. Let At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, the light is emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, so that the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzling and the opposite side is seen from between them. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as a neighbor to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for other players to look into the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to being unable to concentrate on the game and feeling lost due to mistakes being induced, and making the player concentrate on the game to make the game more enjoyable. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 and the like. 88(a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the rear, and (c) is a top lower cover removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the folded state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from above, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from below. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covering the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. a top upper cover 452 attached to a door frame top base 451, a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top base 451. and a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the .

The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top center decoration board 455 attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a door frame top decoration board 455. a door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 in front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front; a door frame top right decoration board 457 attached to the right side of the door frame top central decoration board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 arranged between a door frame top decoration 453 and a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decoration substrate 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decoration 453 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. and a top right reflector 460 located in and attached to the front of the top upper cover 452 .

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a center speaker box 461 attached to the center of the top surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top center speakers 462 attached downward to the center speaker box 461, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and a door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. a top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below; A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper side of the door frame top base 451. there is

The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like body portion 451a extending in the left and right direction with the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction. and a forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side of the body portion 451a is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right forward protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends thereof move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open rearward. The forward projecting portion 451b on the right side in front view is also open upward.

The top cover 452 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 when viewed from the front. The top upper cover 452 covers the outer sides of the left and right forward protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is shaped to connect the upper front ends of the left and right forward protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes forward most at the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. The top cover 452 also has an opening 452a on the upper surface thereof, which is largely cut forward from the rear end. This opening 452 a is closed by a door frame top plate 468 .

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in translucent milky white. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a semi-circular arc that protrudes forward, and the curvature decreases as it goes from both left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and it extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452 . formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a half-tube shape that is open rearward. The door frame top decoration 453 faces downward at both ends in the horizontal direction, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419 .

The door-frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door-frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door-frame top base 451, and bulges upward at the center in the left-right direction. , extending in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating vertically outside the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the horizontal direction and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454 .

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in a long and narrow strip extending in the left and right direction. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decoration substrate 455 can light-embellish the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door-frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door-frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door-frame top right decoration substrate 457 can light-embellish the right portion of the door-frame top decoration 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

Top center reflector 458 , top left reflector 459 , and top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on door frame top center decoration substrate 455 , door frame top left decoration substrate 456 , and door frame top right decoration substrate 457 . Through-holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. As shown in FIG. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker that outputs sounds such as speech and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right forward projections 451 b of the door frame top base 451 . The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter, and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punching metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sounds output from the top central speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465 .

The door frame top relay board 467 includes the door frame top center decorative board 455 , the door frame top left decorative board 456 , the door frame top right decorative board 457 , the top center speaker 462 , the top side speaker 464 , and the door frame base unit 100 . It is for relaying the connection with the door frame secondary relay board 105 .

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452 , has a front end locked to the top upper cover 452 , and has a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. - 特許庁In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decoration 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decoration 404 and the door frame right side decoration 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. there is In addition, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464 .

[3-9. door frame decoration]
The decoration on the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. The door frame 3 has, as shown in the figure, a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire periphery of the door window 101a.

A plate upper left decorative body 271, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate central upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the upper left plate decoration 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the upper right plate decoration 276, the upper center plate decoration 312a, the left side door frame decoration 404, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the Behind the door frame top decoration 453 are a plate upper left decoration substrate 273, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314, a door frame left side decoration substrate 402, a door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and a door frame top center decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately lighting the LEDs of these decoration substrates, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect such that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or half-tube) large-diameter plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other. A door-frame left-side decoration 404 of the door-frame left-side unit 400 and a door-frame right-side decoration of the door-frame right-side unit 410 have similar shapes so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two plate center upper decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b. Since the pressing operation portion 303b and the central pressing operation portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, and the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made conspicuous.

In addition, the upper left plate decoration 271, the upper right plate decoration 276, and the lower left plate decoration 281, the lower right plate decoration 286, and the lower center plate decoration 312b, which are arranged below the upper plate center decoration 312a, are placed in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 increases upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that is arranged on the upper side and can be operated by the player. The push operation part 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the push operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

Further, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the top surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 face the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible for the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 allows the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration 312a, and the lower plate center decoration 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at a glance, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be made. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall structure of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the body frame of the pachinko machine. 94 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also discharges the game ball B to the player side and stores the game ball B used in the game. is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a body frame top hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame top hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame top hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; A main body frame hinge assembly attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 in front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid 520 is provided.

The body frame 4 includes a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the body frame base unit 500 in front view, and a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the body frame base unit 500 to form a game area 5 a of the game board 5 . A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front view upper side and left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500. A rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the rear side so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 501; A frame 4 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending leftward in the form of a groove that opens upward, and a second guide passage attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide path that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide path of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path. A lower full tank ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the body frame base 501 , a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3 , and a unit base 651 protruding rearward. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be engaged with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653, and the door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It has a lock spring 655 that biases the outer frame hook 653 upward and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 100 and the like. FIG. 99(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and FIG. 99(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a main body frame base 501 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503 . and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 which is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth. ing.

The body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, which forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b. A placing portion 501c and a game board restricting portion 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board placing portion 501c in the front view of the base body 501a in front view, and has a launcher attachment portion 501e for attaching the ball launcher 540, and a launcher attachment portion 501e. A cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted is inserted in the right side of the portion 501e when viewed from the front. A circular speaker opening 501g that faces the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a at 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. It has a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h in front view.

Further, the body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A rotatably attached rearwardly extending portion 501j is formed on the rear surface of the base body 501a near the upper and lower ends of the left end in the front view, for attaching the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l.

A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 around a longitudinally extending axis below the game board placing portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board lock member 505 enables the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be detachable by regulating forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position to the right of the speaker opening 501g and below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 includes a flat plate-like guide body 502a extending left and right, and both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a projecting forward and extending rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of protruding strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a guide body 502a are penetrated in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, and a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that an attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end of the cable attachment recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503 . The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame sub board. It is connected to the relay board 105 .

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the body frame base 501 at an end (right end) on the side opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to the hinge in the left-right direction. ) is mounted rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3 .

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and in a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 are installed. (see FIG. 100(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 .

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably, α/3≧β). formed (see FIG. 100(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops when the opening angle α exceeds a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). transition as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501 . By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4. - 特許庁

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. problems can be prevented.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a guides the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis) side of the lower door frame hinge pin 126 .

Further, in this embodiment, the center axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, and the door frame is positioned closer to the speaker duct 103 than the cable holder 103a. The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is configured to be As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open through the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and effects similar to those described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
Main body frame upper hinge member 510 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is attached to the door frame 3. is rotatably mounted on the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the above.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending plate-like plate is bent downward into an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge body 511. and a main body frame hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame hinge assembly 50 . The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a which penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in the horizontally extending portion and supports the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 pivotally. I have it.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501 k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The main body frame hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by inserting the main body frame hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 . The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a of the upper hinge main body 511 .

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to attach the main body frame 4 to the door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 , is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 , and is attached to the door frame 3 . A lower door frame hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member upward into an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 spaced upward from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

The lower hinge second body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. a hinge hole 522a, and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward of the door frame lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3; , is equipped with The door frame lower hinge hole 522 a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511 a in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 .

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 . can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcing frame]
Main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98 and the like. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 . The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is made of a metal extrusion.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof, which restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also extends from the left side of the main body frame 4 through between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the game board 5).

[4-5. ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. FIG. 101(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching device in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching device. The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front lower portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and shoots the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 onto the game board attached to the main body frame 4. 5 is for hitting into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 .

The ball launching device 540 includes a flat plate-shaped launching base 541 attached to the launching device attachment portion 501e of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through a firing base 541; A shooting rail 544 is attached to the front surface of the shooting base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball shooting device 540 is designed so that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the shooting position at the right end of the upper surface of the shooting rail 544, and the game ball B is delivered to the shooting position of the shooting rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the supplied state, the shooting solenoid 542 is driven with the strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543 . Then, the game ball B struck by the hitting ball mallet 543 passes through the shooting ball passage (see FIG. 39) of the shooting rail 544 and the shooting passage section 1012 consisting of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and then through the game area 5a. beaten inside.

In addition, when the game ball B that is launched does not reach the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball B, etc., as shown in FIG. A foul ball falls from a foul ball drop port 1013 opened in the back to a foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 that constitutes the return passage portion 1014, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and passes through the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. It is discharged to the lower tray 202 .

[4-6. payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102(a) is a front perspective view of the payout base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout base unit. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500 .

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 . The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending long downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a. , a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and an approximately constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A rear plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the rear plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front portion of the lower side to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. and have. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape. On the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, an eaves portion 551da projecting rearward is formed in the left-right direction at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and includes a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward, and a part that extends left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape that is open upward.

In addition, the dispensing base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the middle in the left-right direction, and a first rail cover 554 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stop member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The sphere tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in an opaque black color. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a rightward position in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached near the rear end on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in plan view is oblique to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the shape extends straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a guide passage. It is The left end opening of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the one guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560 .

In addition, the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left is steeper than the bottom surface with respect to the horizontal so that the height of the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is inclined so that the left end side is lower at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rails 553 are arranged is curved downward a plurality of times from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped pattern. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stop member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are provided to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from widening or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is.

The ball straightening member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color. The end on the one rail cover 554 side is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 has rectifying pieces 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 111). By delaying the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B that are circulating in two stages, the rectification pieces 556a rectify the flow of the game balls B so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side. Even if the height is lowered, the balls will not be clogged.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color. , the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

As described above, the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged has a cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction that extends downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape with multiple bends. A part of the portion formed in a plurality of bent steps is formed as a substrate accommodating portion 551aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k made of transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when viewed from the rear of the dispensing base unit 550). It has 10 external terminals named ∼XCN10.)), and the board is accommodated so that the mounting surface is perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551 when viewed from the front so that the terminals )) are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is arranged so that the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) is mounted is directed downward and is horizontal. When viewed from the front, the payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in the space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

Among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when housings corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state in which the frame ground board 559 is accommodated and attached inside the board accommodation portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the board accommodation portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 and is difficult to see. 1 (see, eg, FIG. 93). The ground terminal ECN3 has a high height of 13.4 mm as described above, but when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball straightening member 556 and is difficult to see. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm in height as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the rear side, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be given later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding substrate 559 is for once concentrating the electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (earth grounding).

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. FIG. 103(a) is a front perspective view of the payout unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. Fig. 104(a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and Fig. 104(b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551 e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 .

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides down the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full ball path unit A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The ball guide unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the single guide passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580 . The payout device 580 includes a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball drawer branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball extraction lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides down the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball withdrawal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the side of the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a meandering manner through which the game ball B flows, and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward, and the front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. A flat guide passage front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by a game ball B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 111).

In the sphere guide unit 570, the shape of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 when viewed from the front is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while being repeatedly folded between the widths of the unit base 571 in the horizontal direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guiding unit base 571 .

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction in which the game ball B is circulated. It can be guided in a line.

The ball guide unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 attached near the top thereof so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. Specifically, the upper portion of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in a front view so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. is formed to This movable piece member 573 is in a state where the game ball B abuts on the part protruding into the guide passage 570a, and the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-off detection sensor 574 is in a state of detection when the game ball B exists in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B does not exist in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guide unit 570, since the guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guide passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guide unit 570, and many games are played in the guide passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by the ball end detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guide passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 108 and the like. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction. FIG. 106(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball ejection movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational positions of the dispensing blades. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball dropout prevention. In addition, in order to explain the rotational position of the payout blade, FIG. 107 shows the payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be visually recognized from the back of the payout device so that they can be seen, and are subject to explanation. A small circle mark is attached to the bottom portion of the ball containing portion 589b of the delivery blade 589. As shown in FIG. Here, first, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described, and then the rotational position of the dispensing blade, prevention of ball clogging, and prevention of ball falling out will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 . The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a opened rearward and through which the game balls B can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a; A flat dispensing device rear lid 582 closing the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward are provided. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the rear side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

Dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between dispensing device main body 581 and dispensing device front lid 583. A spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 (tooth number Z0: 9) attached and a spur-gear-shaped drive gear 585 meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 and a second spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), which is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583 A transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and a plurality of gears extending outward from the payout gear 588a A dispensing gear member 588 having a detection piece 588b and rotatably attached between a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front lid 583, and a dispensing gear between the dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582. A payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with a member 588 and protrude into the payout passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 are detected. and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 . The payout motor 584 is step-driven under the control of the payout control board 633 . When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the rotation shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotating shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633 . The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in opaque black. The delivery blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a. A movable ball removal piece 592 attached to a portion branched from the dispensing passage 580a by a lid 582 so as to be able to open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. and a ball extracting lever 593 attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The ball removing movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in an opaque white color. The ball extracting lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and molded in an opaque red color.

The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically in a plan view. Dispensing device 580 has a width in the left-right direction larger than the width in the left-right direction of ball guiding unit 570 toward the right in front view.

As shown in FIG. 105, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It is open downwards. The dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height so as to move leftward little by little as it goes downward from the upstream end, and after bending slightly obliquely downward to the right from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 . Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer circumference of the payout blade 589 is formed, and extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in the rear view.

A payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout vane 589 and directly above the downstream end in the payout passage 580a. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the payout detection sensor 591 .

The ball extraction passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a and branches at a portion where it is bent rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end. At this branched portion, a portion of the passage inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is protruded in a rib shape toward the ball removal passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the dispensing passage 580a are formed on the same plane to form a downwardly inclined surface when viewed from the rear. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r will be given later.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b diverge. The main body side guide wall 581a protrudes rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed so as to be continuous with the left side walls of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b in the rear view. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a branch from the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed obliquely upward to the left in a rear view, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removing movable piece 592 rotates through between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end when viewed from the rear. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the dispensing device front lid 583. The dispensing gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detecting pieces 588b having an arcuate shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 . The delivery blade 589 is provided with three blade pieces 589a each having an arcuate shape and concentrically extending outward from the rotating shaft in the form of a flat plate at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The wing piece 589a extends from above in the payout passage 580a toward the rotating shaft and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Further, it protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball housing portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed in an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical shape. By forming the sphere containing portions 589b at regular intervals, three blade pieces 589a forming peaks and three ball containing portions 589b forming troughs are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotates clockwise in the rear view. Thus, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b can be moved downstream.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially attached to the payout device rear cover 582 and the payout device front cover 583 so as to be rotatable together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotating shaft of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the delivery blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the delivery gear member 588 that rotates together with the delivery blade 589 .

The upper end of the ball removing movable piece 592 is attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a so as to be rotatable around the longitudinally extending axis. The ball removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removing movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It can protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 and to the left in the rear view. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 penetrates the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extracting lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part thereof can come into contact with the ball extracting movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extracting movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal movable piece 592 can close the ball removal passage 580b. Further, by positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the upper end, the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b, and the ball extraction passage 580b can be opened (Fig. 106). In this manner, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593. As shown in FIG.

When the ball extraction lever 593 is raised to make the ball extraction movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a string on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592. However, the ball flows over the ball removing movable piece 592 to the ball removing passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 .

For this reason, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, so that more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball removal path 580b. Since the game ball B abuts on the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the back cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable piece 592. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of delivery blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (the number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 ( number of teeth Z1: 20), second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), and dispensing gear 588a in the form of a spur gear that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20) Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payment blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payment gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payment gear member 588, etc. When the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates, the rotation is transmitted through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 so as to rotate the dispensing blade 589. be done.

Here, the rotational speed of the payout gear member 588 is reduced from the rotational speed of the payout motor 584 by the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . This speed reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (=9) of the driving gear 585/the number of teeth Z3 (=24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by mechanical calculation. In this embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation and has a rotary shaft that rotates 18 degrees per one step rotation (the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps and rotates 360 degrees ( = 18 degrees x 20 steps).), and the payout blade 589 integrally rotated with the payout gear member 588 rotates by 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 54 steps), and one rotation (360 degrees rotation) results in 4.5 degrees. It will rotate an extra degree.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing vane 589 rotates 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 in steps of 53.333 (=360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and the step driving of the dispensing motor 584 corresponds to one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times of , is not an integer.

That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589b are formed in the payout blade 589 at regular intervals, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by a predetermined angle of 18 degrees in accordance with step driving, Through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, the dispensing blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 1 When step rotation (18 degrees rotation), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B for each 120 degree rotation, and payout In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777 steps (=120 degrees/6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 18 step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, is set to the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589, so that the payout vane 589, by rotating more than 120 degrees (actually, by rotating 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the position to receive the next game ball B can be rotated.

The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it rotates (360 degrees), but there are cases where only one game ball B is paid out. Because the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotational position of the payout blade 589 due to such reasons, each time one game ball B is paid out, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set. is preferred. In the present embodiment, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589 is set to 18 step rotation, which is an integer obtained by rounding up the decimal point, as described above. The payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, rotated 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and each time one game ball B is paid out, a payout A process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the delivery blade 589 .

In addition, since the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one game ball is put out, Even if the error accumulates, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball is detected. Each time you pay out, you can reset the accumulated error. As a result, even if an error occurs each time one game ball is put out due to the influence of cigarette tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset each time one game ball is put out. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for errors to occur in the rotational position of the payout vane 589 that receives and delivers game balls.

In addition, since the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout vane 589 is not an integer as described above, every time one game ball is put out, The positioning position is different every time. As a result, since the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, the adhesion positions of tar and dust can be dispersed. In addition, if the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated. , and is provided coaxially with the rotating shaft of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. This ensures the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feeding rotating portion for receiving and feeding game balls is changed each time the game balls are put out, thereby dispersing the positions where the tar and dust adhere, thereby preventing tar and dust. It is possible to have a strong payout device 580 against. The dispensing device 580 has one dispensing passage 580a as described above. For this reason, compared to a payout device having payout vanes in two payout passages, when the game ball payout speed is the same, the payout vane 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in this embodiment should rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 compared to the payout device having payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that cigarette tar and dust adhere to the delivery blade 589 is high.

In the present embodiment, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 exceeds one rotation as described above. If the set is defined and managed as a set, every time the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, an angle difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the dispensing blade 589. For example, 80 sets In this case, the angular difference is finally accumulated up to 360 degrees (=4.5 degrees×80 sets), and the number of game balls B to be put out increases by 3 balls.

As described above, the payout gear member 588 has three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions each having a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the payout control board 633 controls the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As a result, a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is set as one management range. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

Specifically, first, of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. 9 step rotation of the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). , and the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is a state in which the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, so the light receiving range is defined as nine steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. (This corresponds to 60.75 degrees (=6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588.).

That is, in the present embodiment, a 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed are used as a light shielding range, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates in nine steps, and detection is performed. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is the light receiving range, and the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is controlled by 18 steps of rotation, which is combined with 9 steps of rotation. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps.

When the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 9 steps, the payout blade 589 rotating integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates by 60.75 degrees (=6.75 degrees × 9 steps). and the light receiving range of 60 degrees. A 60-degree area (light receiving range) in which the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably discriminated.

Here, a method of setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107(a), the payout control board 633 is in a state where the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the blocking state to the non-blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 ("first edge ) is set with the rotational position of the delivery blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the point A as the origin, as shown in FIG. 107(b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b of the payout vane 589. As shown in FIG. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps as the B point. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (referred to as a "second edge detection state"). In the region where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from point A to the origin and point B, as shown in FIG. 60-degree area in which the detection piece 588b is not formed in the 120-degree area of the member 588 in the circumferential direction.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 from the point B by 9 steps as the point A described above again. At this time, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 at the origin is moved downstream from the payout vane 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from point B to point A, as shown in FIG. 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, the 60 degrees region where the detection piece 588b is formed).

Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on process when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure). When the payout control board 633 executes the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting in the payout control side power-on process, the steady process is repeatedly executed. After the interrupt start setting, the payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) and executes the payout control side 2ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various kinds of processing such as payout motor control processing, history creation processing, and origin setting processing in the payout control side 2ms interrupt processing.

The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation process. The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and last time. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is blocking or not blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit-shifting one bit at a time, if both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or when the current and previous confirmation results differ (for example, the current and previous confirmation results are different). One of the confirmation results is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is when the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. is found), set the value 1 to the least significant bit.

In this way, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width in the history creation process every 4 ms when the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotational position of the payout vane 589 as the origin based on the history information updated every 4 ms. By repeatedly executing the payout motor control process, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is positioned at point A. Since the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned as the detection piece. 588b becomes a non-blocking state.

Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having a width of 8 bits, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590 just before the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 reaches the point A. 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information; the same shall apply hereinafter) is set because the transition state (first edge detection state) occurs when the optical axis of . . When the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having a width of 8 bits. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first judgment value of 11110000B, thereby extracting the data from the 8th time to the 5th time before from the history information as the calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result is 00110000B due to the first masking process). Data is taken out as a calculation result (here, the calculation result becomes 00010000B due to the second mask processing), and if the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the payout blade While the current rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is not set as the origin, if the value is not 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is at the origin, and the current rotation position of the delivery vane 589 is set as the origin.

When the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting process, the dispensing control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to point B, and from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at the point B, the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps (that is, beyond the light shielding range). 13 step rotation in total, where the rotational position of the delivery vane 589 is set to the point A again, and this processing is terminated as it is. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout vane 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, until the time until the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates a total of 13 steps elapses, An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting origin setting for the delivery blade 589 .

The payout control board 633 executes the payout motor control process to switch the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 five steps from the state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is positioned at the point A to bring the rotational position of the payout vane 589 to the origin. is 20 ms (=4 ms×5 step rotations), and from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 5 steps to change the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 to B The point time is 16 ms (=4 ms×4 step rotations), and from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is positioned at the point B, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps (that is, the light shielding range is 36 ms (=4 ms×9 step rotations) to set the rotational position of the delivery blade 589 to the point A again. As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by rotating the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 in 18 steps. By rotating the rotation shaft of the motor 584 in 18 steps, it takes 72 ms (=4 ms×18 step rotations).

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a payout device that pays out game balls in a number corresponding to the amount of rotation of a payout rotator that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, JP-A-2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the game machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 ms, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of data drive data for 4 steps to put out one game ball. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is unavoidable that cigarette tar, dust, etc. adhered to the game balls adhere to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensing device is not disassembled for cleaning, there is a demand for a dispensing device that is resistant to cigarette tar and dust. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by driving the payout motor for four steps and one game ball is put out. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotor is the same each time. For this reason, there is a problem that the positions where tobacco tar and dust adhere are also fixed and easily accumulated.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then the prevention of ball removal due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

As described above, the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at the upper end, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be turned to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened. It is possible. When the ball is to be removed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. A total of four game balls B are stopped over a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball extraction passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). It has a length that is located downstream of the payout passage 580a. As a result, a part of the passage inner wall forming the dispensing passage 580a protrudes from the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589 toward the ball removal passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. When a plurality of game balls B are parked in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, part of the last game ball B that is stopped protrudes toward the ball extraction passage 580b in the ball clogging preventing portion 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a described above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. However, it has a length that allows it to flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. In this way, a portion of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention The width of the ball extraction passage 580b is regulated to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down, depending on the length of part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b. It is possible to do so.

In addition, as described above, the ball clogging preventing portion 581r is formed so that the upper surface thereof and the passage inner wall surface forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane and form a right downward inclined surface in a rear view.

That is, when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and the ball is removed, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is a downwardly inclined surface when viewed from the rear. , so that the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is located downstream of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopping on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging preventing portion 581r.

As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r moves along the ball removal path (the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a) and the ball removal path 580b. 108(a), the width of the ball removal passage 580b is regulated so that one game ball B can flow down. Ball clogging can thereby be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging during ball extraction. In this embodiment, the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589, but is set to a minimum width of 12 mm and a maximum width of 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur where the width of various passages is narrowed from more than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to slightly less than twice the diameter of the game ball (eg, 21 mm).

Next, a description will be given of prevention of the ball falling out due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584. FIG. In the state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the game ball B is stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the following game ball B is in contact with the game ball B in a daisy chain. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 and the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end by about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically toward the center (rotational axis) of the delivery blade 589 .

Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B in contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( center of gravity) position, and in a state where the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b of the payout blade 589 will follow. A rightward force (that is, a clockwise rotating force) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B.

In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the central axis of rotation of the payout vane 589, and is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589. The game ball B will flow down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will drop out.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, even if the payout blade 589 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the central axis of rotation of the payout blade 589, the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 does not move the payout blade 589. A payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout blade 589 in rear view is shaped so that it can be stopped after six steps of rotation from the origin.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108(b) and 108(c), when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops. , the game ball B that contacts the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, points S1 where the game ball B contacts the side wall of the payout passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the arc-shaped blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 The side of the ball containing portion 589b containing the game ball B (that is, the ball containing portion 589b containing the game ball B, and the ball containing portion 589b and the following ball containing portion 589b where the game ball B is not contained) part 589b, of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the part 589b, the S2 point that abuts on the ball housing portion 589b side in which the game ball B is stored from the center of this outer peripheral surface). The shape of the dispensing passage 580a is formed. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the delivery blade 589 can be generated, and the rotating shaft of the delivery motor 584 can rotate six steps from the origin of the delivery blade 589 and stop. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 .

When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout vane 589 and stops, the payout vane 589 rotates six steps from the origin. As shown in FIG. 107(d), the light shielding range (9 steps) has been rotated by 2 steps beyond point B, which is rotated by 4 steps from the origin. However, when the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107(d), 2 steps out of 9 steps are performed, the remaining 7 steps + 5 steps from point A), the dispensing blade 589 The rotation position of becomes the origin, and the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is reliably detected by the payout detection sensor 591. ing. Therefore, even when the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout vane 589 (progressing after rotating six steps), the number of game balls B paid out does not become excessive.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 responds to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200, payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5, etc. In response, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). When the power is restored after (instantaneous power failure), first, the payout motor 584 is controlled so that the rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not returned to the origin. As described above, this causes an excessive number of game balls B to be paid out in a state in which the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (proceeding by rotating six steps) and stopped. This is to prevent

In the above-described embodiment, the delivery blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arcuate shape extending outward in a flat plate shape, and three blade pieces 589a are provided at angular intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. may be provided at four angular intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 109 is a modification of the dispensing device, and is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device provided with dispensing vanes 589 having four arcuate vane pieces 589a and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 109 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction, and the same reference numerals as in FIG. 105 are attached. When the delivery blade 589 is provided with four blade pieces 589a each having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 588b are provided at four angular intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90-degree area of the dispensing gear member 588 in the circumferential direction and the 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed are used as the light shielding range. It is managed by 18 steps of rotation including 9 steps rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 and 9 step rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45 degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. , the speed reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps for the payout of one game ball B. As shown in FIG. In other words, when the rotary shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes the payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591 . The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but if affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes. In spite of this, it is possible to make it look as if the game ball B has not passed due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines, based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor A large amount of game balls B are put out by controlling the rotating shaft of 584 to rotate excessively. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring a game ball B (referred to as "radio wave goto"), as shown in FIG. It can be configured to be provided in The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, and when the payout control board 633 determines based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 that an abnormal radio wave is emitted, Along with emergency stop of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, to transmit to the main control board 1310 a radio-controlled goto notification command to that effect. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output an electric wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 . When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit width electric wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the electric wave goto notification command is set to 8-bit width to 16-bit width, and the electric wave goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. The information is transmitted from various speakers and is shaped to indicate that the radio-controlled goto can be notified by setting various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, red flashing light emission mode), and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio-controlled goto notification command having a 16-bit width, it displays a large message "Abnormality has occurred." do.

Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passage sensor 594', which is a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch, may be used. A detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594' is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of put out game balls B does not match, it can be determined that some kind of dishonesty has been committed. When the payout control board 633 determines that some kind of fraud has been done, it urgently stops the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to the main control board 1310 to notify that fact. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 . When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit width goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is set from 8-bit width to 16-bit width, the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume, and the sound is output from various speakers. At the same time, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a red blinking light emission mode), and the content is shaped so that it is possible to notify a goto, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a goto notification command having a 16-bit width, it displays a large message "Abnormality has occurred" on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emission mode. .

Also, in the embodiment described above, the payout motor 584 was a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotary shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle of 18 degrees accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its axis of rotation by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated through the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmission member. , decelerates and rotates the dispensing blade 589, but rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (eg, the first transmission gear 586', The speed may be increased via the second transmission gear 587 ′ and the dispensing gear 588 a ′) of the dispensing gear member 588 so that the dispensing blade 589 can be rotated. By doing this, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout vane 589 is determined in advance so that the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is not an integer. The positioning position is different every time one ball is put out. As a result, since the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, the adhesion positions of tar and dust can be dispersed. In addition, if the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light shielding pieces) of a payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotating shaft of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. This ensures the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmission member is predetermined, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 for receiving and sending out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is put out to prevent tar and dust. By dispersing the positions where the dust adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is resistant to tar, dust, and the like.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550 . The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610 . The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full-tank base 601 and has an open front side. and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and has a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

In addition, the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper delivery ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view and opening downward on the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. An upper full discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the bottom surface, and an upper opening near the right end in the front view on the top surface and substantially perpendicular to the bottom. and an upper ball extraction passage 600e extending downward and opening downward near the right end of the lower surface (see FIG. 111).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side in front view, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball extraction passage 600e are arranged in order and open downward. When the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensed ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580. The upstream end of the passage 600 e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580 b in the dispensing device 580 . As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d. is emitted downward from any of Also, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank ball route unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104 and the like. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower portion of the upper full ball path unit 600 . The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c. 611, a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening/closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full-tank payout passage 610b and a payout passage opening/closing door 613 are attached in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-tank payout passage 610b. and a biasing closing spring 614 .

The lower full ball path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the part extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball passage unit 610. As shown in FIG. The lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b extends forward while being slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the middle in the front-rear direction.

The payout passage open/close door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. The payout passage open/close door 613 is biased clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b have front end openings (downstream ends). opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 has an operating protrusion 613a protruding forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a short arc shape centering on the center of rotation of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and the front end surface of the actuating protrusion 613a approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4. As shown in FIG.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full payout passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are arranged in the upper full position. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flows into the lower full payout passage 610b. , and the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open so as to face the ball removal guide portion 627, which opens leftward in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4), the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 is such that the actuating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 abuts the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As shown in FIG. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . In a normal state, the ball extraction lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a at the branched portion. Further, in the lower full-tank ball path unit 610, the dispensing passage open/close door 613 is in an open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open upward, receives a predetermined number of balls from the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580.例文帳に追加When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout vane 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout vane 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573 , and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573 . As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589 .

In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b moves clockwise in the back view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a 589 is discharged downstream. After being detected by the payout detection sensor 591, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (ball housing portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 are arranged directly under the upper paid-out ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. , is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at .

When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device. The game ball B paid out from 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600 that is in communication. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicated with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper full ball payout passage 600d passes through the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610, and the full ball receiving opening 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be received. After that, the game ball B received by the full ball socket 150b is discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball outlet 150d, and the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are put out, the game balls B can be automatically put out to the lower tray 202. - 特許庁

In addition, when the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, and the game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower tray The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the state of the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removing movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in the rear view, and the ball removing movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

At this time, at the position of the ball extraction movable piece 592, the falling game ball B contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extraction movable piece 592, so that the ball extraction movable piece 592 is less likely to break.

Then, the game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through and discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide portion 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall island equipment side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 116 and the like. FIG. 112(a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and FIG. 112(b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 116 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 .

The substrate unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board placing portion 501c, and a front view near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 facing forward. and a container-shaped speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of vertically extending slits penetrating in the vicinity of the left end in front view, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge forward from the rear on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction, obliquely downward and rearward. and an open connecting portion 621c.

The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side so as to face forward. The connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward. is formed so that the protrusion of the As a result, a sufficient space can be secured on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, so that the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620 a forms part of an enclosure 624 that encloses the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 . In the enclosure 624, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a space front concave portion 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed stepwise so as to reduce the volume, a sufficiently wide space is ensured on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 .

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connection cylinder part 43a so that the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the body frame speaker 622 is positioned behind the speaker unit 620a. and the inner space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication. Therefore, the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the panel front member 42, and the panel rear member 43 can form a wide enclosure 624 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. It is possible to output (radiate) the sound forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42. As shown in FIG.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body-frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right in a front view with a relatively large depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since it communicates with the lower outer frame assembly 40 through the connecting tube portion 43a, the lower outer frame assembly 40 can be connected to the lower outer frame assembly 40 without particularly attenuating the low frequency range in the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel member 42 .

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a phase-inverted state, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622, and the sound is output from the plate unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 resonates so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are produced. This allows the player to listen to sound with rich bass.

In the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is provided with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recess 621b. A through tube 623a extending in a cylindrical shape communicating with the through hole 621d and penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed. When the speaker unit 620a is assembled, the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. and a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a front view. A ball ejection guiding part 627 that guides to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward on the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guiding part 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging downward the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end that opens leftward on the upper left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end that opens to the left end side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 . The ball removal guide part 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 in a state where it is assembled to the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving portion 628. - 特許庁

The ejected ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends laterally. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 at the left end in front view, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view after guiding the ball ejection guide part 627 and the ejected ball receiving part 628. Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a wide space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in a front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than that of the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and . The power supply board cover 631 is shaped with a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply board 630 can be seen through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626 . there is The island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the AC 100 volt (AC 100 V) commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24 volt (AC 24 V) game machine power supply voltage. AC 24V stepped down in the island equipment of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them to various boards. Also, the power supply board 630 should be supplied with 24 VAC power supply voltage for game machines, but it may be damaged by being supplied with 100 VAC commercial power supply voltage due to improper connection of a power cord (not shown). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a Phillips screwdriver, which is a general tool (note that a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver is not used; can also be configured so that it can be manually attached and detached).

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (Fig. 116) and The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632 . In addition, the payout control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. In order to open the control board box 632, its sealing mechanism must be broken, and the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against tampering with the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a rear side of the interface substrate 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 .

The circuit board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the rearward portion of the speaker box 623 , which projects most backward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends rightward in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. back cover]
The back cover 640 of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501 b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The rear cover 640 has its right side in a front view attached to the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 extending vertically so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. In a state assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551 (the rear surface of the eaves portion 551da formed on the rear plate upper portion 551d described above). there is In addition, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a is in surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551, and this contact portion is , and is covered with an eaves portion 551da formed to protrude from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending vertically, except for the contact portion 640a. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-10. locking unit]
Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 117(b) is a back perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 .

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lock units protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding backward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and a door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the direction of rotation. and a transmission cylinder 654 for vertically moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are engaged with the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. A frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, thereby opening the main body frame relative to the outer frame 2 . 4 is unlocked. In this manner, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 125. FIG. FIG. 118(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and FIG. 118(b) is a sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 119 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 120(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails and the like viewed from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper portion of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 at its rear portion, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body that is attached along the upper and left sides of the body frame base 501 in a front view on the rear side. A payout base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and opens upward, and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opens upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 leftward in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the payout base 551, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 and for paying out game balls B to the player side, It has

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right side wall 552e) with a length of about 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction orthogonal to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction. .

The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length (in this embodiment, approximately 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in this embodiment). Due to the rectangular notch portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of about 7 mm added forward from the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a to the thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment). A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed in the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. , about 2.5 mm) and a length of about 30 mm in the horizontal direction.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn such that the game balls B collide with each other, rub against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adheres to the main guiding portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. As a result, the payout of game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by this, and the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a is worn out by inserting a cotton swab into the notch portion 553aa by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing an operation to remove the metal powder.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By means of this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Moreover, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guide portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from behind through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movement of various production units, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect of use.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and the overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outer side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b in which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball. A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the part of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The rear surface of the base body 501a has a flat plate shape extending from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B lower than the upper side of the rear surface. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. Note that the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 below. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In the tank rail 553, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c. A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the sphere tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 such that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a step-like manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the left-right direction on its rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever so that the tip of the electric wiring can be gripped. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551 . The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B that has been dropped can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 123). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by meshing of game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 124, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the detour passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting stuck due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being different, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 123) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 123, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g, and the game ball B spills outside the body frame 4, causing a problem. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, Since the game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

The ball tank 552 is made of conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later, are made of non-conductive resin. In this embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. It repels and is designed not to be attracted to the peripheral control board box.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the ball passage in which the game ball B rolls may be formed with a cutout portion, a hole, or a groove similar to the cutout portion 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. A notch, hole or groove can be formed in the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 111, a dispensing device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged. , the board unit 620 has the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. 112, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570 . Therefore, an eaves-like member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves formed in the blade rotation detection sensor 590 and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be staggered, or both can be adopted. It can also be configured as Also, along the upper sides of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured by protruding. and , can be shifted, or both can be employed. 112, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, and the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 shown in FIG. Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 can be arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 serves as a canopy, or the main control unit Adhesion of the metal powder of the game ball B can also be prevented by arranging an eaves-like member corresponding to 1300 or by not forming ventilation holes in the side wall of the cover provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300 .

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 118(a), and is a schematic view of the configuration for dealing with metal powder. In FIG. 126, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as cross-sectional views.

When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, which may cause the peripheral control unit 1500 to malfunction or malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, includes ICs such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs become smaller, the pin intervals of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 126, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface), it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). are displaced by the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape that bends downward in multiple directions. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is designed to be placed. When the rear cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the rear cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551, as described above. This contacting portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward from the rear surface of the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and adhered to the top plate portion 551a, or is received and adhered to the convex portion 551da. It is possible to do so. Further, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the rear cover 640 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551 are in surface contact with each other, and the contact portion protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. Since it is covered with the formed convex portion 551da, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is pushed through the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 from the contact portion. The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502 are prevented from falling. It has become.

In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the upper back plate portion 551d of the payout base 551 are provided with a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Dust is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the attached effect display device 1600) is out of alignment (in this embodiment, the distance dimension is about 1/2 of the diameter of the game ball B). Due to this arrangement (that is, due to the structure in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch portion 553aa), electrical trouble due to metal powder from the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is prevented. It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later), whereas the upper side, the left side, and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later) are provided. Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 1501 can be made difficult even if it does.

Further, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed with a fan mounting recess having a square shape for mounting the air cooling fan FAN, which will be described later, on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles are formed on the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along the groove. In addition, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 has seven connectors (to be described later) provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to volume control switches. A volume adjustment hole is formed in each, and two connector holes are formed in positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed through the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed through this volume control hole. Further, when a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later, is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed through these two connector holes.

When the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 passes through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. , and the above-described gaps (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover through the gap formed in the volume adjustment hole formed in the body 1501, and the gap formed in the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). , will be taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess of the cover body 1501 (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the area of the ventilation holes 1501az described above. The gaps (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, the volume adjustment switches provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the gaps formed in the cover body 1501 the volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in the gap, and the gap formed in the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501). It's getting smaller. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is allowed to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. , the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be kept low. As a result, it is possible to prevent the heavy metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

Incidentally, when the blades of the cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 via the blades due to this rotation. Since the air flow speed increases due to the rotation of the wings, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is more likely to be sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the air flow. Electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal powder may cause malfunctions (failures) in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 attached inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Become.

Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the fan from being sucked in by the fan FAN. It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the heavy metal powder of B from being sucked into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is of a thin type. is selected (that is, one having a distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN that is smaller than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the fan mounting recess is selected) and formed in the cover body 1501 When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the fan-mounting recess, the inner wall of the fan-mounting recess functions as a canopy to prevent heavy powder such as metal powder of the game ball B from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN. can do. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Next, another configuration of the present invention that can avoid electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B (hereinafter referred to as "metal powder countermeasures according to second to fifth embodiments") ) will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. FIG. 127 shows a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 128 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. 127 to 130, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. , the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are represented as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper portion 551d of the back plate in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and extends upward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the bent end face of the top plate portion 551a is arranged above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the rear box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged substantially on the same plane. A rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, which is arranged substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553, is formed by branching from a portion where the effect display device 1600 is attached and extending rearward.

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the abutment portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 , the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010 . The contact portion is covered with the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged substantially on the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the back surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box of the back unit 3000 are arranged. The difference is that the rear surface 3010d of 3010 is arranged substantially on the same plane. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. 3010da, and the contact portion is covered with the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It is designed so that it can be attached. Further, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact with each other, and are formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is pushed from the contact portion to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000 The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

In this way, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper portion 551d of the back plate in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is near the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude below a notch portion 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the abutment portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553 when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 . The top surface of the curved top plate portion 551a located below the tank rail 553 and the top surface of the contact portion 640a are in contact with each other. are arranged on the same plane.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, A bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end face of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are substantially flush with each other. The difference is that it is placed in In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is arranged below the tank rail 553 . The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a are arranged on the same plane. The difference is that

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a can and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 so that it can be received and attached. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 are in surface contact with each other. As a result, since no gap is formed, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, is pushed through the game panel of the game board 5 from the contact portion. 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It's like

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is provided for the game ball B that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

The front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other at the contact portion. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bottom of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. , or the positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is closely inserted under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. Since there is no gap between the formed contact portion 640a and the portion where the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in close contact, the main guide portion The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from 553a to the outside moves from the close part to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). side) of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502 thereof.

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, it is desirable that the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, as described above, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are separated from each other. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same plane.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the upper portion 551d of the back plate in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, the distance dimension is about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the abutment portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 , the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553 . The rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed by protruding downward. is covered by the rear surface of the curved top plate portion 551a arranged below the .

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, , the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude slightly rearward compared to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. is different. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is arranged below the tank rail 553 . The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in a state of surface contact with a convex portion 551ab formed by protruding downward. , is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is placed below the tank rail 553, and the bent top plate portion It is adapted to be received and attached at 551a. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 and protruding downward, is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, and therefore falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contact part of the metal powder of the game ball B that hits. The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 thereof.

In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as a canopy that can prevent this, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as a canopy disposed below the tank rail 553 is replaced with a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to attach to the

Also, when the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), it may be detachable or may be moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position for the purpose of removing adhered metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate part 551a a different color from the surrounding members, it is possible to clarify the mechanism part that can be removed or moved from the mounting position and returned to the mounting position, and the ease of removing the attached metal powder is improved. Let

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( From the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a, the upper portion of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downwardly of the tank rail 553 is arranged as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged. are arranged substantially on the same plane.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The upper portion 551d of the back plate described above in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). is not provided at all, and the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and extends downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is formed to have a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward to form an abutment portion. The front surface of 640a is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a and comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. It is in a state of contact.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551 as described above. The rear plate upper portion 551d is in surface contact with the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d. ing.

On the other hand, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 has a gutter-shaped main guide. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a, is in surface contact with the rear surface of the main guide portion 553a. The contacting portion is arranged with a large shift forward from the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent downward from the tank rail 553 is arranged, and the tank rail While the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, , the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is bent forward greatly when the back cover 640 is assembled to the body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. In addition, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main frame 4, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 faces the back plate upper portion 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is in a state of surface contact with the rear surface, and this contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the rear plate upper portion 551d so as to protrude rearward. In the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is aligned with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a, which is arranged in parallel and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a, is in surface contact with the rear surface of the main guide portion 553a. The difference is that they are arranged with a large shift forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the guide portion 553a.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fifth embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is dropped to the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached to the upper surface of the contact portion 640a that is formed by bending the side of the contact portion 640a toward the front. Furthermore, it is arranged parallel to the front surface of the abutment portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and protrudes downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a. is not formed. For this reason, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa moves from the contact portion to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 .

In this way, the contact portion 640a, which is formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 largely forward, extends from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a canopy that can prevent the game ball B from falling, and also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . Therefore, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later).

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a tank rail that guides game balls from a ball tank to the downstream side (for example, JP-A-2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter falling from the holes provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board located below the tank rail, electrical troubles may occur and the control board may malfunction or malfunction. It was In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the interval between connector pins becomes narrower. Therefore, it is necessary to take countermeasures against electrical problems caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. Fig. 131 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and Figs. 132 to 139 are enlarged front views of essential parts of the game board. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 . This game area 5a consists of a first game area 5a1 in which a game ball shot with a predetermined shooting force (when the amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down, and a specific shot that is stronger than the predetermined shooting force. A second game area 5a2 in which a game ball shot with force (a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1/a large amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player) can flow down, and this second game area 5a2. It can be divided into the downstream third game area 5a3 where the game area 5a2 and the first game area 5a1 join.

In the left half of the first game area 5a1 of the game area 5a and the third game area 5a3 connected downstream thereof, a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B Payout) is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the right half of the third game area 5a3 connected to the second game area 5a2 and its downstream side receives the game ball B to the player. A general prize winning opening 2001, a second start opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and the passage of game balls B are detected to give a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out) A gate unit 2003 that gives a predetermined privilege (for example, the opening and closing piece 850 of the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time and changes to a winning prize) is provided, and the center of the third game area 5a3 , is provided with a first start port 2002 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) to the player by receiving the game balls B.

Further, in the second game area 5a2, as a peculiar receiving port capable of receiving the game ball B, there is a disadvantageous number that can receive the game ball B but does not collect the game ball B and give the player a profit. 1 receptacle 2006 is provided. In addition, in the second game area 5a2, the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004, which receive the game ball B and give the player a predetermined privilege, are placed in a second opening more advantageous than the first receiving opening 2006. Also called a reception port. This second reception port may be relatively advantageous over the first reception port 2006, so if the setting of the first reception port 2006 is such that no playing balls are given to the incoming ball. For example, one game ball may be provided by entering a ball. Also, if the setting of the first receiving port 2006 is to give one game ball to the entering ball, two or more game balls may be given to the entering ball.

In addition, the game area 5a connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 above, so that the game ball B shot with a specific strong shooting force enters the second game area 5a2. It has a connecting passage portion 5a4 that can pass through.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100. A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. A performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the performance display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 , and the front component 1000 which holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110 . and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. A first game A side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of the intermediate area between the area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3, the second game area 5a2 and the third game area An attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area and having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second reception opening), a second start opening 2004 (second reception opening), a gate section 2003 and a first reception port 2006, and is slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2, and the third game area 5a3 are surrounded on both sides and bottom) and a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the body.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a2 on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of units attached inside the back box 3010. A back effect unit 3100 is provided.

The drive board unit 1700 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151), a panel relay board 1710 for relaying connections with various sensors and switches provided on the game board 5, and a peripheral control board 1510 provided in the peripheral control unit 1500. A panel drive board 1720 that drives various decorative boards and various electrical drive sources (various motors and various solenoids) in response to commands from, a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720, It has

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . A right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper part of which is curved inwardly of the front component 1000, and the game ball B on the outer rail 1001. and an impact portion 1006 made of rubber or the like provided at the intersection of the end in the hitting direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005 .

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the space between the outer rail 1001 and is urged by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front constituent member 1000 has an out ball opening 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out ball port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1010 is aligned with the notch portion 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated and the lower full-filled ball is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat plate-shaped base panel 1110 whose outer circumference is formed slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the base panel 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this base panel 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The base panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern formed by a plurality of linear grooves on its rear surface. The decorative pattern of this embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of diagonal lines with the same spacing as the horizontal lines and rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees, and the horizontal lines and the diagonal lines extending to the right. is a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of horizontal lines and a plurality of upper left diagonal lines rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the horizontal lines. In other words, the decorative pattern is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of contours of equilateral triangles formed by horizontal lines, upper right diagonal lines, and left upper diagonal lines are arranged in a predetermined pattern. This decorative pattern, when assembled on the game board 5, consists of two equilateral triangular outline parts on the left and right sides of the first start opening 2002, and three equilateral triangular outline parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. , a pattern consisting of contour lines of two equilateral triangles of different sizes is further provided.

The decorative pattern has a V-shaped cross section. This decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front side of the player even when the plurality of panel decorative LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 mounted on the panel decorative substrate are not emitting light. , and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. In addition, the base panel plate 1110 was formed into a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangular contours when the panel decoration LEDs of the panel decoration substrate were made to emit light to allow light to enter the interior of the base panel plate 1110 . The decoration pattern can be decorated with light emission.

The decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 includes a radiating portion that mainly reflects forward the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside, and a light emitting portion that reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the inside. and a radiant light guiding portion that reflects the light toward the beam and guides the light along a line. The radiating light guiding portion satisfies at least one of a deeper groove depth and a longer circumferential length in cross section than the radiating portion. The radiation guide section is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation sections, and diffusely reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 into the inside of the base panel plate 1110. , the light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. In other words, the radiating light guide part plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiating parts connected by itself to the other, and this limits the positions and the number of arrangement of the panel decoration LEDs. Among other things, the photosensitivity (percentage of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, the radiant light guide section is arranged outside the range of the normal light guide region from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and the panel decoration LED of the lower left panel decoration substrate, which will be described later. By guiding the light to the part, the radiating part is made to emit light, and the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern is increased.

As a result, more light can reach the radiating light guide portion of the decorative pattern formed in a portion where the light from the panel decoration LED is difficult to reach (a portion outside the normal light guide region). , the radiating portion can be decorated with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident inside the base panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion and the radiating light guide portion, resulting in a geometric shape composed of a plurality of equilateral triangular contours. The decoration pattern formed in the pattern of the academic pattern can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire area.

The base panel 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component 1000 . Further, the base panel 1110 is formed with a plurality of through holes 1112 penetrating back and forth for attaching the front unit 2000 .

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the base panel 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the base panel 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the base panel 1110, is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has the same size as the play area 5a. It has

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion 1122 are penetrated. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is slanted downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the state assembled to the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B ejected to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B ejected downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 151) for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. and has.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 . In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2406, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening sensor. 3001, the first start sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 and 142-144. Figure 142 is a schematic view of the function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the game area, Figure 143 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from behind, and Figure 144 is a function display on the main control board. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of how wiring is routed from the unit; Here, first, the function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described, followed by the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. Unit 1400 will be described.

[5-5-1. When attached to the lower left corner of the front component outside the playing area]
The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400, as shown enlarged in FIG. 131, displays a status indicator 1401 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. and a normal design indicator 1402 consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation indicator 1403 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate part 2003.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. A first special reservation number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by accepting game balls B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result, and a second special reserved number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. a display 1408;

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc. can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-5-2. When attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the playing area]
The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown in FIG. The layout of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is obtained by rotating the layout of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 131 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the functions of the various displays are also shown in FIG. The functions are the same as those of various displays of the function display unit 1400 .

Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. When pulled up to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction to form a game panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 1100 or that is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is pulled downwards.

When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of main control board box 1320 and extends along the lower side of main control board box 1320 to the function display unit connector MFCN. , and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The rear surface of the board holders 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 . In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 shown in FIG. will be placed in

The game panel 1100 includes a panel decoration substrate mounted with a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110, a substrate cover attaching the panel decoration substrate to the panel holder 1120, , the panel decoration substrate consists of an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration substrate arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. Configured. The board cover is composed of an upper left board cover for attaching the upper left panel decoration board 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left board cover for attaching the lower left panel decoration board to the panel holder 1120 .

An upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400 . The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via a connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and is connected to the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side and pulled around to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state of being close (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above, it is below the rear surface of the back box 3010. are bent toward the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and are bundled by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and pulled to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 . is turned. Then, the wiring UPCBL separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 to extend along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel drive board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length. The wiring FCBL, which is routed from the corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the upper side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, is bent downward on the rear surface of the rear box 3010, and vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the direction and are respectively collected and routed to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 . The area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this manner is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that is set.

As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides downward the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580, A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby generating electromagnetic noise. emits For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

The main control board 1310, which will be described later in detail, includes a main control MPU 1310a (which is a microprocessor) including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like ( See FIG. 151). This main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and disabled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The contents of the stored RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. It protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. FIG.

In this way, since static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and their surroundings, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. It may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, and it may electrically connect the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. may intrude into the wiring UPCBL to be connected. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, if the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to pass through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, From a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320, approximately from the top side of the main control board box 1320) bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320 at the point where it has a quarter length), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side When it passes over the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer to the side, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic wave noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, there is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of this intruding electromagnetic wave noise.

Note that if a wiring receiving groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL , not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, if electromagnetic wave noise enters this wiring FCBL, as described above, if the wiring FCBL is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and routed, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of , electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise that has penetrated into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is placed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while the main control MPU 1310a is arranged from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. That is, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below this center line. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310. FIG.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL. , on the main control board 1310, or in the space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged so that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves entering the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the first wiring spacing dimension.

The wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, as described above. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is attached to the right side of the main control substrate box 1320. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , and the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to ensure a large distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring distance dimension") to various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. This second wire spacing dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wire spacing dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. It can also be configured to be directly connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise are preferably provided for each of the wirings FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of electromagnetic noise waveforms, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wires FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

In addition, the panel relay board 1710 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a game ball B that has been received in a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. A large winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a magnetism acting near the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5 are detected. Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected to each other and aggregated. In other words, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wirings from various sensors, the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 is also electrically connected and aggregated. In addition, two wires from the first start opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710 .

The panel relay board 1710 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector 1710a, in addition to the two wires from various sensors, and the wire FCBL from the function display unit 1400. FIG. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is provided to reduce or reduce the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL. By providing an element that can be removed (that is, by providing an element that can reduce or remove electromagnetic noise for each of the plurality of wirings FCBL that transmit control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 ), it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering two wires from various sensors.

The wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length as described above, and is particularly difficult to connect to the game board. 5 from the upper right corner of the game panel 1100 to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, the wiring UPCBL is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and extends to the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed along the vertical direction, and are routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the wiring UPCBL is routed in this way. Electromagnetic wave noise may intrude into the region where the wiring FCBL is located, similarly to the wiring FCBL described above. As described above, this wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side of the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed above a predetermined connector of panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic noise due to wiring UPCBL reaches peripheral control board 1510 in peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, which will be described in detail later. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 148). Corresponding various wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wirings UPCBL are arranged to intersect or contact each other (arrangement straddling), so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wirings UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. If it penetrates into various electrically connected wirings, it will be affected by the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL, and for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 will be disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen will be disturbed). turbulence occurs).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to separate them from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. there is As a result, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not make parallel contact with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and does not electrically connect to the connectors CN2 to CN9. do not touch some of the wiring connected to the In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or contact the wiring UPCBL. are arranged so as not to

Further, in this embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control ICs of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 (Peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 151 and described later) is placed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the peripheral control IC 1510 as a positional relationship. That is, in this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a It is arranged to separate the

As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from the wiring UPCBL that is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 should be separated from the wiring UPCBL that is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. It is designed to attenuate the electromagnetic wave noise that enters. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Furthermore, the substrates of the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 are electrically connected via wiring (not shown), and this wiring crosses or contacts with the wiring UPCBL. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel drive board 1720, and is transmitted from the panel drive board 1720 through the wiring to the peripheral control board 1510. It is extremely difficult to intrude into the peripheral control board 1510, and the influence of electromagnetic noise does not reach the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In the panel drive board 1720, the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid ground). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise for each of the plurality of wirings UPCBL that transmit control signals from the panel drive board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400.) . Thus, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel driving substrate 1720 . Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of electromagnetic noise waveforms, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements also include components for EMC countermeasures (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings UPCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings UPCBL, or beads and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, as the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the wiring between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel driving board 1720 are electrically connected. Of the wirings (not shown), the wiring UPCBL passes in the vicinity of the ball supply means (in the vicinity of at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580). Among the wirings forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL is connected to various door frame side decoration boards 184, 273, etc., except for the upper left panel decoration board 1131, and peripheral control boards. It was arranged so as not to cross or contact the wiring forming the transmission path with the substrate 1510 . Therefore, such a configuration can also be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . For example, among the various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310, wirings that pass under an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise and other wirings other than this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact each other. This prevents the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310), which can be operated by the high-frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator, from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

In the above-described embodiment, wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 (a transmission path for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is formed). As the wiring), the wiring UPCBL and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720 are connected connectors provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131. A wiring UPCBL′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via 1131 a , may be routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 . In this case, the wiring UPCBL′ is a wiring forming another transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (excluding the upper left panel decorative board 1131, various decorative boards 184 on the side of the door frame, 273, etc. and the wiring forming the transmission path with the peripheral control board 1510). As a result, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL' is emitted and is connected to the peripheral control board 1510. The wiring that forms another transmission path (the transmission path between the control means and other rendering means excluding the specific rendering means) It is possible to prevent intrusion into the formed wiring (various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 148)). Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back surface. When the box 3010 is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward, and the wire treatment pieces 3011 are formed in plurality along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the vertical direction. However, when it is drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent. The left side of the game panel 1100 is bent again toward the bottom of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed vertically along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the substrate holder 1200, it is routed downward along the left side of the main control substrate box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Then, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and drawn along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. may be connected directly.

In this way, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to be larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering. This is because, when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. Due to the arrangement, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and its surroundings. This is because there is a case where the wire FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 arranged below may be penetrated.

In addition, when adopting such a mode and configuring the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is provided with the above-described It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals with waveform widths.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as such elements, as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned. They are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series with FCBL, respectively, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel with a plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wires FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back surface. When the box 3010 is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the vertical direction. However, if the wires FCBL respectively bundled by the wire processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, The board holder 1200 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 by being gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 . When pulled downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 is bent. , and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL affects the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 148) and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. Corresponding various wirings are electrically connected to such connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wirings FCBL intersect or contact each other (arrangement straddling). , the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is affected by the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wire FCBL. occur).

Therefore, the wiring FCBL should not be routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500). It is preferable to configure so as not to be in contacting arrangement (straddling arrangement). For example, as a method of routing the wiring FCBL that does not intersect or contact the wiring FCBL with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (arrangement that straddles), the illustration provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is used. The wiring FCBL electrically connected via a non-connector is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is bent from the upper side toward the left side, The left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces are formed vertically along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, respectively. Down along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the panel 1100 , it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, the function display is performed. It may be electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN.

In this way, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to be larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. This is because, when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. Due to the arrangement, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached and its surroundings. This is because the wire FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, which are arranged below, may be invaded.

In addition, when adopting such a mode and configuring the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 is provided with the above-described It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. It is designed to pass signals with waveform widths.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as such elements, as described above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned. They are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series with FCBL, respectively, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel with a plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wires FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a has been arranged in the above direction, but this positional relationship is reversed and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below this center line, while the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged above this center line. Alternatively, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. FIG. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through the space separating the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a in the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back surface. When the box 3010 is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the vertical direction. The right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 It was pulled downward along the In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 shown in FIG. was placed in As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. , and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. In other words, when the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area in which the wiring FCBL is routed is in front of the ball guide unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full ball path unit 610. was placed. Therefore, if the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 can be installed in addition to the routing of the wiring FCBL. , so as not to be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 (so as not to be housed along the wiring housing groove and routed around), the wire is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, and then to the function display unit connector MFCN. may be connected directly.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 outside the game area 5a, but instead of the function display unit 1400, a plurality of full-color LEDs are installed in this area. A mounted decorative substrate may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "wirings") electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate is, for example, shown in FIG. To explain, when the game board 5 is drawn from the upper right corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward, and the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the peripheral control unit 1500 are bundled together, bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and connected to the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) connector. , and then electrically connected to this connector. When it is pulled around to the upper side of the rear surface, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. A connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is bent toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and bundled by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500. A wire routing method can be mentioned in which the wiring is electrically connected to the connector after being routed to the bottom of the connector.

In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is the payout base unit 550 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or near (below) the ball tank 552, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the wiring as described above.

Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510. By arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Via the spaces spaced apart at 1510, entry into the various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In addition, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. On the control board 1510 or in the space separating the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, the electromagnetic noise that enters via this wiring can be attenuated. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Although the decoration board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decoration board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be directly connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or remove the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring described above (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decoration board). On the other hand, it is preferable to provide each element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise). As a result, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of electromagnetic noise waveforms, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as such elements, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be mentioned. , respectively, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. If a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit composed of a combination of coils and capacitors may be inserted in each of the multiple wires, or beads and capacitors may be used. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

In the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is arranged behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL electrically connected via the connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131. is bent toward the upper side of the rear surface of the game panel 1100, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is in close proximity (or contact) with the wiring FCBL described above. When the box 3010 is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the rear surface of the rear box 3010 is bent downward, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010 in the vertical direction. However, when it is drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent. The left side of the back box 3010 is bent again toward the bottom of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces are formed vertically along the left side of the back surface of the back box 3010, respectively. When it is pulled around to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 is bent toward the right side and pulled around along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 to drive the panel in the drive board unit 1700. It may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector after being routed above the predetermined connector of the board 1720 . In this case, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, although not shown, so that the drive substrate It is separated from the upper side of the unit 1700 . As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of drive board unit 1700 below peripheral control unit 1500 and peripheral control of peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged. As for the mounting position of the IC 1510a (see FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the peripheral control 1510. FIG. In other words, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the peripheral control board 1510. can do. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from the wiring UPCBL that is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal figure variation display game, a special figure variation display game, a game state display, etc. is arranged on the surface of the game board (for example, special JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIGS. 2 and 21)). This display device (display unit) is display-controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device There was a risk of impact.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board box 1520 housing a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) and the like for controlling effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310. there is Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board and liquid crystal output board to be described later). ing. The configuration of peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box at the approximate center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c that are open on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, thereby locking the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. front unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110, and the rear end partly penetrates the through hole 1112 to the base. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel 1110 .

As described above, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a and has a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. And, a side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 near the intermediate area between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3, and the second game area 5a2 And an attacker unit 2400 attached near the middle area of the third game area and having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a gate part 2003, a second starting opening 2004 (Second reception port), has a disadvantageous first reception port 2006 and is slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a (both sides in the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2 and the third game area 5a3) and a frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the lower three sides), and further provided with a display effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500. - 特許庁

[5-8-1. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, A first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 is a large winning port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the large winning port 2005. 2403 (also called count sensor) (see FIG. 126). In addition, the center member 2500 is provided with a starting opening solenoid 2404 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004 according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the attacker unit 2400 is the first An attacker solenoid 2405 is provided for opening and closing a big winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004.例文帳に追加

The center member 2500 is arranged above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center in a front view. It is attached via 830. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. .

The frame-shaped center member 2500 has an enclosing frame 832 projecting forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 around the periphery except for the lower side, and is driven into the game area 5a by the enclosing frame 832. A game ball B that has been caught cannot enter the frame.

The center member 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 that is open to the left outer peripheral surface of the enclosing frame 832 in the front view so that the game ball B in the first game area 5a1 can enter, and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501. A warp exit 2502 that can be released and is open in the frame, and a stage shelf 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 to the third game area 5a3 after rolling in the horizontal direction. I have it.

The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the central side in the left-right direction is depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is positioned on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ), the center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage shelf 2503 is arranged so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both left and right sides are lowered forward. It is slanted, and the game ball B can be released to the third game area 5a3 from those parts.

When the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5 , the raised part (top) in the center of the stage shelf 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it will be received by the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

The center member 2500 has an extended region forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second game region 5a2 projecting on the right side in front view. , A gate portion 2003, a first reception port 2006, a general winning port 2001 (second reception port), and a second starting port 2004 (second reception port) with an opening and closing piece 850 are provided, and these are in the second game area 5a2 It is mounted from the front in the formed mounting opening. Further, in the area forming portion 2504, an obstruction nail 2007 is implanted in the base panel 1110 in the same manner as in the first game area 5a1. In this embodiment, the center member 2500 and the area forming portion 2504 are provided integrally, but in another form, the center member 2500 and the area forming portion 2504 are provided separately. may In addition, when the area of the second game area 5a2 is small, the area forming part 2504 is formed with a ball flow lower surface part and an obstacle projection part, and the area forming part 2504 is equivalent to the second game area 5a2 described above. You may make it have a function.

The center member 2500 is installed between the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (11 mm in this embodiment) (a gap with a width of just over one game ball, 13 mm in this embodiment) is formed. This gap is the connecting passage portion 5a4 that connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 above.

The communication passage portion 5a4 of the embodiment shown in FIG. It has a lateral passage portion extending in the horizontal direction to 1006 and a vertical passage portion located downstream of the lateral passage portion and extending in the vertical direction. The lateral passage portion is a substantially linear gap extending substantially tangentially to the apex of the arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the game ball B shot. Therefore, the game ball B shot with a specific strong shooting force (a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the stepped portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832, or By centrifugal force, it can roll while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 and move to the back of the horizontal passage portion (near the entrance of the vertical passage portion).

As shown in FIG. 132, which is an enlarged view of the essential part of FIG. 131, the longitudinal passage portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 has an opening 848aH formed directly below the impingement portion 1006, and communicates downward in a downpipe-like discharge. A part 848a and a downpipe-shaped discharge part 848b communicating downward by opening an opening 848bH approximately one game ball in front of the discharge part 848a in the hitting direction of the game ball B is a partition having a predetermined width. It is provided so as to be partitioned by the portion 848e. The partition 848e serves to separate the opening 848aH and the opening 848bH, and its top (uppermost surface) is inclined so that the game ball flows rightward. In addition, the partition portion 848e has a reinforcing member (reinforcing resin 848e1) formed with a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of collision of game balls, and a housing portion 848e2 for housing the reinforcing member. . In addition, a left and right partition wall 848e3 that divides the discharge part 848a and the discharge part 848b in the left and right direction is formed downward from the surrounding wall part forming the storage part 848e2, and the game ball B flowing down the discharge part 848a and the discharge part The game ball B flowing down the 848b is prevented from being mixed in the middle of the flow. In addition, in the embodiment of FIG. 132, the top (uppermost surface) of the partition 848e between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH virtually corresponds to the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 (the top surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500). It is formed at a height that is substantially on the same plane as the extension line when extended to. As a result, among the game balls B shot with a specific strong shooting force (a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 moves at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e. The rolling game ball B enters the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. In addition, among the game balls B fired with a specific strong launching force (a launching force with a strength to jump over the first game area 5a1), it crosses the top of the partition 848e while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 due to the centrifugal force. The game ball B (the game ball B that has passed over the top of the partition 848e while floating from the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4) collides with the impact portion 1006 and enters the opening 848aH. In addition, the plurality of discharge portions 848a, 848b are arranged side by side at the top of the second game area 5a2, that is, the points 5a2a, 5a2b (exit portion of the communication passage portion 5a4, or the second The entrance portion of the game area 5a2) is connected in a different state. As described above, in the present embodiment, although the game ball B is shot with a specific strong shooting force (a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1), the game ball B is shot with the specific strong shooting force. Considering the strength of the handle adjustment within the range, a new game property is provided in which the game ball moves in various directions after jumping over the first game area 5a1.

As described above, the second game area 5a2 includes a general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a second starting opening 2004 ( 2nd receiving port), the gate part 2003, etc., and the first receiving port 2006 (in the embodiment, the ball is out) in which the handling of the incoming ball (the result of the entering ball) is set disadvantageously from the second receiving port. The ball entry probability to these is appropriately set according to the type of exit of the connecting passage portion 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstructing nails 2007. FIG.

For example, in the example of FIG. 132, the game ball B that enters (falls) into the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the release portion 848a directly below the impact portion 1006 through the communication passage portion 5a4 is It is set so that the probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 is higher than the probability of entering the second receiving port and the probability of passing through the gate section 2003 .

On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a small probability of entering the first reception port 2006 and relatively moves to the second reception port. It is set so that the probability of entering the ball and the probability of passing through the gate section 2003 are increased.

Therefore, when the player hits the second game area 5a2, the player collides with the impingement part 1006 in order to aim at the discharge part 848b leading to the left route, which is easy to enter the second reception opening and difficult to enter the first reception opening 2006. The striking force of the handle 182 is carefully adjusted so that the game ball B is shot with such momentum that the game ball B can roll on the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e.

It should be noted that the release portions 848a and 848b are provided with deceleration means such as an obstacle ridge 849 and a bent portion 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through either of the release portions 848a and 848b by means of this deceleration means. Time is secured for the player to recognize whether or not the This is because the player's profit is greatly affected by which discharge portion 848a, 848b the game ball B passes through. In addition, the deceleration means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment. Alternatively, a transparent cover having a width sufficient to cover the front of both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided, and an obstacle ridge may be provided on the back side of the transparent cover. good.

In addition, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that the image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed also at the position corresponding to the back side of the emission parts 848a, 848b, and the passage surfaces of the emission parts 848a, 848b are formed transparent, The image of the effect display device 1600 may be visible through the transparent passage surface, and the emission parts 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁For example, in a game state (for example, time-saving game state, etc.) that requires the use of the second game area 5a2, a specific image (for example, a flame image) is displayed behind the release unit 848b, so that the release unit 848a The player may be informed that the release portion 848b is advantageous in comparison.

In addition, prior to the start of the game state (for example, time-saving game state, etc.) that requires the use of the second game area 5a2, an announcement that informs the player in advance that the release portion 848b is more advantageous than the release portion 848a An image (for example, a message image such as "Aim at the left passage and hit right!") may be displayed in a predetermined display area, or a message "Aim here and hit right!" It is possible to display a message image of "Take it!" and execute a more detailed explanation effect on "right-handed hitting" than before so as not to confuse the player at the start of the time saving state.

Furthermore, in these cases, it is preferable that a performance sensor (release type detection means) for detecting the game ball B is provided in each of the openings 848aH and 848bH of the release portions 848a and 848b, and the release portion through which the game ball B has passed is preferably provided. Depending on which one of 848a and 848b is, a predetermined notification may be given using sound, image display, or light emitted from a light-emitting body provided in the emitting portions 848a and 848b. For example, each effect sensor counts the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge portion 848a and the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge portion 848b, and depending on the situation of these count values, the notification type (notification pattern) can be exemplified to be different. Specifically, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the release portion 848a in the time-saving gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification saying "Do your best!" or a specific image display a, All or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a is performed, or when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the release part 848b in the time saving game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10) "Congratulations !”, a specific image display b, or all or part of light emission in a specific light emission pattern b can be exemplified. In addition, when the count value of the number of game balls that continuously pass through only the release portion 848a without passing through the release portion 848b reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), the message "Be careful!" , a specific image display c, all or part of light emission in a specific light emission pattern c, or a game in which only the emission part 848b is continuously passed without the game ball passing through the emission part 848a When the count value of the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), an audio notification saying "good! Good!" By doing so, it becomes possible to provide the player with a greater sense of satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

Figures 133 to 139 show other forms of the connecting passage portion 5a4 or the discharge portions 848a, 848b or the second game area 5a2.

The one shown in FIG. 133 is one in which the width in the height direction of the connecting passage portion 5a4 is widened to approximately two game balls. The top of the portion 848e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 (the top surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500). As a result, the game ball B that rolls on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 hits the left side of the top of the partition portion 848e and enters the opening 848bH, so that the game ball B can be further divided by adjusting the handle to the discharge portion 848a. can be made easier.

In addition, since the communication passage portion 5a4 has a large width in the height direction, and the height of the game ball B that has been hit can be known at a glance, it is possible to predict at an early stage which discharge portion 848a, 848b will enter. Therefore, the firing force can be adjusted in a short time.
Furthermore, even if a so-called "twist hit" is performed in which a plurality of game balls B are shot together, if the plurality of game balls move vertically as shown in FIG. The game ball B hits the partition 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game ball B jumps over the partition 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848a.

By the way, in the form shown in FIG. 133, as described above, the game ball B struck repeatedly collides with the partitioning portion 848e, and the game ball B that bounces off the impacting portion 1006 also collides with the partitioning portion 848e. It is preferable to provide reinforcement such as rib molding or a metal plate insert that can withstand the impact of the shock. In addition, since the game ball B contacts repeatedly, it is preferable to cover the surface of the partition 848e with a material having abrasion resistance such as a metal plate.

Also, unlike FIGS. 132 and 133, FIG. 134 shows an embodiment in which a branch portion 848c extends upstream of the reinforcing resin 848e1. Specifically, in FIG. 134, upper and lower partitions extending in the left-right direction separate the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the communication passage portion 5a4 upstream of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b in the vertical direction. A branch portion 848c having a wall 848c1 is provided, and the first ball passage 5a4a of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c is the discharge portion 848a (the first ball passage) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. 1 discharge portion), and the second ball passage 5a4b of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branch portion 848c communicates with the discharge portion 848b (second discharge portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. It is configured to

The branch portion 848c has a metal buffer pin 848d at its tip, and this buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B to prevent damage to the branch portion 848c. Of course, if the tips of the upper and lower partition walls 848c1 of the branched portion 848c are reinforced by covering them with a metal cover or the like, the buffer pin 848d may be omitted.

In this case as well, the player adjusts the shooting force of the game ball B with the handle 182 and aims at either the first ball passage 5a4a or the second ball passage 5a4b. Since it is necessary to separately hit the path 5a4a and the second ball path 5a4b, the degree of difficulty in adjusting the handle 182 is high, and the difference in technique between players is likely to be reflected. Therefore, the feeling of accomplishment and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained increases.

134, a space is formed on the left side of the accommodation portion 848e2 for the reinforcing resin 848e1. In this space, the reinforcing resin 848e1 can be inserted or Further strength improvement may be achieved by attaching a different reinforcing member. In addition, considering the appearance when this space is enlarged, the surface side of the reinforcing resin or reinforcing member mounted in the space may be given a predetermined decoration, or the reinforcing resin or reinforcing material may be used. Instead of members, some effect device (for example, a fourth pattern display device, a sub-liquid crystal, etc.) may be provided to have both effects of reinforcement and effect.

135(a) and 135(b), a drop port 5a4c connecting the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b is provided in a part of the branch portion 848c of the communication passage portion 5a4 of FIG. A part of the game balls flowing through the first ball passage 5a4a can drop into the second ball passage 5a4b and drop from the second release portion 848b to the specific location 5a2b of the second game area 5a2. In this case, there is a variation in the adjustment of the handle 182 that separates the ejection portions 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the game ball B hits the outer rail 1001 and bounces back into the drop openings 5a4c.) increases the interest of the game.

The one shown in FIG. 136 is the one shown in FIG. 134 in which the tip of the branched portion 848c is set near the stepped portion 832a of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500, so that it hits the tip of the branched portion 848c. Since the game ball B is easily bounced back to the first game area 5a1, the difficulty of distinguishing between the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. Incidentally, in the examples of FIGS. 134, 135(a) and (b), the bounce space 832c is provided between the tip of the branch portion 848c and the stepped portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500. Most of the game balls B that hit and bounce off the part 848c roll on the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 and enter the second ball passage 5a4b.

137 and 138 are examples in which the release portions 848a and 848b of FIG. Since the staying time of the game ball B can be lengthened, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the discharge portions 848a and 848b can be improved.

137 and 138 are examples in which the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 is increased by arranging the first receiving port 2006 above and below the gate portion 2003. By doing so, the gate portion Since the thrill of aiming for 2003 can be heightened, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be increased.

As described above, in the example of FIGS. 131 to 138, the points 5a2a and 5a2b that enter the second game area 5a2 provide a profit difference between advantageous and disadvantageous points in the subsequent drop path, and the point 5a2b that is always advantageous is set. However, different types of benefits are provided on the subsequent falling path between the entering points 5a2a and 5a2b, and either one of the points 5a2a and 5a2b is selected and aimed according to the game state. may

That is, in the example of FIG. 139, the game ball B passing through the connecting passage portion 5a4 and entering from the portion 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the impact portion 1006 has a probability of entering the first receiving port 2006. is set so that there is a possibility that the ball will pass through the gate section 2003, although it is higher than the probability that the ball will enter the second entrance.

On the other hand, the game ball B entering from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a very low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006, and the probability of entering the second receiving port is increased. is set to

Therefore, when the player hits into the second game area 5a2, even if he takes the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 according to the game state, he aims at the gate part 2003 and makes it collide with the impact part 1006, and then the discharge part. Aim at 848a, for example, in a big win state, it is difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006 and easy to enter the second receiving port, and aim at the discharge portion 848b which is easy to reach the big winning port 2005 with low risk. Force adjustment will be performed.

Although not shown, the above-described center member 2500 is divided into parts common to different models, such as a part corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and other parts, for each model. A plurality of (at least two) blocks may be formed by dividing the portion to be changed, and one center member 2500 may be formed by combining the blocks. By doing so, it is possible to mass-produce parts common to each model, so that the cost of the center member 2500 can be suppressed.

Also, the member between the ejection part 848a and the ejection part 848b may be made movable so that the gap between the opening 848aH or 848bH of one of the ejection parts 848a or 848b is widened when a specific condition is satisfied.

Also, the inner surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 may be provided with a deceleration means such as the obstructing projections 849 provided in the discharge portions 848a and 848b so as to technically facilitate entry into the discharge portion 848b.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the substrate holder 1200 below. Ejected.

In addition, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. be done.

Also, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. After being detected by the first receiving port sensor 2406, the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first starting sensor 3002 includes a first starting sensor main side (hereinafter referred to as "first starting sensor main side 3002a") and a first starting sensor secondary side (hereinafter referred to as "first starting sensor main side 3002a"). The first start sensor main side 3002a and the first start sensor subordinate side 3002b have at least a distance to prevent erroneous detection (14 mm in this embodiment). , and has a distance dimension larger than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm)). Since the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor subordinate side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor main side When the sensor subordinate side 3002b is arranged in a state of being less than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a is detected along with the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a. It may be detected by the sensor subordinate side 3002b, and the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b is detected by the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b together with the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. This is because there are cases.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main side 3002a of the first starting port sensor and the secondary side 3002b of the first starting port sensor are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in this embodiment) that is larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. Thereby, when the game ball B passing through the first starting hole sensor main side 3002a is detected by the first starting hole sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first starting hole sensor secondary side 3002b. As a result, although the game ball B has not yet passed through the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b, the physical structure prevents the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b from detecting it by mistake. When the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b is detected by the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b, the electrical influence due to the detection can be prevented. reaches the first start sensor main side 3002a, so that the game ball B has already passed through the first start sensor main side 3002a, but the first start sensor main side 3002a False detection can be prevented by a physical structure. In this way, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is first detected by the first starting port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, and then detected by the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. After passing through the side 3002b and being detected by the secondary side 3002b of the first starting port sensor, the substrate is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

In this embodiment, by adopting the first starting sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensor), a first starting sensor main side 3002a and a first starting sensor secondary side 3002b, the first starting A game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. Illegal balls (game balls, metal balls with approximately the same diameter, or synthetic resin balls with approximately the same diameter ) is detected by the first start-up sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensor) and notified in detail later.

[5-8-2. display unit]
Although not shown in detail, the display effect unit 2600 is selected according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , and has a plurality of effect decorations that move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light-emitting effects. The display effect unit 2600 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc., and by appropriately combining them, various pattern effects can be presented to the player. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, to entertain the player with various presentations, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 . The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center member 2500, and has a transparent flat light guide plate that closes the inside of the frame of the center member 2500. Light is emitted from the upper surface of the light guide plate to be decorated with light. and a first pattern decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for a first pattern are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs for a second pattern that are decorated by emitting light from the right side of the light guide plate are mounted. and a plurality of diffuser lenses provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern for diffusing the light from the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. , is equipped with The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are full-color LEDs.

The light guide plate consists of a first pattern formed by a large number of concave-convex upper reflectors that reflect forward only light from above, and a large number of concave-convex right reflectors that reflect forward only light from the right direction. and a second pattern formed by the reflecting portion. In other words, the display effect unit 2600 can illuminate the first pattern by causing the LED of the first pattern decoration substrate to emit light, and emit the second pattern by causing the LED of the second pattern decoration substrate to emit light. can be displayed.

In the light guide plate, the countless upper reflective portions forming the first pattern and the countless right reflective portions forming the second pattern are each formed with fine unevenness. When the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern on the substrate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern on the decorative substrate for the second pattern do not emit light, the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side looks transparent. Various ornaments and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in good condition.

The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern and the right reflecting portion forming the second pattern correspond to the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern. It has a plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the LEDs and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate. The upper and right reflectors are recessed into pent roof-like triangles. The upper reflecting portion and the right reflecting portion reflect light incident from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Reflect in direction. On the other hand, the incident light from the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that do not correspond is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, only light from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can reach the eyes of the player positioned in front of the light guide plate.

The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern mounted on the lower surface of the decoration substrate for the first pattern are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. LEDs are divided into four groups. The first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are arranged in two circles from the left by a predetermined number (three in this case).

The first pattern is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bounded by respective extension lines of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upper diagonal line forming the decoration pattern. The first pattern consists of six large triangle patterns of approximately the same size as the equilateral triangle formed by gathering four contours of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern, and a pattern inside the contour of one equilateral triangle in the decorative pattern. It is composed of a plurality of small triangle patterns that are sized to fit. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circular shape around the center of the game area 5a so as to form a hexagon as a whole, and a plurality of small triangle patterns surround the six large triangle patterns. are placed.

The pattern of the large triangle of the first pattern is such that a plurality of equilateral triangles of different sizes are overlapped so as to decrease in size in order while being off-centered toward the vertex side near the center of the game area 5a. formed in a pattern. The small triangle pattern of the first pattern is formed in a pattern in which contour lines of equilateral triangles are arranged concentrically.

The first pattern includes a first pattern portion made up of a plurality of upper reflective portions corresponding to the first LEDa, a second pattern portion made up of a plurality of upper reflective portions corresponding to the second LEDb, and a second pattern portion made up of a plurality of upper reflective portions corresponding to the second LEDb. It is composed of a third pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflective portions corresponding to the third LEDc, and a fourth pattern portion composed of a plurality of upper reflective portions corresponding to the fourth LEDd.

In the first pattern, the pattern of a large triangle, in which multiple equilateral triangles of different sizes are superimposed, is divided into the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern so that the size becomes smaller in order. The part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, and the third pattern part are superimposed while being eccentric toward the center side of the game area 5a. In addition, the pattern of small triangles made up of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern is divided into the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, are arranged concentrically in the order of

The second pattern is a pattern having a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters "CHANCE!".

Next, the lighting effect by the display effect unit 2600 will be briefly described. When the first LEDa of the first pattern decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected forward at the first pattern portion, and the remaining second pattern portion, third pattern portion, and fourth pattern portion are reflected. Since the part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern part can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Further, when the second LEDb of the first pattern decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected forward at the second pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, third pattern portion, and third pattern portion are reflected forward. Since the four pattern parts and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern part can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Further, when the third LEDc of the first pattern decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected forward at the third pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, and third pattern portion are reflected forward. Since the four pattern parts and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern part can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Furthermore, when the fourth LEDd of the first pattern decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected forward at the fourth pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, and third pattern portion are reflected forward. Since the three pattern parts and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern part can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Then, in the first pattern, the parts of the large triangle pattern are the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, are superimposed eccentrically toward the center side of the game area 5a, and in the small triangle pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part are concentrically arranged in that order. is arranged toward the center, when the first LEDa, second LEDb, third LEDc, and fourth LEDd are illuminated in order, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, Light is emitted in the order of the fourth pattern portion, and a light emission effect such as animation with motion moving from the outside toward the center can be performed.

On the other hand, when the fourth LEDd, the third LEDc, the second LEDb, and the first LEDa are caused to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern portion, the third pattern portion, the second pattern portion, and the first pattern portion emit light in this order, It is possible to perform a light emitting effect such as an animation with movement moving from the center side toward the outside.

Further, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are caused to emit light of different colors, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, and the fourth pattern portion are illuminated in different colors. can be made to emit light.

Further, when the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern of the decorative substrate for the second pattern are caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front of the second pattern, and the remaining first pattern portion, Since the second pattern part, the third pattern part and the fourth pattern part are reflected to other than the front side, only the second pattern can be seen to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Therefore, the plurality of LEDs for the plurality of second patterns can cause the second pattern consisting of the characters "CHANCE!" to emit light.

In this way, according to the display effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern portion, second pattern portion, third pattern portion, fourth pattern portion) can be displayed by one light guide plate. can emit light, there is no need to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the light guide plate, so that other effect units can be arranged in the space, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the light guide plate makes it possible to show the light emitting decoration in which the semi-transparent first pattern emerges in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 and moves like an animation, light emission using the conventional light guide plate can be performed. A strong impact can be given to a player who is familiar with the production, the player can be surprised and entertained, and the player can be made to think that something good is going to happen. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, the first pattern and the second pattern are related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the base panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, so that the inside and outside of the frame of the center member 2500 are continuous. The decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

In addition, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can clearly see the light-emitting display of the first pattern and the second pattern by the light guide plate, other players far from the front can see the light-emitting display. The light emission display of the first pattern and the second pattern becomes difficult to see, and it is difficult for other players to notice that the performance using the light guide plate is being performed, and other players pay attention. In addition, the game can be played without worrying about other players, the game can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002. 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 151).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a2 on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back effect attached inside the back box 3010. a unit 3100;

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a2 penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a2 at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and a liquid crystal mounting portion. A notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side of the portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a 2 of the back box 3010 is formed slightly smaller than the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The back effect unit 3100 moves or emits light according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a plurality of effect decorations, and can perform movable effects and light emitting effects. The back effect unit 3100 can appropriately use a plurality of effect decorations to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, and the like, and by appropriately combining them, various pattern effects can be presented to the player. As well as making it difficult for the player to get bored, the player can be entertained by various presentations, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Here, an example of an effect decorative body capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect will be described with reference to FIG. 145. FIG. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the production decoration. The back upper left movable decoration 3310, which is a performance decoration, is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a2 in the back box 3010. As shown in FIG.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape with the tip facing rightward, and can be moved in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction by a drive motor (not shown) via a mechanism (not shown). You can do it. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has an equilateral triangular outer shape when viewed from the front. In addition, the triangular pyramid-shaped rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 is tilted such that the tip thereof is positioned forward in the left-right direction.

The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has a trapezoidal base decorative portion 3311 that tapers to the right when viewed from the front, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3311 so that the tip points to the right. a triangular pyramid-shaped front stage decoration part 3312; A rear upper left base decoration board for decorating the base decoration part 3311 with light emission, and a rear upper left base board attached to the right side of the base decoration part 3311 for decorating the front decoration part 3312 with light emission. A decorative substrate 3311a is provided. The base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 are formed to have translucency.

A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that emit light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which it is attached are mounted on the back upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in the present embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa(1) to 3311aa(8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the front decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a. ing.

The rotation of the output shaft (rotating shaft) of the back upper left rotary drive motor is caused by the main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the back upper left rotary drive motor and the rotary shaft of the front decorative part 3312. The front decorative portion 3312 is rotated via a reverse left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that engages with the attached and fixed follower gear (not shown). A small cylindrical magnet 3312a is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3312 on the left side surface of the front stage decoration part 3312 facing the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311 . Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decorative portion 3312, and is mounted on the left side of the front decorative portion 3312 so that the axis of the magnet 3312a is parallel to the rotation shaft of the front decorative portion 3312. and is housed in the inner space of the front decorative portion 3312 so that the left surface thereof does not protrude from the left side of the front decorative portion 3312 toward the right side of the base decorative portion 3311. is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3312. This is because the rotation of the front stage decoration part 3312 by the back upper left rotation driving motor causes the rotation axis of the front stage decoration part 3312 to resonate. It is a position where it does not occur.

Since the magnet 3312a is fixed near the rotary shaft of the front decorative portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotating shaft) of the back left upper rotation driving motor is transmitted to the front stage via the back left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation shaft of the decorative portion 3312 is transmitted and the pre-stage decorative portion 3312 starts to rotate, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

Therefore, a Hall element and a A rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is composed of peripheral circuits and is capable of detecting a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a circuit used to detect the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the front decorative portion 3312 to specify the rotational position of the front decorative portion 3312 and set the original position. A detailed description thereof will be given later. As the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the front decorative portion 3312, for example, the vertices of the triangles of the base decorative portion 3311 and the front decorative portion 3312 are aligned to form one triangular pyramid. The state of formation can be mentioned.

In the above-described embodiment, the shape of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the front view is an equilateral triangle, but the shape is not limited to this, and may be, for example, "quadrilateral", "hexagon", "hexagon", It may be "octagonal", "fan-shaped", "star-shaped", or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called a rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front stage decorative portion 3312, so that the movable body can be moved. A sensor is employed to detect the standby position (original position) of a certain preceding decorative portion 3312. By detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312, the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 is specified and the standby position is determined. (original position) was set, but it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by a magnet goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic type sensor) called the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab intermittently detects the magnet 3312 of the front decoration part 3312 while the front decoration part 3312 is continuously rotated. This is because magnetism is supposed to be detected, but if magnetism is continuously detected, an illegal approach of a magnet can be detected as a magnet.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiments, the various drive motors provided in the various effect units are stepping motors, but motors (servomotors) provided with rotation detectors such as encoders may also be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotating shaft) of the servomotor is detected by a rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. As a result, the output shaft (rotating shaft) of the servomotor can be rotated at a predetermined rotational speed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are the ball supplying means, are put out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, but the game board With the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first receiving opening 2006, and the big winning opening 2005, which are reception openings provided in the game area 5a divided into 5 , a ball recovery device having a recovery port for recovering together with the game balls recovered in the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, and the game recovered by the ball recovery device Equipped with a ball conveying device for conveying balls toward the ball launching device 540, the game area is divided and formed by the hitting ball launching device 540 and the game board 5 without supplying the payout of the game balls to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200.例文帳に追加5a, a game ball circulation path may be formed by the ball recovery device and the ball transport device, and a predetermined number of game balls may be circulated in a closed manner for playing a game.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146 to 150. FIG. 146 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 147 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 148 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 149 is line XX of FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 148, and FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500 .

As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 having an open rear side and a box shape longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of performance based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. , a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of a metal shield plate 1540, and a transparent base body 1502 closing the opening of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540 in the inner space of the cover body 1501, thereby forming a shield plate 1540. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by covering the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502 .

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data (peripheral data) that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is stored in the various boards mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 . Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape with an area of about two-thirds of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is arranged close to the left side of cover body 1501 . Peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 are located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, and peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape two times larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is placed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 .

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector to be described later. properly connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to form the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. properly connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin and molded transparently, and covers the upper, left, lower and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover plate 1501a (thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e protrude rearward (toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape with an opening.

The cover flat plate 1501a has an air-cooling fan FAN attached at a slightly upper right side of the center when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 . A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, there are provided cylindrical predetermined through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, respectively. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501 aaa , it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510 .

A pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a in the vicinity of the fan mounting recess 1501aa and diagonally. When the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa and attached, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) (screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated) is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the seated pan head screw, comes into contact with the front surface of the cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the cooling fan FAN protrudes from the fan mounting recess 1501aa. can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). ), a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 . When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wirings from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned along its lower side by 1 position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The connector concave portion 1501ac is defined as two closed substantially horizontally long rectangular regions (more precisely, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). there is Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The bottom surface of the connector concave portion 1501ac generally occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a sound volume adjuster. Two vertically elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 and protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. and are exposed from the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the plugs are hidden by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a above the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, they will not adhere to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. can be prevented.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has, along its lower side, one closed oblong rectangular area corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position where the distance dimension is longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of connector recess 1501ac to the surface of cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a above the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, etc. adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, they can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It's like

Also, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed along the left side of the cover plate 1501a at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the front. A mounting recess 1501af for mounting a wiring cover body 1503 having a laterally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae and can close the wiring draw-out opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is formed in a cylindrical shape at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover 1503, and is inserted into the through hole 1503a. dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are respectively formed.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover 1503. , the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and molded transparently.

Plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, and protrude upward and downward respectively outward with a predetermined interval in the center. In addition, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc that is arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projects outward, and a hinge hook portion 1501cd that is arranged below the guide portion 1501cb and projects outside are formed. The left ends of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered on the rear surface side. On the other hand, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. Four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed at positions protruding from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. The four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and peripheral control Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed on the peripheral control substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 .

When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. placed like this. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced by the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are aligned with each other. , so as to be aligned with mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In this state, among the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition to the contact state, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are brought into contact with each other. Also, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). Also, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the ground (GND) lines of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

Note that when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the opening side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where It is The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are surrounded by circular soldering copper foils (so-called lands) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is formed on the back side of the flat plate cover 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Then, by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwing them toward mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a, A peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 . In this state, land 1520rf4 among lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface side of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the rear surface of L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of metal shield plate 1540. Also, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 come into contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss projections 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. be in contact. Also, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (screw portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the peripheral data. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520 . The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 .

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are attached to the side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. The rear surface of the fixed peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the rear so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions that are diagonally projected from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. The four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are surrounded by copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 for soldering having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and liquid crystal output Circular soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1530 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is attached to the back side of the flat cover plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the liquid crystal is displayed. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540 b 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the rear surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surfaces of the metal pan head screws are brought into contact with each other. Further, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal round head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the 1530 ground (GND). The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 ground (GND). In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. Therefore, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 .

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 become the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the opening-side end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa have a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension. (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed.

A cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed with a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the horizontal direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the vertical direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected to each other. A gap is formed, and a gap is also formed between the volume control switch 1510 d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501 ac 8 formed in the cover body 1501 . Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are connected. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connectors formed on the cover body 1501 Gaps formed in connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, gaps formed in volume control switch 1510d provided in peripheral control board 1510, volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in cover body 1501, and liquid crystal output board 1530. The two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided and the gap formed in the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are taken in.

The sum of the areas of the plurality of arcuate slit holes 1501aaa formed in the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, The above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, gaps formed in the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, volume control switches 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, , a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. , and the area in the gap formed in ) are smaller than the sum of Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. , air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is allowed to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of shield plates 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

[6-2. Base body]
The base member 1502 that closes the opening of the cover member 1501 is made of non-conductive resin and molded transparently. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by base side walls 1502b to 1502e of base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the opening formed by cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of cover body 1501 . Thus, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are located inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a has wirings for the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side so as not to interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7. Disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 elongated in the vertical direction are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken due to the bending of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the force when inserting the connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at a position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or the force when operating the volume control switch 1510d An elongated disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped and the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected.

In addition, the base plate 1502a has an L-shaped circuit at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, on the right side when viewed from the front. A vertically elongated rectangular through-hole 1502ab is formed which is slightly larger than the rear surface of the connecting piece 1540d.

An engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left side wall 1502c when the base body 1502 is viewed from the front. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the above-described L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Engageable.

A base side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward is formed in the center of the right base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center left side and lower center left side of the flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). are formed respectively.

In addition, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are respectively formed, and are located at the center of the oblong rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm). Between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d is formed which is bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, 25 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a). A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from its upper end to its lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a. The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted into the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a without coming into contact therewith.

The metal shield plate 1540 is bent so that the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane, The rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1 and 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed to be parallel surfaces. In this embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the rear surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. The mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. This is one mounting boss hole out of a pair of formed mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. These mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and extend from the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 as described above. These are two mounting boss holes out of four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 protruding from each other.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, a predetermined distance dimension (this embodiment In the form, a space having a width of 14.8 mm is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a second space between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later (see FIG. 149). and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not illustrated, backup power source 1510e described later, power source generation circuit not illustrated, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), LEDML1 to ML4 (to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 (to be described later), etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistors (not shown), capacitors (not shown), A special connector SCN3, etc., to be described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (resistors, not shown, capacitors, not shown, a special connector SCN4, etc., to be described later) are housed therein. Doesn't contain any electronic components. By accommodating various electronic components that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the electronic components. In other words, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to the function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic wave noise.

Shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540 is formed with ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501, respectively. That is, like the ventilation holes 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. there is When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recesses 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades. As a result, air is taken in from the outside of peripheral control unit 1500 through ventilation holes 1501az formed in cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501 and through ventilation holes 1540az formed in shield flat plate 1540a of shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (especially the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity). It is composed of a rectangular foam 1545b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c applied to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include a polyester fabric on which a copper and nickel metal film is formed, and a polyimide film on which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed. As the foam 1545b, for example, polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be used. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be used. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive covering portion 1545a to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the inner space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O controllers. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface and the like are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects that are performed while players are waiting), and the progress of effects. A control ROM 1510b for pre-storing various prescribed schedule data, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic) to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored.
Random Access Memory) SDRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting volume, and a backup power supply capable of supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off. 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, ROM 1510b, and SDRAM 1510c provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have reduced pin spacing and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. ∼ CN7, the pin spacing of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased. ing.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. A peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/Os, various parallel I/Os, and the like. Various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5). SPI communication or I2C communication is used as a communication method for transmitting control data to (communication is performed through the corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, electrical drive sources provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, communicating via connector CN6 or connector CN7) ), and an electric drive source provided on the side of the door frame 3 (for example, the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevation drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300, etc., and communicate via the connector CN3. ), and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units, communicating via the connector CN6.) Receive signals from as detection data, and detect signals from various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, communicating via the connector CN3.) receive as data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate of SPI communication is set to 250 kpbs, and the transfer rate of I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of non-controlled objects and the origin position are input to GPIO (via connector CN6), and control signals for controlled objects (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are sent from GPIO (connector CN6 ), or output a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Moreover, in this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. It can produce serial data. By using such GPIO to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side (Communicating via the connector CN1.) can output light emission data as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (communicating via the connector CN6) ), the light emission data can be transmitted through a plurality of serial lines on the door frame side.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (that is, connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector with both SPI communication and GPIO), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, realizing a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can achieve a high data communication speed. Various control information (peripheral data) from a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 . The liquid crystal output board 1530 has a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510 .

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in a plurality of types of video signal formats. Examples of the multiple types of video signal systems include RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded Display Port), and clockless systems. , four systems (four systems in total) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. In addition, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method is adopted, and the RGB method is one system, the LVDS method is two systems (first LVDS method, second LVDS method), and the eDP method is one system Peripheral control board 1510 can also be created.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (+35 V DC, +12 V DC, and +5 V DC) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as will be described later. LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state of DC +5V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +5V being supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which +12V DC is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which +12V DC is supplied. The LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state of DC +35V being supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state of DC +35V being supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The interior of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, and the sockets and the plugs are fitted by inserting and pushing in the plugs of the corresponding connectors in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. FIG. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are so structured that they do not move vertically when viewed from the front of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 at the time of fitting.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, and the special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) direction), and is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is connected to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 should not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Moreover, a gap is formed between the front face (upper face) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back face of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As shown in FIG.

By inserting and pushing the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the socket and the plug are engaged. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is oriented forward and backward (in the direction of the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), the structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control connector) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. 1510), the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum extent within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 .

Here, the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly explained. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Various types of control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided for the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted in a plurality, Sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is less expensive than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

By adopting a NAND type flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost, contribute to the suppression of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer rate. can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, it is necessary to transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520 a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510 accurately and reliably. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. After pressing in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By doing so, the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is absorbed, so that a plurality of connecting terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. can be prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be reliably formed.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the design dimension distance tolerance is satisfied. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above floating mechanism, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when connecting, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is secured. It can be formed reliably.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, which is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to display the progress of the effect (for example, to the player). An image to convey that a jackpot game state more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image to convey that the jackpot game state will not occur, and a state in which a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state although the jackpot game state will not occur. It is an important substrate for drawing an image such as an image that tells you that you are approaching. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected via a wiring (harness). 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, thereby reducing the influence of noise entering the board-to-board transmission path.

Although the procedure for installing various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 has its special connector SCN4 socket inserted into the special connector SCN2 plug of the peripheral control board 1510 . Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a after pushing it in, the special connector SCN4 socket provided with the floating mechanism described above is adopted. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are absorbed in the longitudinal direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed into the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is possible to prevent breakage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 .

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, although the design dimension distance tolerance is satisfied. Even in such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, damage to the connection terminals formed in the plug and socket is prevented, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is secured. can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected as described above. Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, it is said that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the front surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced compared to the case of performing a three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large effect unit (movable effect body) can be operated on the game board 5. It contributes to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position.

[6-6. Assembling method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

Subsequently, a through hole 1540c1a is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 in order to mount the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss projections 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in .

Subsequently, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by , and metal round screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. A state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is reached.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal round head screws (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1 and 1540 c 2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It will be in a state of being clamped and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, out of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restrained from moving vertically and horizontally by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached to the cover plate 1501a. Movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the rear surface side, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. No projecting portion is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are restrained, and the dimensional error caused by such restraint is eliminated. 1501a are absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are It is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are engaged with the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502 .

Subsequently, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. , the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state where it covers the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501. A metal one-way screw is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 . A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the cover body 1501 and a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed in the base body 1502 are formed by screwing in the metal one-way screw and expanding the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet toward the outside at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea. The base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in contact with each other. In this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) to the rear surface of the is 6.8 mm.

In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and it is possible to deter unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. is raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan head screw with a seat (not shown) is screwed into each of the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Subsequently, for connecting a plurality of wires (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 through the wire lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Then, the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 . Metal round head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 respectively from the front of the wiring cover body 1503 to the rear, whereby the wiring cover body is assembled. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The adhesive tape 1545c of 1545 is attached (bonded).

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 and on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600. , when viewing the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and into the through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the transparent synthetic resin box. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the housing.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 is composed of a picture frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover covering the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a picture frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this picture-frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. In addition, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to its rear side, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502. 1540d passes through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapsed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is collapsed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), resulting in dimensional deviation due to dimensional tolerance or assembly error. can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545 . As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal rear cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is established. Since it can be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510 and the like and can be the same ground (GND), an environment strong against electromagnetic noise can be constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. can be done.

Among the assembly methods described above, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is inserted into the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged to align with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side). ), and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the cover body 1501 seen from the rear surface). 1501), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. (located close to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). In the procedure for mounting various substrates as described above, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, errors in the front-rear direction that occur when the plugs and sockets are pushed in can be absorbed. 1520 and peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In this embodiment, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 stores the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. , and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 .

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the system of the video signal that is input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 having the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As for the method of the video signal input to the display device such as the effect display device, for example, as described above, there are multiple types of methods such as the RGB method, the LVDS method, the MIPI method, the eDP method, and the clockless method. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these multiple types of systems are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the format of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 . In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded. 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, a metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. In addition, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4, as described above. properly connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) through the metal shield plate 1540. is now possible. As a result, there is no need to equip each board (including the power supply board 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 will be described. These plural circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 as described above, and also have the function of confirming the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 1510, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., direction of the IC, part number , pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are checked from multiple angles. 1510b, they are arranged in a dispersed manner so as to form an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to confirm the modification of the control ROM 1510b through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . In addition, the LEDML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b maintains the lighting state when DC +5V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Therefore, the DC +5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are used to check the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 2, an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board. 1520 and 1520 are distributed and arranged so as to form a large area in which the silk-printed contents can be almost confirmed from multiple angles. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. In addition, the LEDML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is designed to keep the lighting state while the DC +35V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state of supply, it serves as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the function of , the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pins is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. and the visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. .

Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. 2, the area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and 1530 are arranged separately so that the silk-printed contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the correspondence between the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4, which is arranged near the special connector SCN2, is maintained in a lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight to brightly illuminate the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Improvement of the visibility of contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improvement of visibility of the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , can contribute to

A plurality of circular ventilating holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 , and so that the states of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles, the areas are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. are placed. As a result, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can be done. In addition, the LEDML2 arranged near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lighting state while the +12V direct current from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function to confirm (monitor) the state of DC +12V supply, but it also has a spotlight function to brightly illuminate the SDRAM 1510c, so that the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) , the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, among the plurality of blades constituting the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vanes of the air cooling fan FAN) , the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

In the present embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have weak directivity. Also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with a metallic shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. and various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. (12 mm in this embodiment), and a first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) between the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has luster, and the area of the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. and its surroundings, it also has a function as a reflecting section capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 and directing it toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be further coated with glossy colored paint.

In the vicinity of the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these units and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above, and the inner space of the cover body 1501 is configured. In addition, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various boards. A configuration is adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates by fixing the shield plate 1540 with a . In this embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 as described above. (GND) line and the same ground (GND) is used.

As a result, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Electromagnetic wave noise entering from the body 1502 is removed by guiding it to the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540. can be done. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base Electromagnetic wave noise entering from the body 1502 can be removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 .

4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data A board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520 and a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By doing so, it can be arranged away from the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. By arranging the inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-described inter-board connector.

In addition, a board-to-board connector by a special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). 148, since it can be arranged to be elongated in the vertical direction, it is possible to minimize the area to which dust, metallic powder, etc. adhere. When the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged to be elongated in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, metallic powder, or the like adheres greatly increases. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are elongated in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is covered by the protruding wall of the cover plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Even if dust, metallic powder, or the like adhered to the connector falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN1 to CN9. In order to prevent dust, metallic powder, etc. from adhering to the respective electrical terminals, the direction in which the above-described board-to-board connector is arranged, the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged, is selected.

In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 has the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 plugs, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the special connector SCN3 socket, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 has the special connector SCN4 socket. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and correspondingly, the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a socket) that serves as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 has a special connector (or a socket that serves as a plug). a special connector) can be provided. In the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal formats to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that becomes a socket), and correspondingly, if the liquid crystal output board 1530 becomes a socket, it becomes a special connector (or a plug). special connector).

In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and transparently molded. They may be made of resin and molded in an opaque black color. Alternatively, if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, they may be molded in a translucent color. may have been Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board can be mounted on the rear surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed with metal pan head screws so as to be connected to the ground (GND) of these various boards as described above. be able to. As a result, the noise entering from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be flowed to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and the noise can be removed.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 to predetermined positions on the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, a predetermined gap is formed between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is arranged in this space to form two spaces. One space is a first predetermined height distance dimension (this embodiment 12 mm), and a second predetermined height distance dimension (in this embodiment, 1.6 mm) and a second space 1505b. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large production unit (an electric drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production object, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position) is arranged on the game board 5, If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be the same distance dimension of the predetermined height. The predetermined height distance dimension may be configured to be greater than the first predetermined height distance dimension. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are susceptible to electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a. By not accommodating various electronic components that emit heat, the heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metallic shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed. and model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.). Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, The part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a , and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a special connector SCN3) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area, or to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the larger area. 1530, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in one or a combination thereof. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, cover side walls 1501b to 1501az provided on the upper, left, lower and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover side wall 1501e except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the bottom side, and the right side, respectively, thereby contributing to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505. FIG. The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side were formed with the ventilation holes 1501az, through the ventilation holes 1501az, Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and intrudes, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to fall onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble will occur due to foreign matter.

Incidentally, conventionally, there have been gaming machines equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and an effect control board, etc., on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the effect control board according to the video signal input to the display device and manufacture it, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

In addition, conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, characters, etc., and a production control board (production control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted. A gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied to the game machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity when they rub against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. It is The main control board 1310 can control game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effects based on the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the commands from the main control board 1310 and the various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is a thing. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310, which can control the progress of the game, controls power-on processing that is executed when power is turned on, and a main control program that controls game operations that are executed after a predetermined time has passed since power is turned on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor containing a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and a main control input circuit 1310b for inputting detection signals from various sensors. , a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage. It has a power failure monitor circuit 1310e and a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310 a is operated by a high-frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310 .

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a to identify the individual (the only code that exists in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). a main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information; a main control output circuit without a reset function and not provided with a reset terminal; consists of The main control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function outputs signals based on the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system. is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board, etc. by resetting the main control system. It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

First starting hole sensor 3002 (described above, first starting hole sensor main side 3002a and first starting hole sensor subordinate side 3002b) for detecting game ball B received in first starting hole 2002, second starting hole 2004 A second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 A gate that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 Sensor 2401, first receiving port sensor 2406 for detecting game ball B received in first receiving port 2006, big winning port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in big winning port 2005, and game area 5a Each detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the main control input circuit 1310b is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

The detection signals from the first starter sensor 3002 and the second starter sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are sent to the main control input circuit 1310b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, detection signals from the general winning gate sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the first receiving gate sensor 2406, the big winning gate sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Specifically, it is input to the main control board 1310, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby causing the main control output circuit with reset function to output the main control solenoid. By outputting control signals to the drive circuit 1310d, drive signals are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starter solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or, by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, the status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400, normal symbol indicator 1402 from the main control output circuit with reset function , Ordinary reservation display 1403, first special symbol display 1404, first special reservation number display 1405, second special design display 1406, second special reservation number display 1407, drive signal to round display 1408 is directly output without going through another board.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, by outputting various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with reset function By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the main control with reset function by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002 (the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a and the first starting opening sensor secondary side 3002b), the second starting opening sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big winning opening The sensor 2403 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning hole sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 3002 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start sensor 3002, the second start sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving opening sensor 2406 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 and the first receiving opening sensor 2406 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving opening sensor 2406 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches. It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001 or the first receiving opening sensor 2406, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, whereby the payout control board 633 is sent from the main control output circuit without reset function. Sends various commands as serial data to When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (primary payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.) BC0 (see FIG. 160, etc.). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is processed by an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f. is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. there is This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is also output to the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC +12V and DC +35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these DC +12V and DC +35V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of DC +12V and DC +35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. While being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa through the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 is entered in Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . It should be noted that the power failure warning signal may be configured to be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines, a power line to which DC +12V is supplied (+12V power line) and a power line to which DC +35V is supplied (+35V power line). By monitoring the voltages individually, signs of power interruptions such as power outages or momentary power outages can be detected more accurately than in the case of monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +35V power line. can be done.

[7-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B, as well as controls the shooting and transporting of the game ball B, has a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542. , a firing control unit 633b that performs ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED indicator 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error LED indicator 633c for canceling the error displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. and an error release switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and controls the game medium payout operation that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor containing various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., and detection signals from various sensors related to payout are input. a payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, It has

The payout control MPU 633aa includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in WDT") that monitors the system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built-in.

The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. a payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information; a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal; consists of The payout control output circuit with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function outputs various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like. is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board etc. by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on that information is It is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guide unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580. A detection signal from the sensor 591 and a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

A detection signal from the door frame open switch for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and a detection signal from the main body frame open switch for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to a payout control input circuit. 633ab, it is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa.

Also, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Moreover, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310 . When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa drives from the payout control output circuit with reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, and a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the state of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the error LED indicator 633c. By outputting the drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED indicator 633c.

The error LED indicator 633d is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 633d include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is a "ball ball" (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 is engaged with the game ball B to notify that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. If it is, it informs that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 is malfunctioning based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and the number "5" is displayed. When the number "6" is displayed, it informs that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the fact that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates "full (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154, the lower tray 202 is full with game balls B stored), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is set, it informs that it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any part from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1). , when the number "9" is displayed, the fact that it is "stocked (with prize balls stocked (not paid out))" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has been reached).

In addition, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually put out as prize balls from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with reset function, thereby performing payout control with reset function. The number of game balls actually put out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal plate 558 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal board 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers not shown (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls B and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the game ball B. The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and it is possible to control the main control board 1310 that can progress the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, payout, etc. Abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 and the peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the performance, to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out as prize balls by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, thereby obtaining the payout information of the game balls B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1. , ball output information) and the game played by the player.

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. It is designed to be input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining degree of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a remaining degree display signal to the ball rental operation unit 220. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display section of the rental operation unit 220 .

Various voltages (DC +35V, DC +12V, and DC +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 . The power board 630, which supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633, has a capacitor BC0 (see FIG. ). Due to this capacitor BC0, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the payout control input circuit. 633ab, it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa, and is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and a clock signal based on this clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on this firing reference pulse, and a firing reference. and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 to move. One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of production based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which interfaces and the like are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, control ROM 1510b for pre-storing various schedule data that defines the progress of various programs and effects, and peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown). It has a backup power source 1510e capable of supplying power even when the power is off, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of various I/O interfaces include various serial I/O ports, various parallel I/O ports, and the like.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Between the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, as described above, the transfer speed is 2 Gbps. transferred at high speed. The control information (peripheral data) includes, as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and data provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs etc. mounted on various decorative substrates, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game It is driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effects provided on the board 5 .

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to proceed with the effect. .

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and various LED light emission modes according to various effects are performed. Various performances are progressed by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects in accordance with various performances are played.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, control is performed to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. FIG. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a becomes ready to receive the screen data defining the configuration of the screen, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to inform it.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates and outputs the sound data, thereby generating vibration speakers provided in the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. 354, the top central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound of the main body frame 4 to output acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4.1ch surround signal, etc.). By doing so, it is possible to provide a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and stores the read schedule data. game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to full-color LEDs and monochromatic color LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is stored from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Read out and send as a command from various serial I/O ports to each decoration board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or drive various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The game board side drive data for outputting the signal is read from the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 and sent as a command from various serial I/O ports to the panel drive board 1720, or the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 , and door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the operation button lifting drive motor 367, etc., and lighting signals and blinking signals for full-color LEDs and single-color LEDs, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Alternatively, door-side drive light-emission data composed of door-side light-emission data for outputting a gradation lighting signal is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and sent as a command from various serial I/O ports to the door frame 3 side. . When the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a), the panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, command). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units is provided.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each combination position) of the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are sent to the panel drive board 1720, and It is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the production operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the detection signal from the lifting detection sensor 382, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 Detection signals from are received by various serial I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Also, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that transmit the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power generation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 converts one of the various voltages from the power supply board 630 (for example, DC +12 V) into a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510. We produce and supply types.

The peripheral control IC 1510a has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

[7-4. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive board 1720, which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510, will be briefly described. Here, the relationship with each decoration board of the game board 5 will be explained, and then the relationship with various driving motors of various effect units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be explained.

[7-4-1. Relationship with each decorative board of the game board]
The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the full-color LEDs or monochromatic color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5, as described above. is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as a command to each decoration board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720 from various serial I/O ports. Each decoration board of the game board 5 has one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits capable of supplying a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

As each decoration substrate of the game board 5, for example, a first pattern decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for the first pattern are mounted to be decorated with light emission by making light enter from the upper surface of the light guide plate in the display effect unit 2600. and a second pattern decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are mounted, which are decorated by emitting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate in the display effect unit 2600 .

Also, as each decoration substrate of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 are mounted. an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131, and a lower left panel decoration substrate mounted with a plurality of panel decoration LEDs arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110; There is

In addition, as each decoration substrate of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for decorating the front stage decoration part 3312 of the back left upper movable decoration body 3310 in the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There is a decorative substrate 3311a and the like.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the various drive motors provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. is transmitted from various serial I/O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) outputs the received game data. Drive signals are output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on board-side drive data (that is, commands).

As various drive motors provided in various effect units, for example, there is a back upper left rotary drive motor that rotates the leading decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 .

[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each combination position) provided in various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are, as described above, driven by the panel. It is input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control substrate 1510. FIG.

As various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each combined position) provided in various production units, for example, the standby position (original position), and a magnetic type rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the rear upper left front decorative substrate 3311a.

The standby position (original position) of the leading decoration portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 is based on a detection signal from a magnetic type back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper left leading decorative substrate 3311a. is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame grounding substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground it to the island equipment of the game hall (earth grounding). Here, the system of the ground line by the frame ground board 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 152A and 152B show the structure of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152A is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152B is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the frame ground board 559 is mounted with its mounting surface facing downward (that is, with the connector insertion openings of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 facing downward). It is accommodated and mounted inside a substrate accommodating portion 551aa formed in the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 shown in FIG. 102(b).

As shown in FIG. 152(b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly describing the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected to the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 serves as the island equipment ground and is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire. The ground terminal ECN3 is provided as a ball tank ground on the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. One end of the sphere-tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that does not attach to the sphere-tank ground wire, and the other end of this sphere-tank ground wire is electrically connected. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 with a metal screw (not shown), The other end of the body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 serves as a power ground, and is provided on the power board 630 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal through the power ground wire.

As shown in FIG. 152(c), the circuit of the frame ground board 559 is such that the ground terminal ECN3 as the sphere tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground is removed by being guided to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed as the ball tank ground. Electromagnetic wave noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN3 is removed by being guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and removed by the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing in is removed by being guided to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth and the island equipment earth wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the earth terminal ECN5 as the power supply earth , the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the island facility ground wire, are guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed.

As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560 and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560 . The game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and emits electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame earth board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the body frame metal The earth terminal ECN4 as the ground and the earth terminal ECN4 as the earth, through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, are gradually fed with electromagnetic noise and attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of the high voltage, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground. It can be led to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate is transferred from the frame ground board 559 through the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the earth earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed.

In this embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are located in a region strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as described above. (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground is used to prevent electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 from the game hall, as described above. A large ground terminal is used because it leads to the earth ground of the island facility and is removed. The earth terminals ECN2 to ECN4, which employ this large earth terminal, have a square cross-sectional shape with one side of 1.14 mm, rated current: 7 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#18), rated voltage: 250 V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #22 to #18, and has a general specification of 13.4 mm in height (earth terminal ECN2 to When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as a power supply ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are employed. The earth terminals ECN1 and ECN5, which employ this small earth terminal, have a square cross-sectional shape with a side of 0.64 mm, rated current: 3 A (when using AC/DC, AWG#22), rated voltage: 250V (AC/DC), applicable wire range: AWG #30 to #22, and as shown in FIG. When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

In this embodiment, the ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank ground wire, body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is large compared to the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), which are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The ground wire, body frame ground wire) is thicker than the ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm, as shown in FIG. 152(a).

In this way, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is temporarily collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall, so that it can be removed. The ground substrate 559 has a function of removing electricity.

In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places can be collected once on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be eliminated. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once collected on the power supply board 630 and the island equipment of the game hall. In comparison with the configuration of leading to the earth ground and removing it, the routing of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely simple.

In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame grounding substrate 559 are configured to be arranged in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in close proximity, a plurality of wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be connected. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 are arranged in a row from the left side to the right side of the dispensing base unit 550 when viewed from behind).) ) and the hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment earth in the frame earth board 559, and the earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall. , can be performed as a series of operations, such as the work of electrically connecting , with the island facility ground wire (wiring), which contributes to the improvement of workability.

In addition, since the frame ground board 559 is configured to be able to be arranged in the board accommodation portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island facility of the game hall are connected. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, the production , peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the peripheral control board 1510). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like provided for.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. For the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, in the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are respectively provided. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. be able to.

In addition, by arranging the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the payout unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity tends to accumulate and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting the static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the sphere tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits static elimination. It can be configured to be the shortest length compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

In addition, by arranging the frame ground board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the body frame 4 near the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, can be used. For the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500, in the frame ground board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground are Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by leading to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire.

By the way, conventionally, each ground is once aggregated on the power board placed on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that it is easy to supply AC 24V power to the CR unit, and is connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power board. A game machine that touches the ground has been proposed (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 84 and 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged at the bottom of the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to concentrate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank, the prize ball device, etc. on the upper part of the game machine toward the power supply board below. By routing the ground wire in this way, there is a risk that electromagnetic wave noise will be transmitted to various control boards located along the way, resulting in an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is concentrated on the power supply board, if there is some problem with the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the operation of the power supply board may be affected by the current flowing through the ground wire. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, the grounding wire aggregated on the power supply board needs to be routed again from the bottom to the top for connection, which is sometimes complicated.

[9. A conductor floating with respect to the ground]
Next, referring to FIG. 153, members provided on the game board for handling conductors floating with respect to the ground will be described. FIG. 153 is a schematic diagram of handling of conductors floating with respect to the ground provided in various effect units provided on the game board.

In the vicinity of the game board 5, as described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. The game balls rub against each other in the ball path, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the environment around the game board 5 is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

In the game board 5, a back unit 3000 is provided with various performance units. Various production units include structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings for electrical parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and A plurality of conductors such as structures (including decorative structures) molded from conductive resin are used. In addition, the game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates and various effect units are arranged close to each other. In addition, these conductors have different effects on electric circuits when electrostatically discharged, depending on the size of their surface areas. If the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge that can be stored is small, and the effect of electrostatic discharge on electric circuits can be ignored, and it is not necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge. In contrast, conductors with a large surface area can store a large amount of electric charge, and the effects of electrostatic discharge on electrical circuits cannot be ignored, so it is necessary to safely remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge. .

When these conductors are floating with respect to the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-described electromagnetic wave noise, and electrostatic induction occurs in the conductors under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise. As a result, various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be damaged due to electrostatic discharge from the conductors floating with respect to the ground.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when electrostatic discharge occurs, various substrates provided on the game board 5 are affected and malfunction. We adopted a configuration that does not float against the ground for items that may be damaged or damaged.

[9-1. Example of handling the conductor of the production unit (Part 1)]
Among the various production units, one production unit is provided with a metal reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back side thereof in order to increase its rigidity. The one located near the drive motor 3151 is attached to a metal slide rail 3151ns that can slide vertically by a predetermined distance, and the other not located near the drive motor 3151 is a metal slide rail (not shown). A sliding portion (not shown) that slides along the cylindrical rod (moves while sliding the surface of the metallic cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (may be molded of conductive resin, It may be molded from non-conductive resin.) is attached.

In the present embodiment, at least among the plurality of conductors provided in various effect units, when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided on the game board 5 to cause malfunction or damage. A state in which the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, and is not floating with respect to the ground. and For example, a reinforcing plate made of metal and a slide rail 3151ns made of metal are attached and brought into structural contact with each other to establish an electrically conductive state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153(a), a metal slide rail 3151ns for the rear-lower moving arm, which is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 and is slidable in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, is provided with a metal slide rail. The housing and the mounting hole 3151n closer to the slide rail 3151ns out of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 are connected via the first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151nc. In addition to the electrical connection, the mounting hole 3151f farther from the slide rail 3151ns and the panel drive board 1720 are electrically connected via the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc.

The first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151nc has wiring terminals crimped to both ends thereof, and one end of the wiring terminal is fixed by screwing to the metal housing of the slide rail 3151ns. terminal is screwed into a mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the driving motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the production unit.

One end of the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is crimped to a wiring terminal, and the other end is provided with a connector. , and the connector at the other end is inserted into a corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the driving motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720, the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0. The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is the ground of various boards such as the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards and various decoration boards. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

A plurality of electric wires (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and are inserted into corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720 different from the connector into which the connector of the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is inserted.

In this way, among the plurality of conductors provided in various effect units, at least, when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided on the game board 5 to cause malfunction or damage. For a single conductor whose surface area is larger than a predetermined surface area, the conductors are brought into structural contact with each other and fixed to conduct, for example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail. 3151ns are attached and are in structural contact with each other to be electrically connected and conductive. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs0 of the panel driving substrate 1720. FIG.

As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in various production units, at least those that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may malfunction or may be damaged. , the surface area of a single conductor becomes larger than the predetermined surface area. However, the intruding electromagnetic wave noise can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel driving substrate 1720. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage to various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

Further, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise penetrates these conductors, it is necessary to prevent the intruding electromagnetic noise from affecting the electric circuit parts of various substrates provided on the game board 5, such as malfunction and failure. Since it can be removed safely, the pachinko machine 1 can continue normal operation, and the shock caused by electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the big win game state, and the occurrence state of the variable probability fluctuation Discomfort of the player such as disappearance can be prevented.

[9-2. Example of handling the conductor of the production unit (part 2)]
Of the vertical ends of the moving arm base, one of the moving arm bases located in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 is a metal slide that can be slid in the horizontal direction by a predetermined distance. The other one attached to the rail 3151ns and not arranged near the drive motor 3151 is slid along a metal cylindrical bar (not shown) (the surface of the metal cylindrical bar is slidable along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical bar). A sliding portion (not shown) (which may be molded from a conductive resin or a non-conductive resin) that moves while moving is attached.

In the present embodiment, at least among the plurality of conductors provided in various effect units, when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided on the game board 5 to cause malfunction or damage. A conductor is selected as an object that does not float with respect to the ground, as long as the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area. For example, a metal slide rail 3151ns.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153(b), a metal housing of a metal slide rail 3151ns arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 and capable of sliding in the left-right direction by a predetermined distance dimension; Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the motor 3151, the mounting hole 3151n (3452n) closer to the slide rail 3151ns is electrically connected via the first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151nc. , and the mounting hole 3151f farther from the slide rail 3151ns and the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit are electrically connected via the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc.

The first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151nc has wiring terminals crimped to both ends thereof, and one end of the wiring terminal is fixed by screwing to the metal housing of the slide rail 3151ns. terminal is screwed into a mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the driving motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151n is fixed to the production unit.

One end of the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc is crimped to a wiring terminal, and the other end is provided with a connector. , and the connector at the other end is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector in the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit. At this time, the metal casing of the driving motor 3151 forming the mounting hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. The second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2 when electrically connected to the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit. The ground (GND) line of the relay board 3151a provided in the production unit includes the panel drive board 1720, the power board 630, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards and It is electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of various boards such as various decorative boards.

A plurality of electric wires (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and are connected to corresponding connectors in a relay board 3151a provided in a different production unit from the connector into which the connector of the second conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151fc is inserted. inserted. A relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via electrical wiring (harness). This electrical wiring (harness) is provided with connectors at both ends thereof, and is inserted into and fixed to corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720 .

In this way, among the plurality of conductors provided in various effect units, at least, when electrostatically discharged, there is a risk of affecting various substrates provided on the game board 5 to cause malfunction or damage. Assuming that the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, for example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151ns is connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc and the metal housing of the drive motor 3151. It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) through the body, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistance Rs2 of the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit.

As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in various production units, at least those that, when electrostatically discharged, may affect various substrates provided on the game board 5 and may malfunction or may be damaged. , the surface area of a single conductor becomes larger than the predetermined surface area. Even so, the intruding electromagnetic wave noise can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the effect unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction and damage to various substrates provided on the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic noise penetrates these conductors, it is necessary to ensure that the electromagnetic noise that has entered is not affected by malfunctions, failures, etc. Since it can be removed safely, the pachinko machine 1 can continue normal operation, and the shock caused by electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the big win game state, and the occurrence state of the variable probability fluctuation Discomfort of the player such as disappearance can be prevented.

As described above, the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various parts of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 5 can be collected once on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 has a function of removing electricity. In other words, a path is formed for guiding electromagnetic noise generated at various locations in the door frame 3 and the body frame 5 to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removing it safely. On the other hand, if at least one of the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is electrostatically discharged, various substrates provided on the game board 5 may be affected and malfunction. It can be safely removed by leading to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) so as not to be floating with respect to the earth. In other words, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least the conductors that are likely to affect the various boards provided on the game board 5 and malfunction when electrostatically discharged. A path is formed that can guide electromagnetic noise to the circuit ground (the ground (GND) of various substrates) and remove it safely against anything that may cause damage or damage. In this manner, the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the game board 5 are provided with independent paths for safely removing electromagnetic noise, and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented.

As described above, conductors have different effects on electrical circuits when electrostatically discharged depending on the size of their surface areas. In addition, the susceptibility of the conductor to electrostatic discharge varies depending on the distance from the electric circuit. Therefore, in this embodiment, the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit are taken into consideration, and among the plurality of conductors, the electromagnetic noise is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. In addition to individually selecting the conductors that need to be removed (individually distinguishing whether or not the conductors are grounded), electromagnetic noise is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) Individual selection of conductors that need to be safely removed by

In the above-described embodiment, at least among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, when electrostatic discharge occurs, various substrates provided on the game board 5 are affected and erroneous. For items that may operate or may be damaged and the surface area of the single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, each is brought into structural contact and fixed to conduct, such as , a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151ns are attached and structurally contacted to be electrically connected and conductive. It was a path electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the metal housing of the motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720, but the drive motor 3151 Metal screws may be provided instead of the metal housing of the above, and the metal screws may be used as a single piece of metal screws. ) may be provided so that the lug plate is used. In other words, these conductors are connected to the ground (GND) through the first conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation prevention wiring 3151fc, and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720. may be a path electrically connected to . A plurality of conductors in various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can also be configured in the same manner.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151ns is electrically connected to the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 via the transition wiring of the first conductor potential variation prevention wiring 3151nc. , metal slide rail 3151ns conductors and other conductive members (e.g., structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical components (including housings for electrical components), decorative Conductive plating applied to the structure and structures molded with conductive resin (including decorative structures), among multiple conductors, one conductor) and other transition wiring may be electrically connected at In other words, the configuration may be such that electrical connections are made by two or more transition wirings. In this case, the plurality of conductors may be electrically connected in a daisy chain with transition wiring, or the plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel with transition wiring, or metal screws may be provided. In this case, the transition wiring that electrically connects one conductor and another conductor may be relayed via this metal screw alone, or a lug plate (a metal lug terminal connected to an insulating substrate) may be used. (fixed to ) may be provided, and the lug plate may be provided. It is preferable to configure so that the length of each of the plurality of transition wirings is short.

[10. Power board]
Next, the power supply substrate 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the substrate unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 159. FIG. 154 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a view of FIG. FIG. 158 is silk printing of electronic parts printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 2), and FIG. 159 is the discontinued electronic parts 1 is a perspective view for explaining the outline of the . Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described, followed by the method of identifying electronic components of the same shape, confirmation of blown fuses, capacitance of capacitors, and countermeasures against discontinued electronic components.

As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V game machine power supply voltage. When the plug of the power cord (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall, AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board 630 . The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power breakdown circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. It is mainly composed of a circuit 630h.

AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power cord (not shown). AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power line (not shown), and the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a B-type fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a receives a line 1 of 24 V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1" (sometimes referred to as "L side")), and the power switch A line 2 of AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2" (sometimes referred to as "N side")) is input to an input terminal 1 of 630a. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC 24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As soon as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As the supply is interrupted, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is interrupted. As a result, power to the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

While the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be powered off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise countermeasure circuit]
The noise suppression circuit 630b includes a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 through the power switch 630a. electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is through the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input as the frame ground FG2 to the ground connection terminal DCN5. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 152 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

A normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through a power switch 630a.

AC 24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24VA. 24 VAC output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as 24 VAC. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the CR unit power line (not shown). 24VA and 24V AC are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. A peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and Zener diodes.

The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into direct current through switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 are output respectively. The package type of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 is the so-called TO-220F, which is the same type and is fixed to the heat dissipation fin HS1 (see FIG. 155). ing. The heat radiation fins HS1 are soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 so as to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 .

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. , respectively, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q3, Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. A peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and inductors.

The DC whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. are entered respectively. The gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 receive the gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The direct current, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2, suppresses the generation of harmonics through switching by the FETs Q3, Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da, improves the power factor, and is applied to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10. are output from respectively. The package type of the FETs Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 155). The heat radiation fins HS2 are soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. As shown in FIG.

The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminals are supplied with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smoothes) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generating circuit 630f. It has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm. Then, it is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as DC +35V. The power line supplied through the fuse FUSE3 becomes the +35V power line for each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and also outputs the generated DC +5V from the +5V terminal and outputs it from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate inside. The power line supplied from the +12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +12V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the +5V power line for each board inside the pachinko machine 1. power line.

The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor improvement circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by controlling output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC 24V1 and AC 24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a gate signal for the power destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power supply generation circuit 630f is based on the power supply voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1. is set to about 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breaking circuit can be output to the power supply breaking circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power destruction circuit to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply breaking circuit 630g enters the short mode and the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifying circuit 630c, and the power supply breaking circuit 630g. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, blowing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by flowing the current all at once toward the CGND terminal of the generation circuit 630f.

A GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 . The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded serves as the ground (GND) line of each substrate inside the pachinko machine 1 .

[10-1-6. power supply breakdown circuit]
The power breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. , the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected in addition to the other end of the resistor R25.

In the power breaking circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power breaking circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FETQ5 via the resistor R25, the FETQ5 is activated and the drain terminal of the FETQ5 is changed to the source terminal. (The drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), and the FETQ5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are conductive. be done. The package type of FETQ5 is the same as the package type of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above), but FETQ1 , Q2, Q3, Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiating fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 155 and 156). The purpose of this is to cool down the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 by absorbing the heat through the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (an overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5), the FETQ5 is shorted due to heat generation. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When it is plugged in, the power generation circuit 630f adjusts the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold : In this embodiment, it is set to about 50V.), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FETQ5 are electrically connected is maintained, and the source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are turned ON, the currents flowing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 pass through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5, which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, to the power generation circuit 630f. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, blowing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Even if it is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. When the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that are not blown, and the plug of the power cord is connected to AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall. , the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained. Then, a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply destruction circuit 630g. One or both of FUSE1 and FUSE2 will blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord must be replaced with the island equipment of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, the game cannot be started.

[10-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h is composed of a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line), and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the positive (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of capacitor BC0 is grounded (GND). A main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 151 shown in FIG. VBB and payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. there is

That is, the negative (-) terminal of capacitor BC0 is grounded (GND). A main VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and payout control It is a circuit divided into two systems: a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to a payout control built-in RAM of a payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 .

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) is blocked by the Schottky barrier diode D20. , to charge the capacitor BC0, and also to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, it is supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned off at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), power failure or momentary power failure occurs. As a result, DC +5V from the power supply line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply line) is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 begins to discharge. This discharge is provided to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. It is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and is supplied as payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. It holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

In other words, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including the case where the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned off at the same time by turning off the breaker of the game hall), or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the DC +5V from the power supply line (that is, the +5V power supply line) supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the capacitor BC0, the capacitor BC0 discharges to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held, and stored as payout VBB in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Various types of information received are retained.

[10-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. Electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include FETs Q1, Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, FETs Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 of the power factor correction circuit 630d, as described above. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length: 5 mm). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic parts that cannot be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic part that is destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, only electrons that destroy In order to make it easier to identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the others.

Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that cannot be destroyed, have white outlines as shown in FIG. 157(a). A line and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 . The thick white line is the side fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 155, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 must be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1, HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk-printed white outline line on which HS2 is arranged and the thick white line portions of the silk-printed TSLK1 to 8 are connected to each other.

On the other hand, for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. Ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are silk-printed, and silk-printed TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 . That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 Among TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white oblique line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is observed compared to other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. As a result, it is possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that will be destroyed among the different types of electronic components having the same shape.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white oblique lines ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for , the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so it is easy to communicate with the staff of the service center and the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall. Become.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the clerk of the game hall, etc., on the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall, etc., follows the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. FIG. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 of interest can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

As described above, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a type of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V, which is higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. , the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed as described above to maintain the short mode, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed. melts. In other words, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and then one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed as evidence that the plug of the power cord was accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. there is Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 is printed so that the electronic component to be destroyed can be easily identified. We adopt silk printing that has characteristics different from others.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158(a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that will not be destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is colored white. A silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as a silk print.

On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 158(b). , silk prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as a silk print including a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline. That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). The region ad2 is visible, and the solid white region ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the region inside the white outline, is transparent. Visual observation is ensured through a transparent glass tube.

In this way, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, the white color that is represented as a characteristic pattern By visually checking the area ad2 painted solidly, it is possible to identify which electronic component among the electronic components of the same type and having the same shape is the electronic component that should be observed more closely than other electronic components. It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape shows a trace that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100 V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. can be specified.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone, the solid white area represented by the characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 having ad2, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. It becomes easier to communicate with a staff member such as a store clerk.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by telephone, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall is the person in charge of the service center. , the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

[10-3. Fuse confirmation]
Next, confirmation of melting of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 of the same type and having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). Soot adheres to the inside of the Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will be fused. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described silk prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk prints for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse wires can be easily checked. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2 and FSLK3 correspond to the transparent glass tube except for the two ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken.

As a result, the plug of the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 can be connected to AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, by a staff member such as a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power supply, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are traced. Of these, the fuse wires housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes are broken, and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tubes. Even if the plug is inserted into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, so it must be an initial failure."

On the other hand, as the silk printing for the fuse FUSE3, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as described above. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the power supply board 630 . Further, in the present embodiment, a region of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resist corresponding to it (that is, the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resist corresponding to it are not laid out at all). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of , no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is done by viewing through the transparent glass tube the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the corresponding area of solid green resist to determine the fuse wire encased in the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3. By improving the visibility of the state of , it is possible to check whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

In addition, in the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is not transparent even when all the wiring patterns are laid out in the same way as when no wiring pattern is laid out. Visibility of the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 is improved by making the glass tube and the corresponding solid green resist area visible through the transparent glass tube. Therefore, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC 24VA and AC 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 functions not only as means for relaying various signals, but also as means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). 158(a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is printed on its mounting surface. A region of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the region of the solid green resist that corresponds to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) by viewing through the transparent glass tube the area of solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse wire, it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be configured to be provided on one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided on both. can also

In addition, in the area of the solidly coated green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, the wiring pattern is not laid out at all. The condition of the fuse wire housed in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is indicated by viewing the clear glass tube of the fuse FUSE and the corresponding solid green resist area through the transparent glass tube. Visibility is improved, and it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

[10-4. Capacity of capacitor]
Next, the capacitance of capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure, the capacitor BC0 is connected to the power line supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the +5V power supply). line) supplies DC +5V to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20, so that the capacitor BC0 can be charged. (including the case where the power supply to the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning OFF the power source), and when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the power supplied from the +5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f Discharge is initiated in response to the supply of DC +5V from the line (that is, the +5V power supply line) to capacitor BC0.

Due to the discharge of this capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is cut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), power failure, In the state where an instantaneous power failure occurs, the backup power supply as the main VBB is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310, so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. At the same time, a backup power supply as a payout VBB is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, thereby holding various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It's like

When the business of the game hall is finished, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall, thereby simultaneously shutting off the power supply of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when the next business is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is left in the ON state), the staff such as the clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall. is turned on, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are all turned on. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the game hall to the start of the next business. Various information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, at the start of business, when a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, the RAM clear switch is turned on. Regardless of whether it is operated or not, the main control MPU provided on the main control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clearing notification to the effect that the game has been cleared, the RAM clearing notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines resounds in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided in the payout control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM in the power-on processing, and completely restores the contents of the payout control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about 3 days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM can be stored by supplying it, and it is supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 and built-in payout control A memory having a capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. The selection of this capacity is such that the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 is equal to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633. It is also taken into account that the power consumption is about 10 times greater than the power consumption of the paid VBB supplied to . The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC +5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. is large compared to the power consumption of

[10-5. Countermeasures against discontinued electronic components]
Next, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, payout control board, etc., lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, and the back side is mounted. It is necessary to solder on the side, which is the soldering side. However, although lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and hybrid game machines, other general electronics manufacturers do not use surface-mounted components that can be miniaturized ( So-called SMD type) is used. As a result, lead-type electronic components may be discontinued due to a decrease in production numbers. If a lead-type electronic component procured from one electronic component manufacturer were discontinued and a replacement was sought, there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also discontinue production. Therefore, it becomes difficult to mount lead-type electronic components on a substrate that will eventually be treated as a main substrate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate treated as the main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at positions corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb, which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed at the positions where one ends of leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at positions where the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged. , D20db and the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed.

The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and cathode side D20cb, which are the terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. , the anode side D20ca, the cathode side D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface of the substrate D20a are wrapped with epoxy resin and molded to form an electronic component main body D20h covering one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component main body D20h. As shown in FIG. 159(b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front and/or rear surface of the electronic component main body D20h. Also, although not shown, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front and/or rear surface of the electronic component main body D20h.

In this way, SMD type electronic components can be configured as lead type electronic components. SMD type electronic components used by electrical equipment manufacturers can be used.

In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described, but SMD type capacitors, SMD type resistors, SMD type coils, etc. can also be applied. Further, it is also possible to form a lead-type electronic component by arranging a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components in an array.

Next, countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage are taken in the event that the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility of the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC 100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment") will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 shows a configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 160, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (hereinafter referred to as "commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment") are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment and the configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply breakdown circuit 630f is connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When a circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of FETQ5 via resistor R25, FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are overloaded). FET Q5 is destroyed by the current), so that the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FET Q5 are electrically connected is maintained.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, and the circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. there is

In addition, in the configuration for dealing with the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, as well as the diodes D5, They are input to the anode terminal of D6, respectively output from the cathode terminals of diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through the power cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1 , and FUSE2 to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the solid white area ad2 within the outline are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and FSLK3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). A solid white area ad2 is visible, and the solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the inner area of the white outline. ad2 is clearly visible through the transparent glass tube.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Then, the L side (24 VAC 1) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a through the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (24 VAC 2) is directly input to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. be done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the solid white area ad2 within the outline are printed as silk prints, and the silk print FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. ing. That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown), but the area inside the white outline and the periphery of the supporting metal fittings is solidly painted in white. A solid white area ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1, which is the area inside the white outline, is transparent. Visual observation is ensured through the glass tube.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is omitted for AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. Briefly explaining this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 on both power cords (L side (AC 24 V 1), N side ( AC 24V 2)), but a test conducted by the applicant found that omitting one side (the N side (AC 24V 2)) did not cause any problems. As a result, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Cost reduction is realized by directly inputting to .

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the same switch as the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is adopted. Briefly explaining this, with respect to the power switch 630a, it is necessary to reliably connect/disconnect both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected/connected simultaneously.

In addition, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1 in between. The other end of the microgap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the earth connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 sends the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5 when a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") enters the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall due to a lightning strike. Surge voltage is limited by flowing current to prevent surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. The surge voltage is limited by passing a surge current through the frame ground FG2 so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. Also, the micro-gap type arrester AL1 may be accidentally grounded by an operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. and the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, electromagnetic noise will be transferred from the island facility of the game hall to the N side of 24V AC (AC24V2 ) and remove it, the noise immunity can be improved.

Further, in the configuration for countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and the choke coil In addition to L1, it is composed of a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power supply breakdown circuit 630g', and the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power supply switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a power supply breakdown circuit. 630g', and is input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power breakdown circuit 630g' has a faster response speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, surge absorber SA1 A silicon surge absorber can be mentioned.), one end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC 24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end is connected to the N side of AC 24V via the power switch 630a ( AC 24V 2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, etc.) is used. A silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage that rises more rapidly than a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber is characterized by very fast response to surges, excellent control voltage characteristics, and very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type should be used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, should be selected.

Further, in the configuration for dealing with the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1 and also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of choke coil L2 is electrically connected to power factor improvement circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay driving circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between terminals (that is, between contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. , the capacitor has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity decreases, and is selected so that it will not be destroyed even if AC 100 V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is applied.

The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, to the power generation circuit 630f, and to the relay driving circuit 630i. When receiving the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e, the relay driving circuit 630 generates an operating voltage (+24 V) capable of operating the coil of the relay RL1 and supplies it to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are depleted (relay drive circuit (Insufficient +24V power supply from the 630i), the coil of the relay RL1 is not operating, so the relay RL1 cannot be turned ON (that is, the relay RL1 remains OFF). , the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conducting state, and are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1. be. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows only toward the thermistor TH1. Although the current flowing through the thermistor TH1 gradually increases the temperature of the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Apply a strong current to the load.

On the other hand, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on and the power from the relay drive circuit 630i (+24V power supply from the relay drive circuit 630i) switches from the state in which the coil of the relay RL1 does not operate to the state in which it operates, the relay RL1 is turned on, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into a conductive state, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is branched between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1, and is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. be done. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is applied between the terminals 2 (COM) and 3 of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), the current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 rises accordingly, thereby connecting the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The current flowing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) will increase.

As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. Flowing through TH1, the current to the load following the thermistor TH1 increases as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and the power supply of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. If it is accidentally plugged into an outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) before the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, causing a surge current to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Absorber SA1 can be destroyed to set short mode.

In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 through the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode state in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is closed. It will be fused. In addition, since the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Can prevent being destroyed in open mode. As a result, only the power board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 other than the power board 630 is destroyed. can be reliably prevented.

In the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage with common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. , the FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit and the CGND terminal for causing large currents to flow through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are not required, so that the circuit configuration is not complicated.

In addition, the plug of the power cord was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. In the state where the surge absorber SA1 that is inserted and constitutes the power supply breaking circuit 630g' is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with one that is not blown, and the plug of the power cord is connected to the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall. , the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced through the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1, and the fuse FUSE1 is melted again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g' has not been destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machines of the island facility of the game hall, the game cannot be started.

In the above-described embodiment, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power supply breaker circuit 630g are provided on a single power supply substrate 630. , various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it is also possible to provide them separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power supply breaking circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. When input to the connector B, it is input to the rectifier circuit 630c, is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will happen. Various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. be.

Also, the power supply substrate 630 shown in FIG. 160 can be divided into two substrates, a first power supply substrate 630A and a second power supply substrate 630B. In this case, the circuits of the first power supply board 630A include the power line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B, which is mainly composed of the connector A, includes the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, the relay RL1, the It mainly consists of thermistor TH1, choke coil L2, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the driving power lines (for example, the +35V power line from the power board 630 or the +12V power line from the power board 630) to the various driving motors provided in the various effect units of the game board 5 are A fuse (a chip fuse may be used) in a substrate (for example, the panel drive substrate 1720 shown in FIG. 153(a) and the relay substrate 3151a shown in FIG. 153(b)) to which the wiring from the drive motor is directly connected. ) or a polyswitch as a resettable fuse, or a line supplied as a driving power supply line on the power supply board 630 (for example, a +35V power supply line from the power supply board 630, or a +12V power supply line) may be provided with a polyswitch as a fuse (which may be a chip fuse) or a resettable fuse.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with power supply means capable of generating various power sources necessary for the gaming device based on external power supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). Publication (Fig. 2) By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone about the specific parts of the power supply means, the person in charge of the service center should follow the instructions. Another problem is that it is difficult to identify a particular component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with power supply means for generating various power sources based on the power source from the game island facility and supplying them to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038] )). The game island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC100V) into a stepped-down AC power supply for game machines (AC24V). However, if the power cord for supplying power from the island facility to the game machine is inserted into the power outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the power outlet of the AC power supply for the game machine, the commercial AC power supply is stronger than the AC power supply for the game machine. Since it has a high voltage, there is a risk that an abnormal power supply will be output from the power supply means and various boards inside the game machine will be destroyed.

[11. Main control board circuit, payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 162. FIG. FIG. 161 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. It is a diagram. First, the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[11-1. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the main VBB.

The DC +5 V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h as shown in FIG. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with DC +5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply substrate 630, its 2nd terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND), DC +5V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the third terminal. The DC +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) are removed and smoothed.

The DC +5V output from the 3rd terminal is the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). and are electrically connected to each other, so that the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed DC +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure occurs. It is to be applied as +5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection signal from the first entrance sensor 2406 A detection signal, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the like are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, respectively. A detection signal from the starting opening sensor 3002 and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are input directly to the main control input circuit 1310b without going through the panel relay board 1710, respectively.

A detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, A detection signal from the first inlet sensor 2406 and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the first starting port sensor 3002 is composed of two sensors (double sensor), namely, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor secondary side 3002b. there is The detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected (that is, directly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310, whereas the first starter sensor main side 3002a A detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the primary side of the first starting port sensor 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the secondary side of the first starting port sensor 3002b. is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PB is composed of 8 bits like the input port PA. A power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB (not shown). An input terminal that is input to a predetermined input terminal and becomes an empty terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[11-2. Power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with DC +5 V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as VBB.

The DC +5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h as shown in FIG. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 has its first terminal applied with DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f') of the power supply board 630, and its second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND), DC +5V from which the noise component has been removed is output from the third terminal. The DC +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) are removed and smoothed.

DC +5V output from the third terminal is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). and are electrically connected to each other, so that the ripples are further removed and smoothed. This smoothed direct current +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is released after the instantaneous power failure. It is to be applied as +5V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC +5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC +5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. , the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (in this embodiment, the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is the same as the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. As for the form, a large one is selected compared to the capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). As a result, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 Each charged charge is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). , and is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout detection sensor 591 A detection signal and a RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball end detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are These are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA consists of 8 bits, and input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. These empty input terminals PA6 and PA7 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as empty terminals.

The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Input to predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively, and the input terminals that become free terminals are grounded ( GND).

[11-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
The board treated as the main board includes the power supply board 630, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like. If a fraudulent act of illegally altering the wiring to the board treated as the main board is performed, the operation of the board treated as the main board becomes uneasy, and a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the illegal game balls are illegally used. When the wiring to each of these substrates is tampered with, it is necessary to detect the tampered wiring at an early stage because there is a risk of being acquired by an actor.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163(a), the wiring to the power supply board 630 is performed using the connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes the name of the manufacturer and the part number (the number listed in the catalog). )) are repeatedly printed with the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the 1st pin to the 22nd pin. And part number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the illegal identifier SLAB is printed on the cover of the wiring SCBL2. Manufacturer name: XXX and part number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 is at least the covering portion of the wiring so that the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. has a length in which the illegality identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

Note that the cover of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and a color (for example, black) that is easily recognizable against the color of the cover is used as the fraudulent identifier SLAB, and the manufacturer name: XXX and product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is printed repeatedly, and the covering portions of the wires SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be of a color other than white (single color (for example, red or gray), or may be of multiple colors. color (e.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.)), or a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the coating (e.g., a single color or multiple colors) ), the manufacturer name: XXX and product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

As for the wiring to the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 163(b), it is connected to the connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has the name of the manufacturer and the part number (the number listed in the catalog)). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the coating of each wiring as the fraudulent identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is printed repeatedly, and the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are printed on the second pin as the illegal identifier MLAB on the cover of the wiring MCBL2. number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 should be such that the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the unauthorized identifier MLAB on the covering of the wiring. has a length in which the illegality identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

Note that the cover of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and a color (for example, black) that is easily recognizable against the color of the cover is used as the fraud identifier MLAB, the manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the part number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wiring MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be of a color different from white (single color (eg, red or gray)). Or a plurality of colors (e.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the coating (e.g., a single color or a plurality of colors) ), the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier MLAB.

As for the wiring to the dispensing control board 633, as shown in FIG. 163(b), it is connected to the connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number listed in the catalog)). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the coating of each wiring as the fraudulent identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the 1st pin to the 30th pin. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is printed repeatedly, and on the second pin, the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are printed on the cover of the wiring HCBL2 as an illegal identifier HLAB. number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the dispensing control board 633 is at least such that the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the unauthorized identifier HLAB on the covering of the wiring. has a length in which the illegality identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

Note that the cover of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and a color (for example, black) that is easily recognizable against the color of the cover is used as the fraud identifier HLAB, the manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be of a color different from white (single color (for example, red or gray), Or a plurality of colors (e.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the coating (e.g., a single color or a plurality of colors) ), the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB.

In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the connector and the wiring connected to the connector are repeatedly printed with the manufacturer's name and product number (the number listed in the catalog). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early discovery of altered wiring. As the wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate, it is preferable to use wiring that is difficult to obtain even if it is published in a catalog.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting hole sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting hole sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002 provided on the game board 5 Wiring and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are connected to the main control board via connectors (not shown). 1310 directly electrically connected. On the other hand, the first starting hole sensor subordinate side 3002b constituting the first starting hole sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2002 provided on the game board 5 is provided on the game board 5. A gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003, a large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5, and a general winning opening provided on the game board 5. General winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting game ball B received in hole 2001, first receiving hole sensor 2406 for detecting game ball B received in first receiving hole 2006 provided in game board 5, game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are electrically connected and aggregated on the panel relay board 1710 via respective connectors. are also electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector.

Therefore, two wires from the main side 3002a of the first sensor 3002 and two wires from the second sensor 2402, which constitute the first sensor 3002, are connected to the main control board 1310 by mistake. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the color of the coating of the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink. The manufacturer's name and product number (the number listed in the catalog) are printed repeatedly. As for the color of the coating of the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black. ) are printed repeatedly on each. As a result, at the manufacturer, line workers can distinguish between the two wires from the first starting sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting sensor 2402. In addition, in the game hall, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall identifies the two wires from the first start sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a connector having a pitch of 2.5 mm electrically connects two wires from the main side 3002a of the first starting sensor 3002 constituting the first starting sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. is selected, and a connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310 . As a result, the two wirings from the main side 3002a of the first starting sensor 3002 and the two wirings from the second sensor 2402, which constitute the first sensor 3002, correspond to each other. Since it can be a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturing process, the line operator can 3002a and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as wrong insertion) can be reliably prevented. , When confirming the presence or absence of illegality, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall, the main side 3002a of the first starter sensor 3002 constituting the first starter sensor 3002 It is possible to reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring between the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 .

In the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 2001. For these general winning holes 2001, a plurality of general winning hole sensors are individually or divided into a plurality of groups. can also be configured to use In this case, connectors having the same shape are selected for electrically connecting the two wires from the general winning hole sensor to the panel relay board 1710 . Although there are a plurality of general winning holes 2001, no matter which of the general winning holes 2001 a game ball enters, only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls as the ball enters. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or changes in the presentation. In addition, even when adopting a configuration in which two wires from the general winning hole sensor are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710, A connector having the same shape is selected for electrically connecting the two wirings to the main control board 1310 . As described above, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls regardless of which of the general winning openings 2001 a game ball enters. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or changes in the presentation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start opening sensor 2402, and is sent to the lower board holder 1200. However, as with the first starting sensor 3002, the second starting sensor main side 2402a and the second starting sensor secondary side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may consist of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first starting point sensor 3002, the second starting point sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensors), a second starting point sensor main side 2402a and a second starting point sensor subordinate side 2402b. By adopting, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 can be reliably detected. Illegal balls (game balls, metal balls with approximately the same diameter, or synthetic resin balls with approximately the same diameter ) is reliably detected and reported in the fraudulent act detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Contribute to what can be discovered.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side By passing through 2402b, the substrate is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the secondary side of the second starting port sensor 2402b. In addition, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected (that is, directly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310, whereas the second starting A detection signal from the mouth sensor secondary side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second starter sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starter sensor slave side 2402b. is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b, as described above. A first start sensor subordinate side 3002b that constitutes one start sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A large winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a first receiving hole provided on the game board 5 Two sensors from various sensors, such as a first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received at the entrance 2006 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 The wires are electrically connected and aggregated via respective connectors, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector.

Further, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a pitch of 2.5 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the secondary side of the first starting sensor 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the secondary side of the second sensor is selected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. FIG. As a result, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b can be electrically connected to the corresponding ones. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator at the manufacturer has two wires from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and two wires from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion) of two wires from 2402b and 2402b. When confirming, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and restored, two wirings from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and two wirings from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b are used. , erroneous wiring (wiring mistake such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001, but these general winning openings 2001 may be separately divided and a general winning opening sensor may be used. can. In this case, different shapes may be selected for the connectors that electrically connect the respective two wires from the general winning hole sensor to the panel relay board 1710 . For example, in order to contribute to the progress of the game or change in performance as the ball enters each general prize winning opening 2001, the shapes of the connectors of the two wires from each general winning prize opening sensor 3001 are made different from each other. may In this way, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each general winning hole sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to the corresponding one. In the manufacturing process, line workers can reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) of erroneous wiring of the two wires from each general winning slot sensor 3001, and in the game hall. When confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when temporarily disconnecting the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall will check the error of the two wires from each general prize winning opening sensor 3001. It is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake of wiring (wiring mistake of wrong insertion). In addition, when adopting a configuration in which two wires from each of the general prize winning opening sensors 3001 are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710, the shape of the connector are selected differently. As described above, this can be a physical structure in which each of the two wires from each general winning gate sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to its corresponding one. At the manufacturer, line workers can reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring of two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors 3001 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, when confirming the presence or absence of illegality, when temporarily disconnecting the wiring for maintenance and restoring it, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall checks the two wires from each general winning opening sensor 3001. It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring of the wiring (wiring mistake such as incorrect insertion).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401, but as with the first start opening sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b are detected. may be composed of two sensors (double sensor) arranged in a state of being separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, like the first starting point sensor 3002, the gate part 2003 can A game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. Illegal balls (game balls, metal balls with approximately the same diameter, or synthetic resin balls with approximately the same diameter ) is reliably detected and reported in the fraudulent act detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Contribute to what can be discovered.

In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003 first passes through the gate sensor main side 2401a and is detected by the gate sensor main side 2401a. It will be done. Detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor secondary side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). is being used). A detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC (this input port consists of 8 bits) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the detection signal from the gate sensor secondary side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. FIG. For this reason, a connector having a pitch of 2.5 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a to the panel relay board 1710, and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b are selected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring of the panel to the panel relay board 1710 . As a result, the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b can be electrically connected to each other as much as possible. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator at the manufacturer may mistakenly connect two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b. (wiring mistake such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, it is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring of two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and two wires from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b. can do.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the connector that electrically connects the two wires from the main side 3002a of the first starting sensor 3002 constituting the first starting sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 has a pitch of 2.5 mm. is selected, and a connector with a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second start sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310, but the first start Two wires from the main side of the first starter sensor 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starter sensor 2402 are combined to form one connector. , and one connector composed of these four wires may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . By doing so, a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the main side 3002a of the first starter sensor 3002 constituting the first starter sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310 and two wires from the second sensor 2402 A connector that electrically connects this wiring to the main control board 1310 can be physically structured as one connector composed of four wirings instead of being separate entities. , in the manufacturing process, the line worker must connect two wires from the main side 3002a of the first sensor 3002 and two wires from the second sensor 2402. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work errors such as incorrect wiring (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion), in the game hall, staff such as store clerks at the game hall can confirm the presence or absence of fraud. When temporarily removed and put back, two wires from the main side 3002a of the first starter sensor 3002 constituting the first starter sensor 3002, two wires from the second sensor 2402, It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion).

Furthermore, by adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start opening sensor 2402, and is sent to the lower substrate holder 1200. However, as with the first starting sensor 3002, the second starting sensor main side 2402a and the second starting sensor secondary side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may consist of two sensors (double sensor). In this way, like the first starting point sensor 3002, the second starting point sensor 2402 is composed of two sensors (double sensors), a second starting point sensor main side 2402a and a second starting point sensor subordinate side 2402b. By adopting, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 can be reliably detected. Illegal balls (game balls, metal balls with approximately the same diameter, or synthetic resin balls with approximately the same diameter ) is reliably detected and reported in the fraudulent act detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Contribute to what can be discovered.

In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subordinate side By passing through 2402b, it will be discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below after being detected by the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b. In addition, two wires from the first starting sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting sensor main side 2402a constituting the second starting sensor 2402 , are configured as one connector, and one connector configured by these four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . The detection signal from the second starter sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected (that is, directly electrically connected) to the main control board 1310, whereas the second starter sensor main side 2402a A detection signal from the slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, electrically connected indirectly). The detection signal from the second starter sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starter sensor subordinate side 2402b. is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b, as described above. A first start sensor subordinate side 3002b that constitutes one start sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5 A large winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, and a first receiving hole provided on the game board 5 Two sensors from various sensors, such as a first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received at the entrance 2006 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided on the game board 5 The wires are electrically connected and aggregated via respective connectors, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector.

Furthermore, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b are transmitted via the same panel relay board 1710 to the main control board 1310. Therefore, four wirings including two wirings from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and two wirings from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b are required. It may be configured as one connector, and configured such that one connector configured by these four wirings is electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710 . In this way, the second starting sensor 2402 and the connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting sensor subordinate side 3002b constituting the first starting sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 are formed. A connector that electrically connects the two wires from the secondary side of the second starting port sensor 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 is not considered as a separate entity, but is physically configured as one connector composed of four wires. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the line operator at the manufacturer has two wirings from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and two wirings from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b. It is possible to reliably prevent work errors such as incorrect wiring of books (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion). Incorrect wiring of two wires from the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b and two wirings from the second starting port sensor subordinate side 2402b when the wiring is temporarily removed and restored for maintenance. It is possible to reliably prevent such work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 2001, but these general winning holes 2001 may be separately divided and a general winning hole sensor may be used. can. In this case, one connector (single connector) can be configured as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from each of the general winning opening sensors to the panel relay board 1710 . For example, in order to contribute to the progress of the game or change in performance as the ball enters each general prize-winning opening 2001, the two wirings from each general prize-winning opening sensor 3001 are integrated into one wiring. It may be configured as one connector (single connector), and configured such that one connector configured by the integrated wiring is electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710 . By doing so, it is possible to make a physical structure in which the two wires from each of the general prize-winning opening sensors 3001 are not separate entities, but are integrated into one connector as one connector. At the manufacturer, line workers can reliably prevent work errors (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring of two wires from each of the general prize winning opening sensors 3001 in the manufacturing process. In addition, in the game hall, when confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall, It is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as miswiring of the main wiring (wiring mistakes such as wrong insertion). It should be noted that the integrated wiring is configured as one connector (single connector). A configuration of electrically connecting to 1310 can also be adopted. Even with this configuration, as described above, the two wires from each of the general prize winning opening sensors 3001 are not separated, but are physically integrated into one connector. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, line workers at the manufacturer may make a work mistake such as incorrect wiring of each of the two wires from each general prize winning opening sensor 3001 (wiring mistake such as incorrect insertion). ) can be reliably prevented. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring mistake such as incorrect insertion) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wires from the winning hole sensor 3001 .

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various ball entrances in advantageous areas of the game board, and each ball entrance provided with each sensor (detection means) for detecting the passage of a game ball ( For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4))). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the ball entrance with similar usage is mistakenly connected electrically, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the detection signal of the ball entrance is erroneously received. It will be done, and it will affect the progress of the game. However, there is a problem that, depending on the circumstances, the incorrect connection may not be immediately noticed, especially since the uses are similar.

[12. Each decorative substrate provided on the door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. FIG. 164 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided on the door frame, FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. FIG. 167 is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram of a method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the view. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 and the frame door sub-relay board will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, a decorative board equipped with the LED constant current drive circuit, and an LED constant current drive circuit. A method of arranging the drive circuit will be described.

First, as described above, the door frame 3 includes the upper left plate decorative body 271, the upper right plate decorative body 276, the upper central plate decorative body 312a, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the side The side window interior decoration part 410b of the window interior decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are respectively arranged, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, the dish upper right decoration body 276, and the dish A plate lower left decoration 281, a plate lower right decoration 286, and a plate center lower decoration 312b are arranged below the central upper decoration 312a.

Behind the upper left plate decoration 271, a plate upper left decoration substrate 273 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper left plate decoration 271 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the upper right plate decoration 276, a plate upper right decoration substrate 278 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the upper right plate decoration 276 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). Behind the upper plate center decoration 312a, a plate center upper decoration substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semi-arc shape along the plate center upper decoration 312a is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are used for light emission decoration.

Behind the door frame left side decoration 404, a left side upper decoration substrate 402a and a left side lower decoration substrate 402b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame left side decoration 404. A door frame left side decorative board 402 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, left side upper decorative board 402a 5, and 10 on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b). The side window interior decoration parts 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and are formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412 behind it. A window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 12 LEDs) mounted on the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 are decorated with light emission. Behind the door frame right side decoration 419, a right side upper decoration substrate 418a and a right side lower decoration substrate 418b are formed in the shape of elongated strips extending vertically along the door frame right side decoration 419. A door frame right side decorative board 418 is arranged, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, right side upper decorative board 418a 4, and 10 on the right side lower decorative substrate 418b).

Behind the door frame top decoration 453, a door frame top central decoration substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decoration 453 is arranged. A door frame top left decoration substrate 456 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the left side of the top decoration 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453 . A door-frame top-right decorative board 457 formed in an elongated strip shape is arranged, and a plurality of them are mounted on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455, the door-frame top-left decorative board 456, and the door-frame top-right decorative board 457, respectively. Full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 LEDs on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 LEDs on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 LEDs on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) are decorated.

Behind the lower left plate decoration 281, a lower left plate decoration board 283 formed in a strip shape extending left and right along the lower left plate decoration 281 is arranged. It is light-emitting and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). Behind the lower right plate decoration 286 is disposed a lower right plate decoration substrate 288 formed in a strip-like shape extending left and right along the lower right plate decoration 286 . A plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 6 LEDs) are mounted on the LEDs to illuminate and decorate. Behind the lower plate center decoration 312b, a lower plate center decoration substrate 316 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc along the lower plate center decoration 312b is arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are used for light emission decoration.

The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is provided with the effect operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the front side, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape on the rear side. , consists of The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decoration substrate 352a, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the rear decoration substrate 352b. In the present embodiment, luminous decoration is provided by 9).

In this way, each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape. Thus, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distances of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, etc. can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, plate lower left decoration board 283, the door frame side decoration substrates such as the lower right plate decoration substrate 288, the lower center plate decoration substrate 316, the front decoration substrate 352a, and the rear decoration substrate 352b, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. Electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, and light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, which are serially output from the there is Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side 1st serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relay of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. It is input to the board 214 and is also input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

The first serial line on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are connected to the plate lower left decorative board 283, the plate lower right decorative board 288, , and input to the operating portion relay board 392 of the effect operating unit 300 shown in FIG.

The door frame side first serial system (luminescence data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input to the plate upper left decorative board 273, respectively. In other words, the plate lower left decorative board 283 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the plate upper left decorative board 273, thereby The decorative substrate 283 and the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a string. A door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are input to the plate lower left decoration board 283 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper left decorative board 273 of the dish. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 electrically connected to the lower left plate decoration substrate 283 (that is, the last stage of the lower left plate decoration substrate 283) is provided with the lower left plate decoration substrate 283. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. .

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the plate lower right decorative board 288 are input to the plate upper right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a string. The plate lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridging board receives the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are shown for outputting to the plate upper right decorative board 278 respectively. There is a connector for output that does not work. On the other hand, the upper right plate decoration substrate 278 electrically connected to the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 (that is, the final stage after the lower right plate decoration substrate 288) has a lower right plate decoration substrate. Only an input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors (not shown) of 288. ing.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the operation section relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 are connected to the plate center upper decorative board 314, the plate It is input to the center lower decoration board 316 and the front decoration board 352a of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, respectively.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decoration board 352a are respectively input to the rear decoration board 352b. That is, the front decoration board 352a serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the rear decoration board 352b. and the post-decorative substrate 352b are electrically connected in a row. On the front decoration board 352a serving as a bridging board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the operation part relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively. An input connector (not shown) for input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. is provided with an output connector (not shown). On the other hand, the rear decoration board 352b electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the front decoration board 352a) has an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a. Only input connectors (not shown) are provided for inputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) respectively output from.

Here, for example, the plate lower left decoration board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input will be briefly described. The plate lower left decorative board 283 has an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat dissipation circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a includes a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x that can pass a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current to pass through sdLED1 to sdLED6. It is mainly composed of a circuit 283y and a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x controls the constant current to flow through sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 283c takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x can be dispersed.

Further, for example, the plate upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the plate lower left decorative board 283 are input will be briefly described. , the upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat dissipation circuit 273c, and six full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink type constant current drive circuit 273x capable of supplying a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6. , and a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to suLED1 to suLED6. The constant-current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door-frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate lower left decorative board 283. FIG. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed by the heat dispersion circuit 273c.

[12-1-2. Door frame side 2nd serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame secondary relay board 105 are connected to the left side lower decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. Along with being input to the substrate 402b, the side window inner decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. are entered in each.

DC +12 V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decoration board 402b of the door frame left side decoration board 402 are input to the left side upper decoration board 402a of the door frame left side decoration board 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected to the door frame top right decoration board. 457 is entered.

The door frame side second serial system (luminescence data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top right decorative board 457 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. The door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top central decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a string. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC +12 V, and ground. (GND) are input to each input connector (not shown), and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) is provided for each output to the decoration board 455 . In addition, the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 is shown on the door-frame top-center decorative board 455 that is electrically connected to the door-frame top-right decorative board 457 (that is, is located after the door-frame top-right decorative board 457). An input connector (not shown) is provided for inputting the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. , door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decoration board 455 are input to the door frame top left decoration board 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are electrically connected in a row. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative board 456 electrically connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455 (that is, the rear stage of the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the final stage) has a door. Inputs (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top central decorative board 455, DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are respectively inputted. There is only a connector for

Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 are input. Briefly describing the left side lower decoration board 402b, the left side lower decoration board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat dissipation circuit 402bc, and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left plate decorative substrate 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left plate decorative substrate 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay capable of setting the maximum current to be supplied to hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. control.

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. A sink type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of supplying a constant current to hdLED10 and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, hdLED9, hdLED10, and left and a maximum current setting circuit 402bby capable of setting the maximum current to be applied to the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame secondary relay board 105. A constant current is controlled to flow through hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 on the upper left decorative substrate 402a.

Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through hdLED9, hdLED10 and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax, thereby dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. Also, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat dispersion circuit 402bc and the heat dispersion circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a. ing.

In this way, part of the heat generated by the constant-current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed only by the heat-dissipating circuit 402bc of the board (left-side lower decoration board 402b) on which the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is transferred to the subsequent substrate in addition to the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. The heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a can disperse the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx.

The constant-current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current through the board (left-side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted and to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board. It is Therefore, the work of electrically connecting the left side lower decorative board 402b and the left side upper decorative board 402a is always required. The worker who performs this work must have his finger on the connector of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decoration board 402a, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decoration board 402a. Since the distributed circuit 402ac is touched, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decoration substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to

As described above, the left-side upper decorative board 402a receives direct current +12 V from the left-side lower decorative board 402b and the ground (GND). A line through which an electric current flows is input. The left-side upper decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, as described above. As described above, the heat dissipating circuit 402ac has the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 402bbx, as well as the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[12-1-3. Emission data]
The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described here. It consists of key information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

[12-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, so the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the plate lower left decorative board 283 will be described here. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of passing a constant current through sdLED1 to sdLED6, and the maximum current to be passed through sdLED1 through sdLED6 is set. and a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[12-2-1. constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and each channel can output a current. In this embodiment, an output channel LR , LG and LB are controlled individually, thereby using three output channels. In other words, in this embodiment, one constant-current drive circuit can control the light emission mode by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs. can be done.

The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current drive section 283xi. mainly composed of

[12-2-1a. linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit that can generate and supply an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, +5V DC) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x by inputting DC +12V from the +12V power supply line. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset section 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting section 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing section 283xg, a PWM section 283xh, and a constant current driving section. 283xi, and this internal power supply Verg supplies a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. is able to work.

The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the +5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. there is This is because if the +5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the +5V power supply line is used by routing electric wiring, so the length of the +5V power supply line that supplies DC +5V becomes longer, resulting in noise. easier to invade. Then, if external noise is transmitted to the +5V power supply line and DC +5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not need the +5V power supply line from the power supply board 630, so that the constant current drive circuit 283x can be connected from the +12V power supply line, which has extremely high noise resistance compared to the +5V power supply line. A configuration is adopted in which the linear power supply 283xa independently generates DC +5 V as the internal power supply Vreg.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the internal power supply Vreg is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to other boards and is used only within the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg. Therefore, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. As a result, the internal power supply Vreg is stabilized, which contributes to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, electric wiring for input and electric wiring for external transmission to the +5V power supply line become unnecessary, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs it to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on-reset circuit that can be initiated. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset section 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting section 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing section 283xg, the PWM section 283xh, and the constant current driving section 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, address setting section 283xe, oscillator 283xf, logic processing section 283xg, PWM section 283xh, and constant current driving section 283xi are started to operate.

The constant current drive circuit 283x, for example, does not receive a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. there is For example, if a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a "reset signal transmission line") is used, this reset signal transmission line can be used by routing electrical wiring. As a result, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily penetrates. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x may be reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be extinguished. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by eliminating the need for the reset signal transmission line in the constant current drive circuit 283x, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal is independently generated as the internal reset signal RST in the reset section 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x. did.

Thus, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external board, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another board, and only within the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using this, it is possible to make it difficult for external noise to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x is not reset by external noise, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, It is possible to contribute to prevention of unexpected extinguishing and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, electric wiring for input to the reset signal transmission line and electric wiring for external transmission become unnecessary, which contributes to miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "data line") for transmitting serial data (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. , the waveform of the signal that transmits the serial data is shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line (hereinafter referred to as a "clock line") for transmitting a clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. A clock signal is input from the circuit, and the waveform of the clock signal can be shaped and output to the outside of the logic processing unit 283xg and the constant current drive circuit 283x.

Data lines and clock lines are transmitted over a plurality of substrates and relay substrates, as described above. As a result, both the data line and the clock line are long, making it easier for noise to enter. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise entering the data line and the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is reduced. is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent board.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if both the data line and the clock line are long, the data line and the clock line can be formed to be resistant to noise. This makes it possible to realize signal transmission that is resistant to noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[12-2-1d. Address setting part]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 different addresses as IDs (IDs for individual identification) of the constant current drive circuit 283x using three ID resistors (not shown). It is possible to do so.

Thus, in this embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by the hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data from software.

[12-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processor]
The logic processing unit 283xg receives serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) and clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal (here, clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. Sometimes, gradation information is fetched from this serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM section 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to obtain the gradation information that has been fetched. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not taken in and is set in the PWM section 283xh. control to maintain the current contents of

[12-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 steps from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. In other words, the PWM unit 283xh has PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the respective gradation levels are set, these PWM gradation control sections 1 to 24 control the constant current driving section 283xi so as to flow a current corresponding to the set gradation levels.

[12-2-1g. constant current driver]
The constant current driver 283xi supplies one constant current driver (not shown) for one output channel so as to achieve the gradation set in the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 provided in the PWM unit 283xh. A current driver supplies a constant current to the LED elements forming the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi has constant current drivers 1 to 24 corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24 (that is, 24 constant current drivers).

The constant current drivers 1 to 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 9 to 16 has one end of a resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting green (G) light, which constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LG1 to LG8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). Each of the constant current drivers 17 to 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting blue (B) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. They are electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND).

The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element, which constitute the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a +12V power supply line and receives DC +12V.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 1 to constant current drivers 8), respectively, so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 1 to 8, respectively. It's becoming The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 9 to constant current drivers 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 9 to 16, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) through the corresponding heat dissipation resistors. 17 to constant current drivers 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current drivers 17 to 24, respectively. ing.

The constant-current drivers 1 to 8 draw a constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED, which are individually set, so that the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LED are drawn. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 9 to 16 each absorb a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, thereby causing the green (G) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs. can emit light. The constant-current drivers 17 to 24 absorb the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements that form the individually set full-color LEDs, respectively, so that the blue (B) LED elements that form the full-color LEDs are drawn. can emit light.

In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light from 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. , it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes a resistor Rr for setting the maximum current to flow through the LED elements emitting red (R) light that constitute the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. Construct full-color LEDs in the eight output channels up to LG8, and the resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED elements that emit green (G) light, and the full-color LEDs in the eight output channels LB1 to LB8. and a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current to be supplied to the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

One end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded (GND). there is One end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 provided in the constant current driver 283xi as described above, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded (GND). there is

[12-3. Decorative substrate with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate with an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. FIG. Here, a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are configured as the same circuit. Therefore, in FIGS. 165 and 166, for convenience of explanation, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[12-3-1. Decorative substrate with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the body frame 4, as described above. Light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 as described above, and is supplied with DC +12V. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the plate lower left decorative board 283 is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and the ground (GND) of the plate unit 200. It is input through the plate unit relay board 214 . DC +12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a through heat dissipation resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements composing the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the above-described constant current) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via heat dissipation resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6, respectively. It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

Based on the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) on the side of the door frame, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, drives the LED constant current drive circuit 283a from the light emission data SDAT1. Gradation information is taken in, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 283c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame secondary relay board 105 is transmitted via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) to the top left decoration of the dish. DC +12V and ground (GND) are input to the upper left decorative board 273 via the lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273 . As a result, noise that has entered the data line or clock line just before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is prevented from being transmitted to the succeeding board 273, which is the top left decoration board. , the waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x).

The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the They are also input to the anode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements.

The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 1 to constant current driver 6). The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 9 to constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 (the constant current It is electrically connected to the driver 17 to the constant current driver 22). Output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is of the sink type as described above, heat is generated by absorbing the constant current flowing through suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 273c. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

In addition to the plate lower left decorative board 283 and the plate upper left decorative board 273, the plate lower right decorative board 288, the plate upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as the decorative boards having one LED constant current drive circuit. , and door frame top right decorative substrate 457 .

[12-3-2. Decoration board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. ˜hdLED 10, with heat dissipation circuit 402bc.

The door frame secondary relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the body frame 4, as described above. Light emission data SDAT2 and clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 as described above, and is supplied with DC +12V. GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC +12 V, and ground (GND). there is DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and also to the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements that constitute the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. , and blue (B) LED elements, respectively.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one constant-current drive circuit controls the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs to change the light emission mode. can be controlled. Therefore, of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled in light emission mode by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, while the remaining two LEDs are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. For hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board across the board on which it is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). It is designed to control the light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5.

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8. The output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current drivers 1 to 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (constant current driver 9 to constant current driver 16 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dissipation resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. to LB8 (constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above).

Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, for two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are respectively The output channels LR1 and LR2 (constant current driver 1 and constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are electrically connected via the heat dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, and the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are electrically connected to each other. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 10 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements forming full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are connected to the output channel LB1 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dissipation resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. , LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

In addition, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a that follows the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, red ( The cathode terminals of the LED elements of R) are connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a and the heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, respectively. are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively. Output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (constant current driver 11 to the constant current driver 15), and the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are respectively connected to the heat dissipation resistors huRb1b to Electrically connected to output channels LB3 to LB7 (constant current driver 19 to constant current driver 23 described above) of LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via huRb5b and heat dissipation resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in left side lower decoration board 402b. It is Output channels LR8, LG8 and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, Gradation information is taken in, and eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are individually controlled to perform dimming lighting so as to obtain the taken in gradation information. .

The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb receives the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and 10 Of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs, hdLED9 and hdLED10, are individually controlled for dimming and lighting, and the left side that follows the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper decorative substrate 402a are individually controlled for dimming lighting.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of the sink type, and heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through eight of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat dissipation resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 that constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402bc. As a result, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of the sink type as described above, it absorbs the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and Five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the upper left decorative board 402a, which follows the lower side decorative board 402b, generate heat by absorbing a constant current flowing through them. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two of the ten full-color LEDs, hdLED1 to hdLED10, to hdLED9 and hdLED10. The heat dissipation resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat dissipation circuit 402bc are in charge of the heat dissipation resistors, and are mounted on the left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipation resistors huRr1a to hudRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, and left side upper decoration substrate 402a, which constitute heat dissipation circuit 402bc in left side lower decoration substrate 402b. The heat dissipation resistors huRr1b to hudRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipation circuit 402ac in You can do it.

As described above, the heat dissipation circuit 402bc of the left side lower decoration board 402b and the heat dissipation circuit 402ac of the left side upper decoration board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the air, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic parts due to static electricity.

In addition to the left-side lower decorative board 402b, the decorative boards provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits include a plate center upper decorative board 314, a plate center lower decorative board 316, a side window inner decorative portion decorative board 413, and a right side. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455. FIG.

In addition to the left-side upper decoration board 402a, there is a right-side upper decoration board 418a as a decoration board that does not have any LED constant current drive circuit.

[12-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. FIG. In this embodiment, the LED constant-current drive circuits provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are the same circuits as described above. Here, an electronic component in which a constant current drive circuit forming an LED constant current drive circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip will be described. As a type of IC package for the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. ), which is the so-called VQFN. Of the four sides of the constant current drive circuit, one side is the input side and the remaining three sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In addition, in FIG. 168, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip, as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. And there is. Since the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, here, the left side plate formed in the shape of a vertically extending elongated strip having two LED constant current drive circuits is used. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semi-arc shape will be described.

[12-4-1. Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 167(a), the left side lower decoration board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, while the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb , is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. A connector LDUCN for connecting electrical wiring to the upper left decorative board 402a is mounted on the upper edge side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame secondary relay board 105 and electrical wiring is mounted on the lower edge side of the surface 402by.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are coated solidly with a white resist. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 emit light forward (that is, to the front side of the pachinko machine 1). can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, the board control number of the left-side lower decoration board 402b is not formed as white resist characters on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b.

This is because the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged reduce the reflectance of the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

Further, the door frame left side decoration 404 shown in FIG. By moving the head (face) of the player, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and if the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404 Even if it is possible to do so, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. A region indicating the position and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player because it is not printed at all as silk printing, and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visually recognized by the player. prevent it from being done. Therefore, numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration board 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position of the connector LDLCN, which has no relation to the game for the player.

Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. not In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is printed with foil characters (that is, wiring in which the layer (copper plane) in which the wiring pattern is formed is made of copper foil). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the lower left decorative board 402b is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b instead of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. is formed on the layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed with a copper foil wiring pattern and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a character), or the left side lower decorative substrate 402b On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern that is copper foil, and the characters are It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is obtained by making letters with foil-cut letters (that is, letters with a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx or the solid grounding surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by, either one or both of the solid grounding surfaces are formed as blackout characters. may be

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, various dispersion Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk-printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are printed as silk-printing near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is silk-printed with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 168(a)) on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 168(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and near and above this region LSLKa by silk printing. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 168(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 168(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, are printed with yellow chain lines as silk printing. (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 168(a), only the dashed lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 are shown, respectively), and these areas are printed. Part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 above or below LSLK1 to LSLK10 (Fig. 168(a) shows part numbers LED4 and LED5 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5). ) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

On the LED-non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (or black dashed line), and near this area, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED, so the LED non-mounting surface is implemented in

Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting test is individually performed for hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are silk-printed near the plurality of check pins (not shown). It is printed in yellow (or black). A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

In the embodiments, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from full-color LEDs, are LEDs that emit light from full-color LEDs. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the region, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that region. In this case, on the non-LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are to be arranged is printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Part numbers corresponding to parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds the area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

As described above, the left-side lower decorative board 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically. The width dimension from the left edge 402beg1 to the right edge 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged parallel to each other. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, let's draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on that edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns, because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right edge of the four edges of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is the input. 166, the terminals on the input side are connected to the door frame side second serial system (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left edge, upper left edge, and upper right edge are mainly the terminals of output side 1 to the output side. 166, output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2 , clock signal SCLK2) and the like. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left side 402beg1 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is led out from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in a vertically elongated strip shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 composed of the four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 and the four full-color LEDs Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 consisting of hdLED5 to hdLED8, the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the groups 1 and 2 can be routed to reduce its length. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to Group 1 and Group 2 from becoming longer or shorter than either Group 1 or Group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is placed in the vertical central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the full-color LED hdLED6 in FIG. 167(a) is In addition, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged in the vertical central portion (FIG. 167(a)) of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 402bax), and can be arranged above hdLED8, which is a full-color LED formed in group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant-current drive circuit 402bax to hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. , two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, and five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 provided on the upper left-side decorative substrate 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) differ from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx in that one longitudinal side of each of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb is the left side of the left lower decoration substrate 402b. 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2, and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the left side 402beg1 and the right side 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant-current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decoration substrate 402b so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel to each other.

In addition, as described above, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is such that the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are arranged 45 degrees from the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate. The door-frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door-frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door-frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are substantially identical, are arranged in the same manner as the door. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are placed on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit are separated from the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457. are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the . That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decoration substrate. There is a mixture of what is and what is. In this embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 has 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, and another central decorative board (not shown) on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. two LED constant current drive circuits (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, 2nd maximum current setting circuit)) shown by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, the second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)) Two heat dissipating circuits (the first constant current driving circuit is the first heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor), the second constant current driving circuit is the second heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor)) , and the door frame top left decorative board 456, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, has another left decorative board (not shown) mounted with one full-color LED (not shown). One LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in the door frame directly controls light emission via one heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistance) provided in itself (not shown), door frame top right decorative board 457 has one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit , maximum current setting circuit) directly controls light emission via a single heat dissipation circuit (heat dissipation resistor) provided therein (not shown). The other central decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is formed in the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. , and the other right decorative substrate is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right along the right side of the door frame top decoration 453. The other center decoration board, the other left decoration board, and the other right decoration board need to be provided with heat dissipating circuits (heat dissipating resistors) respectively. The heat dissipating circuit (here, the second heat dissipating circuit (heat dissipating resistor)) provided in the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 itself and the heat dissipating circuits of the other central decorative substrates are, as described above, provided on the door frame top central decorative substrate. In addition to the ability to disperse the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has a function that allows Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other left decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. Further, the heat dissipation circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat dissipation circuit of the other right decorative board are, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself (exactly In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit, it also has the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

The edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. HDLED1 to hdLED10 are located near the right edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decoration board 402b when viewed from the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED-mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decoration board 402b. , the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged near the left edge 402beg1 of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of the sink type, and generate heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. Therefore, even in the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant-current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less susceptible to the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the one in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right sides of the decorative board is the decorative board. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the horizontal direction.

[12-4-2. Plate center upper decorative substrate]
As shown in FIG. 167(b), the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, which is the side facing upward of the effect operation unit 300, while the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on an LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, which is the upward side of the effect operation unit 300. As shown in FIG. 167(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration 312a). ), on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314, on the right side along the upper edge 314eg1, a connector HCN for connecting electrical wiring to the operation section relay board 392 is mounted.

An LED mounting surface 314x and an LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated solidly with a white resist. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are emitted forward (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the production operation unit 300). The reflectance of the film can be increased.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate control number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is not formed as a white resist character.

This is because the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314 due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. prevent this from happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

Further, the plate center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. By moving the head (face) of the player seated in the seat, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 has part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and full-color LEDs. A region indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player because it is not printed as silk printing at all, and the position where the full-color LED is arranged. This prevents the player from viewing the area indicating . Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the full-color LEDs It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the area indicating the positions where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

The part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position of the connector HCN are not printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position of the connector HCN, which has no relation to the game for the player.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). Thus, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 at all. not In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the substrate management number of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is printed with foil characters (that is, a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). The foil-cut characters are formed by making characters in a pattern and removing the copper foil around them), and the foil-cut characters are formed by solidly coating the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 with a white resist. covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component. The board management number of the plate center upper decorative board 314 is assigned to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative board 314 instead of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314. is formed in the layer (copper plane) on which the characters are formed with a wiring pattern of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters), or the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, foil-cut characters (that is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, It may also be formed as a punched character formed by punching a copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is obtained by making letters with foil-cut letters (that is, letters with a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of being formed as solid grounding characters formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid grounding surface of the LED non-mounting surface 314y, either one or both surfaces are formed as blackout characters. may be

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in the vicinity of these regions. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as printing.

In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk-printed and yellow (not shown). (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 are printed respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed in yellow (or , black).

On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decorative substrate 314 is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

Furthermore, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, LED elements that emit red (R) light, LED elements that emit green (G) light, and LED elements that emit blue (B) light, which constitute one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are silk-printed near the plurality of check pins (not shown). It is printed in yellow (or black). A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground, in which areas other than land patterns and wiring patterns of electronic components and connectors are grounded (GND). A solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decorative substrate 314 and a solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decorative substrate 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). there is

In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color whose reflectance on the LED mounting surface decreases due to the light emission of the full-color LED are Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, or connectors that do not have white color may be placed in that area. In this case, on the non-LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are to be arranged is printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) (not shown) as silk printing. Part numbers corresponding to parts and connectors are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing.

As described above, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated band plate having a semicircular arc shape, so that the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. When viewed (that is, when the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the plate center upper decoration 312a), the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 extends from the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2. is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. Therefore, if the edges of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged parallel to each other. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is extremely short, let's pull out the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. Even so, it is difficult to draw out all wiring patterns from the lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the edges of the wiring patterns, because there are restrictions on the minimum distance dimension in the pattern width of the wiring patterns and the spacing between the adjacent wiring patterns. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edge sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the top edge 314eg1 and the bottom edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. adopted the configuration.

In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, of the four sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the lower left side of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is the input. By arranging the terminal on the input side near the upper edge 314eg1 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so as to become the side terminal, the input side terminal can be connected to the door frame side first serial system (emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and resistors Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left edge, upper right edge, and lower right edge are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side. 3, and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the above-described output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), etc. are output. The output side 1 terminal has a terminal to which the resistor Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have terminals to which the ground (GND) is input. there is

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the top side 314eg1 of the plate center upper decoration substrate 314. In addition, the remaining two edges can be arranged such that they are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. As shown in FIG. As a result, from each lead pad of the land patterns arranged on the four sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns are subject to the minimum distance dimension limitation. Also, all wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is led out from the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-arc shape.

In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, of the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, group 1 consisting of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 consisting of hLED5 to hLED8, the length of the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the groups 1 and 2 can be reduced. can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern to be routed to the group 1 and the group 2 from being increased or shortened disproportionately to either the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to improve the efficiency of arrangement and routing of the wiring pattern on the work.

167(b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the upper plate center decorative substrate 314 is positioned above the plate center). (actually arranged along the decoration 312a), the constant-current drive circuit 314ax is connected to the semicircular central portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (the full-color LED in FIG. 167(b)). 167 (b ) where the full-color LED hdLED6 is arranged), and to the left of the full-color LED hLED8 which is formed in the group 2 whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. can be done. As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to hLED1 to hLED8, which are eight full-color LEDs, can be secured in the plate center decorative substrate 314, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx , an area for routing wiring patterns to hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured in the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG.

In addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, capacitors (not shown) are soldered to the non-LED-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 in this embodiment. The resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are so-called EIA type 0805 (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length: 2.0 mm). height: 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are smaller than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitors (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, and one longitudinal side of the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb is the upper side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 . The capacitor (not shown) is arranged parallel to 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2, and one longitudinal edge of the capacitor (not shown) is perpendicular to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. are arranged as In other words, the edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land pattern are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and the resistors They are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 so that Rr, Rg, Rb and one longitudinal side of the capacitor (not shown) are not parallel.

Further, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged near the lower edge side 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and in a semicircular shape on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. While the constant-current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged at predetermined intervals along the plate center decoration substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged near the top edge 314eg1 of the plate center decoration substrate 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center decoration substrate 314. A configuration is adopted in which they are arranged on the non-LED-mounting surface 314 y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 . Like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink type as described above, and by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element, Fever. Therefore, even in the central upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated band plate shape having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, It is possible to make the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 less susceptible to the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx.

In addition, by arranging the land pattern edges of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuits The edges of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge and right edge of the decoration substrate (that is, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 of the door frame top decoration 453, the door frame top left decoration Compared with the board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457), the decorative board in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board is better. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the can be made shorter. Since this can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, the large-sized effect operation unit 300 can be provided in the door frame 3, and the effect operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[12-4-3. Metal pads on the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit]
IC packages for the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx on the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the upper plate center decorative board 314 include, as described above, planar IC packages. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decoration board 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

A metal pad FP is exposed at the central portion of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called exposed pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package is soldered to a substrate so that heat dissipation and bonding can be improved.

The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with a square EPad land pattern EP in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the wiring pattern from each lead pad cannot be drawn out in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is of the sink type, and generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be dissipated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly explained. The number and size of the diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large and voids are prevented from occurring. It is possible to obtain a high bonding strength. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can be formed by dividing it into a grid. The bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP must be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

Further, in the case where the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decoration board 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx When the edge of the land pattern is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat radiation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is also arranged on the left side in the same manner. When arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so that they are arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and are inclined by 45 degrees, , and the EPad land pattern EP is also arranged with an inclination of 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged parallel to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left decorative substrate 402b The distance between the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the substrate is shortened, and the distance to the substrate edge is shortened. . On the other hand, the left edge 402beg1 of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left-side lower edge 402beg1 and the right-edge 402beg2 of the left-side lower decoration substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right edge 402beg2 and the edge of the substrate is a portion where the distance between the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate is short, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are non-parallel to the edge of the substrate. Since there is a large margin for heat dissipation on the substrate, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel to each other.

Each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in the shape of an elongated strip as described above, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in a vertically elongated strip-like shape and is provided with two LED constant-current drive circuits. The plate center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape will be described, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will indicate the LED by the light emission of the full-color LED. It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. A detailed explanation has been given of the fact that measures such as a decrease in reflectance have been taken to prevent this from happening. Here, other configurations of the present invention in which countermeasures such as reflectance reduction are taken (hereinafter referred to as "configurations for countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the second to fourth embodiments") will be described with reference to FIGS. A detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the second embodiment, FIG. 170 shows a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the third embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 170 is an enlarged view of the D'' portion of FIG. 170 as seen from the non-mounting surface of the LED, FIG. 172 is a configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is D''' of FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the part seen from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 169 to 173, for those having the same function as the embodiment shown in FIGS. are denoted by the same reference numerals. Also, in FIG. 171, various electronic components are omitted and part of the silk printing is omitted for ease of viewing of the drawing. Various electronic components are omitted from FIG. 173 for ease of viewing.

[Comparison between configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to first embodiment and configuration for countermeasure against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to second embodiment]
In the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. Areas indicating positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions of electronic components such as various distributed resistors are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are printed on silk screens near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are silk-screened. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) are printed as printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. It is

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. , and areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed near these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) are printed as printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. . . . hdLED10 and corresponding part numbers, and regions indicating positions where full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk-printed yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. In the vicinity of the area LSLK1 to LSLK10, hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. each printed.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing. The part number to be used is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

In addition, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in yellow (not shown) by silk-screening near the plurality of check pins. is printed with A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 171, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed in the vicinity of these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171(a)) as a silk print on the left side lower decoration substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 171(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and near and above this region LSLKa by silk printing. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 171(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED, so the LED non-mounting surface is implemented in

In addition, even in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are solidly coated with a white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Corresponding part numbers and regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silkscreen printing. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are printed as silk-printed yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. In the vicinity of the area HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and LED1 to LED10, which are the corresponding part numbers, are printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. It is

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is to be arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk printing, and the connector HCN is placed in the vicinity of this region. The part number to be used is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in yellow (not shown) by silk-screening near the plurality of check pins. is printed with A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are shown as silk-screen printing in the vicinity of these areas. are printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

In the second embodiment, resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a black resin package. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated solidly with white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. is not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has parts corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and areas indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are provided. (yellow solid line) and are printed as silk prints, respectively, and part numbers (yellow letters and yellow ) and the areas (yellow solid lines) indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed by silk printing.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. For this reason, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing, the black-printed silk-screening allows the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. A problem arises in that the reflectance of the mounting surface is lowered, and the light emitted from the full-color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. Although formed in a translucent milky white color, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), which changes the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decoration substrates provided on various decorations provided in the game. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed. , By printing in yellow, which is a bright color, unlike black, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged ) and find the number that identifies the full-color LED (ie, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. By printing with , it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LED.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is silk-printed, and different from black, light color (when printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, do not emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED mounting surface, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that are not white, or connectors that are not white may be placed in that area. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow solid line (not shown). is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison between configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. The area indicating the positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed on silk screens near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are silk-screened. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) are printed as printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. It is

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. , and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed near these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) are printed as printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

On the other hand, in the configuration for countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 170(c), only foil-cut characters LED7 are shown as a part number corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. A foil-extracted region excluding terminals and wiring patterns not shown (that is, a region formed by removing copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which wiring patterns are formed, excluding terminals and wiring patterns (Fig. In 170(c), only the foil-free area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7.)), and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with the resist. Specifically, regions indicating positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil-cut regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. Part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as blank characters on the left or above the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10. , and the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (that is, the wiring pattern is formed) excluding each terminal (not shown) and the wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and in the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is attached to the foil (not shown). It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the surrounding copper foil).

Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 171, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various distributed resistors are arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed in the vicinity of these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171(a)) as silk printing, and the left side lower decoration substrate IC1 (see FIG. 171(a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is silk-printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b, near and above this region LSLKa. is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). Areas indicating positions where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402 bay are arranged are silk-printed yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 171(a)). are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and near these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd and to the right, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. and corresponding part numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171(a)) are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. there is

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LEDs. is implemented in

In addition, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil character (that is, a character is formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is not shown is each terminal and the foil extraction area excluding the wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) In each terminal and a region formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern). Each character is covered. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and on the right side, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as letters on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, respectively. The foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are each covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. As shown in FIG. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is electrically insulated from the electronic component.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed). In the layer (copper plane) in which each terminal and wiring pattern are removed, the area formed by removing the copper foil is formed in the layer (copper plane), and the part number corresponding to the connector HCN is formed in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blanked character (that is, a blanked character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the surrounding copper foil).

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). Thus, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are marked with foil letters (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters. A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various distributed resistors, etc. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components are to be arranged are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) (not shown) as silk-screen printing, and part numbers corresponding to electronic components are shown as silk-screen printing in the vicinity of these areas. are printed in yellow (or black), respectively.

In the third embodiment, resistors, capacitors, and the like mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a black resin package. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED-mounted surface because the reflectance of full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. is not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has parts corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed with foil characters (that is, a wiring pattern in which the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed is copper foil). The area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged excludes terminals and wiring patterns (not shown). It is formed as a foil-extracted area (that is, an area formed by removing the copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern), and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The white resist applied solidly to the LED mounting surface 402bx covers the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters, respectively. The part number corresponding to ~ hLED 10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a cut-out character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil) In addition, the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is arranged is a foil extraction area excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern not shown (that is, a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) , a region formed by removing copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern), and the foil removal region is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. and its foil-cut characters are respectively They differ in that they are covered.

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. For this reason, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing, the black-printed silk-screening allows the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. A problem arises in that the reflectance of the mounting surface is lowered, and the light emitted from the full-color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. Although formed in a translucent milky white color, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), which changes the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decoration substrates provided on various decorations provided in the game. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as the decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut letters, and the part numbers are completely unrelated to the game for the player. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color The wiring pattern of the LED, the foil-free area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED), are made of copper foil to make them the same color, and are covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface to indicate the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is placed) ), or to find the number that identifies the full-color LED (ie, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED).

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs, which have no relation to the game for the player, are formed as foil-cut letters, and the part numbers for the player have no relation to the game at all. By forming an area indicating the position of an unrelated full-color LED as a foil-extracted area and covering the foil-extracted character and the foil-extracted area with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface, the full-color It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the LED.

The configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment. In other words, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full-color LEDs.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the process of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, in the foil-extracted area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged as the foil-extracted area) , the polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, do not emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance of the mounting surface, electronic components such as non-white resistors and capacitors, or non-white connectors may be placed in that area. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is arranged is a foil extraction area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer in which the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) ), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing copper foil), and in the vicinity of this region, the part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is printed with foil characters (not shown) That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, characters are formed with a wiring pattern made of copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form characters.

[Comparison between configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the first embodiment and configuration for measures against decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance or the like according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. The area indicating the positions where the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) as silk printing, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed on silk screens near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black) as printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are silk-screened. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) are printed as printing, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas. It is

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. , and areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are placed are printed with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown as silk printing, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are displayed near these regions. are printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) are printed as printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. They are printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

On the other hand, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance, etc. according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172(c) shows only characters without white resist as part numbers corresponding to hdLED7, which is a full-color LED. ), and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist-free regions using two-coat white resist (in FIG. 172(c), full-color LEDs hdLED7 Only the white resist removed area LSLK7 is shown as an area corresponding to . Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is coated with white resist as the first coat of the white resist applied twice. It is covered (that is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with white resist as the first coat of white resist applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is, as the second coat of the white resist coated twice, an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged (predetermined pin numbers are arranged). 172(c), the area corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7, LSLK7, has the fifth pin of the full-color LED hdLED7. ) are masked as white resist removed areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the vicinity and left side of these white resist removed areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 are masked. Alternatively, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with white resist while the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers LED1 to LED10 are masked as characters without white resist. covered. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have different densities, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same shall apply hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer appears pale. In other words, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown). The numbers are formed as white resist removed characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist in the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist in the second layer are the same. The white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist-free area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It's becoming

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It is possible to do so.

Also, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The packages of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering (solidly painted) the entire LED mounting surface 402bx. HDLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entire LED (solidly painted) are mounted. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, the lighting inspection of hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decoration substrate 402b, is individually performed (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and near the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in white resist characters (not shown). is formed as A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, a region indicating the position of arranging electronic components such as various distributed resistors (not shown) is formed as a white resist removal region using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these areas, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist, similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. . Specifically, first, the non-LED-mounted surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with a white resist as the first coat of the two-coat white resist. It is covered with a resist (that is, the white resist is solidly coated on the non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first coat of the white resist applied twice). The non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant-current drive circuit 402bax is arranged (predetermined pin number arrangement) as the second of the two-coat white resist. 173, the white resist removed region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax includes a region between the 1st pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) is masked as the white resist removed area LSLKa, and a constant current is applied near and upward to the white resist removed area LSLKa. With the part number IC1 (see FIG. 173(a)) corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax masked as characters without white resist, the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. covered with resist. As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower decorative substrate 402b. The whole is covered with a white resist, and the whole is covered except for the region masked with the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked region is recessed as a recess corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A white resist removed area LSLKa is formed as a region to be printed, and IC1, which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is formed as white resist removed characters.

The non-LED-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist (not shown) in an area indicating the positions of electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various distributed resistors (not shown). In the vicinity of this region, white resist-cut characters R1, R2, not shown, corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b are shown. R3 is formed, and part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as various distributed resistors and capacitors (not shown) are formed as white resist characters (not shown). In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is placed near this region. It is formed as a white resist removed character (not shown).

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are the same. , the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading. Looking at the base of 402by (the copper foil portion and the area excluding the copper foil portion, the same shall apply hereinafter), the white resist of the first layer appears pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the second-layer white resist, the white resist-extracted characters formed on the first-layer white resist can be identified. can be performed, and the white resist removal area can be identified.

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. You can do it.

Also, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin, and the housing of the connector LDLCN is made of black, brown, or blue resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance due to the light emission of the full-color LED, so the LED non-mounting surface is implemented in

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solidly coated with white resist to increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It is possible to do so.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The corresponding part numbers are formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged use two coats of white resist. It is formed as a white resist removed region. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration substrate 314 is coated with the white resist as the first coat of the two coats of white resist. It is covered (that is, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist as the first coat of white resist applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged (predetermined pin numbers are arranged as the second coat of the two-coat white resist). For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the full-color LED hLED7, a notch mark and a notch mark indicating the arrangement of the fifth pin of the full-color LED hLED7 are included. are masked as white resist removed regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and near these white resist removed regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right, hLED1, which is a full-color LED, is formed. The entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with white resist while the part numbers LED1 to LED10 corresponding to LED10 are masked as characters without white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the areas masked by the resist, the masked areas are recessed as recesses, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are white resist areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have different densities, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. In other words, when looking at the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative board 314 through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown). The numbers are formed as white resist removed characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist in the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist in the second layer are the same. The white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading, and when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removal area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It's becoming

In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. It is possible to do so.

In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. The packages of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It is made of resin of a color that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solidly coated). Mounted are full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (recognized as the same color) as the white resist covering the entirety (solidly painted). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a lighting test is individually performed for hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 for each LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green (G) light, and an LED element that emits blue (B) light that constitutes one full-color LED. A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and near the plurality of check pins, part numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins are printed in white resist characters (not shown). is formed as A plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who conducts an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin so that the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to conduct various inspections. Some of the check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various distributed resistors (not shown) are provided. A region indicating the position where electronic components such as are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a white resist that is coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, and these regions A part number corresponding to an electronic part is formed in the vicinity as a white resist removal character using a two-coat white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314. FIG.

In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are the same. Therefore, the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer have shading. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the characters without white resist formed on the white resist of the first layer can be identified. can be performed, and the white resist removal area can be identified.

In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer and the second The light refractive index of the white resist of the second layer changes. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed area in the white resist of the first layer can be identified. You can do it.

In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip is The package is made of black resin. In this way, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED light emission is reduced.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are coated with a solid white resist. As a result, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, and the light emitted from the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reflected forward (that is, toward the upward side of the production operation unit 300). rate can be increased.

As described above, in the configuration for the countermeasure against the decrease in reflectance and the like according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b is provided with the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the full-color LEDs. is not printed as silk printing at all, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate has parts corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The numbers and the areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-extracted letters using double-coated white resist, and are full-color LEDs. The area indicating the positions where hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using two coats of white resist. Part numbers corresponding to certain hLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist-cut characters using double-coated white resist, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is double-coated white. The difference is that they are formed as white resist-extracted regions using the resist of .

The solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b can increase the forward reflectance (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by light emission from the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. It's like In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 is solidly coated with white resist, so that the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 emit light forward (that is, the direction toward the upward direction of the production operation unit 300) Reflectance can be increased. For this reason, when the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk-screen printing, the black-printed silk-screening allows the LED to emit light from the full-color LED. A problem arises in that the reflectance of the mounting surface is lowered, and the light emitted from the full-color LED is not efficiently used. In addition, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the top left decoration 271, the bottom left decoration 281, the top right decoration 276, the bottom right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. The upper plate center decoration 312a, the lower plate center decoration 312b, the left side door frame decoration 404, the inner side window decoration member 412, the right side door frame decoration 419, and the top door frame decoration 453) are arranged as described above. Although formed in a translucent milky white color, the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his or her head (face), which changes the line of sight depending on the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decoration substrates provided on various decorations provided in the game. In this case, there arises a problem that the player sees the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the positions where the full-color LEDs are arranged, which are completely unrelated to the game for the player.

Therefore, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist-extracted characters using a white resist coated twice with a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player In addition, by forming an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player, as a white resist removal area using the white resist coated twice, the mounting position of the full-color LED (i.e., the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) or finding the number specifying the full-color LED (i.e., the part number corresponding to the full-color LED). can be done.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures against a decrease in reflectance, etc., according to the fourth embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED, which is completely unrelated to the game for the player, is coated twice with a white resist, and white resist characters are used. In addition, by forming the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which is completely unrelated to the game for the player, as a white resist removal area using the white resist coated twice, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance on the LED mounting surface.

In the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the configuration for countermeasures against reflectance reduction and the like according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number that identifies the full-color LED (that is, the part number that corresponds to the full-color LED) and the white resist removal area that uses two coats of white resist that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position where the full-color LED is placed) ) can be made difficult for the player to visually recognize, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED.

In addition, in the configuration for countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the process of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively. Reducing the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

Note that in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color, which reduce the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emitted from the full-color LED, do not emit light from the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance of the mounting surface, electronic components such as non-white resistors and capacitors, or non-white connectors may be placed in that area. In this case, an area indicating the positions of electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors to be mounted on the LED mounting surface is formed as terminals (not shown) and a white resist removal area (not shown). In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors to be mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as characters without white resist (not shown).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the non-LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, but are entirely covered with the first layer of white resist. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector are arranged is formed as a white resist removal area. In addition, part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors are formed as white resist removed characters, but other methods may be used to form white resist removed areas and white resist removed characters. . For example, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate are coated with white resist once or several times, before the white resist dries, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED or connector is arranged A method of forming a white resist removed area by pressing a plate of, and forming a white resist removed character by pressing a plate showing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED or connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and After coating the non-LED-mounted surface with white resist once or several times, after the white resist dries, laser irradiation is performed to illuminate the areas where the full-color LEDs and connectors are to be arranged as white resist removal areas. In addition to forming, a method of forming part numbers corresponding to full-color LEDs and connectors as characters without white resist can be mentioned.

In the above-described embodiment, the method of arranging the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. , the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are arranged in an inclined state of 45 degrees. , the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, but it can also be applied to an elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided on the game board 5. FIG. Examples of the elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 include decorative substrates provided in various effect units of the game board 5 .

In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls light emission by passing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other monochromatic LEDs. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control light emission of a maximum of 24 monochromatic LEDs.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 was input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 165) is used for lighting the LED within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. can be used as the voltage of For example, for one of the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, maximum one single color LED (for example, LEDs excluding red LEDs) are electrically connected, the anode terminal of the single-color LED is configured to receive an internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) generated by a linear power supply, and the single-color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistor of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. Further, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, red LED) are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipating resistance of the heat dissipating resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

In the above-described embodiment, DC +12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are input. -LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED is electrically connected to one output channel through the heat dissipation resistance of the heat dissipation resistance circuit described above. However, multiple full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series for one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two to three. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the DC +35V from the power supply board 630 is used as the LED lighting voltage instead of the DC +12V from the power supply board 630. You may The decorative board configured in this manner can be applied to a decorative board provided on the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3 .

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 of the door frame top decoration 453 are the door frame top center decoration substrate 455 and the door frame top center decoration substrate 455. When the frame top left decoration substrate 456 and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decoration 453, the width dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the decoration substrates is large. The edges of the land pattern are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. For any one decoration substrate or any two of the frame top center decoration substrate 455, the door frame top left decoration substrate 456, and the door frame top right decoration substrate 457, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit The sides may be arranged so as not to be parallel to the top side and the bottom side of the decoration substrate. Then, the door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which, for example, two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full-color LEDs provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456, in addition to its own full-color LED, directly drives another left decorative board on which, for example, one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. The LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are coated with a solid white resist, but instead of this, they may be printed by white silk printing. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and LED non-mounting surface of various decorative substrates with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed as silk printing. Each will be printed in yellow (or black).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative substrates provided for each decoration provided on the door frame 3, such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, etc. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards were printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as silk printing, respectively, but the mounting position of the full-color LED (That is, when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the full-color LED It may be configured to specify the mounting direction.

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various substrates that are supplied with power from a power supply substrate and that can control illumination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-192989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in the game machine, lines for transmitting power and lines for transmitting control signals are routed to various boards, and as the length of these lines increases, various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window that opens forward and backward with a see-through protective plate on the game board (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-192989 (paragraph [0014] , and FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame becomes thin, and the decorative substrates accommodated in the left and right sides also become strip-shaped. In addition, by providing the display device and the movable body on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board becomes large, so that the decorative substrate provided on the game board also becomes a band plate. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip plate-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a movable accessory device that is arranged in a standby manner in front of and below the display screen of the effect display device and that operates during the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], Figures 4, 8 and 9)). A decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted facing the rear surface of the light emitting portion (lens) of the design surface is mounted inside the movable accessory device. However, there is a risk that the number identifying the light-emitting means mounted on the decoration board and auxiliary lines indicating the mounting position of the light-emitting means, etc., which are completely unrelated to the game for the player, may be visible to the player through the light-emitting portion.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine to which a decoration board on which light emitting means is mounted is attached (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of performances using the light-emission performance by such light-emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the number identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means reduce the reflectance and make the decoration. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light-emitting surface.

[13. Each decorative board provided on the game board]
Next, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the decorative board on which the magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with a magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

First, among the decoration substrates provided in the game board 5, the decoration substrate on which the magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted is the preceding decoration portion of the back upper left movable decoration 3310 of the back unit 3000, as described above. There is a rear upper left front decoration substrate 3311a on which a magnetic type rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotational position of 3312 is mounted.

Light emission data PSDAT1 and clock signal PSCLK1, which are the door frame side serial system and are serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, are input to the rear upper left front decoration board 3311a via the panel drive board 1720. ing. In addition, the back upper left front decoration board 3311a is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720, and receives DC +12 V, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) is electrically connected to the line. The back upper left front decoration board 3311a may be directly electrically connected to the +12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. It may be configured to be electrically connected directly to a ground (GND) line.

The back upper left front decorative board 3311a includes a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat dissipation circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa(1) to 3311aa(8).

The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is capable of detecting a change in magnetic pole, and is mainly composed of a linear power supply 3311aba, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmidt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. Configured as an open-drain output.

The linear power supply 3311aba is a circuit that receives DC +12V from the +12V power supply line and creates and supplies an internal power supply that is used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. This internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd to operate them. Source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

The Hall element 3311abb can detect the intensity of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the intensity of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abb and outputs it to the Schmidt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd adjusts the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the final-stage FET 3311abf. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal according to the signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

The back left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311abb becomes greater than the operating point (Bop). , when the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

The rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged so that the Hall element 3311abb is positioned directly below the track of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. It is

In this embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of the IC package is rectangular in plan (horizontal length: 2 .9 mm, vertical length: 1.6 mm) and is a so-called SOT (SMD, height: 1.1 mm). Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, it is mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a (that is, the back upper left The distance dimension (this distance dimension (clearance ) can be reduced to about 1.5 mm in this embodiment.

In addition, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a small movable decorative body, it is arranged as a sensor for detecting the front decorative part 3312 which is a movable body using a large optical sensor such as a photocoupler. It is structurally difficult to

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the leading decorative portion 3312, which is a movable body. Compared to the optical sensor described above, this magnetic sensor has a greater variation in detection. Even if there is a deviation, the deviation is small, and the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort is low.

As described above, the back upper left movable decoration 3310 moves in the left-right direction, moves in the up-down direction, and the leading decoration part 3312 rotates. In some cases, light from various light emitting sources (a plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is incident on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab from multiple directions.

For this reason, if the above-described optical sensor is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the light from various light sources (plural light sources) provided on the game board 5 will emit disturbance light ( light pollution), resulting in erroneous detection.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described magnetic sensor is adopted also for this reason. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312 by light emitted from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 .

In the present embodiment, the optical sensors provided in the various effect units described above are such that the light from various light emitting sources (plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light is detected). (light pollution), so there is no risk of erroneous detection due to the light.

The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. Mainly from a sink type constant current drive circuit 3311acx capable of It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. Based on data PSDAT1 and clock signal PSCLK1), control is performed to supply constant current to full-color LEDs 3311aa(1) to 3311aa(8). Since the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is of the sink type as described above, it generates heat by absorbing the constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa(1) to 3311aa(8). Therefore, the heat dissipation circuit 3311ad takes charge of part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 3311ac can be dispersed. The heat dispersion circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat dispersion circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG.

The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating the light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the plate lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 165, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

On the LED mounting surface of the back upper left front decoration board 3311a, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa(1) to 3311aa(8) and a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab are mounted. , an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has the above-described configuration for measures against reflectance decrease, etc. according to the first embodiment, configuration for measures against reflectance decrease, etc. according to the second embodiment, and reflectance according to the third embodiment. Either configuration can be adopted from among the configuration for measures such as a decrease and the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, the back upper left base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that emit light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3311 to which it is attached. 3311a is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front decorative part 3312, but the multiple full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration board are of the side view type. Along with the selection, the plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decoration substrate 3311a may be selected to be of the side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration substrate may be selected from the side view type. A view type LED may be selected, and the plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decoration substrate 3311a may be selected to be of the top view type, or a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration substrate 3311a may be selected. A top-view type full-color LED may be selected, and a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected from a top view type, or a back upper left base decorative board. The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the top-view type may be selected, and the side-view type may be selected for the plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which the performance operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a performance control device (control means) (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph [ 0071], FIGS. 3 and 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. If electromagnetic wave noise penetrates into other wiring through the routed wiring, there is a possibility that the performance control device (control means) malfunctions under the influence of the electromagnetic noise from the other wiring.

Further, conventionally, a game machine having a game board with a movable body has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2016-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIGS. 18 and 19)). The movable body has a projecting detection piece, and the detection piece specifies the position of the movable body by being detected by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body. By the way, when an optical detection switch is provided on the movable body to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light emitted from a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is in operation causes the light to be emitted. There is a risk that the light will become disturbance light and enter an optical detection switch, causing the detection switch to make an erroneous detection.

[14. Brightness setting for indirect light and direct light]
The base panel plate 1110 and the light guide plate in the display effect unit 2600 include a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line from the end surface thereof (a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for emitting light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110; A plurality of LEDs for the first pattern that are decorated with light by allowing light to enter from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601, and a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are decorated with light by allowing light to enter from the right side of the light guide plate. (hereinafter referred to as "LED used as indirect light") is incident and indirect light is emitted from the inner surface of the light guide plate.

Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. Other LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "LEDs used as direct light") which are various LEDs provided and are not used in the light guide plate are irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are the same, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. If the current brightness of various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is too bright, the player wants to adjust it to be darker, and if it is not too dark, to adjust it to be brighter.

By the way, various kinds of LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or more LED constant current driving circuits are mounted. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from off to lighting (maximum brightness) in a total of 128 levels from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. It is something that can be done.

The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are, as described above, data for designating the light emission mode, and consist of ID information and gradation information. there is The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating the light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation from among gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127 is specified.

The gradation designated as the gradation information described above is used in the lamp palette setting processing in the effect operation unit monitoring processing and received command analysis processing in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a, which will be described later. set. In this lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on a lamp palette setting table composed of a luminance designation value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value. , respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) schedule data for generating a lighting mode from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. to update the gradation information described above and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. For example, within a predetermined period of time for a specific effect, the lamp palette setting process can be executed to update the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. The specified brightness value can be set to one brightness specified value in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st brightness specified value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness during a demonstration (demonstration performed while the player is waiting) or during the performance. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) can operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set desired brightness. In addition, when a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk of a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, a predetermined luminance value to a specified luminance value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of a demonstration or effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to 31 specified brightness values, the image visually indicates the level of brightness desired by the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk). It is possible to do so. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the palette A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the above-described gradation information along predetermined formulas (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The brightness designation value by the operation of 303 and the corresponding special palette value are set. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this Then, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value to the 31st brightness level. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a specific decoration board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which an effect member provided on a game board is provided with a light emitting means and light from the light emitting means is used as direct light to perform light emitting decoration (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154676). Publication (paragraph [0021], Figures 2 and 5)). However, when using the light of the light emitting means provided in the production member as indirect light, it becomes darker than when the light of the light emitting means provided in the production member is used as direct light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the luminance between the means and the light emitting means used as direct light.

[15. Game content]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. In the above-described pachinko machine 1, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 to input the hitting force adjustment. The stored game ball B passes through the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a, thereby playing the game with the game ball B. be started. The game ball B hit to the upper part in the game area 5a is the first game area 5a1 which is the left side of the center member 2500, or the right side of the center member 2500 through the connecting passage portion 5a4 depending on the hitting strength. It flows down either a certain second game area 5a2. The hitting strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The more the handle 182 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In the first to third game areas 5a1, 5a2, 5a3 of the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail 2007, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various motions are imparted to the game ball B. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a pinwheel 2008 that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided at an appropriate position.

[15-1. Entering into the first game area]
The game ball B shot to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a predetermined launching force (the game ball B jumps over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and does not reach the connecting passage portion 5a4). It rolls on the left side of the stepped portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 and flows down from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while coming into contact with the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. When the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage shelf 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on the left and right sides of the top. Released forward. When the game ball B is released into the third game area 5a3 from the central top of the stage shelf 2503, the top is located directly above the first start opening 2002, so the first start opening 2002 is highly likely. accepted by When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the third game area 5 a 3 from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100 . The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be received in the first starting opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, and the like.

In addition, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 brings it to the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the starting opening There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the first starting port 2002 of the unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

[15-2. Winning at the first start gate, lottery for special lottery results]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 (the same applies to the second start port 2004), the main control board 1310 sets the advantageous game state (for example, " A lottery will be held for special lottery results that generate "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability variation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit". The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special fluctuation time).In addition, a special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002 The results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit". ”, “No fixed time reduction hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous game state, the special fluctuation time After a lapse of time, the large winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. In order to enter the game ball B into the big winning hole 2005, it is essential to hit the game ball B into the second game area 5a2. ) is guided by voice announcements or images, etc., but in this embodiment, which of the release parts 848a and 848b should be aimed for is called, for example, "left route for right-handed hitting" or "right route for right-handed hitting". are specifically guided. This is because the ball entry probability to the first receiving port 2006 and the second receiving port differs depending on from which release portion 848a, 848b the game ball B is released to the second game area 5a2. In addition, the driving to the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

When the special lottery result is a "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening and closing pattern is repeated multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit", after the big winning hole 2005 becomes an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses, or to the big winning hole 2005 Acceptance of a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) to make the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state. is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for a "2R big win", 5 rounds for a "5R big win", and 15 rounds for a "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this form, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be done. The number of pending special lottery results to be held is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) is generated according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until display is different), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 is operated according to the special lottery result. A player-participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player-participation type performance, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate the rotary operation unit 302, vibrate it, assist the rotary operation, or inhibit the rotary operation. By 367, the pressing operation section 303 can be raised to be conspicuous, and the operation of the production operation section 301 can entertain the player participation type production.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, etc. , movable effects, etc., can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and a decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to allow the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in performing the operation to be performed or does not perform the operation in the player participation type presentation in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated. to notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation portion 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 is caused to vibrate. The effect display device 1600 is made to display that effect.

[15-3. Hitting into the second game area (right hitting)]
A game ball B shot to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a specific shooting force stronger than the predetermined shooting force (a shooting force strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1) hits the tapered corner of the stepped portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832. It rides on the upper surface behind the portion 832b or rolls while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force to move to the inside of the connecting passage portion 5a4. When the game ball B lands on the upper surface behind the tapered corner portion 832b of the stepped portion 832a of the enclosing frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500 and enters the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b. Or, even if the game ball B rolling in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 stalls and falls in front of the opening 848bH of the release portion 848b, it will roll on the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 and the release portion. Enter opening 848bH in 848b. The game ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b is discharged to the left portion 5a2b of the second game area 5a2 by descending through the discharge portion 848b as shown in FIG. The game ball B released to the left portion 5a2b has a low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 as described above, and a high probability of entering the second receiving port and passing through the gate portion 2003. It is set as follows, and the winning to the big winning opening 2005 is relatively easy.

On the other hand, most of the game ball B that rolls in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 due to the centrifugal force and collides with the impact portion 1006 enters the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a. The game ball B that has entered the opening 848aH of the release portion 848a descends through the release portion 848a and is released to the right portion 5a2a of the second game area 5a2, as shown in FIG. The game ball B released to the right portion 5a2a is arranged so that the probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 is higher than the probability of entering the second receiving port and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003 as described above. It is set and can enter the first receiving port 2006 at an early stage and be processed in the same way as an out ball.

Therefore, in the gauge configuration of FIGS. 131 and 132, the handle 182 is adjusted to be slightly weaker than the strongest level, and the game ball B makes an effort to enter the release portion 848b from the connecting passage portion 5a4, and then the second game area 5a2. to reach the big winning opening 2005 efficiently and safely via the left part 5a2b.

In addition, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal win", the closed second start opening 2004 will be in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 will be possible. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, to the upper tray 201. paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal fluctuation time is, the more the game ball B that draws the "normal hit" in the gate section 2003 is accepted by the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

[16. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 151 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. A random number for reach determination for use in determination, and a variable display for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a pattern and a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1404 and a second special pattern display device 1406 of a function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated. , the random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number, the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 and the second special A random number for a small winning symbol used for determining a small winning symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display device 1406, a random number for determining an initial value for a small winning symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for this small winning symbol, etc. prepared. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the acceptance of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination For determining the initial value of the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit determination, and for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns and the like are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for judging a big hit are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the random number for judging a big hit is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for normal pattern hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number. .

Note that in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the memory as numerical values is the checksum value stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure) When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when it does not match the (sum value), the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is An ID code is taken out, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal symbol based on the taken out ID code is executed, and the derived fixed value is It is designed to be set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to open and close the game ball to the second start port 2004. cannot generate a game state in which is acceptable.

[16-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register") to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT will forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be operated normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed and the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S16 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built into the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) is to be erased. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it returns to step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. is not possible, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase various information (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

In the determination of step S32, the main control MPU 1310a, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, the main control built-in RAM A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a itself resets and then returns.

After step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processes, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) ends normally and the backup flag BK- If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines that various information is to be erased, or in the determination of step S30, When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the main control MPU 1310a That is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side When the power-off processing is not completed normally, the unique ID code preliminarily stored in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the random number for judging the normal pattern is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter is performed, and this fixed value is used for determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number. Initial value for normal per symbol determination. Set random number for decision.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

After step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate the jackpot game state by hardware In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. When all values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit/fall random number update process (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops driving signals output to, for example, the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, etc. (step S62).

After step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main-control-side power-off processing, and the main-control-side power-on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing is not stored immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is applied due to the fact that the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S28 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) will match, and a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control internal RAM, and the contents of the main control internal RAM will be completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charged electric charge is applied as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as a DC +5V to the island of the game hall. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. is applied as DC +5V, within a period of about 7 ms, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a game hall clerk or other clerk, and even if there is no indication of intention by the game hall clerk or other clerk to clear the RAM, the memory is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. However, there is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. It is possible to prevent various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls) from being updated, and checksum calculation results It is designed so that there is no change in As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, supplies game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU 1310a of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated to set the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S12, clear the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, and restart the clocking. The main control built-in WDT can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a by making it impossible to start.

By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls A mechanism is adopted in which updating of various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls) is divided into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that it is not changed at all. , The content of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information, etc.)) is reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed for the main control return destination command at the time of power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, and the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will not operate the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board issues a large winning hole 1 count display command to convey the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, for example, when finishing the 4th round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state. The main control board 1310 sends a large winning gate 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the main control board 1310 is to shift from the closed state to the closed state (that is, start closing the big winning gate 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds). , and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening 5th display command that instructs the transition to the state where the large winning hole 2005 is opened (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning hole 2005). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece to open the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, and when the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the start opening solenoid 2404 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the command at power-on A counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. The big winning slot is open. It is possible to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored. In a state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen notifying that the drive of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting port.”) is displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface of the pachinko machine. A game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored to the player seated on the seat can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is set when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). When the RAM is cleared, the information instructing that effect, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non-working time saving state, and high probability non working hours state, and the model code of the pachinko machine It consists of the information shown and Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine, etc.) is such that probability fluctuations occur in the state where the game is played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption or misunderstanding that it is flowing to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in addition to when the power is turned on), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications by looking at the inspection monitor, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[16-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed for each interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 175 and 176 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the first special symbol display device 1404 and the second special symbol display device 1406 of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 lights according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) Time such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that tells that the payout control board 633 has normally received the various commands sent by manage. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the detection from the first opening sensor main side 3002a that constitutes the first opening opening sensor 3002. signal, detection signal from the first starting opening sensor subordinate side 3002b constituting the first starting opening sensor 3002, detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, first reception opening sensor A detection signal from 2406, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are normally received by the payout control board 633. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which conveys the fact, is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first start sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding start start winning command classified into others is stored in the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second starting When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, a starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Note that in this embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to empty terminal processing). , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the states in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) are checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a that constitutes the first starting opening sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the secondary side 3002b of the first starting opening sensor constituting the starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection from the first reception opening sensor 2406. A signal, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the control board 633 can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the empty terminal processing is applied is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a classifies the information display to inform that the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a has a problem. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win/lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hitting random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, and this prize ball When the payout control board 633 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. , second starting hole 2004, and big winning hole 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5"). It counts the number of game balls to be put out, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) divided into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize balls is checked. For example, the input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor subordinate side 3002b. If the logic is different, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball of approximately the same diameter or approximately the same It is determined that a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation") by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball with a diameter) is being performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation counter is incremented by 1. do. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time radio wave irradiation is determined in the fraudulent act detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection processing. ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Here, to briefly explain the radio wave irradiation goto, an irregular ball (a game ball or a metal ball with approximately the same diameter as A ball or a synthetic resin ball of approximately the same diameter) is shot from the upper tray 201 through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, enters the first starting port 2002, and is first starting. Radio waves are emitted in a state where the game ball is stationary in the area for detecting the game ball passing through the opening sensor (the ball passage detection area of the first starting opening sensor). As a result, when the radio wave irradiation is performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned ON) while the game ball is stationary in the ball passage detection area of the first starting hole sensor, the logic of the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor is changed. While the logic is that the game ball is not detected, the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected when the radio wave irradiation is stopped (that is, the radio wave irradiation is turned off). . That is, in a state in which the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first starting hole sensor, the radio wave irradiation is turned ON, and the radio wave irradiation is turned OFF repeatedly, thereby detecting the ball passage of the first starting hole sensor. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be generated in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting port sensor to the main control board 4100 .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main side 3002a of the first starting opening sensor and the secondary side 3002b of the first starting opening sensor are arranged to have a dimension larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance so that such radio wave irradiation can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, if an illegal ball attached with a flexible string-like operating wire is hit into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, it enters the first start opening 2002. Then, the area for detecting the game ball passing through the first starting hole sensor main side 3002a (the ball passing detection area of the first starting hole sensor main side 3002a), or the game ball passing through the first starting hole sensor secondary side 3002b (ball passage detection area of the first start opening sensor subordinate side 3002b), even if it is possible to form a stationary state, a player who commits cheating turns on radio wave irradiation or radio wave irradiation By repeating turning off and on, the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002b must always be different. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation notification command classified as a notification display that informs that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created, and the above-mentioned transmission information is stored as transmission information. It is designed so that it can be stored in the area. In this embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation thing by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can discover the radio wave irradiation thing at an early stage. It's like

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not in the jackpot game state (big winning opening 2005), etc., a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from the hardware random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, this obtained random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the judging value stored in advance in the built-in main control ROM, it is judged whether or not they match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), taking out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the jackpot pattern, and judging the probability variation that is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation).

Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to 32767 is set for a low probability, and is read from the normal determination table, whereas a value of 31768 to 31768 is set for a high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the determination table at the time of probability change. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM in advance When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. This is done depending on whether or not the

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 3002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2402 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern, the first special symbol indicator 1404 or the second special symbol indicator 1406 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the two special symbol display device 1406 is set, and stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, big win game state, etc.) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2405 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp is set so as to light the 2nd round display lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp of 1408 to light the 15 round display lamp, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or light up the occurrence of probability fluctuation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal symbol per determination random number is extracted and used as gate information by the gate of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the information storage area.

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th division, 1st division, 2nd division, and 3rd division. It's like For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. Store in partitions.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, if the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the total number of stored gate information is used as a hold ball, and the normal hold indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is lit. Based on the gate information described above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. While storing in the area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, It is stored in the output information storage area described above as the output information.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2404 is set to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , create various commands classified into general pattern synchronization production related, store as transmission information in the above-described transmission information storage area, and according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to be lit, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU 1310a, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2405 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning port 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting port solenoid 2404 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2 rounds jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting prize Various information (game information) signals related to games such as information output signals are output to the payout control board 633 .

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 tuning effect related, and are classified into jackpot related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display Commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and other various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 pays as prize balls based on the game balls that enter various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls to be put out reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize ball number information. prize number information output command, etc.) are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main peripheral serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main peripheral serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation settings of the command to be performed, the power-on state command, which is classified as power-on, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize number information output judgment counter when power is turned on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the output determination counter notification command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122) and terminates this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. When power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared at step S38 in the main control side power-on process shown. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when the power is turned on. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[17. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. FIG. FIG. 178 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 178, and FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[17-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 633aa. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, the processing is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In the input/output setting of this I/O, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. be. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, it is not intended to instruct the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated.

When the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a over a predetermined time from the time of power-on.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting enables access to the payout control built-in RAM, and enables writing (storage) or reading of payout information, for example.

After step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S526 that they match, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power failure processing has been normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU 633aa. Information is set in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

After step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. is entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S540 that there is no power failure warning signal input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator 633c are stored, and payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or output the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually puts out 10 game balls A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time a ball is paid out.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator 633c.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and a BRQ signal from the CR unit. , BRDY signal and CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that tells that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, etc. are read and used as input information. Store in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be put out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, and when the game balls are paid out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, momentary power failure or power outage causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is cut off and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and game balls can be continuously paid out. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stop when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stop occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit from changing due to an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out control. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting process, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible when the CR unit is not in communication is output as the PRDY signal. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa. to the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-described ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls, and the full-tank information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is conveyed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormality occurs in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when the out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. At step S546, the value 0 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL at step S546, port output processing is performed at step S548, port input processing is performed at step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control section main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines in the determination of step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

After step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[17-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 178 to 180.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register, as shown in FIG. 181 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

After step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[18. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 186. FIG. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 185 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[18-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 and various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a obtains calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after executing the current time information acquisition processing so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from VDP of peripheral control IC 1510a with a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the CPU of peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

After step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. Repeatedly determine whether or not By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

After step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs lamp palette setting processing as one processing of the effect operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. During the demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) or during the performance, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) uses the performance operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303) to set one luminance designated value ranging from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value that is the maximum luminance, the set luminance The above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to become the specified value.

After step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output board 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. It is a mechanism that can give priority to performances such as music, sound effects, etc. that match various performances from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"). In this display data output process, the display data is displayed on the door frame 3 in accordance with the light emission data indicated by the pointer, out of the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. It outputs to various decoration boards provided and various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 (including the panel drive board 1720).

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the schedule data for screen generation, the order of which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is indicated. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

In the scheduler update process, among the sound data such as music and sound effects arranged in time series, and the sound command data indicating the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, the first sound The pointer is updated in order to indicate what order of the sound command data to output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a from the command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of which order from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that is originally supposed to be instructed.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands received. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b ( extracted) and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) schedule data for generating a lighting mode from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or a staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to change the brightness from the first brightness specified value to the maximum brightness. When one luminance designated value is set up to 31 luminance designated values, the grayscale information described above can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to achieve the set luminance designated value. It's like

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, a normal symbol Normal pattern storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of design synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, big winning opening At 2005, it is analyzed whether or not it is a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted, and the current game state is recognized.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands classified as related to figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as normal electric role effects related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

After step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, are updated. Date is updated.

After step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and screen data indicated by the pointer, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, is transferred from the control ROM 1510b. Read out (extract) and output to VDP of peripheral control IC 1510a.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

After step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and reproduces the sound data such as music and sound effects in accordance with the track number specified in the sound command data. In addition to setting the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral controller steady-state process is performed), the volume adjustment switch 1510d is turned on based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch 1510d. Identify the slide position. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the sound volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and in the sound data output processing of step S1018, the sound data generation processing is performed. Sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall slides the volume control switch 1510d to set the volume to a low volume, the pachinko machine 1 does not produce sound effects such as music and sound effects played from various speakers. When a problem occurs in the game or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty. Also, based on the current volume set by volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen (image) unfolding on the effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

After step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the steady process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in 1510c2 and backed up.

After step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts by setting a value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1008, and starts 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is, as described above, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed when the signal is input to the CPU. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[18-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to indicate that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. will be explained. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 183 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, that the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit is being executed, this Exit the routine. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, the V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. By setting the value 1 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[18-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady-state processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 182 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 184 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt process has started when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that are arranged in time series and constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. According to the drive data, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order. do. As a result, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3, an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input, thereby providing history information (for example, original data) of detection signals from various sensors. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. or acquire the movable position to grasp the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The direction of rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110) and terminates this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are backed up. It is backed up by copying to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In this embodiment, the 1ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , 1510c2 and the backup areas for regular processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt causes the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[18-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 185 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, reads 1-byte (8-bit) information. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the judgment of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, after the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the second byte of the main peripheral serial data In a certain mode, and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, electrostatic discharge occurs and noise is generated. in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a checks whether or not the main peripheral serial data has been affected by noise between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. can judge.

In step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216 ), exiting this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period for which information can be received is exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, the routine ends.

[18-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 186, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates the 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If so, this routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure warning signal has been input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed. (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control section command reception interrupt processing is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a for backup.

After step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, it returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. determine whether In other words, it continues infinitely to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clearing processing in step S1314. CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 182 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state by executing the WDT clearing process in step S1314. It is designed not to take. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[19. technical means, effects, etc.]
It should be noted that, as described below, the above-described forms include a background art with Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741 as a prior patent document and many technical means for solving problems.

[Background technology]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board having a game area in which games are played, and a door frame having a door window that closes the front side of the game board and allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front. , and the player can be entertained by playing a game within the game area that can be seen through the door window.

A gaming machine of this type includes a storage tray for storing game media for playing a game, a bulging portion bulging forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, and a bulging portion. and a decorative body attached to the top surface has been proposed (eg, prior patent documents). According to the technology of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the game machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decorative effect of the body was weak, and the appeal to the players was insufficient. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his/her hand on the storage plate, a part of the decoration is hidden by the player's hand. In such a case, it becomes difficult for the player to notice the luminous decoration, and there is a possibility that some players may feel lost due to not noticing the luminous decoration and lose their interest in the game.

[Problems to be solved]
In view of the above circumstances, a gaming machine is provided which is highly appealing to players and can suppress the decline in the interest of players in games by means of light-emitting decorations.

[Technical means to solve the problem]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front;
a door frame base that closes the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable, and has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front;
a bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base below the door window, and includes a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the game area; ,
attached to the bulging portion, forward of the front end of the storage tray and extending forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base; a protruding decorative body;
a decoration light-emitting means for causing the decoration to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area.

Here, "game" is defined as "a game medium is aimed at a specific receiving port where a special lottery is held to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, and the game medium is delivered to the specific receiving port. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to acceptance is drawn, a specific receiving port for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by receiving the game media, so the game media are aimed at the specific receiving port. A game in which a game medium is hit", "A game in which a game medium is hit by aiming at a reception port where benefits including the payout of game medium are given", "After inserting the game medium, multiple patterns are provided for each A game in which the rotation of each spinning body is stopped so as to form a combination of symbols that gives a privilege including the payout of game media after rotating the spinning body. Examples of the above-mentioned "game media" include "spherical objects (game balls)", "disk-shaped objects (medals)", and the like.

In addition, the ``game area'' in which games are played is defined as ``a plurality of receiving slots into which game media are inserted by the player's operation, and benefits including payout of the game media are given according to the acceptance of the game media. "Area where a player is playing" and "each of which is provided with a plurality of symbols, and when a game medium is inserted, each of them is rotated by a player's starting operation, and a combination of symbols stopped by a player's stop operation. A region in which a plurality of bollards are arranged in which a privilege including payout of game media is provided accordingly”, and the like.

In addition, the "main body frame" includes "things that can be opened and closed (rotating hinges) with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame attached to the island facility of the game hall where the game machine is installed", "the game machine Examples include those that are directly attached to the island facilities of the game hall where they are installed, those that are equipped with a game medium payout device for playing games, and the like.

In addition to the storage tray, the 'swelled section' may also include 'having an operation section operated by a player to play a game', or 'a storage tray for storing game media for playing a game'. ``Equipped with a performance operation unit that allows the operation of a player to be accepted when a player participation type performance is executed'', ``A lending operation unit that lends out game media for playing a game ”, and the like.

Further, examples of the "storage tray" include "a plurality of which are separated vertically", "a single one", and the like.

Furthermore, as the "decorative body", there are "things imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine", "things imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine", and "things imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine". imitation of a predetermined scene”, and the like. The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decoration is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base is that if the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width, This is because the amount of forward protrusion is about the same as that of a conventional game machine, and the appeal to the player cannot be sufficiently enhanced. This is because there is a risk that the game machine will become a hindrance to the player, making it difficult for the game machine to be selected as a game machine.

In addition, as "according to the game state", "a game to a reception opening (for example, general winning opening, start opening, big winning opening, prize winning opening, V winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area "In accordance with the receipt of the medium", "In response to the passage of the game medium circulating within the game area through a specific area (e.g., gate, warp passage, stage shelf, etc.)", "In response to placement within the game area Depending on the result of a special lottery drawn by receiving game media into a receiving port (e.g. starting port)", "lottery by receiving game media into a receiving port (e.g. starting port) arranged in the game area Depending on the type of effect (for example, ready-to-win effect, jackpot effect, losing effect, etc.) for suggesting the result of the special lottery drawn, "Multiple designs with multiple patterns triggered by the insertion of game media "In response to the rotation of the turret", "A plurality of turrets each having a plurality of patterns are rotated after the game medium is inserted, and then sequentially stopped, and according to the combination of the patterns of the stopped turrets , ``according to the amount of game media struck into the game area'', ``according to the length of the blank of the game medium struck into the game area'', and the like.

In addition, as the "decorative body light emitting means", there are "full color LED", "single color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", and the like. mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine includes a game board having a game area where a game is played, a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and a front side of the body frame that can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and the part below the door window on the front of the door frame base bulges forward. a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the region; and a bulging portion attached to the front end of the storage tray and forward from the front surface of the door frame base. A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and a light-emitting decoration according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area with the decorative body. and a decorative body light-emitting means that causes the light to flow.

As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. In addition, the protruding portion is provided with a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base and having a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when the game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decorative body protrudes greatly forward below the door window through which the inside of the game area can be seen, making the decorative body more conspicuous than other game machines. As a result, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, enhance the appeal to the player, and make it easier for the player to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the horizontal direction can be made longer than before. can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his or her hand on the storage plate, it is possible to reduce the part of the decorative body that is hidden by the player's hand. To make it easy for a player to notice the luminous decoration of the decorative body when the luminous decoration is made by the decorative body luminous means, to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be made

In addition, since the ornament is projected forward greatly below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornament is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, when the decoration is light-embellished by the decoration light-emitting means according to the game state, the light illuminates the player from below, and the player's line of sight is directed to the decoration by the light-emitting decoration of the decoration. In addition, by directing the player's line of sight to the lower decorative body, the inside of the game area provided in front can be kept away from the player's field of view, making it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. . Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, and when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, special winning opening, etc.) opens and closes , etc., by lighting the decorations with the decoration lighting means, the player's attention is directed to the decorations below the game area, and when the player returns his/her line of sight to the game area, By changing the production image, the movable body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, and the player can be entertained, and at the same time, there is something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think that the player is not interested in the game, thereby increasing the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration body can be illuminated according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the performance in the game area during that time. can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the decorative body is luminous decoration, and the player can be entertained and entertained. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the ornaments are projected greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire ornaments, the player moves away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, the decorative body may be smoothly curved and protruded forward. As a result, the decorative body projecting greatly forward is smoothly curved, so that there is no risk of hurting the player even if the decorative body comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous enough to cause an injury at a glance of the decoration, so that the player can select the game machine with peace of mind. This allows the player to enjoy the game on the game machine and suppress the loss of interest.

Moreover, it is desirable to attach the decorative body to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to make the presence of the ornament stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, thereby increasing the appeal to the player and making it easier for the player to select this gaming machine. In addition, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. It is possible to facilitate the operation and handling of the game media stored in the storage tray, thereby making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, the decorative body may be provided with a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross section. As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is shaped like a half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protruding forward, so that it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to make the player concentrate on the game and to suppress the decline in interest, and to prevent the player from being injured even if the player touches it at a glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is safe, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game. Further, in the case where the decoration body is provided with the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration part, when the entire first decoration part is illuminated by the decoration body light emitting means according to the game state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. The luminous decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Since it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates, it is possible to surprise the player and make him think that something good is happening, thereby increasing his expectation for the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest by

Furthermore, when the decoration is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration, the front end is arranged below the first decoration so that it is positioned behind the first decoration, and has a semicircular cross section. A second decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward may be further provided. As a result, the first decorative part and the second decorative part make it possible for the player to see the decoration as if half-doughnuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate can be improved. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part to make the decoration appear larger, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to make the gaming machine highly appealing, strongly attracting the interest of players. Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration part and the second decoration part are arranged vertically, each of them is appropriately illuminated by the decoration body light emitting means, so that the light is emitted in such a manner that the light rotates. It is possible to show the player a performance or a light emission performance in which the light moves up and down to entertain the player, and at the same time, to show the player a variety of light emission performances to keep the player from getting bored. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by making it difficult to make it difficult.

Further, an effect operation section may be provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body so that the player's operation can be accepted according to the game state. As a result, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player can operate the production operation unit to enable the player participation type production. The performance can be enjoyed, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, by lighting up the decoration with the decoration lighting means, the player's interest can be attracted to the decoration attached to the production operation unit, so that the player who operates the production operation unit can When the participatory performance is executed, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (performance operation part) and the operation of the performance operation part can be urged, and the player can perform the performance operation. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the effect operation section is attached behind the front end of the top surface of the decoration, the decoration can prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, etc. from coming into contact with the effect operation section. Therefore, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the performance operation section, and to surely enjoy the player-participation type performance that operates the performance operation section, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Furthermore, when the effect operation part is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation part looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. In addition to making it easier to select a machine, the game progresses (for example, game medium (game balls), insertion of game media (medals) to start rotation of the rotating body, etc.), thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the case where the performance operation section is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body, the performance operation section includes an annular rotation operation section that can be rotated by the player, and an inner ring of the rotation operation section. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player. As a result, since the rotation operation section capable of rotating operation and the pressing operation section capable of pressing operation are provided as the production operation section, the rotation operation can be performed in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation section can be accepted. Since it is possible to allow the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operations, it is possible to respond to effects that require more complicated input (player's operation), so that more diverse player participation type effects can be played. The game can be presented to a player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less bored, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, the decoration having the rotating operation part and the pressing operation part attached to the upper surface can be illuminated by the decoration lighting means, so that the decoration can be illuminated when the player participatory performance is executed. The luminous decoration makes it possible to direct the attention of the player to the decorative body (the effect operation part such as the rotary operation part and the pressing operation part) and prompt the player to operate the effect operation part. By allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type performance, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation part or to press the pressing operation part according to the lighting mode of the decorative body. The operation part can be accurately operated, and the player's participatory performance can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, when an annular rotary operation part and a pressing operation part arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part are provided as the rendering operation part on the upper surface of the ornament, the pressing operation can be performed. The part can be moved between a retracted position slightly projecting upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part and a projecting position projecting upward from the retracted position according to the game state. good. As a result, when the pressing operation part is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation part protrudes upward from the rotating operation part, so that the upper surface of the ornament is large together with the rotating operation part. Since it is in a state as if it bulges upward, it is possible to make the surroundings of the decorations appear larger and give a strong impact to the players, and to make the decorations more conspicuous and to enhance the appeal to the players more than other game machines. In addition, since the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upward, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation part, and the player's expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part can be enhanced, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

Further, when the pressing operation part in the ring of the rotary operation part attached to the upper surface of the ornament is movable between the retracted position and the protruded position, the player can move the pressing operation part at the protruded position. A cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part that can be pressed, and a cylindrical center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position. You may make it comprise with a press operation part. As a result, on the upper surface of the decoration that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation part and the rotating operation part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. To strongly attract a player's interest, to heighten the player's expectation for a player-participation type performance in which each operation part is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can be done. Also, in this case, by making the ornaments light-emitting, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the ornaments, and in turn, to the rotary operating section, the outer peripheral pressing operating section, and the central pressing operating section, thereby prompting the player to operate them. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by entertaining the player participation type production.

Furthermore, when the upper surface of the decorative body is provided with the effect operation part, it is desirable to provide an operation part light emitting means for lighting the effect operation part according to the game state. As a result, it is possible to light-embellish the effect operation part by the operation part light-emitting means according to the game state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with luminescence, the bulging part can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole can be decorated with luminescence. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in this case, by lighting up the production operation section with the operation section light-emitting means, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the production operation section. When it is executed, the effect operation part is decorated with light, so that the player's interest can be directed to the effect operation part and the operation can be urged, and by making the player operate the effect operation part, the player participatory effect. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the front surface of the door frame base may further include a peripheral edge decoration that is continuous with the decoration attached to the bulging portion and extends so as to surround the outer periphery of the door frame. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the game area can be decorated, the appearance of the game machine can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to provide peripheral edge decoration light emitting means for luminous decoration of the peripheral edge decoration. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the decline of interest.

Also, an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image may be provided in the center of the game area when viewed from the front. As a result, the player can be entertained by the effect image displayed on the effect display means in addition to the game performed in the game area, and the loss of the player's interest can be suppressed. Further, when the performance image is switched while the performance image is being displayed by the performance display means, the decoration is made to emit light so that the player's line of sight is directed toward the decoration in the lower part of the game area, thereby making it difficult to notice the switching of the performance image. can do. Then, when the player turns his or her line of sight to the performance display means after the performance image is switched, the player can be surprised by the change in the performance image, and the performance image can be enjoyed more. The switching of the images can make the player think that something good is going to happen, heighten the player's expectation for the game, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said decoration is
It is characterized by being "smoothly curving and protruding forward".

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and projected forward.

As a result, the decorative body protruding greatly forward is smoothly curved, so there is no risk of hurting the player even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, the player can recognize that the decoration is not dangerous enough to cause an injury at a glance of the decoration, so that the player can select the game machine with peace of mind. This allows the player to enjoy the game on the game machine and suppress the loss of interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The said decoration is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

According to the configuration of means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

As a result, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, thereby appealing to the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to select this game machine as a game machine for playing with increased strength. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. ) and the handling of the game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and the player is less likely to be stressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said ornament is
It is characterized by having a first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward and have a semicircular cross section.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ornamental body is provided with a first ornamental portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross section.

As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body extends in a semicircular shape so that the cross section of the semicircular arc bulges outward, so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. Since it has a form that looks like it is hanging, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, to make the player play the game in a calm mood, and to concentrate the player on the game. At the same time, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a safe one that is unlikely to be injured even if he touches it at a glance, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby making him feel more interested in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion is formed in a half-doughnut shape, when the entire first decorative portion is illuminated by the decoration light emitting means according to the game state, it emits light like an annular fluorescent lamp. The decoration can be displayed to the player and can attract the player's attention. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect that the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so that the player can enjoy the decoration. It is possible to surprise the player and make him think that something good will happen, heighten the expectation for the game, and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Means 5: In the configuration of Means 4,
"The said decoration is
It is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end is located rearward of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape. A second decorative part is further provided."

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is arranged below the first decorative portion so that the front end thereof is located rearward of the first decorative portion, and the decorative body is bulged outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. It further comprises a second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape.

As a result, the first decorative part and the second decorative part make it possible for the player to see the decoration as if half-doughnuts are arranged vertically, and the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage plate can be improved. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative part is located behind the tip of the first decorative part, the perspective can be emphasized by the second decorative part to make the decoration appear larger, and the player can enjoy it. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts the interest of players.

In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decoration part and the second decoration part are arranged vertically, each of them is appropriately light-emitting by the decoration body light-emitting means, thereby producing a light-emission effect in which the light rotates, It is possible to show a player a light emitting performance in which light moves up and down, to amuse the player, and to show a variety of light emitting performances to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
It is characterized by ``further comprising a performance operation unit attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decoration and capable of accepting the operation of the player according to the game state''. do.

Here, the ``effect operation part'' includes a ``rotation operation part capable of rotating operation'', a ``press operation part capable of pressing operation'', a ``touch operation part capable of touch operation'', and a ``slide operation part capable of slide operation''. , a “stick operation unit capable of stick operation”, a “composite operation unit capable of rotating operation and pressing operation”, and the like. Further, the "drawing operation section" may be in contact with the upper surface of the decoration, or may protrude from the upper surface of the decoration.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the game machine is further provided with a performance operating section attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and capable of accepting the player's operation according to the game state. be.

As a result, since the effect operation section is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the effect operation section can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type effect is executed), the player can By operating the performance operation unit, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance, and the decrease in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. At this time, by lighting up the decorations with the decoration lighting means, the interest of the player can be attracted to the decorations to which the production operation unit is attached, so that the player who operates the production operation unit can When the participatory performance is executed, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player's attention can be directed to the decorative body (performance operation part) and the operation of the performance operation part can be urged, and the player can perform the performance operation. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player's participatory performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the effect operation section is attached behind the front end of the decoration, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body, clothing, or the like from coming into contact with the effect operation section due to the decoration. The erroneous operation of the performance operation part can be reduced, and the player's participatory performance for operating the performance operation part can be surely entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation part is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the effect operation part looks large and gives a strong impact to the player. At the same time, the game progresses (for example, game media (game ball ), the start of rotation of the rotatable body by inserting a game medium (medal), etc.), it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect operation part is provided behind the front end of the upper surface of the decoration body, the decoration body decorates the outside of the effect operation part, so that the appearance of the effect operation part can be improved. , the performance operation part can be conspicuous, and the game machine can strongly attract the interest of the player.

Means 7: In the configuration of Means 6,
"The production operation unit
an annular rotating operation unit that can be rotated by a player;
and a pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotating operation portion.

Here, the ``rotation operation part'' includes ``thing that can be rotated not only by the player's rotation operation but also by driving a motor'', and ``that can be rotated only by the player's rotation operation''.

Further, the ``pressing operation part'' includes a ``cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part along the inner circumference of the rotary operating part, and a cylindrical central pressing operation part provided in the outer peripheral pressing operation part. , ``single columnar shape'', ``equipped with a cross key or an arrow key'', and the like. Furthermore, the ``pressing operation part'' includes ``a device that can move back and forth in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the protruded position,'' and ``a device that cannot move in the vertical direction.''

According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit is provided with an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotation operation unit. It is what I did.

As a result, since the rotation operation section capable of rotating operation and the pressing operation section capable of pressing operation are provided as the production operation section, in the player participation type production in which the operation of the production operation section can be accepted, the rotation operation Since it is possible for the player to operate by appropriately combining and pressing operations, it is possible to respond to effects that require more complicated input (player's operation), so that more diverse player participation type effects can be played. The game can be presented to a player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less bored, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decoration having the rotating operation part and the pressing operation part attached to the upper surface can be illuminated by the decoration lighting means, the decoration is illuminated when the player participatory performance is executed. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the decorative body (the effect operation part such as the rotation operation part and the pressing operation part) and prompt the player to operate the effect operation part. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the player participation type presentation. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation part or to press the pressing operation part according to the lighting mode of the decorative body. The operation part can be accurately operated, and the player's participatory performance can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, it is desirable that the diameter of the rotary operation part is larger than the distance of the storage plate in the front-rear direction. As a result, the front end side of the rotary operation part protrudes farther forward than the storage dish, so that the rotary operation part can be greatly conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and at first glance It is possible to make the game machine recognize that it is different from other game machines, and to make it easy for the game machine to be selected as the game machine to play. In addition, when the diameter of the rotation operation part is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation part is for rotating operation, and when the player participation type production is executed, the game can be played. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the performance, to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type performance, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotary operation portion is increased, the inner diameter of the rotary operation portion can be increased to increase the size of the pressing operation portion within the ring. It is possible to make the depressing operation of the depressing operation part fun and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Means 8: In the configuration of Means 7,
"The pressing operation part
It is movable between a retreat position projecting slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part and a projecting position projecting upward from the retreat position according to the game state. It is characterized by

Here, the ``pressing operation part'' that can move between the retracted position and the projecting position includes ``thing that can be moved to the retracting position when the player presses it when it is in the projecting position'', and ``when the player is in the projecting position, , which cannot be moved to the retracted position even if it is pressed.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation part is moved between the retracted position slightly projecting upward from the upper surface of the rotating operation part and the projecting position projecting upward from the retracted position according to the game state. , is movable.

As a result, when the pressing operation part is moved to the protruding position according to the game state, the pressing operation part protrudes upward from the rotating operation part, so that the upper surface of the ornament is large together with the rotating operation part. Since it is in a state as if it bulges upward, it is possible to make the surroundings of the decorations appear larger and give a strong impact to the players, and to make the decorations more conspicuous and to enhance the appeal to the players more than other game machines. In addition, since the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upward, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pressing operation part, and the player's expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part can be heightened, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. be able to.

In addition, since the pressing operation part is movable between the retracted position and the projecting position, the player's attention can be directed to the rotating operation part at the retracted position, and the player's interest can be directed to the rotating operation part at the projecting position. Since the pressing operation part can be directed to the pressing operation part, by moving the pressing operation part according to the content of the player participation type performance to be executed, it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation part, and the game can be played. The player can be made to operate the rotary operation part and the pressing operation part accurately to enjoy the player-participation type presentation.

Means 9: In the configuration of Means 8,
"The pressing operation part
a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion that can be pressed by a player when in the projecting position;
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and has a cylindrical central pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position. characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation part includes a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operating part that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and is arranged in the retracted position and the protruding position. and a cylindrical central pressing portion that can be pressed by the player at any position.

As a result, on the upper surface of the decoration that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation part and the rotating operation part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. To strongly attract a player's interest, to heighten the player's sense of expectation for a player-participation type performance in which each operation part is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can be done. In addition, by making the decorative body luminous decoration, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, and furthermore, to the rotary operation part, the outer peripheral pressing operation part, and the central pressing operation part, and to encourage the operation thereof, A decrease in interest can be suppressed by entertaining the player participation type presentation.

Further, when the pressing operation portion inside the rotating operation portion is set to the retracted position, the central pressing operation portion, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and the rotating operating portion have the same height, and the rotating operating portion and the central pressing operation portion are at the same height. becomes operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion project upward from the rotating operation portion, and the central pressing operation portion, The peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operation part become operable. Therefore, according to the contents of the player-participation type performance, the operation part that the player can operate can be appropriately used properly, and more various performances can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored and suppresses the loss of interest.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation part is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part can be seen. can. As a result, even if a player who is under the illusion tries to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation part when the player participatory performance for operating the rotating operation part or the pressing operation part is executed, the outer periphery pressing operation part does not rotate, so that the game is played. The player can be impatient, and the flow of performance can be given a sense of tension to entertain the player.

Means 10: In the configuration of any one of Means 6 to 9,
It is characterized by ``further comprising an operation part light-emitting means for lighting and decorating the effect operation part in accordance with the game state.''

Here, the "operation unit light emitting means" includes "full color LED", "single color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold cathode tube", and the like. are mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is further provided with an operation part light-emitting means for making the performance operation part light-up and decorated in accordance with the game state.

As a result, the effect operation part can be illuminated by the operation part light emitting means according to the game state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with luminescence, the bulging part can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the whole can be decorated with luminescence. By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, increase the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation section by lighting the effect operation part by the operation part light emitting means, the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation part is executed. At times, by decorating the effect operation part with light, the player's interest can be directed to the effect operation part and the operation can be encouraged. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Means 11: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played,
a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front;
a door frame base that closes the front side of the body frame so as to be openable and closable, and has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front;
a bulging portion that bulges forward from a portion of the front surface of the door frame base below the door window, and includes a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game in the game area; ,
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction and extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward with a semi-circular cross-sectional shape, and the front end thereof is forward of the front end of the storage tray and the door frame. a first decorative portion protruding forward from the front surface of the base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base; a decorative body provided with a second decorative portion arranged below the first decorative portion and extending in a semi-annular shape so as to have a semi-arc cross-sectional shape and bulge outward;
a decoration light-emitting means that causes the decoration to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area;
A ring-shaped rotary operation portion attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the ornament and capable of being rotated by the player, and an upper surface of the rotary operation portion within the ring of the rotary operation portion according to the game state. The cylinder is movable between a retracted position slightly projecting upward from the retracted position and a projecting position projecting upwardly from the retracted position, and the player can press the cylinder at the projecting position. and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion which is arranged in the cylinder of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and can be pressed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruding position. an effect operation unit including a pressing operation unit and capable of receiving an operation by a player according to the game state;
and an operation part light emitting means for lighting and decorating the production operation part according to the game state.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the game machine has a game board having a game area in which a game is played, a body frame detachably holding the game board from the front, and a front side of the body frame that can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and the part below the door window on the front of the door frame base bulges forward. A bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing a game within the area, and a bulging portion attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction and bulging outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. The front end of the door frame base protrudes forward from the front end of the storage tray to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base. and a decorative portion, which is arranged below the first decorative portion such that the front end thereof is positioned rearwardly of the first decorative portion, and extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular cross-sectional shape. a decorative body having a second decorative portion that is attached to the decorative body; a decorative body light-emitting means that causes the decorative body to emit light according to a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area; A ring-shaped rotary operation part which is attached to the rear and can be rotated by the player, and a retracted position which slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotary operation part in the ring of the rotary operation part according to the game state and a protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position. It is provided with a push operation part consisting of a cylindrical central push operation part that is arranged in the cylinder and can be pushed by the player at either the retracted position or the protruded position, and the player can press the push operation part according to the game state. This game machine is provided with a performance operation part that can accept an operation and an operation part light-emitting means that lights and decorates the performance operation part in accordance with the game state.

As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward at a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that opens and closes the main body frame. a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base and having a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base; A central pressing operation portion, an outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and a rotating operation portion are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the . As a result, when this game machine is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the decorative body with the effect operation part attached to the upper surface protrudes greatly forward below the door window through which the inside of the game area can be seen. The decoration can be made more conspicuous than other game machines, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the game machine can be selected as the game machine to play. can be made easier. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward under the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage dish, and the length of the decorative body in the horizontal direction can be made longer than before. can be longer. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or puts his or her hand on the storage plate, it is possible to reduce the part of the decorative body that is hidden by the player's hand. To make it easy for a player to notice the luminous decoration of the decorative body when the luminous decoration is made by the decorative body luminous means, to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decrease in interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be made

In addition, since the ornament is projected forward greatly below the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the ornament is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, depending on the game state, when the decoration body is illuminated by the decoration body light emitting means, or the effect operation section is illuminated by the operation section light emission means, the light will illuminate the player from below, A player's line of sight can be directed to the downward decoration body and the performance operation part by the luminous decoration of the decoration body and the performance operation part, and by making the player's line of sight look downward, the game provided in front of the player can be played. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area by keeping the inside of the area away from the player's field of vision. Therefore, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, and when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, special winning opening, etc.) opens and closes , etc., the player is directed downward in the game area by decorating the decorative body and the effect operation unit with light emission, and then when the player returns the line of sight to the game area, the effect image and the movable body are displayed. etc., can surprise the player and give a strong impact, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good will happen. It is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration body can be illuminated according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the performance in the game area during that time. can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the luminous decoration is applied to the decorative body. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the ornaments are projected greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire ornaments, the player moves away from the game machine, so that the entire game machine including the game area can be easily seen. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, thereby appealing to the player. This game machine can be made easy to select as a game machine for playing with an increased . In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to make it easier for the player to extend both hands forward. ) and the handling of the game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and the player is less likely to be stressed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the first and second decorative parts arranged above and below the decorative body are arranged so that the semi-arc cross section extends in a semi-annular shape so as to bulge outward, the To give a smooth and soft impression to a player and to make the player play the game in a relaxed mood because the half of the tube-shaped donut projects forward. It is possible to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest, and to make the player recognize that it is a safe one that is unlikely to be injured even if it touches at a glance, By making the player feel at ease, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, by luminous decoration of the decoration body and the effect operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration body, the entire bulging part bulging forward below the door window can be luminous decoration. Therefore, the bulging portion can be made conspicuous to strongly attract the player's interest, and the entire luminous decoration can make the player think that something good is happening, and the game is played. A player's interest can be directed to the performance operation part to prompt the operation, and by making the player operate the performance operation part, the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are semi-doughnut-shaped, the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion can be illuminated by the decoration light emitting means according to the game state. , the luminous decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect that the light moves and rotates inside the donut, so that the player can enjoy the decoration. It can surprise and make you think that something good is happening, and at the same time, the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decoration can be rotated in the direction in which the light of the first decoration part and the second decoration part is rotated. The player can be urged to rotate in the same direction as . Alternatively, by alternately luminous decoration of the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which the light moves up and down. The moving light can prompt the player to press the peripheral pressing portion or the central pressing portion. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotary operation part or press the pressing operation part by appropriately lighting the first decoration part and the second decoration part. The rotating operation part or the pressing operation part can be operated accurately against the player, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decoration that protrudes greatly forward, the peripheral pressing operation part and the rotating operation part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the visual impact can be enhanced. Thus, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, to heighten the player's expectation for the player-participation type performance in which each operation unit is operated, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest. can.

Further, when the pressing operation portion inside the rotating operation portion is set to the retracted position, the central pressing operation portion, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion, and the rotating operating portion have the same height, and the rotating operating portion and the central pressing operation portion are at the same height. becomes operable and the pressing operation portion is moved from the retracted position to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion project upward from the rotating operation portion, and the central pressing operation portion, The peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operation part become operable. Therefore, according to the contents of the player-participation type performance, the operation part that the player can operate can be appropriately used properly, and more various performances can be handled, and the player can enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, when the pressing operation part is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation part can be seen, so that the player may have the illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation part can be rotated. can. As a result, even if a player who is under the illusion tries to rotate the outer periphery pressing operation part when the player participatory performance for operating the rotating operation part or the pressing operation part is executed, the outer periphery pressing operation part does not rotate, so that the game is played. The player can be impatient, and the flow of performance can be given a sense of tension to entertain the player.

Means 12: In any one configuration of means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the game area and capable of receiving game media;
A pachinko machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of game media into the receiving slot.

Here, the ``acceptance opening'' includes a ``general prize winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``advantageous game state that is always open within the game area and gives an advantage to the player by accepting game media.'' A start prize winning opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether to generate a Acceptable variable winning gates (variable starting gates, prize winning gates, etc.)”, “Normal lottery drawn by game media passing through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area Depending on the result, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that can accept game media, "a specific area within the game area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.) Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game medium, it is possible to accept the game medium, and a variable start is performed to perform a special lottery as to whether or not to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous due to the acceptance of the game medium. Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium received in the accessory winning opening is sorted and received by the distribution means", " Advantageous gaming states that are advantageous to the player include a "big prize winning opening and prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media".

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. A special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols in response to the display, and displaying an advantageous game state in the special lottery result display means. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), A distribution means for distributing the game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning port, the prize winning port is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give an advantage to the player. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "has a large winning opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by receiving game media into the starting opening Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium received in the special prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special prize winning opening or the special prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. (a so-called multi-function machine) having advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing in a pattern of .

According to the configuration of the means 12, the game machine comprises a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of receiving ports which are arranged in the game area and are capable of receiving the game medium, and a game machine into the receiving port. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the receipt of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

It is desirable that the lighting decoration of the decoration by the decoration lighting means is executed when the game medium driven into the game area is received by the receiving slot. As a result, when the game media are received in the receiving port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out and the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the player can be entertained by hitting the game media aimed at the receiving port. can be made easier to continue, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by accepting game media into the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when suggesting the result of the lottery to the player. As one of the effects, the decoration may be decorated with light by the decoration lighting means. As a result, since the decorative body is luminous decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player with the above-mentioned effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player can be obtained by the player. It is possible to make the player think that an advantageous game state will occur (for example, "jackpot"), raise expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous game state, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light, so the effect (for example, It can be suitably used for a ready-to-win effect), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
a plurality of turrets each having a plurality of patterns;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted;
a plurality of stop operation units for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation parts respectively. characterized by being

Here, the ``slot machine'' includes ``a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining a combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game'', and ``a slot machine with a An internal lottery is executed with the start of rotation, and benefits that are advantageous to the player are given according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the internal lottery drawn. It is done", etc. In addition, as "privileges", "big bonus (BB)", "regular bonus (RB)", "cherry rush bonus (CRB)", "replay", "long replay time (LRT)", "assist time ( AT)”, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine comprises a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of patterns, and a starting operation section that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted. and a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotation bodies, and the stop symbols by all the rotation bodies that are stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts. and a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

The luminous decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means is performed when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). Furthermore, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorations may be rotated by the drive means. As a result, the decorative body is decorated with light, so that the interest of the player can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation section can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be luminous decoration. When the combination of specific symbols is stopped, the player can be made to think that an advantageous game state (for example, "BB") will occur, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous game state can be heightened. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest. In addition, as described above, it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light. It can be used to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

Means 14: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 11,
The game machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion game machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "fusion game machine" that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine means that after a predetermined number of game balls, which are game media, are inserted, a plurality of symbols are generated in response to the operation of a start operation unit (for example, an operation lever). After that, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, stop button), and the game ball as the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols. It gives a privilege (for example, advantageous game state) that is advantageous to the player. It should be noted that if the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the passage of the predetermined period of time.

According to the configuration of means 14, the game machine is a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined. As a result, in the fusion game machine that combines the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, it is possible to achieve the effects of any of the means described above.

In addition, the luminous decoration of the decorative body by the decorative body light-emitting means is performed when the combination of symbols whose rotation is stopped except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, the decoration may be decorated with light by the decoration light emitting means, or the decoration may be decorated with light when the internal lottery result is a winning hand. , and the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

[effect]
As described above, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to the player and that can suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game by means of the luminous decoration.

[Relationship between the above-mentioned form and the above-mentioned technical means]
The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is the bulging part of the present invention, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 in this embodiment are the storage trays of the present invention, and the production operation section cover unit in the production operation unit 300 of this embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention, and the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment. The plate center lower decoration 312b is the second decoration part of the present invention, the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention, and the production operation ring decoration in this embodiment The substrate 352, the central button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 correspond to the operating section light emitting means of the present invention.

[Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed in the portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 closing the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. A tray unit 200 having an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the tray unit 200 is about half the width of the door frame base 101. A production operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 is provided, and a central pressing operation section 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation section are arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the production operation section cover unit 310. 303 b , and a rotary operation unit 302 . As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation part cover unit 310 having the effect operation part 301 attached to the upper surface is installed below the door window 101a through which the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized. Since the plate unit 200 (performance operation part cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, it can strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation part cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is largely projected forward below the door frame 3, the production operation part cover unit 310 can be moved forward from the front end of the upper tray 201.例文帳に追加In addition, the length of the effect operation section cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his/her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his/her hand on the upper plate 201, the parts of the whole performance operation part cover unit 310 that are hidden by the player's hand are reduced. Therefore, when the effect operation section cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emitting decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the plate center lower decorative board 316, the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 is given to the player. It is possible to make it easy for the player to notice this, to avoid the player from feeling lost, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 is largely protruded forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 is opened. is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 can be light-emitting-decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 according to the game state, or the effect operation can be performed. When the effect operation section 301 is decorated with light emission by the ring decoration board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the peripheral button decoration board 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301 are illuminated. , the player's line of sight can be directed toward the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation section 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the game area 5a provided in the front can be turned. can be kept away from the player's field of view to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 open and close, etc. Furthermore, by decorating the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation part 301 with light emission, the player is directed downward in the game area 5a. By changing the body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good will happen. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light according to the game state to attract the player's attention, and the effect in the game area 5a can be changed to surprise the player. , the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312 can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous game state (“jackpot game”) in which the player has an advantage). As a result, a premium feeling can be given to the luminous decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with luminescence, thereby making the player happy. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, the player looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the game area can be seen. becomes easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if the game has been put aside for a while, and the player can be relaxed to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, since the effect operation part cover unit 310 projecting greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation part cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by increasing the appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation section cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a. It is possible to easily operate the handle 182 for the purpose and to handle the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201, thereby making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the loss of interest.

Further, the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation section cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semi-annular shape, half of a cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so it is possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression, It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to make the player concentrate on the game and to suppress the decline in interest, and to prevent the player from being injured even if the player touches it at a glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is safe, and to make the player feel at ease, thereby suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

In addition, the plate unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a is provided by simultaneously decorating the performance operation part cover unit 310 and the performance operation part 301 protruding from the upper surface of the performance operation part cover unit 310 with light. Since the whole can be luminous decoration, the dish unit 200 can be conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the whole luminous decoration does not bring any good to the player. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's interest to the performance operation unit 301 to prompt the operation, and by making the player operate the performance operation unit 301, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance and enjoy it. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b are formed in a half-doughnut shape, the plate center upper decoration substrate 314 and the plate center lower decoration substrate 316 are formed in accordance with the game state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are light-emitting, the player can see the light-emitting decoration like an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the luminous decoration is made, for example, if the luminous decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can see the luminous effect as if the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It can surprise you and make you think that something good is going to happen. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction that the light at 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, which are arranged vertically, are alternately decorated with light, so that the player can see a lighting effect in which light moves up and down. At the same time, the vertically moving light can prompt the player to press the peripheral pressing portion 303b or the central pressing portion 303a. Therefore, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are appropriately illuminated to prompt the player to rotate the rotary operation unit 302 or press the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, the player can be caused to operate the rotary operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 accurately, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 extends forward from the side of the door window 101a (outside of the right side). A side window in which three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of a side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction on a flat plate-shaped door frame right side unit 410. 410a is formed, and in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that illuminates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the decoration portion 410b. Therefore, a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. This pachinko machine 1 can be used to increase the expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , the game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

At this time, in the door frame 3, the left side of which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 by the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, the door window 101a Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b are visible. can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, making it difficult for other players to see By making it difficult to receive the feeling, other players can play without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined game state, the LEDs of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light. Visibility through the side window 410a is changed by making the inside 410a bright. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are cylindrical, light can be emitted in a belt-like and radial manner, making the side window interior decoration portions 410b dazzling and making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from between them. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window interior decoration part 410b, so that the player's interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished and the side window is viewed. The visibility through 410a can be lowered, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the inside of the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.例文帳に追加

More specifically, when the game state is such that, for example, the player is in a game state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an advantageous chance, the three side window inner decorative portions 410b are caused to emit light, and the glare of the side window interior decoration portions 410b causes the side windows to emit light. Reduce visibility through window 410a. This makes it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加Because it is possible to avoid this, the other players are worried about the attention and can not concentrate on the game, so they feel uncomfortable, and they feel that they have lost money because they are induced to make mistakes. can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

In addition, since the three side window interior decorative portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction in the side window 410a, the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap each other, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b are not illuminated, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a can be viewed on the opposite side. (within the game area 5a), and a player looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without it.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged with an interval in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b of a certain height are illuminated, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a is displayed. can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when the player is in a game state such as when a chance arrives, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a. It is possible to entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

Furthermore, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending long forward is provided with the side window 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decorative portions 410b are turned off to open the side window 410a. In a state in which the visibility through the pachinko machine 1 is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment can be seen without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily discover that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the game hall, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, which is farther from the left side of the door frame 4 that is rotatably attached to the main frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the body frame 4.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened to carry out work such as maintenance or replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be prevented from becoming a hindrance by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

In addition, since the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called The side window interior decorative portion 410b may be illuminated or extinguished depending on the expected value). More specifically, for example, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b inside the side window is illuminated to make it difficult for other players to look into the game, thereby generating an advantageous game state. When the game is not played (when "losing"), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side window interior decoration part 410b is not illuminated or extinguished, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state ("big win") even in a state where it is easy for other players to peep. ), it is possible to suppress the decline in interest without creating an awkward atmosphere, and to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, thereby increasing the interest in the game of the player. It can make the game more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) in which the player is advantageous occurs (so-called (expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to both upper and lower sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. A specific side window interior decoration portion 410b may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window interior decoration parts 410b are caused to emit light in order from the bottom or in order from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to peek at the game, to suggest an expected value, to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

The three side window interior decorative portions 410b as described above emit light (lighting) and light off, and also include differences in flashing patterns, light emission colors, and changes in light emission colors (for example, from cold blue to hot). A change to a feeling of red, a change to blue-yellow-red like a traffic light, etc.), or a change in brightness (luminance), etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration parts 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to strongly attract the attention of the players.

For this reason, conversely, during the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., depending on whether or not the three side window inner decorative portions 410b emit light and the light emitting mode such as the light emitting pattern, the game state is advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to suggest the degree (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the - It is possible to make the player's heart beat faster, heighten the player's sense of expectation, and suppress a decline in interest.

Also, the three side window interior decoration parts 410b may be arbitrarily turned on or off by operating the effect operation part 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. . As a result, for example, in the ready-to-win effect, the ready-to-win developing effect, etc., when the possibility (so-called expected value) of the occurrence of an advantageous game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player is low, the effect operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to make the side window interior decoration part 410b emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeking at it, so when an advantageous game state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling embarrassed by being watched by other players, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous game state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration part 410b does not emit light. (or turn off the side window interior decoration part 410b), even if other players look into the game, an advantageous game state is generated, thereby preventing an awkward atmosphere and reducing interest. In addition to being able to suppress, it is possible to create an atmosphere as if the other players are cheering for each other.

In addition, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is also possible to set the timing, light emission mode, etc., for the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light. As a result, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal path is opened. When the 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream is disabled by the ball removal movable piece 592 to flow into the ball removal passage 580b. Subsequently, it flows downstream of the dispensing passage 580a and can be sent to the dispensing blade 589 via the dispensing passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball extraction lever 593 is lifted (unlocked) to put the ball extraction movable piece 592 in a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from upstream moves to the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it passes over the ball removal movable piece 592 and flows to the ball removal passage 580b, and can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment side via the ball removal passage 580b. can. Since the payout blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in a normal state, the ball pullout lever 593 prevents the ball pullout movable piece 592 from rotating (first state). , on the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows downstream, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removal movable piece 592. Since the game ball B is paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game ball B upstream from the payout blade 589 becomes relatively slow, so that the game ball B hits. The force acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak, and the opposite side of the ball extraction movable piece 592 to the part that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball extraction passage 580b. is not caught between the wall surface of the ball extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball extraction movable piece 592 is not damaged. As a result, it is possible to reduce damage to the movable ball piece 592 during the game, so that the game is interrupted due to the damage to the movable ball piece 592, thereby avoiding discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a during replacement or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5), the ball removal lever 593 is lifted so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball extraction movable piece 592, flows down to the ball extraction passage 580b side beyond the ball extraction movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout vane 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a side. will flow down quickly. In this way, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball extraction passage 580b at a high speed. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the game ball B vigorously, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear lid 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of this contact. It is not caught between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the ball extraction movement due to the collision of the game ball B can be prevented. It is possible to suppress deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 . For this reason, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can be made difficult to break, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, so that pachinko It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement, maintenance, etc. of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Also, when the ball extraction movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extraction movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B, and the ball extraction passage 580b. , the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 projecting into the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the gap is larger than the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the narrow gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the ball after that is released. Since the movement of the movable ball removal piece 592 is due to inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removal piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball removal piece 592, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not fly out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be surely circulated to the downstream side of the ball extraction passage 580b.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the left side of the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around the axis extending vertically. The body frame 4 attached to is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 on the left side of the body frame 4 (axis center) When the door frame 3 attached to be openable and closable (rotatable by the hinge) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend parallel to each other. A connection that connects the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side, and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. The cable 503 extends from a portion away from the axis of the cable attachment recess 501h recessed rearward on the front surface of the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 toward the axis, and is attached in the cable attachment recess 501h. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the cable guide member 502 further extends to the vicinity of the axis, then folds back and extends in the direction away from the axis, and the door It is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the frame 3, and then connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. It is connected.

Then, when the door frame 3 closing (closed) the front side of the body frame 4 is hinge-rotated around the axis on the left side so as to be opened from the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is opened to the body. Since the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves away from the main body frame 4 as it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (turns) around the mounting shaft 502 c away from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is tilted with respect to the front surface of the body frame 4 . In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the leading end of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are unlikely to become an obstacle.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends from the rotatably attached mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core, the base end of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connecting cable 503 is guided by the connecting cable guide member 502, the folding back portion of the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guide member 502 is the door frame upper hinge pin 122 for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded-back portion of the connection cable 503 can be set to a position that is less likely to get in the way.

On the other hand, when closing the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the body frame 4. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 moves in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 can be moved without being caught between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. can be closed. Therefore, when performing maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, and the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance can be interrupted for maintenance. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the connection cable 503, which extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core and is folded back to extend in a direction away from the shaft core, is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line passing through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is less than or equal to the angle at which it intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis along which the connection cable guide member 502 extends to the posterior surface of the . Further, on the side of the door frame 3 , the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 . 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axial core side.

For these reasons, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state. It is possible to prevent troubles such as disconnection of the connection cable 503 due to contact of the tip of the member 502 with the door frame 3 . Therefore, when a problem occurs during the game that maintenance must be performed by opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and maintenance can be performed. The game can be played smoothly, the increase in the game interruption time can be reduced, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can get used to it. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the fold. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease of the door frame 3 can prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Also, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (closer to the axis than the cable holder 103a) ), and can press the connection cable 503 toward the body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by abutting it (a position closer to the axis center than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103). a portion projecting rearward on the side). As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the open connection cable guide member 502 via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Also, a tangent line that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and is in contact with a circle centered on the central axis (axis) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and passes through the pressing portion, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The crossing angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide body 502a is increased, making it difficult to bend. In addition, the connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, so that the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized reliably.

Further, as described above, since the connection cable guide member 502 has increased rigidity, even if the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made up of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more electric wires can be guided. Therefore, the electrical connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

In addition, with the connection cable 503 placed between the pair of frame pieces 502b of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 is passed through the through-holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 and connected to the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. In addition, by holding the connection cable 503 with the binding band 504 passing through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is removed from the connection cable guide member 502, so that the connection cable 503 is caught between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed. It is possible to avoid the above-described operation and effect.

Furthermore, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame lower side constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylindrical portion 43a. Since the space between the port member 47 and the connecting tube portion 43a in the assembly 40 (the inner space 40a of the curtain plate) is communicated with the main body frame speaker by the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, the deep bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player is entertained by the sound of the heavy bass sound, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game. can be done. Therefore, by providing the main body frame 4 with the cable mounting recess 501h for mounting the connection cable guide member 502, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the main body frame speaker 622 can output deep bass sound. Therefore, the body frame 4 can be provided with the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 can be mounted on the body frame 4 side to achieve the above-described effects. In addition, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame in the body frame 4 passes through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion opening 501b of the base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed below the door window 101a. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end in the longitudinal direction (lateral direction) of the front panel front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member 47 is opened at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end on the side opposite to 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covering the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 ) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the rear panel member 43 . In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 are output from the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. 621a and the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 are radiated to the player side. On the other hand, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting tubular portion 43a into the inner space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43. , and emitted forward from the port member 47 toward the player side. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extended bass range can be output forward from the body frame speaker 622 . In addition, since the connecting tube portion 43a of the panel rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) of the frame, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are connected to the enclosure 624. ) in the depth direction (front-rear direction) at the connection portion with the speaker unit 620a. Attenuation of sound from the space toward the interior space 40a of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 can be reduced as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 is cylindrical on the side of the outer frame 2, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed. 47 can output a sound in which the bass is amplified. The sound forwardly output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound forwardly output from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined to increase the volume. , the player can be made to listen to richer bass sounds, and the player can enjoy sounds such as voices, music, sound effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex speaker). When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 overlaps the sound output forward from the port member 47, the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the volume of the sound increases because the phases are the same. Compared to using a passive radiator, it is possible to increase the sound output with a simple configuration.

Furthermore, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion opening 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimension of them can be increased. enclosure 624 can be increased in volume. More specifically, generally, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the eyes of the player is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a in which games are played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion opening 501b in the main body frame 4 Therefore, by increasing the vertical dimensions of the lower outer frame assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output a sound with a richer bass tone, to entertain the player with the sound, and to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, simply by closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c contact each other. In addition, since sliding resistance is not generated between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening and closing operation of the body frame 4 does not become heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress deterioration of workability during maintenance or the like.

Furthermore, since the seal member 48 seals the space between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the effects described above.

In addition, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made small, so that the game board is relatively small. The game board 5 with a wider game area 5a can be provided by enlarging the insertion opening 501b, and the wide game area 5a can entertain the players more, and the wide game area 5a can be opened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous by being visible, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the horizontal direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are separated from each other by the outer frame. 2 (pachinko machine 1) at a certain distance in front of it, they interfere with each other. You can hear rich bass sound.

In addition, as described above, since the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 to the front is amplified by interference near the player, other sounds distant from the pachinko machine 1 can be amplified. The player will receive unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound suggesting the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 hears a sound with a high volume and a rich low tone, thereby heightening expectations for the game. can be made On the other hand, since it is difficult for players playing other pachinko machines to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult for them to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 indicates the arrival of a chance. This makes it possible to reduce other players' peeping into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the players playing with the pachinko machine 1 feel uncomfortable and reduces their interest. can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connecting tube portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set at the center of the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of the lower outer frame assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the side of the body frame 4 connected to the connecting tube portion 43a Since the position of the connecting portion 621c of the body frame is at the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a across the center in the left-right direction, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by means of other members, and the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the attention of the players.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in the space. A base unit 620b equipped with a ball ejection guiding portion 627, a discharged ball receiving portion 628, and the like, and a ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , a power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with these reliably. .

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center pressing operation portion 303a protruding upward from the upper surface of the plate unit 200 protruding forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is played. , an annular outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 surrounding the outer periphery of the central pressing operation portion 303a, and an annular rotating operating portion surrounding the outer periphery of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. 302 are arranged in an inclined state so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, so that the upper surfaces of the rotating operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are positioned so that the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 (Face) turns in a certain direction, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operation portion 302 are made easy to see, and the three large operation portions (pressing operation portions) arranged concentrically. 303 and the rotary operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and an operation that is clearly different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 distinguishable from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the player's interest. In addition, since the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the player operates the central pressing operating portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b, and the rotating operating portion 302 The expectation for the player participation type performance can be heightened, and the game is advanced so as to enter a game state in which the player participation type performance is executed (here, many game balls B are driven into the game area 5a. ), and when the player participatory type performance is executed, it is possible to make the player participate in the performance easily, so that the player can enjoy the player participatory type performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, depending on the game state, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are moved to a retracted position (lowered position) slightly protruding from the upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 by an elevation mechanism including the operation button elevation drive motor 367 and the like. ) and a protruded position (raised position) that protrudes upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the locking portion 371c of the elevation cam member 371 presses the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b. With the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b cannot be accepted. As a result, the central pressing operation portion 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, in the state of the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is in a state in which it cannot be pressed. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central depressing operation portion 303a by rotating the rotating operation portion 302, or rotating the rotating operating portion 302 by pressing the central depressing operation portion 303a. can be made difficult to occur, the player's participatory performance can be surely enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

By moving to the projecting position, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b protrude greatly upward on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. 303b can be made conspicuous, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be imparted to the pressing operations of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that it is not possible. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to participate in the player-participation-type performance by pressing the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b and the central pressing-operation part 303a, and it is possible to make the player-participation type performance enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

In this projecting position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing portion 303a, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the rotation operating portion 302 are arranged concentrically. , when the central pressing operation portion 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b are pressed, or When the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation part 303a is pressed, or both the central pressing part 303a and the outer peripheral pressing part 303b are pressed. The operating portion 302 may be rotated, or the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b may be pressed when the rotary operating portion 302 needs to be rotated, or the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a may be pressed. can be induced to press the As a result, when performing a pressing operation or a rotating operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotating operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. A sense of tension can be imparted to the pressing operation and the rotating operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and at the same time, the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance of performing the pressing operation and the rotating operation. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game of the player.

In addition, it is provided with a notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600, and in a player participation type effect, the player can perform a central pressing operation in the state of the projecting position where the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is possible. If only the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b is pressed by mistake when the portion 303a should be pressed, the notifying means notifies that the center pressing portion 303a will be pressed, and the pressing operation is restarted. The central pressing operation part 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, and the player can enjoy the player-participation type performance. It is possible to avoid the feeling of being in a bad mood, and to make the player enjoy the player-participation type presentation and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the player believes that he/she is pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type performance is performed despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a. is different from what is desired, and the player may be under the illusion that the center depressing operation section 303a is out of order, which may reduce the interest of the player. On the other hand, as described above, since the error of the pressing operation is notified by the notification means, the player's assumption can be corrected, and the central pressing operation portion 303a is correctly pressed to allow the player to participate. You can enjoy the type production.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and performing the game are located in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is played. , an annular rotating operation part 302 that is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically and that has an outer peripheral side surface, an upper surface, and an inner peripheral side exposed to the outside; A pressing operating portion 303 consisting of a central pressing operating portion 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operating portion 303b is arranged, and the rotary operating portion 302 is rotated according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. Peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect in which rotation operation is performed or pressing operation portion 303 is pressed. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed. When rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the player touches and operates any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface in one direction with the player's hand. can. Therefore, even when a player-participating effect is executed that requests the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. The effect can be enjoyed for the player, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently operated to rotate, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early, and the rotation The player's participatory presentation in which the operation unit 302 is rotated can be continuously entertained, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or rotated with a light force, the player can be requested to perform various rotation operations, To make it possible to request a different rotation operation for each, to present a wider variety and variety of player-participation type performances to the player, to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest. can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (consisting of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the plate unit 200. Since the plate unit 200 protrudes in an arc outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotation base 332 that is attached to the plate unit 200, even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface, the plate unit 200 does not become an obstacle. , the rotary operation unit 302 can be easily rotated, and since the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than right beside the rotary operation unit 302 (perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easier to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotating operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotating operation unit 302 when rotating the rotating operation unit 302 . Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral surface of the rotary operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotary operation unit 302 can be rotated at a faster speed in the player participation type performance. , the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation portion 302 is increased, compared to a rotary operation portion having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle, and a rotation operation can be easily performed. Since it is possible to increase the movement of the player at the time of , it is possible to make the player feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation unit 302 is formed in a ring shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302, the upper surface can be rotated in addition to the outer peripheral side surface. Since it is possible to rotate by touching a portion according to the player's preference and situation, such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved. It is possible to make the audience participation type performance more enjoyable and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation, even if the pressing operation portion 303 is provided in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302, the pressing operation portion 303 can be pressed. The operation part 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are sufficiently enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. can be made

Furthermore, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotary operation. The appearance of the portion 302 can be completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, an airplane control stick, or the like. As a result, for example, if the rotary operation unit is shaped like a steering wheel of an automobile, the moment the player sees the rotary operation unit, the player may assume that the rotary operation unit is to be operated by grasping the rotary operation unit. Therefore, when a player-participation type effect that requires a variety of rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation that is different from the handle operation, and the player-participation type effect cannot be performed. There is a risk that the player will not be able to enjoy the game and will lose interest in the game. However, in this embodiment, the external appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., so that the player is given a preconceived idea of how to operate the rotary operation unit 302. It is possible to wipe out, and the rotation operation part 302 can be operated at will by the player, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, even when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the projecting position, the outer peripheral side surface and upper surface of the rotary operation portion 302 are exposed to the outside. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation part 303 does not become an obstacle, the rotation operation part 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the enjoyment of the rotation operation of the rotation operation part 302 can be suppressed. can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in front and below the game area 5a where a game is played on the game board 5, there are provided an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 for storing game balls B that bulge forward to perform a game. on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular rotating operation part 302 with a rotating shaft extending vertically, and a central pressing operation part 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b in the ring of the rotating operation part 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. As the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotary drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect rotation. , the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345 . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference, unlike the conventional rotary operation part. In addition, since the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, the portion (operation ring transmission gear 350) that transmits the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 ) can be a part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation part 302 . Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a performance in which a sufficient number of LEDs are annularly arranged in a height between the rotary operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345 is provided. An operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes by playing a game in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decoration board By properly emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 352, the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337, which constitute the rotary operation unit 302, are sufficiently (uniformly) decorated with light. It is possible to make the rotary operation unit 302 conspicuous and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotary operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. In the same direction and at the same speed, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be sequentially lighted (turned on/off). As a result, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific parts of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are decorated with light. An illusion can be created as if an LED is provided inside the rotary operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotary operation unit 302 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. Alternatively, according to the game state, when executing a player-participation type effect that requires a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction desired to be operated, the player can be encouraged to rotate the rotary operation unit 302, and the player's participatory performance can be enjoyed to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the rotation direction and rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration board 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotational speed as the rotary operation unit 302 . As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302 rotates together with the rotary operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotary operation unit 302 emits light. , a strong impact can be given to the player, and the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the luminous decoration can give a premium feeling, and at the same time, there is something good for the player. It is possible to make the player think and increase the expectation for the game, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a circular ring on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made to emit light in sequence, the player can see the light emission decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the ring-shaped rotating operation part 302 is for rotating operation, and to make it easy for the player to participate in the performance when the player participation type performance is executed. At the same time, it is possible to heighten expectations for execution of the player participation type performance, and to suppress the decline of the player's interest.

In addition, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached rotatably about an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotary operation unit 302, and when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotation operation A transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the portion 302, and in the plate unit 200, the configuration related to the rotation operation portion 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340). can be compactly assembled, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotary operation unit 302 can be conspicuous and strongly attracted to the player.

Furthermore, it is equipped with an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 via a transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state, and as described above, a rotation that can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 Since the operation part 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation, the rotation operation part 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated in accordance with the game state, and light is emitted. By decorating, it is possible to make the rotary operation part 302 conspicuous in the lower and front part of the game area 5a, and to attract the player's attention to the rotary operation part 302 strongly.

In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation part 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation part 302, the rotation is detected. By rotating the rotary operation unit 302 in the same direction as the operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 can be lightened. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring driving motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, it is possible to apply a load to the rotary operation of the rotary operation unit 302, thereby improving the operational feeling of the rotary operation unit 302. can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed by applying a rotation force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring driving motor 342 for each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, by reciprocally rotating the rotary operation portion 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring driving motor 342, the rotary operation portion 302 can be vibrated. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feeling to the rotary operation unit 302, it is possible to respond to more various player participation type productions, so that the game can be played with various productions. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotary operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be operated in the same manner as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in a direction or in a direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operation feeling can be supported by the light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, since the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotary operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs can be mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be arranged, the rotary operation unit 302 can be more uniformly and brightly decorated with light, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, the rotary operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a are each illuminated and decorated in a favorable state by the effect operation ring decorating board 352, the outer peripheral button decorating board 377, and the central button decorating board 376. Therefore, by making them emit light as appropriate, only the rotary operation portion 302 can be decorated with light, only the pressing operation portion 303 can be decorated with light, only the central pressing operation portion 303a can be decorated with light, and the peripheral pressing operation can be performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated to make it easier for the player to recognize the operation portion to be operated, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation type presentation.

In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the peripheral button decoration board 377, by sequentially illuminating the LEDs, it is possible to create a lighting effect in which the light rotates. It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect by the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the effect by the outer circumference button decoration board 377 in the outer circumference pressing operation portion 303b are associated. Specifically, for example, when prompting the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED of the outer circumference button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light in sequence. , luminous decoration in which the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotary operation unit 302, the LED (peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302, and the player can On the other hand, when it is desired to reverse the rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302, the LEDs of the peripheral button decoration substrate 377 are used to rotate the light in the reverse direction. In this way, since the player can see the effects of various light emission, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, an outer circumference button decoration board 377, and a center button decoration board 376 are arranged to light-embellish the rotary operation part 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b, and the central pressing operation part 303a arranged concentrically, respectively. For example, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the central button decoration board 376 to emit light in this order, or by causing them to emit light in the reverse order, the rotary operation unit 302 It is possible to show an effect of light concentrating from the center pressing operation portion 303a and a light effect of diffusing from the center pressing operation portion 303a to the rotary operation portion 302. FIG. As a result, it is possible to show the player more colorful luminous decorations, to entertain the player, and to direct the player's attention to the central pressing operation part 303a or to the rotation operation part 302. It is possible to encourage the operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302 to enjoy the player participation type presentation.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which a game is played is detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front, and the front face of the body frame 4 can be opened and closed. The door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is closed to the outside is formed with a door window 101a through which the game area 5a can be viewed from the front. is attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the door frame base 101, and below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101, an upper tray 201 and a lower tray 202 for storing game balls B for playing games are provided. A plate unit 200 is installed.

On the upper surface of the plate unit 200, a donut-shaped rotary operation part 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a cylindrical rotary operation part 302 coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotary operation part 302 are provided. A pressing operation portion 303 consisting of an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing portion 303a is attached, and a donut-shaped semicircular arc similar to the rotating operation portion 302 is provided below the rotating operating portion 302. Two large-diameter plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b are mounted vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center top decorations 312a and plate center bottom decorations 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape as shown in FIG. 453 is attached outside the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, three donut-shaped members are vertically arranged by the rotation operation part 302 and the two center upper and lower plate decorations 312a and 312b. Since the operating portion 303b and the central pressing operating portion 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be enhanced, the rotary operating portion 302 and the pressing operating portion 303 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby enhancing the interest. A decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, the rotation operation part 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are formed in a donut shape in which a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is ringed, and are provided below the rotation operation part 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decoration 404, a door frame right side decoration 419, and a door frame top decoration 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the plate center upper decoration 312a. Therefore, the player can see the decoration as if the outer periphery of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be given a sense of unity. The appearance can be improved, and the player's interest can be directed to the inside (the game area 5a, the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube to enhance the appeal. , the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played by heightening expectations for the game on the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Also, a doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since the state is tilted to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 are directed toward the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so that the player can rotate. The operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be fully visible, and the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to appear larger. In addition, as described above, since the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotary operation portion 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, it is possible for the player to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, so that the player can immediately rotate when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player participation type performance to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation part 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center decoration body 312a and the lower plate center decoration body 312b are made larger than the diameter of the rotation operation part 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotary operation portion 302, the upper plate center decoration body 312a, and the lower plate center decoration body 312b protrude farther forward than the upper plate 201. Since the decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b decorate the outer periphery of the rotary operation part 302, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are largely conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b. Therefore, the player can be made to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest and appealing to the player. can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the rotary operation part 302 has a donut shape, which is a circular cylindrical shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotary operation part 302 are easier to handle than in the case of a flat disc shape. Since it becomes easier for a finger to be applied, the player can rotate the rotary operation unit 302 as he likes. Further, since the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation portion 302, the upper center plate decoration 312a and the lower center plate decoration 312b are larger than the rotation operation portion 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his/her arm or put his or her finger on the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b, and the player can operate the rotation operation part 302 in a comfortable posture. At the same time, the presence of the plate center upper decoration 312a and the plate center lower decoration 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation part 302 prevents the player from getting too close to the rotation operation part 302. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary operation unit 302 in which the player's arms and fingers can be moved, and the operability of the rotary operation unit 302 can be enhanced. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 as desired when the player participation type production is executed. It is possible to entertain the participatory performance and suppress the deterioration of interest.

Further, the pressing operation portion 303 composed of the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a inside the rotating operation portion 302 can be moved between a retracted position (lowered position) and a projected position (raised position). Therefore, when the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation portion 303 protrudes upward more than the rotary operation portion 302, so that the rotary operation portion 302 and the pressing operation portion 303 can be made to appear larger. As well as being able to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the operation of the rotary operation part 302 and the pressing operation part 303, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can be made

Also, when the pressing operation part 303 is at the lowered position, the doughnut-shaped rotary operation part 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation part 303, so that the player's attention should be directed to the rotation operation part 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation part 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation part 303 is more conspicuous than the rotating operation part 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation part 303. Therefore, by moving the pressing operation part 303 between the lowered position and the raised position according to the content of the player participation type presentation to be executed, the player is prompted to operate the presentation operation part 301 to be operated. This allows the player to operate the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 accurately to enjoy the player-participation type performance.

Further, when the pressing operation portion 303 inside the rotary operation portion 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotary operation portion 302, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b, and the central pressing portion 303a are at the same height, and the rotation operation is performed. When the portion 302 and the central pressing operation portion 303a become operable and the pressing operation portion 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a protrude above the rotating operation portion 302. At the same time, the rotation operating section 302, the outer peripheral pressing operating section 303b, and the central pressing operating section 303a become operable. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to respond to more various productions and to allow the player to enjoy various operations. This makes it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the plate center upper decoration board 314 and the plate center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 Since the board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided, the rotation operation part 302 and the plate center upper decorative body 312a are provided. The overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved by luminous decoration of the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by strongly attracting the interest of the players. In addition, the rotation operation part 302, the plate center upper decoration 312a, the plate center lower decoration 312b, the door frame left side decoration 404, the door frame right side decoration 419, and the door frame top decoration 453 are appropriately illuminated. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from within the game area 5a to the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or can be guided from the production operation unit 301 to the game area 5a. The player can be made to operate the performance operation part 301 or play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and the player can be prevented from getting bored and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Although the pachinko machine 1 has been described above with a preferred embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and changed in design in various ways.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are changed to different effects, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is prompted. This makes it possible to perform more diverse player-participation-type presentations, entertain the player, and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the pressing operation portion 303 (the central pressing portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing portion 303b) is moved to the raised position, pressing the pressing portion 303 moves to the lowered position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the downward movement may be restricted after a slight downward movement from the elevated position when the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed in the elevated position.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the rotating operation part 302 is provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 that protrudes forward, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotating operation part is arranged inside the dish unit. In addition, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation portion may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the plate unit. This also allows the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation section as described above, and suppresses the loss of interest in the game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the body frame 4 is provided with the speaker unit 620a communicating with the panel inner space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting tube portion 43a, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

The pachinko machine described so far includes the following technical ideas.
"Equipped with a game board having a game area formed therein in which a game ball shot with a predetermined shooting force can flow down; In a gaming machine having a second game area in which game balls shot with a specific shooting force stronger than the shooting force can flow down,
A communication passage through which the game ball fired with the specific firing force can pass prior to entering the second game area,
The communication passage portion is provided with a plurality of release portions for releasing the passing game balls to the second game area so that the passing game balls enter the second game area differently, and further the A branching portion is provided to separate the passages so that a plurality of ball passages are formed in the vertical direction on the upstream side of the plurality of discharge portions,
A first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branching portions communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and a first ball passage of the plurality of ball passages formed by the branching portions communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions. A game machine in which the second ball passage is configured to communicate with the second ejection portion of the plurality of ejection portions. ”

Such a game machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages of the communication passage portion and a plurality of discharge portions communicating with each ball passage, and the point of entry into the second game area differs depending on which ball passage passes through. The falling modes in the two game areas are different. If the falling pattern in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will also be different. When a game ball is obtained, a sufficient sense of accomplishment and satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the player's attention is focused on shooting the game ball toward the second game area, the interest in the game increases.

In the above game machine, a drop port connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage is provided in a part of the branch portion of the communication passage, and a part of the game balls flowing through the first ball passage is dropped into the second ball passage. It may drop to a specific location in the second game area from the second release part.
By doing this, both the firing direction and the firing force must be satisfied in order to aim at the first ejection part connected to the first ball passage, so the handle operation is performed with more careful concentration.

[20. Other form of pachinko machine 1]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of another embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 212. FIG. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is mainly the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 of the above-described pachinko machine 1, descriptions other than those related thereto are omitted in principle. Therefore, in FIGS. 187 to 212 and 1 to 186, the constituent elements with the same reference numerals are, in principle, the same or have the same function.

[game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 199, the game board 5 of Embodiment 1 includes a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a on the front surface, a center member 2500 attached to the game panel 1100, and the game panel 1100. and a production unit 814 attached to the rear side of the.

[Game panel]
The game panel 1100, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. and a front component 1000 enclosing the .

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood board as described above, and a synthetic resin cell that becomes the first decorative surface 819 is adhered to the entire front surface thereof. Embellishments 820a (a random arrangement of a boy's face in this variant 1) are printed. Also, a large through-hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is formed at a position near the center of the base panel 1110 .

[Back side decorative member]
201, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 202, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. Through the support frame 852 (specifically, because it is screwed to the front surface of the effect support frame 852, it is integrated with the effect support frame 852 in terms of form.) It is arranged on the back surface of the base panel 1110, and the A background decoration 816 (for example, the decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 and are connected to complete one character.) is formed. In the second decorative surface 822, plate pieces 822p of several blocks are arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward, so that the decoration 816 itself is given a three-dimensional effect of perspective.
The rear side decorative member 817 is arranged in such a manner as to correspond to the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 for mounting the center member 2500. The upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, the right decorative member 817c, and the left decorative member. 817d, of which the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c are arranged so that their second decorative surfaces 822 face the inside of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d A second decorative surface 822 is positioned to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. In addition, since the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged opposite to the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, it is not visible to the player in a normal state, but is shown in FIG. Some of them can be recognized when viewed obliquely. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the feeling that the background decoration 816 extends to the far side of the base panel 1110 where the player cannot see, so that the three-dimensional effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component member 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, not shown Windmills, obstacle nails, etc. that change the drop of game balls are appropriately provided according to game contents, and an out ball port 1008 for collecting out balls is provided at the lowest position.
Most of these members are made of transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Front component]
As shown in FIG. 200, the front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that separates the upper outer side of the play area 5a and the center member 2500, and an inner rail that separates the play area 5a from the side and lower sides of the center member 2500. A game ball shot from the shooting rail 544 passes through the shooting passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 to the upper part of the game area 5a or the upper part of the center member 2500. be guided.
The front component member 1000 is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, and its surface can be seen through when installed on the base panel 1110 . On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of this other embodiment 1 has the background decoration 820a on the entire front surface, so that the front component 1000 is hardly conspicuous when camouflaged with the background decoration 820a. The entire front surface of the base panel 1110 appears as if it were a large playing area 5a. Therefore, a visual effect is obtained as if the entire game panel 1100 were expanded to the game area 5a, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine surrounded by an opaque front structural member.
In addition, in this other form 1, the background decoration 820a inside and outside the game area 5a is unified in terms of design (including not only uniformity in appearance but also conceptual uniformity) to visually expand the game area 5a. However, the background decoration 820a of the portion corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component 1000 may be designed differently without uniformity. In such a case, since the front component 1000 can be decorated by printing the first decorative surface 819, there is no need to decorate the front component 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

The game panel 1100 of the present embodiment 1 is configured as described above. Since the decorations 816 and 20 have a three-dimensional effect of perspective, it is possible to provide a novel game machine.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 includes a mounting flange portion 830 having a contour slightly larger than the contour of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and protruding from the back side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to be loosely fitted into the through hole 1112. It has an inner frame portion 831 and a surrounding frame 832 projecting from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a. is formed by
A tapered portion 833 that tapers toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the attachment flange portion 830 of the center member 2500 . In this other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 193, at least the portion that can be seen by the player during play (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 in the upper half of the center member 2500) taper portion 833 penetrates. Conventionally, the engagement between the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is set shallow so as to hang on the edge of the hole 1112 . As a result, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 passes through the tapered portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and changes like a prism and leaks to the outside. can be easily and effectively decorated.

In addition, the center member 2500 is a board having a production area 834 facing a drum 854 (described later) of the production unit 814 inside the surrounding frame 832, and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a. and a decorative member 836 having a shape.

[Production area - light guide plate unit]
A performance area 834 of the center member 2500 is provided with a light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of a drum unit 855, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 197, this light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting a light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 containing a light emitting device 838 and a horizontal frame 840. 839 and the light emitting device 838 of the horizontal frame 840 irradiate the light guide incident end surface of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image in a dramatic manner.
It should be noted that the light guide plate 842 is fitted into the display window 841 in such a manner that it rattles by several millimeters (for example, 3 mm). By doing so, even if the light guide plate 842 thermally expands, stress is less likely to be applied, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state in which some of its four sides are fixed with screws (not shown) or the like, and the other sides are unconstrained and movable.

[Decorative member]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inner side of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. It has a decorative surface 835 with a height almost flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 198, this decorative surface 835 has uniformity with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (not only uniformity in appearance but also uniformity in concept). ) is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 197, the difference in position and size between the rendering area 834 and the through-hole 1112 indicated by imaginary lines in the same figure (marginal part) can be filled in in a natural way. That is, the background decoration 820b applied to the first decorative surface 819 naturally bites into the center member 2500. As shown in FIG. In addition, although uniformity is achieved by the decoration, the light-emitting decoration may be arranged so as to straddle the outer and inner sides of the center member 2500 .
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decorative member 836 according to the size of the rendering area 834, it is possible to support many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500. FIG.
In addition, the decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 of this other form 1 is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding properties. By contrast with the decoration 816 of , the three-dimensional effect is further enhanced. Moreover, there is also the advantage that the light illuminating from the inside of the through hole 1112 can be moderated in an indirect lighting manner due to the light shielding property of the decoration 843 .
In addition, in this other form 1, a decorative lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the front upper part of the production support frame 852 described later and above the drum 854 described later, and overlaps with the decorative lamp 844H of the decorative member 836. A notch 845 is formed at the position to avoid polymerization. As a result, there is no possibility that the light of the decorative lamp 844H is reflected on the decorative member 836 and becomes difficult to see, so the definition of the decorative lamp 844H is improved.

[Accessories, etc. attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, the center member 2500 has a stage shelf 2503 which allows the game ball to drop into the game area 5a while floating in the left and right direction, and a stage shelf 2503 which enters from the game area 5a. Warp path 847 for guiding game ball B to stage shelf 2503 is integrally provided. As described above, the first starting port 2002 is arranged directly below the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a, and when a game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it can win a prize with a high probability.

In addition, in the right outer upper half of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 facing the front, there is provided a discharge part 848 that guides the game ball jumping over its own upper part along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a. It is The release portion 848 has a width of approximately one game ball, and has semi-cylindrical obstruction ridges 849 protruding alternately on the right inner wall and the left inner wall in the front view in the passage at substantially equal pitches. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 contacts a large number of obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, as if it were falling while colliding with obstacle nails in the game area 5a for a suitable period of time. It is hung and led to the lower right side of the game area 5a.

In addition, a second starting opening 2004 is provided in the right outer lower half of the enclosing frame 832 of the center member 2500, and the winning opening is opened and closed by turning the opening/closing piece 850. The second starting opening 2004 and the ejection portion A passage-type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of the vertical direction of 848 . The gate portion 2003 is installed on an extending portion 830a extending in a horizontal peninsular shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and the rear portion of the gate portion 2003 is aligned with the extending portion 830a of the center member 2500 so as to be aligned with the base panel 1110. is housed in a curved notch 1112a carved in the through hole 1112 of . A gate portion 2003 (the same applies to the other winning openings) is installed in the extended portion 830a projecting like a peninsula from the mounting flange portion 830, and a bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. Compared to the case where the gate 2003 or the like having its own mounting flange is separately installed in the independent form, the mounting flange on the side of the center member 2500 becomes unnecessary, resulting in an installation space. can be made compact, and the area of the plywood board of the base panel 1110 in the portion where the game balls flow can be increased accordingly. The plywood board is characterized by the fact that it is easy to drive and adjust the nails, and that the nails do not easily come off even after long-term use. The game ball entering the discharge part 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, it is discharged to the area of the plywood board where the obstacle nail is provided. That's what it means.

[Production unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a display device 851 capable of displaying, as game information, the result of a lottery relating to a big win, which is started when a game ball is detected by the first starting port 2002, for example. , a frame-shaped production support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the production support frame 852 and covers the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type such as the liquid crystal display device described above or a real movement type capable of displaying the game information by mechanical changes such as rotation and stoppage of a movable object. 1 uses the latter production type.
As shown in FIGS. 203 to 207, a specific actual movement type display device 851 includes a plurality of sets of drum units 855 arranged in a horizontal row (three sets in this embodiment 1) capable of rotating and vertically moving a drum 854, which is a movable object. (set) are arranged side by side and fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856 at the top and bottom thereof.

[Drum unit]
Each drum unit 855, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. It is roughly composed of a movement driving device 858 for vertically moving the drum 854 and an illumination member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify the game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and patterns are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface of the drum 854 .
A rotary drive device 857 for rotating the drum 854 includes a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854 , and a rim-shaped ring member 860 that is disposed at the center of the drum 854 and gradually expands in diameter toward the ring member 860 . In addition, a central member 861 having a frustum cylindrical shape that opens outward on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric By rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863, the central member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 rotate or stop together.

The rotation drive device 857 is provided with air cooling means for cooling the inside of the drum 854 by passing air through it. That is, the air cooling means consists of sirocco fan-shaped intake winglets 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and propeller fan-shaped exhaust winglets 865 formed on the connecting member 862 . By rotating in the indicated direction, air is sucked from the opening of the central member 861 in the manner of a sirocco fan and discharged into the space between the outside of the central member 861 and the inside of the drum 854, and the air guided into this space is driven by the propeller fan. to the outside of the drum 854 from between the connecting members 862 and 862 in the manner of . Therefore, a U-turn airflow is generated in which the intake air and the exhaust air flow in opposite directions inside and outside the central member 861 of the drum 854, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

A movement driving device 858 that vertically moves the drum 854 together with a rotation driving device 857 includes an electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855, a disk-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the illumination member 859, and a support substrate 866 that can slide up and down. a guide shaft 867 supported by the support, a male screw-shaped drive shaft 868 erected parallel to the guide shaft 867, upper and lower bearing pedestals 869 supporting the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing pedestal and a lift motor 870 for drive shaft 868 mounted on top of 869 .
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the lift motor 870, the support substrate 866 is lifted or lowered along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, thereby lifting the drum 854 together with the rotation drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the imaginary line in the figure. Incidentally, the drum 854 is usually stopped at a substantially intermediate position (hereinafter referred to as a "reference position") of the movable range. may be moved up and down separately. Also, when the drum 854 is at the highest or lowest position, a part of the drum 854 is out of the display window 841 as shown in FIG. 207 and cannot be seen. It exists within the frame of the display window 841 .

By the way, the movement driving device 858 of this other embodiment 1 can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction. A set is added to rotate the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 in a horizontal direction, and it is incorporated between the original support substrate 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, the two added to the original support substrate 866 The bearing bases 869 may be fixed side by side to cross the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 sideways, and the electric motor 863 may be attached to a new support substrate 866 supported by the sideways drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. good. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the performance by the drum 854 is greatly improved, and the members that interfere with the up and down movement can be temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. is also possible.

Further, in the display device 851 of the first embodiment, linear illuminations 871 a to 871 d are provided between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855 . The linear illuminations 871a to 871d are light emitters such as cold-cathode tubes, for example, and are formed so as to curve in an arc shape (arcuate shape) toward the front surface (player). The degree of curvature of the linear illuminations 871a and 871d located between the drums 854 is set to be gentler than the degree of curvature of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854. are installed so as to protrude toward the player from the linear illuminations 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854. As shown in FIG. This makes it possible to impart a three-dimensional effect to the front surface of the drum 854 with the linear illuminations 871a to 871d turned on.

The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear side by a production support frame 852 which will be described in detail below. is designed to fit. In other words, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width (diameter of the drum 854) of the drum 854, which is a movable object, so that the display window 841 shows the game information in front of the stopped drum 854. (A combination of numbers or patterns in this portion indicates whether the lottery result is successful or not.) In addition, at least one of the upper and lower outlines of the drum 854 is visible to the player. Since at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 can be seen through the display window 841, the player can feel as if the drum 854 is in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 as described above, the main control board 1310 performs a lottery to determine hit or miss. is performed, and the result of the lottery is a combination of the patterns of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 after a certain period of production operation by mechanical change that appropriately combines the rotation and vertical movement of the drum 854. is displayed. If the result of the lottery is a big win, a benefit is given that a large amount of prizes to the big prize winning port 2005 can be easily won within the range of predetermined conditions. Of course, the presentation operation of the display device 851 may be of any kind.
In addition, in this other form 1, at the timing (preferably before the large winning opening 2005 opens) at which a large amount of winning to the big winning opening 2005 is possible, it is necessary to hit the right hand, that is, how to hit the game ball. Indicate that you should hit the right side of the game area 5a (for example, switch the display panel 2005p indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. A guidance such as "Please hit to the right." there is

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 is in the form of a picture frame having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851 , the back side decorative member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the display device 851 on all sides. In addition, the effect support frame 852 is provided with a decorative lamp 844H positioned above the drum 854 on the front upper part as described above, and furthermore, the effect support frame 852 has a decorative lamp 844H positioned above the drum 854 on the front lower part of the effect support frame 852 below the drum 854. A decorative lamp 844L is provided for decoration. By blinking the upper and lower decoration lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, it is possible to clearly inform the target of attention among the plurality of drums 854 .

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the production support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851. As shown in FIG. , and the rear surface is also provided with ventilation holes 874 for heat dissipation. In addition, above and below the rear cover 853, effect lighting 875 for irradiating light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided, so that the contour of the drum 854 is illuminated from the rear side. there is At least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 has a dark color (specifically, black) in order to enhance the effect of the light produced by the production lighting 875 . Also, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853, and a light emitting body 876 such as an LED is exposed inside the rear cover 853 from there. A half mirror 877 is provided in a portion corresponding to the production lighting 875 in the rear cover 853 so that the rear side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface when the production lighting 875 is off. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also produced gorgeously.

It should be noted that the above-described Embodiment 1 includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical thought 1]
a game panel having a game area in which game balls can flow down;
a center member having at least a performance area inside an enclosing frame that is attached to a through hole formed in the game panel and capable of preventing inflow of game balls from the game area, the game machine comprising:
A game machine comprising a decorative member provided with a decorative surface substantially flush with the game area inside the surrounding frame of the center member.

[Technical thought 2]
a display device that displays game information by moving a movable object;
a display window that allows the presence of the display device to be recognized,
A gaming machine that allows a player to recognize game information by means of the movable body that is recognizable through the display window,
A gaming machine, wherein the display window is formed in such a manner that at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen by the player in addition to the part that displays the game information of the movable object.

[Technical thought 3]
A game machine comprising a game panel having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
a first decorative surface for applying background decoration formed on the front surface of the game panel;
A gaming machine comprising a second decorative surface for applying background decoration formed at a position recessed from the front surface of the game panel.

[Technical Thought 4]
A game machine comprising an operation medium for game operation on the front surface of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that a hand cover section is provided on the front surface of the door frame so as to cover the vicinity of the periphery of a player's hand that operates the operation medium.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 of the first embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 208 to 212 and the like. Since the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is almost the same as that described in paragraphs [0237] to [0252] and [Fig. 54], Figs. Refer to FIG. 54 for a description of the parts not shown.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (door frame base unit 100), and is manually rotated by the player to control the ball shooting device 540 and shoot the game ball B in the upper tray 201. The player hits the game area 5 a of the game board 5 .

The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 as an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the handle base 181, a handle decoration substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184L mounted on the front surface, and covering the front side of the handle decoration substrate 184. A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 and a hand cover part 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 to cover the vicinity of the periphery of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182.

The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and the handle 182 is attached to the front end of the handle unit 180. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 (see FIG. 54) meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a (see FIG. 54) that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. ) and sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186 (see FIG. 54).

One end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 can be returned to the initial rotation position (counterclockwise rotation start point when viewed from the front). A biasing handle return spring 190 is attached to an inner base 186 at one end and to a transmission gear 188 at the other end. and an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 54) biasing in the direction.

The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a front end of the handle base 181 extending outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 (see FIG. 54), which protrudes and the base end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 are detected. and a single button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 .

[Handle base]
A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending back and forth, a cup-shaped front end portion 181b provided at the front end of the base portion 181a, and a recessed portion extending inward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. and three grooves 181c (see FIG. 54) extending in the axial direction and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. A base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 . Also, the three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are positioned in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes non-rotatable relative to the handle attachment member 102 .
Around the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, a bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in white is provided in a state of being fixed to the handle attachment portion 102. The full-color LED light emitted from the end of the frame right-side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected with almost the same color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disc having a diameter and thickness suitable for a player to hold with one hand, protrudes from its outer peripheral surface to a height greater than or equal to the height at which one finger can be inserted in the circumferential direction. Four finger hooks 182g to 182j protruding at substantially point-symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, at equal intervals (90 degrees), and a circle centered on the rotation axis (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a hook that protrudes rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slit 182e and engages the other end side of the handle return spring 190. and a stop protrusion 182f (see FIG. 54).

A decorative handle 1820, which is an annular decorative member concentric with the handle 182, is provided integrally with the handle 182 through the finger hooks 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed inside the hollow. A large number of light-emitting LEDs 1823 and light-emitting LEDs 182L provided in a dotted manner in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j enable an appropriate full-color presentation by light.

In addition, as an example of light production by the light-emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, by visually changing the light emission mode of the plurality of light-emitting LEDs 182L, it is visually shown that the decorative handle 1820 is rotating to the right. It can be used as the above-described hitting style instruction means for instructing timing. In addition, preferably, full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are used to produce a clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3, which makes it even more dynamic. can be instructed to hit to the right. For example, the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are changed to "lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper right → upper right → right middle → The light is emitted in the order of the bottom right and the light is directed to flow to the right (clockwise), and the light emission LED 1823 of the decoration handle 1820 is caused to emit light in the form of inheriting the flow of light in the clockwise direction. In particular, if light is emitted from the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full color LED positioned at the bottom of the door frame right side unit 410, a more interlocked (integrated) effect can be achieved. In this case, since the two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820 are used to instruct the player how to hit the ball, even if one of the LEDs fails, the player can play the ball without any trouble. can direct you.
In this way, as an example of the light effect, the one indicating the right timing is shown. . For example, when instructing left-handed hitting from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the light production in the case of right-handed hitting (for example, the light emitting LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side is turned , the full-color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 are turned lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left. → light up in the order of the lower left), or instead of instructing how to hit, for example, when a performance with a high degree of expectation for a hit is executed, a performance linked to that is executed, or the degree of expectation for a hit For example, the production linked to the production is executed before the production with a high value is executed. Further, the term "interlocking" as used herein refers to the interlocking of the above-described light effect that instructs how to play, for example, the effect that light flows from the top to the bottom of the pachinko machine 1 (the full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). are illuminated, then the upper left and upper right are illuminated, then the top→middle→bottom of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410 are illuminated, and finally the illumination LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is illuminated. to emit light).
In addition, when the light emission LED 182L of the decoration handle 1820 is used as the hitting method instruction means, the light emission timing may be the same as the lighting of the display panel 2005p as other hitting method instruction means, or may be set to the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as the displayed right-handed instruction, or before or after them, but it is better to do it at least before a large amount of prizes can be won in the big prize hole 2005 (before the big prize hole 2005 is opened). , is preferable in terms of protecting the interests of the player.

In addition, as an example of lighting effects of the light-emitting LEDs 182L provided in dots on the front surfaces of the finger hooks 182g to 182j, the lighting pattern can be changed according to the firing intensity of the ball launching device 540. FIG. For example, if the emission intensity is "weak", the color is blue, and if the emission intensity is "medium", the color is green. In a general pachinko machine 1, the right-handed state with the firing intensity set to ``strong'' is an advantageous game state such as a big hit or a variable probability, so when the firing intensity is set to ``strong'', psychological excitement is induced. It is preferable to light red, which is said to have an effect.

When the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the two finger hooks 182g and 182i are oriented horizontally, and the remaining two finger hooks 182h and 182j are oriented vertically. It is set in a cross shape so that when the player grips the handle 182 in a normal gripping style, the right thumb naturally engages with the lower side of the finger hook portion 182g located on the peripheral surface on the left side of the center of rotation. It has become. Therefore, in this other form 1, the finger hooking portion 182g is a finger hooking portion for normal operation. In this normal gripping style, the fingers other than the thumb cover the handle 182 in such a manner as to sandwich the upper finger hook portion 182h.
On the other hand, the finger hook portion 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle 182 is hardly touched by any finger in the above-described normal gripping style, but the gripping hand, for example, can be used to hold the handle 182. If a finger such as the index finger is hooked on the finger hooking portion 182j, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise when viewed from the front by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this other form 1, as described above, a hitting instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing to hit to the right is provided, and the hitting instruction means should hit the right side of the game area. This instruction can be handled by applying a force in the direction opposite to the instruction (force in the left direction when viewed from the front) to the finger hook portion 182j of the handle 182. FIG.
Alternatively, the handle 182 may be rotated by pulling upward or downward by putting fingers on the finger hooks 182h and 182i other than the finger hooks 182g and 182j.

[Cover pedestal]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and has a plurality of mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a is attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation from the initial rest position.

[Handle cap]
The handle cap 185 has a round front surface that bulges forward and a center portion that is translucent. The inside of the handle cap 185 is equipped with a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. This handle cap 185 can be produced with light by appropriately lighting the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. FIG.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in front view, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated through the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. rotates. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. A game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.例文帳に追加In addition, in this other form 1, it is set so that when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, the momentum of the game ball is increased.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player touches the handle 182 or the finger hooks 182g to 182j or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, the game is started. The static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player's contact with the handle 182 or the like is detected. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player. The drive of the shooting solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the , and the game ball B can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a manner different from the original to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

Also, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the ejection control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single shot button 193. The firing solenoid 542 is de-energized. As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 182, and by canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, the single-shot button 193 can be operated before the operation. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a again with the hitting strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. As shown in FIG. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is slanted so that the right end side is positioned more rearward than the left end side in a plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the hole is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform the rotation operation without discomfort.

[Hand cover part]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 that surrounds the vicinity of the outer periphery of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outer side of the handle attachment portion 102, as shown in FIG. , its front opening 195h is generally aligned with the rear face of the ornamental handle 1820. As shown in FIG. The joint ring 1824 projecting from the rear surface of the hand cover portion 1820 and the annular slit 195a formed on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195 are slidably fitted together to form a joint between the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820. Connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 without the decorative handle 1820. In this case, the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 extends to the outer periphery of the handle 182. Along with extending, the front opening 195h may be provided with a decorative means similar to the decorative handle 1820. FIG.

In the hand cover portion 195 of this other embodiment 1, a window opening 195w is formed in a part of the body portion and communicates with the outside. To prevent stagnation of drinks, etc., which flowed in due to negligence, and to prevent fraudulent acts by improving the visibility of the inside.
Note that the handle 182 may be made detachable as shown in FIG. 212 in order to facilitate the cleaning of the inside of the hand cover portion 195 and the wiping of the beverage that has flowed into it. Specifically, the base 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the side of the handle mounting portion 102 are provided with engagement/disengagement means 197, for example, a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b. By engaging (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 212) and disengaging (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 212) the engaging/disengaging means 197, the handle 182 is attached to the handle mounting portion together with the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. You may make it removable from the 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle mounting portion 102 and the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 can be fully opened, thereby facilitating cleaning of the inside and wiping of spilled beverages. Also, preferably, if the release operation of the engaging/disengaging means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (for example, insertion of a thumbtack-type pin), there is no danger that the handle 182 will be pulled out by mischief or the like.

By providing the hand cover portion 195 on the outside of the handle 182 as described above, the player's hand (fingers) operating the handle 182 seems to have entered the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she is operating the pachinko machine 1 more strongly.
In addition, if a blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 to blow air, most of the wind blows out from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the player's hands can be reliably blown with air. can be done. Therefore, for example, when there is a high expectation for a big hit, or when there is a high expectation for an advantageous hit (a hit with a high probability or a lot of balls), it is possible to send the wind with a predetermined effect (for example, like an air cannon) When it is controlled in a game state (for example, during variable probability, during short time, during latent probability), the wind is sent at regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or after performing a predetermined lottery, the lottery It is possible to effectively perform effects such as sending wind when winning. Of course, you may make it always send wind.
Also, although not shown, a speaker for games (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195 . In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is emitted from the front opening 195h of the hand cover part 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt in the hands of the player.

The above other form 1 includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical Thought 5]
a ball launcher for hitting game balls into the game area of the game board;
A game machine comprising a handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball launching device by a manual rotating operation,
The handle is
a finger hook for normal operation, which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side of the center of rotation of itself and can be engaged with the thumb of the hand operated in a normal grip style;
In addition to the finger hook, it is provided on the peripheral surface below the rotation center of the handle and has a finger hook that can be operated irregularly and can be engaged with at least one finger of the player's hand. A gaming machine characterized by:
In addition, in such gaming machines,
A hitting method instructing means for instructing the player how to hit the game ball according to the game situation,
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force increases when it is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front,
When the hitting method instructing means indicates that the player should hit the right side of the game area, it is possible to respond by applying a force in the left direction in front view to the finger hook portion for the irregular operation of the handle. can be

Other forms of the pachinko machine have been described above, but it is of course possible to modify the other forms as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels.

Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotary drive device 857 and the lift motor 870 of the movement drive device 858 are oriented in different directions. On the other hand, the output shaft of the lift motor 870 is oriented perpendicular to the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, and so on. can be made the same. However, in the case where the electric motor 863 and the lifting motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, it is necessary to specify the motor that is the cause when trouble occurs in either the rotating operation or the lifting operation of the drum 854, and to take appropriate measures. It is excellent in that it can be performed quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but the base panel 1110 may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.
In the above embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are patterns such as printing, but they may be decorations using light emitters such as LEDs.

In the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 and the handle 182 rotates between them. You can get it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover portion 195 are combined. can be enjoyed to

[Other pachinko machines]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 224. FIG. 187 to 212 mainly in the number, arrangement, and structure of the handle units 180, so in principle, other than those related to them, Description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 213, the pachinko machine 1 has handle units 180, which are input media for games, on both sides of a forward-protruding structure composed of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, and the like. has two In FIG. 213, the right handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as the "right handle unit") 180(R) adjusts the strength of the hitting ball of the ball launching device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as "left handle unit") 180(L) is used as input means for the player in the above-described player participation type production.

Each of the handle units 180(L), (R) is provided with an operating portion comprising the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the finger hooks 182g to 182j as described above. is inserted and rotated (operated).

In each handle unit 180(L), (R), the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is It is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102 , so that the entire unit can move linearly in the front-rear direction within the hand cover portion 195 . Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of a handle position control means 4000 (to be described later), which is loaded in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in a compressed state. Always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180(R) adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by turning the handle 182 as described above. 195h (hereinafter referred to as "front position"), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle Position Control Means of Right Handle Unit]
A handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as a "right handle position control means") 4000 of the right handle unit 180(R) includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at its tip, and the lock arm 4004, It consists of a solenoid 4005 that changes between a horizontal locking posture (see solid line in FIG. 218) and a released posture (see imaginary line in FIG. 218) in which the roller 4003 side is flipped up.
When the lock arm 4004 is in the horizontal locking posture, it lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180(R) and the handle mounting member 102 like a support rod to hold the right handle unit 180(R). When the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state to swing the lock arm 4004 to the release posture, the roller 4003 is disengaged from the handle base 181 (the support of the lock arm 4004 is disengaged). The right handle unit 180(R) is unlocked and can be moved linearly behind the hand cover portion 195 (hereinafter referred to as "rear position") as shown in FIG.
The lock arm 4004 is urged from the unlocked posture to the locked posture by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown). When returned to the position, it automatically returns to the locked posture.

The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as input means for appropriately detecting an operation to move the entire unit from the locked state with a sensor and issuing an input signal to the player participation type production (that is, one The handle unit 180 can be used to input the striking force of the ball launching device 540 and input the player participation type effect.) In the embodiment, the striking force of the ball launching device 540 is adjusted by moving the entire unit from a stopped state. It is used as a second input means to

Specifically, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in with the right handle position control means 4000 unlocked, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is applied to the handle in proportion to the linear displacement. It becomes stronger in the form of taking over the striking force immediately before by the rotation of 182 (meaning to eliminate the problem that the striking force is temporarily lowered at the point where the operation subject is switched), and when it is pushed to the rear position as it is, the striking force of the game ball is the strong. level to the right (see paragraph [1608]), and return the right handle unit 180(R) from the rear position to the front position (relax the pushing force on the right handle unit 180(R). ), and the hitting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually the hitting force in the previous game).

Alternatively, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in, a striking force control signal is immediately sent so that the striking force of the ball launching device 540 becomes a strong level, and the previous rotation angle of the handle 182 is sent. The striking force based on the above changes to a strong level at once, and when the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the forward position, the striking force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the striking force immediately before) is returned at once. good.

In short, the right handle unit 180 (R) has two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions. The ball launcher 540 can be adjusted in impact force by displacing the movable elements, and when the impact adjustment by the other movable elements is completed, the impact force adjustment by the one movable element is resumed. There are two movable elements, for example, a handle 182 supported rotatably and the entire handle unit 180 supported movably in a different plane direction. In the state where the striking force adjustment is being executed, the striking force adjustment of the ball shooting device 540 can be performed by moving and displacing the entire handle unit 180, and when the striking force adjustment by moving and displacing the entire handle unit 182 is completed, It is designed to return to the hitting force adjustment by the handle 182, and as a result, the normal game is performed by adjusting the hitting force by one movable element, and the strong hitting force required when changing to a special game state is adjusted to another. On the other hand, when the special game state is over, simply ending the striking force adjustment by the other movable elements can easily and accurately return to the normal game state. can be returned to

The right handle unit 180 (R) is constructed as described above, and is positioned in front of the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 218 during a normal game. Locked. 187 to 212, the handle 182 can be rotated together with the ornamental handle 1820 to adjust the striking force of the ball shooting device 540. FIG.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special game state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned ON, and the lock arm 4004 changes to the releasing posture in which the roller 4003 is flipped up. , the right handle unit 180(R) is unlocked. Then, characters such as "Push the right handle to the back." An instruction prompting for input by movement of is issued. In response to this, if the player pushes the entire unit to the rear position against the force of the spring 4001 without changing the grip of the handle 182 being operated, the operation is detected and the hitting force is reduced. The hitting force continuously changes to a strong level in the form that a new hitting force is added. This puts the player in a right-handed state, and the profit of the special game is brought to the player more.

When the special game state ends, at the same time, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off under the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player is instructed by the hitting method instruction means to "turn the right handle." Please return it to the front." When the player relaxes the pressing force on the right handle unit 180(R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180(R) returns to the forward position by the bias of the spring 4001. FIG. Then, the lock arm 4004 changes to a horizontal lock posture by the force of the torsion coil spring (not shown), and lies like a supporting rod between the handle base 181 and the handle mounting member 102 of the right handle unit 180(R). Lock the unit 180(R) in the forward position.

As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal game state, but at this time, the degree of grip (rotational angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in the state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is resumed with the striking force immediately before changing to the special game state. By the way, since the conventional handle unit adjusts the hitting force by operating one handle, it is necessary to search for the optimum hitting force again when returning from the right-handed state to the normal game state. It may be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
The left handle unit 180(L) is used as input means for the player in the player participation type performance as described above. The left handle unit 180(L) has a structure substantially symmetrical with respect to the right handle unit 180(R) with respect to the vertical axis passing through substantially the center of the door frame 3. The control means 4000 is unique with a cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as "left handle position control means") 4000 of the left handle unit 180(L) is based on the cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base portion 181a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, an elongated hole 4008 formed in the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted to the outside of the cylindrical portion 102a. 4009 , a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009 , and a motor (not shown) that transmits rotational force to a gear 4011 provided at the end of the cylindrical cam 4009 .

The cam portion 4010 includes a first cam surface 4012 formed parallel to the end surface (rear end surface) of the cylindrical cam 4009 opposite to the gear 4011, and an end surface (front end surface) on the side of the gear 4011. It consists of a second cam surface 4013 formed parallel to the end surface at a position near the side, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012 .
As described above, the left handle unit 180(L) is slidably supported by the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 and always biased toward the player by the spring 4001 loaded in the cylindrical portion 102a. However, its position is controlled by the manner of engagement between the follower roller 4007 and the cam portion 4010 provided on the left handle unit 180(L).

221, the left handle unit 180(L) is at the rear position with the follower roller 4007 in contact with the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010. As shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position with the roller 4007 in contact with the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010 .
Therefore, when the left handle unit 180(L) is in the rear position as shown in FIG. 221 and the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. Through the inclination of the cam surface 4014, the second cam surface 4013 is reached, and the left handle unit 180(L) moves to the front position together with the follower roller 4007 as shown in FIG. The cam portion 4010 has an open space at the rear so that the follower roller 4007 can be freely moved rearward. When pushed against the bias of 4001, it sinks to the rearward position within the hand cover portion 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the forward position by the bias of spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180(L) located in the front position can be freely moved forward and backward in a straight line depending on the strength of the player.
Further, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. It returns to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014, and in this state the left handle unit 180(L) moves back to the rear position as shown in FIG.

The left handle unit 180(L) is constructed as described above, and is located at the rear position within the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. 221 during normal game play. The left handle unit 180(L) at this rear position is hidden by the forward protruding structure composed of the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the effect operation unit 300, etc., and is not easily noticeable to the player. In addition, since it is surrounded by the hand cover portion 195 and the projection to the outside can be minimized, it is less susceptible to external shocks that may lead to breakage, and the risk of injury due to contact is also reduced. By the way, currently, a large lever or the like is used as an input means for the player in the player participation type production, but if it always protrudes close to the player's hand or knee, it will receive a shock that can lead to damage. In addition, there is also a risk that the player may come into contact with it and be injured.

As the game progresses, a player-participation type effect is executed, and in a scene where the player's input is required, the main control unit 1300 first rotates the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000. Due to the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the force of the spring 4001, the left handle unit 180(L) linearly moves toward the player side together with the follower roller 4007 and stops at the front position. In this state, the player sees as if the left handle unit 180 (L) has appeared. , or pressing operation of the left handle unit 180(L) is requested by display, voice, or the like. When the player responds by rotating the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180(L) or pushing the left handle unit 180(L), the operation is detected and the production shifts to the next scene. After that, the performance further progresses and ends as appropriate.
In addition, in the handle unit 180 of the embodiment, since the periphery of the gripped hand is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820, there is no possibility that the fingers will come into contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if the rotation or pushing operation is performed. Less risk of injury. Thus, the ornamental handle 1820 that encloses the clasped hand and can rotate or move with the hand can also be effectively referred to as an "outer ring" that can protect the operating fingers.

Next, when the above effect is completed, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 contacting the follower roller 4007 moves from the second cam surface 4013 through the third cam surface 4014 to the third cam surface 4014. It changes to 1 cam surface 4012 . In the meantime, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the slope of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180(L) moves back from the front position against the bias of the spring 4001, and the follower roller The rear position is reached when 4007 contacts the first cam surface 4012 . The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180(L) waits at the rear position until the next performance is executed.

As is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) is capable of effecting and inputting actions substantially equivalent to those of the effect operating section 301 .
For this reason, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the production operation section 301 are operated under the same control and inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the production operation section 301 can be used. .
In this case, for example, a player who is embarrassed by the large action of operating the effect operation section 301 can place his or her hand on the left handle unit 180(L) in advance and perform the operation with the least noticeable movement. Therefore, since the player can casually participate in the player-participation type presentation, the interest increases.
In addition, whether the operation unit used in the player participation type production is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the production operation unit 301 can be determined in advance by, for example, providing a selection switch on a part of the front bulging structure. The player may be allowed to choose.

Other pachinko machines have been described above, but of course the pachinko machines are not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment may be installed at the place where the left handle unit 180 (L) is installed, and it may be used as an input means for the player in the player participation type production. Often, and vice versa, a handle unit having the same structure as the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the place where the right handle unit 180 (R) is installed, and it is used to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540. It may be used as an input means for.

Moreover, although two handle units 180 are provided in the above description, the number of handle units 180 may be one.
Further, although the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182 in the above description, the handle unit 180 may not be provided with the handle unit 180 so that the input for the game can be performed only by linearly moving the handle unit 180 .

In addition, although a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a game machine in the above, it can also be applied to other game machines such as a mackerel ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. ) is also applicable to slot machines. When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type presentation.

[Other form 2-1]
Next, another form 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 225 to 229. FIG.
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the other form 2-1 can also be provided with the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 instead of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the game board 5 (details are will be described later), the front top unit 4500 is used.
In addition, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is an appropriate modification of that of the door frame top unit 450 described above. fits as is.

The pachinko machine 1 of the other form 2-1 has a window portion that covers the game area 5a in which a game is played in a state visible from the front (same as the door window 101a closed by the glass plate 162 in the pachinko machine 1 described above. ) 1010a, and an eave-like front top unit 4500 corresponding to the door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 88 to 90) projects above the window portion 1010a.

This front top unit 4500 has a top shape in which, for example, the top upper cover 452 and the top lower cover 465 shown in FIG. A body cover 4520 is provided, and the center speaker box 461 and the door frame top bottom plate 454 of the door frame top unit 450 are removed to form a space 4520S inside.
The top main body cover 4520 has an upward opening 452a communicating with the space 4520S on its upper surface and largely notched forward from the rear end. It is closed by a front top plate 4680 which is a shaped open/close lid.

The front top plate 4680 is rotatably attached to the top body cover 4520 by a rotating shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side. The end side can be flipped up to open the opening 452a and can be rotated to a standing posture (see FIG. 225) in which it can be seen from the outside. In cooperation with the peripheral control board 1510, the closed posture and the standing posture can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
In addition, the front top plate 4680 has an outer surface 4680a facing outside in the closed posture with appropriate decorations (not shown), while an inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed posture has light reflection performance. It is processed into an excellent screen shape.

The front top plate 4680 may have a single panel structure as shown in FIGS. 225-228. 4680c may be connected to form a hinge or, as shown in FIG. 229, a plurality of elements may be connected by hinges 4680p to form a flexible folding structure. By adopting the latter folding structure, the front top plate 4680 can be unfolded in an upright posture, and the light decoration can be effectively carried out at a higher place and for the player. In addition, if the first stage of the folding structure is made into a gate shape or made transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display body of the island facility (the game provided on the curtain board above the pachinko machine 1) (display device showing the progress of (such as the number of occurrences of the jackpot game)) operation can be prevented.

Further, the front top unit 4500 is provided with a lighting base 8000 on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the player side, and on the lighting base 8000, a rod-shaped light emitting means 8002 with a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 arranged in a row swings. It is freely attached to the shaft.
This light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in the same manner as the front top plate 4680, so that the irradiation direction and the light emitting pattern can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game. Specifically, when the front top plate 4680 is in the upright posture, the light emitting means 8002 is directed upward so as to irradiate the inner surface 4680b facing the player, while the front top plate 4680 is in the closed position. In conjunction with the change to , the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 is switched downward so that the light can be irradiated.
In Modification 2-1, the bottom portion of the top main body cover 4520 is made of translucent and opaque synthetic resin, so that the player can only see the light produced by the light emitting means 8002 . Moreover, since the light emitting means 8002 for irradiating the front top plate 4680 with light can be used for the effect of the light, there is almost no extra cost.
The light emitting means 8002 may be of a lighting type that irradiates the inner surface 4680b of the front top plate 4680 with colored light, or may be of a video projection type that projects a character or the like onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top plate 4680.

[Other forms 2-2]
In the pachinko machine 1 of Modification 2-2, as shown in FIG. It is provided at the inner edge of the space 4520S on the side opposite to the player, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the other form 2-1. In this case, the front top plate 4680 needs to transmit light from the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b side (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side). Preferably, it is made of an opaque synthetic resin (for example, a milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, the front top plate 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, so that the player can feel more powerful and can be made to stand out from the outside.

Since the pachinko machine 1 of other forms 2-1 and 2-2 is configured as described above, during the execution of the ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win development performance, or the like, or during the result of the lottery related to the big win or the execution of the big win, The front top plate 4680 is swung, the front top plate 4680 is placed in an upright posture, and light is emitted from the light emitting means 8002. Alternatively, the front top plate 4680 is closed and the light emitting means 8002 is used to cover the top body. Various effects can be performed by, for example, irradiating the bottom of the 4520 with light.

When the front top plate 4680 (opening/closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, heat is released to the outside from the opening 452a. Therefore, for example, while the light emitting means 8002 is turned off, the front top plate 4680 is switched at appropriate intervals to open and close the opening 452a, and when it is in the standing state for several times, it suddenly hits the effect display device 1600 and displays the pattern. If an effect pattern is set, the opening and closing operation of the front top plate 4680 can be incorporated into a part of the game to increase the interest of the player, and heat can be dissipated from the opening 452a without the player noticing. can.
In addition, the front top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching between the closed posture and the standing posture at a predetermined timing irrelevant to the progress of the game, i.e., irrelevant to the progress of the game. You may make it

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 does not perform the effect of raising the front top plate 4680, the opening 452a is blocked by the front top plate 4680 in the closed position. The space 4520S does not contain dust, dust, cigarette tar, etc., and even when the front top table 4680 is in an upright posture, the air heated in the pachinko machine 1 rises to keep the front top unit 4500. Since an air current is generated to escape upward from the opening 452a of the space 4520S, it is difficult for dust, dust, tar, etc. to enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machine 1 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 has been described above, the pachinko machine 1 is of course not limited to the above other forms 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the front top plate 4680 (opening/closing lid) adopts a flip-up type in which the free end side can be flipped up around the rotating shaft 4680c to open the opening 452a. , the front top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Further, the front top plate 4680 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 may be separately provided on the front and rear sides of one pachinko machine 1. FIG.
In addition, the front top plate 4680 does not need to be fully opened all the time. For example, it may be half-opened.
Further, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is formed to be swingable, but the light emitting means 8002 may be made vertically movable so that the light is emitted from a high place of the pachinko machine 1. .

In addition, in other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided on the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end of the game board 5 in FIG. The front top unit 4500 is attached to the attachment portion of the top unit 4500, and the game board 5 having the front top unit 4500 is attached to the main body frame 4, or the game board 5 is shown in FIG. Alternatively, a mounting portion for the front top unit 4500 may be provided on the upper portion of the body frame 4 and mounted thereon. In this case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion capable of covering other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 projecting forward from the window portion 1010a.

Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the portion of the front top plate 4680 to be decorated with light has a planar shape, but it may have a three-dimensional shape imitating a character or the like. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 can be of the image projection type, and the three-dimensional shape can be more realistically decorated by the projection mapping method. This increases the visual difference between when the front top plate 4680 is in the closed position and when it is in the standing position. The crime prevention effect against 452a is also increased.
Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the front top plate 4680 and the light emitting means 8002 are separately formed with their front and rear positions separated, but the light emitting means 8002 is incorporated inside the front top plate 4680. may
In addition, it is also possible to irradiate the curtain plate of the island facility with light using the light emitting means 8002 of the other form 2-1, so that the light decoration and performance can be performed in a state of jumping out from the pachinko machine 1.
In addition, in other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a game machine, but the game machine can also be applied to other game machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates multiple drums (rotating drums or reels). In this case, the portion provided with the drums and the like that can be seen from the window that is visible from the front of the game machine corresponds to the game area in which the game is played.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 231 to 260. FIG. Since the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment is a modification of the pachinko machine 1 described above, the description of the parts other than the modifications will be omitted. Therefore, in FIGS. 231 to 260 and other figures, the constituent elements with the same reference numerals are, in principle, the same or have the same function.

[game board]
The game board 5 of the embodiment, as shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. It consists of a back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a board holder 1200 attached to the back side bottom of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the bottom of the back box 3010 .

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 234, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front structural member 1000 surrounding the game area 5a, and a game element group (details are will be described later).

[Base panel]
The base panel 1110 of the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood board, and is provided with large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the game element groups.
The base panel 1110 may be an opaque veneer plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate.
234, reference numeral 1110t denotes a back gutter member for game balls attached to the rear surface of the base panel 1110. As shown in FIG.

[Back box, substrate holder]
As shown in FIG. 234, the back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front, and is mounted in a state of covering the rear side of an upper game zone 4823, a lower game zone 4825, and a right-handed game zone 4824, which will be described later. Also, the substrate holder 1200 is attached so as to cover the outside of the lower portion of the back box 3010 . A main control unit having a main control board 1310 (see block diagram of FIG. 252) for performing various game controls based on the detection status of game balls in the game area 5a is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling various performances based on control signals from the main control board 1310 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 .
The top plate of the back box 3010 is provided with an interference avoidance part 3010aa penetrating into the box at a position where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 intersect. By setting the height of the top board of the back box 3010 high by avoiding the interference of the back box 3010, there is an effect that it is possible to easily deal with a large production device or the like.

[Game element group]
As shown in the front view of FIG. 231 and the block diagram of FIG. 252, the game elements of the embodiment are:
a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player;
a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 planted in the base panel 1110 for randomly changing the falling direction of the game ball;
A pinwheel 2008 that rotates upon contact with a game ball,
A general winning opening 4801 (in terms of control configuration, <general winning opening sensor 4872> in the block diagram of FIG. 252. Below <> See the block diagram of FIG. 252 for the inside.) and
The electric first shutter plate 4802 <starting port solenoid 4873> that slides in the front-rear direction can switch between entering and non-entering the ball (receiving the game ball falling in the forward state and entering the game ball falling in the retreating state) is passed as it is, and the ball is not entered) Electric start winning opening 4871 <Electric start opening sensor 4874>,
a plurality of starting gates 4803 <gate sensor 4875> for starting a lottery for opening and closing the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning opening 4871;
A normal pattern display device 4804 for production that displays the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery to be described later by the starting gate 4803 for production,
Ordinary design reservation display device 4805 for production that displays for production the number of reservations corresponding to the ordinary reservation display device described later,
Like the first shutter plate 4802, the electric second shutter plate 4806 <first big winning opening solenoid 4876> can switch between ball entry and non-ball entry. to close the winning opening and non-entering) the first big winning opening 4807,
A rotating ball receiving member 4808 <V rotating solenoid 4877> provided in the first big prize opening 4807,
A V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878> into which only the game ball placed on the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 can enter;
A general winning opening 4801 <general winning opening sensor 4872> into which a game ball placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined backward downward of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters;
Opening and closing plate 4811 <second big winning opening solenoid 4879> is opened and closed in a tilted window method that opens upward, and a second big winning opening 4812 that can enter many game balls in the open state,
A fixed starting winning opening 4813 <fixed starting opening sensor 4880> provided on the vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting the lottery for opening and closing the first big winning opening 4807;
A first display device 4815 formed of a group of display lamps 4814 for performing and displaying various lottery games associated with the entry of a ball into the fixed start prize opening 4813 or the electric start prize opening 4871;
A group (three pieces in the embodiment) of pattern display members 4816 showing the first stage in the case of stepwise displaying the results of various lottery games associated with the entry of a ball into the fixed start prize winning port 4813 or the electric start prize winning port 4871. a formed second display device 4817;
Provided above the vertical center line of the game area 5a, the second (final ) a third display 4818 showing the stage;
A fourth symbol display lamp 4819 that complementarily displays the display of the results of various lottery games associated with the ball entering the fixed start prize port 4813 or the electric start prize port 4871,
A production special symbol holding display device 4820 that displays the number of holding balls for production on the first special holding number display device and the second special holding number display device to be described later,
A decorative light-emitting member 4821 provided as appropriate,
an announcement unit 4822 that displays a message image such as "Right shot";
A plurality of out guide units 1003 <out ball sensor 4881> that finally collect the game ball to the back of the machine,
A timer segment 4882 for production by a segment display capable of displaying a 5-digit number,
It is roughly composed of The details of the required game element group will be described later.

Here, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The fixed starter sensor 4880 and the electric starter sensor 4874 are directly input to the main control board 1310 . Detection signals from the fixed starter sensor 4880 and the electric starter sensor 4874 input to the main control board 1310 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. there is On the other hand, various sensors such as a gate sensor 4875, a general winning opening sensor 4872, a V winning opening sensor 4878, an out ball sensor 4881, a diving sensor 4831, a first ball sensor 4870a, a second ball sensor 4870b, and a magnetic sensor 3003 is indirectly input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 . Detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. A sensor directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310 described above can be appropriately configured as the double sensor described above.

Each detection signal from the sensor that is directly or indirectly input to the main control board 1310 described above is input by the main control MPU 1310a in the switch processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Various signals input to the input terminal of the port are read and stored as the above-described input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with reset function. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to various solenoids such as the starting opening solenoid 4873, the V rotation solenoid 4877, the first big winning opening solenoid 4876, and the second big winning opening solenoid 4879. through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function. From the main control output circuit to various display devices such as the normal design display device 4804 for production, the normal design reservation display device 4805 for production, and the special design reservation display device 4820 for production, and the drive signal to the fourth design display lamp 4819, Output directly without going through another board. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, thereby outputting the main control output circuit with reset function to various sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuits (to be described later) and the like. By outputting control signals to various sorting stepping motor drive ICs, drive signals to various stepping motors such as the first sorting motor 4908, the second sorting motor 4909, and the driving motor 4860 are sent via the panel relay board 1710. , that is, output indirectly.

Each drive signal output from the main control board 1310 described above is output in the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. and outputs various signals from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information.

The peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured by attaching an air cooling fan FAN. The peripheral control board 1510 includes the peripheral control IIC 1510a and the like, as described above. Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like input to the peripheral control board 1510 described above are used by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the movable object information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. reads various signals input to the input terminals of various parallel I/O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and determines whether or not detection signals from various sensors are input. history information (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads various data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 for outputting driving signals to various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818. are sent as commands from various serial I/O ports through the panel drive board 1720 to various boards provided in various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 emits light from the game board side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to full-color LEDs, monochromatic color LEDs, etc. provided on various decoration boards of the game board 5. Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and sent as commands from various serial I/O ports to various decoration boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. FIG. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided on the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drives the panel from various serial I/O ports as commands. Transmit to board 1720 .

Of the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the display of step S1016 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. Output is executed in the data output process, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 selects the light emission data arranged in chronological order constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the pointer points to the light emission data. According to the light emission data, it outputs to various decoration substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 (including the panel driving substrate 1720). Among the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for the various drive motors of the game board 5, the motor and solenoid drive processing of step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. , and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Of these, according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. Each time, update the pointer.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to generate drawing data for drawing an image on the liquid crystal display device as a dummy even when the game board 5 is not provided with a liquid crystal display device. When it becomes possible to receive the screen data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and defining the configuration of the screen, the V blank signal is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the peripherals shown in FIG. Peripheral controller steady-state processing in the control unit power-on processing may be executed. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not use the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game board 5 is not provided with a liquid crystal display device, and counts the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing reaches a predetermined value (32 times of execution of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing), the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 182 may be executed. This determination is performed in place of the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In this case, VDP-related processing in the display data output processing of step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. etc. are not executed.

Here, an example of game contents by the game element group will be described.
A function display unit 1400 provided on the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display device composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display device composed of another eight LEDs, and the like. In the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device, a lottery game (special symbol variation game) is performed in which the respective special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are varied and displayed. The first and second special symbols are symbols for deriving a lottery result showing the result of determination (hit lottery) of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery game has a symbol variation in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is varied and displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device. A single lottery game is executed from the start to the stop. Hereinafter, the lottery game related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device may be referred to as the "first lottery game", and the lottery game related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display device may be referred to as the "first lottery game". It may be indicated as "second lottery game".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the lottery game is started, which of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is used for the winning lottery is determined. is selected. Specifically, the lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device is selected based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813, and the electric A lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display device is selected based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning hole 4871 . Then, when a winning lottery using the special pattern of the selected side is performed, the pattern indicator corresponding to the special pattern of the selected side blinks 8 LEDs based on the result of the winning lottery. Control to start fluctuation is performed (main control board 1310). In the pattern variation thus started, after the variation state is maintained for the variation time selected based on the result of the winning lottery, a big winning pattern (big winning display result), which is a stopping mode of the special pattern that can recognize the big winning, and a small winning pattern are displayed. Either a small winning pattern (small winning display result) which is a stopping mode of a special pattern in which a hit can be recognized, or a losing pattern (a losing display result) which is a stopping mode of a special pattern in which a loss can be recognized appears. By lighting eight LEDs in the pattern display in a predetermined combination (stopping pattern variation), the player can determine whether he has won a big win, a small win, or has lost (lost). be able to recognize. In addition, when the game stops with the big-hit pattern appearing, the main control board 1310 executes a big-hit game in which the player can win a game ball (prize ball) as a prize. The jackpot game is a game that continues until the opening/closing plate 4811 of the second big prize opening 4812 is opened and closed 15 times, and many prize balls can be given to the player. Also, when the game stops with a small winning pattern appearing, a small winning game is executed by the main control board 1310 in which the player can acquire a prize ball. A small-hit game is a game that enables a big-hit game to be executed when a predetermined condition is established, and it is not possible to obtain as many prize balls as the big-hit game only with the small-hit game.

Here, the small winning game will be explained. In this embodiment, a plurality of small winning patterns are provided, and a plurality of execution modes of the small winning game to be subsequently executed are selected according to the types of the small winning patterns determined by the pattern lottery performed at the same time as the winning lottery. It is supposed to be set in one of the modes. Specifically, the small winning game is a game that operates the second shutter plate 4806 of the first big winning hole 4807 to allow the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 4807, and is executed this time. Depending on which one of the plurality of small winning symbols the small winning symbol resulting from the small winning game is, the opening and closing pattern of the entrance opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the opening time when opening are set to differ. The possibility of entering the game ball into the first big winning hole 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small winning game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is retracted over a relatively long time (eg 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 over a relatively short time (eg 0.5 seconds). It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 4807 than the execution mode of the small winning game that moves backward.

Next, in the small winning game, all the game balls that have entered the first big winning opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first big winning opening 4807, and the game balls reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 If it is received by the ball receiving recess 4809, the game ball that is not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotating movement of the rotating ball receiving member 4808. The ball rolls on the tapered circumferential surface that slopes backward downward and enters the general winning hole 4801 . When the game ball guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotating motion of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V winning opening 4810 as described above, the opening/closing plate 4811 of the second big winning opening 4812 is opened as a privilege. A jackpot game is executed to open and close until the maximum number of times of opening and closing is reached.

The first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818, which will be described later in detail, are configured with display areas larger than both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display. The result of the winning lottery, ie, winning or losing, is displayed in a state that is easier for the player to recognize than the above-mentioned special symbols, and is mainly directed to liven up the game. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether he or she has won a big win, won a small win, or lost (missed) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818. be able to

Although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special holding number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the reception of game balls into the fixed start winning opening 4813, and an electric start winning prize. A second special reservation number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the mouth 4871, and a four that displays the lottery results per normal figure determined by the passage of the game balls to the start gate 4803 A normal symbol display consisting of one LED and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the passage of game balls to the starting gate 4803 are provided.

Here, the first special reserved number display device informs the player of the number of winning lotteries on the first special symbol side that are reserved in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved memory number). It is. The first reserved memory number is incremented by "1" when a game ball enters the fixed start winning opening 4813, and is decremented by "1" when the first lottery game is started. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the fixed start winning opening 4813 within the period during which the first lottery game is being played, the first reserved memory number is further added, and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, main In the embodiment, it accumulates up to "4").

In addition, the second special pending number display device informs the player of the number of winning lotteries (hereinafter also referred to as the second pending stored number) of the second special symbol side that is pending in an unexecuted state. is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by "1" when a game ball enters the electric start prize-winning opening 4871, and is decremented by "1" when the second lottery game is started. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the electric start winning opening 4871 within the period during which the second lottery game is being played, the second reserved memory number is further added, and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, main In the embodiment, it is accumulated to "2").

Also, in the normal pattern display, when the determination of whether or not it is a normal hit (lottery per normal pattern) is performed, a normal pattern variation that varies multiple types of normal patterns based on the result of the lottery per normal pattern is performed. will be This normal pattern variation is a normal winning pattern (normal winning display result) which is a stop mode of a normal pattern in which a normal winning can be recognized after maintaining a fluctuation state for a variation time selected based on the result of the normal winning lottery. , or a normal losing pattern (result of display of losing), which is a stopping mode of normal symbols in which a normal loss can be recognized. You will be able to recognize whether you have made a mistake. In addition, when it is stopped in the form that the normal winning pattern appears, the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning opening 4871 advances to enter the ball entry possible state.

In addition, the normal pending display device informs the player of the number of memories of the lottery per normal pattern that is pending in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the number of normal pattern pending memories). The number of normal pattern reservation storage is added by "1" when the game ball is accepted by the starting gate 4803 arranged on the game board 5, and is subtracted by "1" when normal pattern fluctuation is started. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in the starting gate 4803 within the period during which the normal pattern variation is performed, the normal pattern reservation storage number is further added, and a predetermined upper limit number "4").

Further, in this embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be executed at the same time. When both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are equal to or greater than "1", the second lottery game based on the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) using the special symbols and the normal symbol variation can be executed at the same time.

An example of the game contents by the game element group of the embodiment has been described above, but of course various variations such as a big win, a medium win, and a small win may be added.

[Details of game area and game element group]
In the game area 5a of the embodiment, the above game element groups are arranged in three game zones to maximize the interest of the game.
That is, the game area 5a includes an upper game zone 4823 corresponding to the first game area 5a1 in FIG. 131, a right-handed game zone 4824 corresponding to the second game area 5a2 in FIG. It is divided into a lower layer game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper game zone 4823 is provided with the obstacle peg 2007, the windmill 2008, the general winning opening 4801, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 of the game element group.
At the lower edge of the upper game zone 4823, a shelf board-shaped boundary rail 4826 is provided between the lower game zone 4825 and the game ball does not fall into the lower game zone 4825, but the boundary rail It communicates with the lower layer game zone 4825 with the width of one game ball by the diving part 4827 provided in the middle of 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a). In addition, the details of the dive section 4827 will be described in the section of the lower game zone 4825 .
In addition, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a gradient that descends in the left-right direction with the jumping-in portion 4827 as the apex, and the out-guiding portions 1003 are provided at both ends of the descending end.

In addition, at the lower corner of the inner rail 1002 side (left side in FIGS. 231 and 232) of the upper game zone 4823, the out guide portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 passes through between the inner rail 1002 and the lower game zone 4825. The upper end of the out-bypass 4828 leading to is open, and even if game balls exceeding the discharge capacity temporarily concentrate on the out-guiding portion 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826, the overflowed game balls are out-bypass 4828 It is designed to flow to the out guidance section 1003 of the lower layer game zone 4825 through. A so-called out ball, which has no possibility of entering the ball, can make the player feel negative emotions, and the game can be played comfortably by quickly recovering it and shortening the time that the player sees it. can let

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed by three circular pattern display members 4816 arranged side by side on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826. This shows the first step in the case of displaying the results step by step, and when proceeding to the display by the third display device 4818, all three pattern display members 4816 show the "GO" pattern. When the game ends in the first stage, at least one of the three pattern display members 4816 displays an "x" pattern.

The second display device 4817 is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 in such a manner that the front surface of the pattern display member 4816 covers part of the through hole 1112, and is a transparent cover plate 4883 integral with the boundary rail 4826. Since it is covered, even if game balls frequently pass through the front surface of the pattern display member 4816, the display surface is not damaged. In the embodiment, although illustration is omitted, an appropriate pattern is applied to the front surface of the cover plate 4883 by printing, a sticker, or the like, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 is placed behind the cover plate 4883. The decorative plates formed with are erected at appropriate intervals (preferably within the range of the thickness of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the game area 5a, for example, by drawing plant patterns on the front and rear decorative plates of the cover plate 4883 to give visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided above the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and is used to display step by step the result of the lottery accompanying the ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813 as described above. It shows the second (final) stage.
The third display device 4818 is roughly composed of a 7-segment type display member 4884 corresponding to a one-digit number, and a display frame 4885 serving as a mounting base for the display member 4884. It is mounted vertically movable on the performance back cover 4886 covering the rear surface of the hole 1112 and can be viewed from the front side (player side) through a frame-shaped center member 2500 bordering the front side of the through hole 1112 .

[Display material]
As shown in FIG. 237, the display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 has a tubular segment partition frame 4884a that passes through in the front-rear direction, and that has the outline of each segment of the 7-segment display. A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are installed in each frame of the segment partition frame 4884a (including upper and lower two frames surrounded by 7 segments), and a front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a. A lens 4884d is attached to the portion. As a result, not only single-digit numbers, but also the entire area surrounded by 7 segments can be used to produce effective effects. The display member 4884 may be an image display such as liquid crystal or organic EL.

[Display frame]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 includes a substantially hemispherical frame body 4887 that bulges forward, and arms protruding from both left and right sides of the frame body 4887 approximately in the center and shaped like holding a fist downward. A first movable portion (hereinafter also referred to as an arm-shaped movable portion) 4888 and a frame main body 4887 project from the left and right sides of the lower side of the frame body 4887 so as to open in the direction (angle) of about 7:25. A second foot-shaped movable portion (hereinafter also referred to as a foot-shaped movable portion) 4889 , and a colored transparent sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 attached to a display frame 4885 so as to partially cover the display of the display member 4884 . , and it is an anthropomorphic spherical bomb-shaped character.

[First moving part (arm-shaped moving part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting left and right arm members 4888a, which are resin molded products, with an arm shaft 4888c to which a driven gear 4888b is fixed at the center, and the arm shaft 4888c is attached inside the display frame 4885. The arm member 4888a can be rotated in both the forward direction and the backward direction by being rotatably pivoted on the arm support plate 4891. As shown in FIG.

[Second moving part (foot moving part)]
The foot-shaped movable part 4889 is a resin molded product as a whole, and the left and right foot members 4889a are pivoted so as to freely roll through the joint shaft holes 4889b through ankle joint shafts 4892 projecting from the display frame 4885. Furthermore, by meshing the fan-shaped gears 4889c provided at the ends of each other, the left and right leg members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line.

[arm-shaped moving part + foot-shaped moving part]
The arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 are connected to each other through an elevating slider 4893 rollingly supported inside the display frame 4885 so as to be able to move up and down vertically.
That is, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 engages the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c with the rack gear 4894 formed on the lifting slider 4893, while the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided at the upper end of the leg member 4889a on the right side as viewed from the front. A connecting pin 4895 projecting from the lifting slider 4893 is loosely fitted in the elongated hole 4889d.
In the state shown in FIG. 240 in which the arm-shaped movable part 4888 holds its fist downward and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 opens in the direction of about 7:25, the elevation slider 4893 is at its highest position. The elevated position is maintained by the weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 . Therefore, when the lifting slider 4893 is forcibly pushed straight down by applying an external force against its own weight, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 rotates due to the meshing of the driven gear 4888b and the rack gear 4894, and the arm member 4888a changes in the direction of banzai. At the same time, the leg movable part 4889 rotates one leg member 4889a having an elongated hole 4889d around the joint shaft hole 4889b by downward movement of the connecting pin 4895 of the lifting slider 4893, and meshes with the sector gear 4889c. The other leg member 4889a also rotates around the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, a spherical bomb-shaped character raises its fist and jumps up both legs in the direction of about 8:20 as shown in FIG. change to After that, when the external force applied to the lifting slider 4893 is removed, the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 move in the opposite direction due to their own weights and return to the original position (orientation) shown in FIG.

[Display cover part]
The sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 is fixedly attached to the frame main body 4887 so as to cover part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. The color of the display cover portion 4890 is very light, so there is no risk of obstructing the display of the display member 4884 . Note that part of the display on the display member 4884 is intentionally made difficult to see by darkening the color of the display cover portion 4890 or making it opaque. The display on the display member 4884 may be completely exposed by rotating the display member 4884 completely or by electrically switching the display member 4884 to be transparent. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is hidden, for example, firstly, it is not possible to tell whether the display is "0" or "8" to increase the expectation of the player, and the display of the display member 4884 is improved. It is possible to make the game more interesting by increasing the gap in the display of the result, such as bursting with joy at the moment when the whole picture is seen.

[Production back cover]
The effect back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. and a lifting device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896 .

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 has a forward-opening box shape surrounding the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500 and forms a performance space 4898 communicating with the opening of the center member 2500 . The back cover main body 4896 has a bottom curved shape that descends from the front to the back as shown in the central vertical cross-sectional view of FIG. It's becoming In addition, a plurality of ridges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side on the bottom of the back cover main body 4896 . This ridge 4899 is for expressing sea waves. For example, when an employee opens the door frame 3 to deal with trouble, even if a game ball is accidentally dropped into the presentation space 4898, The game ball can be rolled along the ridge 4899 and easily taken out. Incidentally, if the bottom of the back cover main body 4896 does not have the longitudinal ridges 4899 (stripe guides for scraping out the game ball), the game ball rolls freely in the lateral direction and it takes time to catch it. It should be noted that arranging the ridges 4899 in the horizontal direction and arranging the grooves in the horizontal direction are merely different expressions and have substantially the same meaning.

[lift device]
The lifting device 4897 moves the third display device 4818 up and down inside the production back cover 4886, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. a fixed elevating base 4900 attached to an elevating base 4900, an elevating panel 4901 attached to an elevating guide shaft 4918 erected between the elevating base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896, and an elevating panel 4901 attached to the rear surface of the elevating panel 4901 and a lifting motor 4904 for lifting and lowering the lifting panel 4901 by meshing the pinion gear 4903 with the formed lifting rack gear 4902 .

[Third display device and lifting device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined with the lift panel 4901 of the lift device 4897 . Specifically, a connecting rod 4905 projecting from the rear surface of the display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 passes through a communication opening 4896w formed in the rear wall 4896r of the back cover main body 4896 and is screwed to the lifting panel 4901. It is Therefore, when the lift panel 4901 is lifted by driving the lift motor 4904, the third display device 4818 rises together with it as shown in FIG. descend with The lift device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 that pulls the lift panel 4901 upward, and the weight of the lift panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 is elastically supported, thereby reducing the load on the lift motor 4904. It's like

The lifting device 4897 also functions as means for applying an external force necessary to move the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818 .
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 242, a key-shaped pressing member 4907 having a fuse-shaped front surface is provided on the lifting base 4900, which is a fixed element of the lifting device 4897, so as to protrude forward from the upper end of the center. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 237, the lower end of the pressing member 4907 is connected to the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 with a suitable gap at the top of a vertically movable slider 4893. They face each other in the installed state.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is lifted by the lifting device 4897, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially lifted until the top of the lifting slider 4893 abuts the lower end of the pressing member 4907, that is, until it rises by the gap. , and then the top of the lifting slider 4893 comes into contact with the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the lifting slider 4893 from rising further. As shown in FIG. 241, the spherical bomb-shaped character raises its fist and jumps with both legs in the direction of about 8:20. change to In this manner, the third display device 4818 is linked to the elevation by the lifting device 4897, raises its fists, and simultaneously opens both legs and acts as if it were jumping up.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 rolls down from the raised position in FIG. The lifting slider 4893 rises relatively due to the weight of 4889, and finally the position and attitude of the third display device 4818 return to the state shown in FIG.

When the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 in the stationary state of FIG. Since a large force is required to start the swinging of the portion 4889 at the same time, in this embodiment, as described above, there is a slight gap between the fuse-type holding member 4907 on the side of the lifting device 4897 and the top of the lifting slider 4893. is provided, only the lifting slider 4893 is raised first, and the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 are swung with a time difference corresponding to the gap. As a result, the load applied to the lifting motor 4904 of the lifting device 4897 can be distributed and reduced.

Furthermore, the rack gear 4894 is intentionally provided on the lifting slider 4893 instead of the fixed element of the back cover main body 4896, so that when the third display device 4818 is completely lowered, the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 move up and down in reaction. Since it bounces slightly together with the slider 4893 (in terms of appearance, the arms and legs swing slightly a few degrees), the slight movement caused by the bounce adds a human touch to the character's movements, which tend to be mechanical. be able to.

In addition, the center member 2500 surrounding the third display device 4818 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view so that a game ball in the upper game zone 4823 can enter, A warp exit 2502 that is open in the frame so that the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released, and the game ball released from the warp exit 2502 rolls in the left and right direction and then to the upper game zone 4823. A stage shelf 2503 that can be released is provided, and a game ball falling from the center of this stage shelf 2503 can enter the diving part 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower game zone]
As shown in FIGS. 232, 237, 238, and 244 to 247, the lower layer game zone 4825 includes the first display device 4815 of the game element group, the starting gate 4803, and the normal symbol display device 4804. , and a fixed start winning opening 4813, and the game ball that entered the lower game zone 4825 from the jumping part 4827 of the upper game zone 4823 is divided into a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution parts 4829a to 4829c to be described later. It is sorted into whether the ball enters the fixed starting prize opening 4813 after passing through, passes through the starting gate 4803 and is collected in the out guidance section 1003, or is collected in the out guidance section 1003 without obtaining any benefits. be done.

[Dive part]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 237, the diving part 4827 includes a diving pocket 4830 that opens upward at the lower part of the upper game zone 4823, a passage-type diving sensor 4831 provided in the diving pocket 4830, and a diving pocket. The game ball entering 4830 is once rolled to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then rolled forward to the front position of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball moves forward and backward from front to back and back to front. and a front-back bending passage 4832 that is laterally V-shaped.

[First sorting unit]
A first sorting portion 4829a among the sorting portions 4829a to 4829c includes a ball passage 4834 that intersects the end of the front-rear curved passage 4832 in the left-right direction via a stepped portion 4833 corresponding to approximately one ball, and the stepped portion. A first electric distribution piece 4835 <first distribution motor 4908> provided in 4833 that always swings like a wiper, and a game ball dropped into the stepped portion 4833 through the front-back curved passage 4832 is distributed in the first electric distribution. Depending on the rocking timing of the piece 4835, the ball passage 4834 is divided into a right path flowing to the right side and a left path flowing to the left side. The right course of the ball passage 4834 is directly connected to a third distributing portion 4829c described later via a screw passage 4836 descending spirally, while the left course is indirectly connected via the second distributing portion 4829b. It is connected to the third sorting section 4829c.

As will be described later, the third distribution section 4829c is the final stage in which the ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813, and therefore the distribution to the right course directly connected to this third distribution section 4829c. is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to make the ball enter the diving section 4827 aiming at the timing of being distributed to the right course, but the diving section 4827 is not able to enter the diving pocket 4830 with respect to the first distribution section 4829a. Since it is bent in the front-back direction by the front-back bending passage 4832 and reaches the first electric distribution piece 4835, the change in the perspective in the front-back direction is difficult for the player in front of it to understand, and accordingly the timing is poor. elusive. Therefore, it becomes difficult to match the ball entry timing of the diving portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the element of luck/bad luck inherent in the game is improved, and the amusement of the game can be increased.

[Second sorting unit]
The second sorting portion 4829b connected to the left course of the ball passage 4834 of the first sorting portion 4829a includes a shallow cup-shaped recessed circular turning portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834 and the circular turning portion 4837. A plurality (three in the embodiment) of ball drop holes 4838 penetrating through the central area of the game panel 1100; 232, a second electric distribution piece 4840 <a second distribution motor 4909> provided below the front end of the front tilting gutter 4839 and swinging like a wiper at all times; It consists of a right back passage 4841 that communicates when the second electric sorting piece 4840 rises, and a left front passage 4842 that communicates when the second electric sorting piece 4840 stands up. It is further distributed to the right rear passage 4841 and the left front passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the two electric distribution pieces 4840 . The right rear passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c, while the left front passage 4842 is connected to the starting gate 4803.

Here, both the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution unit 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution unit 4829b always oscillate, but they oscillate at different cycles. is set to Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set to swing slowly at a period slightly less than twice that of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that there is a difference between the swing timings of the two. is set. By doing so, when the first sorting section 4829a and the second sorting section 4829b synchronize and move from the first sorting section 4829a to the second sorting section 4829b, the sorting direction is generally known. It is possible to prevent the harmful effect that the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b is remarkably lowered.

[Third Sorting Section]
The third sorting section 4829c is located in the lower part of the lower game zone 4825 and is centered on the vertical center line of the game area 5a like the jumping section 4827. It is generally called a "croon" ball turning type. It consists of a sorting device 4843 and a sorting base 4844 provided directly below the sorting device 4843 .

[Sorting device]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball-rolling member 4845 that rolls game balls vigorously and turns by inertia, a rotating member 4846 that can rotate around a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball-rolling member 4845, and the rotating member 4846. and a driving device 4847 that supports and rotates in a fixed direction at a low speed.

[Ball Rolling Member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a bottom wall portion 4849 that slopes gently downward toward the center of a circle like a shallow sake cup and has a circular hole 4848 in the center, and a short tubular shape that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 4849 . A peripheral wall portion 4850 is provided with an annularly curved ball flow path, and a game ball is thrown into the ball flow path toward the inside and substantially tangential direction of the peripheral wall portion 4850 as shown in FIG. 4851a and 4851b are provided at front and rear two places.
A screw passage 4836 connected to the right course of the ball passage 4834 of the first sorting portion 4829a is connected to the throw-in gutter 4851a in front of the ball rolling member 4845, while the throw-in gutter 4851b at the rear is connected to the The right rear passage 4841 of the second sorting portion 4829b is connected, so that the first sorting portion 4829a passes through the right course and the screw passage 4836 and is thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the front throwing gutter 4851a. The game ball and the game ball thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the rear throwing gutter 4851b through the left course and the right back passage 4841 of the second sorting part 4829b from the first sorting part 4829a It turns clockwise in FIG. In addition, since the revolving game ball gradually loses centrifugal force as the speed decreases, it gradually descends toward the circular hole 4848 due to the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849 .

It should be noted that the ball rolling member 4845, game balls are thrown from the two throwing gutter 4851a, 4851b as described above, but in the embodiment, the game thrown from the throwing gutter 4851a leading to the screw passage 4836 with a large drop The ball has a higher velocity than the game ball thrown from the throwing gutter 4851b, so depending on the throwing timing, there is a possibility that one game ball will collide with the other game ball and develop into an unexpected development. In this way, by providing a plurality of throwing troughs on one ball rolling member 4845 and throwing game balls at different designed speeds (tilt distance and angle), the chance of the game is enhanced and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

The ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. A sphere guide portion 4852 is provided to obtain. The ball guiding portion 4852 has a wedge-shaped cross-sectional projection that slopes downward (approximately 20° with respect to the horizontal line) toward the point of contact with the bottom wall portion 4849 of the game ball, as shown in FIG. The bottom wall portion 4849 may have a form in which the slope becomes steep from the middle.

[Rotating member]
The rotary member 4846 includes a distribution disk 4853 which has a slightly smaller diameter than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and is provided at a height position substantially equal to or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848 , and an edge of the distribution disk 4853 . A plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions that are symmetrical with respect to the center of the distribution disk 4853 (=the center of the bottom wall portion 4849). A receiving port 4855 for game balls, and one of the receiving ports 4855 is a specific receiving port 4855v. A cross-shaped partition wall 4857 that partitions adjacent ones of all the receiving ports 4855 including the specific receiving port 4855v, and a driving shaft 4858 of a driving device 4847 described later are inserted. The bushing 4859 is roughly configured.

[Driving device]
As shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the drive device 4847 includes a drive motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a drive shaft 4858 projecting upward from the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base. and a gear group 4861 inside the base 4844 for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858. is supported in an umbrella shape, and the rotating member 4846 is rotated at a low speed in a certain direction (in the embodiment, counterclockwise direction opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845).

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower layer game zone 4825, and has a pocket-shaped fixed start winning opening 4813 on its front surface as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. It has a prize winning passage 4862 leading to the fixed start prize winning port 4813, and on both sides of the prize winning passage 4862 on the front side, a detachment passage 4863 leading to the out guide section 1003 of the lower layer game zone 4825 is formed.
In addition, on the upper part of the sorting base 4844, a sorting passage 4864 for receiving the game balls entering the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 in the sorting device 4843 and guiding them to the passing passage 4863; A prize sorting passage 4865 that receives the game balls entering the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and guides them to the prize prize passage 4862, and a game ball that jumps out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the sorting device 4843 and falls to the game hall side. A drop recovery path 4866 for recovery is formed.

[Outside sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 244 to 246, the detached sorting passage 4864 protrudes from the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 at a height close to the hanging cylinder portion 4854 of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843. It is formed by a substantially U-shaped enclosing frame 4867 having a curved portion having a diameter approximately the same as that of the member 4846, and enters the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 and straightly passes through the hanging cylinder portion 4854. It receives the falling game ball and guides it to the exit passage 4863 .

[Award-winning sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 244 to 246, the prize sorting passage 4865 is formed of a corridor gutter 4868 attached to the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to surround the rotating member 4846. It receives the game ball that enters the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and is laterally fed out of the hanging tubular portion 4854 by the laterally feeding gutter 4856 and leads it to the winning path 4862 in front. 246(a), when the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is located above the winning path 4862, and the game ball enters the special receiving port 4855v, the horizontal feeding gutter 4856 drop directly into the winning path 4862.

[Drop collection passage]
The drop collection passage 4866 is composed of the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 which is inclined downwards toward the rear, and a gutter-shaped stepped portion 4869 provided at the rear of the sorting base 4844. The game balls that have jumped out and fallen are collected in the gutter-shaped stepped portion 4869 and collected together with out balls and the like to the game hall side.

[Countermeasures against clutter in the sorting device]
Conventionally, the pachinko machine 1 is shaken or hit to vibrate the pachinko machine 1, and the vibration changes the path of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a to enter various prize-winning openings or gates. There is an act (hereinafter simply referred to as "Dotsukigoto"). The throbbing of the ball-swirling type sorting device is to hit the front of the pachinko machine strongly at the timing when the game balls spinning on the bottom wall approach a specific receiving port, and the impact vibrates the pachinko machine. The trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration, and the ball enters the target specific receiving port.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the sorting device 4843 of the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall portion 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the game ball rolls on the bottom wall portion 4849 by inertia while receiving the action of centrifugal force. Since the game ball is guided to the position, even when the game ball is closest to the peripheral wall portion 4850, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG.
Therefore, a player who plans to make a big move applies an impact to the pachinko machine 1 as indicated by arrow F in FIG. Even if the trajectory is changed in the radial direction, since there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 4850 and the game ball, the movement of the peripheral wall portion 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the game ball. In addition, the ball guiding portion 4852 in contact with the game ball hits diagonally downward from the center of the game ball, and gets under the game ball due to vibration to guide the game ball as shown by arrow M in FIG. 246(b). Attempting to move in a different direction than intended by the fraudster. Therefore, it is possible to substantially make confusion difficult.

By the way, the conventional ball swirl type sorting device has a spherical flow path which is composed of a bottom wall portion which slopes gently downward toward the center of a circle like a shallow sake cup, and a peripheral wall portion which surrounds the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion. , and by throwing a game ball into the ball passage toward the inner side of the peripheral wall and in a substantially tangential direction, the ball is rotated on the bottom wall while exerting a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall. A moving member, a plurality of (for example, 2 to 4) receiving ports for game balls provided at positions symmetrical with respect to the center of the bottom wall, and one of the receiving ports that is an input. A game ball that is thrown into the ball flow path of the ball rolling member and initially circles along the peripheral wall due to centrifugal force gradually gains momentum. The element of the game is to lose the ball and gradually descend toward the center of the bottom wall portion, and finally enter any of the receiving ports including the specific receiving port.
The problem with such a ball turning type sorting device is that the game balls turning on the bottom wall part approach the specific receiving port, and the front of the pachinko machine is hit hard to apply an external force, and the impact is applied. The pachinko machine is vibrated, and the vibration changes the trajectory of the game ball from the turning direction to the radial direction so that the ball enters a specific receiving slot. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-229209), a vibration sensor is installed in the pachinko machine, and the vibration detected by the vibration sensor is used to determine whether or not there is a problem, and based on the determination result It was that the game hall side would take necessary measures.
However, conventional countermeasures against thumping using vibration sensors only presume that thumping has occurred by detecting abnormal vibrations of the pachinko machine. It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between ball entry and abnormal vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by the pounding.

[others]
In addition, in the lower game zone 4825c, a passing type first ball sensor 4870a that detects a game ball passing through the right path in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a, and a right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b A passing-type second ball sensor 4870b is provided for detecting a game ball passing through. You can manage the number of balls that entered 4843. Then, the number of balls entering the sorting device 4843 and the number of balls passing through the left front passage 4842 of the second sorting section 4829b and detected by the starting gate 4803 are summed up and detected by the diving sensor 4831 of the diving section 4827. By comparing with the number of balls that entered the lower layer game zone 4825, it is possible to know the presence of game balls that have not left while entering the lower layer game zone 4825, thereby giving a warning that some kind of fraudulent act is suspected. Can be issued to the administrator.

In addition, in the embodiment, the flow path from the jumping part 4827 to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is long, and the residence time of the game ball is long. It becomes difficult to perform a so-called stopping shot that temporarily stops the firing of. Therefore, there is an effect of effectively preventing stopping shots that act disadvantageously for the game hall.

[Right-handed game zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes, in the order of flow of the game balls, the obstacle nail 2007, the starting gate 4803, the electric start winning opening 4871, the first big winning opening 4807, and the rotating ball receiving member 4808. , a general winning opening 4801 into which a game ball placed on a tapered peripheral surface inclined backward downward of a rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters, a V winning opening 4810, a general winning opening 4801, a second big winning opening 4812, , and the out guidance unit 1003 is shared with the lower game zone 4825.

131 to 139 and 191, the right-handed game zone 4824 is connected with the upper game zone 4823 by a connecting passage portion 5a4 through which a game ball fired with a specific strong firing force can pass. The details of the connecting passage portion 5a4 are omitted because they are the same as those described with reference to FIGS.

In addition, in the right-handed game zone 4824, a right-handed ball flow path is provided that goes around the game element group.
This right-handed ball flow path is
an upper free fall area 4910 formed immediately below the exit portion of the connecting passage portion 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a start gate 4803;
In addition, a first gutter 4911 which opens upward at the lower end of the free fall area 4910 and receives a game ball that has passed through the starting game gate 4803 and a game ball that has simply passed beside it without passing through the starting game gate 4803;
a branch area 4912 that continues to the terminal end of the first gutter 4911 and has four obstacle nails 2007 planted in the form of corner posts, and the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning opening 4871 is located in the straight falling direction;
A second gutter 4913 that opens on the left side of the branch area 4912 in FIG.
a third gutter 4914 that continues from the second gutter 4913 and includes the upper surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first big prize opening 4807 as part of the flow path;
A lower free-fall area 4915 is located between the exit portion of the third gutter 4914 and the second big prize opening 4812 and is formed of a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general prize opening 4801 .

In the right-handed game zone 4824, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 248, the right-handed ball flow path is provided on the inner surface side of the boundary wall 4916 that separates the upper game zone 4823 and the lower game zone 4825. A lighting board 4917 is provided for effecting illumination from the side. Due to its position and orientation, the lighting board 4917 can be viewed from the player side exclusively from the front end surface to the back surface of the opaque board, and the light from the light emitting LED that is the light source is difficult to enter directly into the field of view. It is possible to suppress glare while illuminating brightly.
In addition, in the right-handed game zone 4824, a timer segment 4882 by a segment display capable of displaying a 5-digit number is provided near the end of the third gutter 4914, and this timer segment 4882 is a timer. The interest in the game is enhanced by, for example, giving an advance notice.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has the above configuration, and the outline of the game has already been explained. Aiming to enter the part 4827. Of course, only a part of the balls enter the diving section 4827 as intended, and some enter the general prize winning opening 4801, while others quickly enter the out guidance section 1003 and finish the game.
In this upper layer game zone 4823, when the ball enters the jumping part 4827 and enters the lower layer game zone 4825, and the game ball enters the fixed start winning opening 4801 through the above-described plurality of allocations, the first special symbol display device A lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol performed in is performed, and in this first lottery game, the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 The effect display makes the players expect that they have won the above-described big winning game or small winning game. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game described above, first, the display lamps 4814 of the first display device 4815 are turned on sequentially from the bottom to the top, so that the start of the lottery is displayed as if a fuse were burning. Subsequently, the lottery result of the first stage is displayed with the contents of three symbols displayed on the second display device 4817 (for example, three "GO" displays are arranged), and finally the third display device 4818 displays the final stage. is displayed (specifically, a single-digit number is displayed by a large segment display, and a spherical bomb-shaped character jumping action is performed by the display frame 4885, the arm-shaped movable part 4888, and the foot-shaped movable part 4889), and a big hit and a small hit are displayed. To make a player recognize hit and miss.

In addition, among the game balls launched into the upper game zone 4823, some of the game balls that entered the jumping portion 4827 but did not enter the fixed start winning opening 4801 pass through the second sorting portion 4829b. It is possible to pass through the starting gate 4803, and when the game ball passes through the starting gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875 and the normal symbol lottery regarding the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
Then, when the winning (1/10) is achieved in the normal pattern lottery, the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed game zone 4824 advances by the amount corresponding to the lottery result, enabling the ball to enter the electric start winning opening 4871. After that time elapses, the first shutter plate 4802 retreats and the entry of the ball into the electric start winning opening 4871 becomes impossible.
Incidentally, the result of the lottery is displayed on the production normal symbol display device 4804 (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed by a segment display).

In addition, after the end of the jackpot game, a time-saving game state in which the variation time of the normal symbols in the normal symbol lottery is shortened (for example, 1 second) as compared to the variation time (for example, 120 seconds) in the normal game state. , and by aiming directly at the starting gate 4803 of the right-handed game zone 4824 instead of the diving part 4827, the lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display device is mainly It becomes possible to proceed with the game. The time-saving game state ends under a predetermined end condition (for example, 10 times of variable display of special symbols, etc.), and returns to the normal game state.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is of course not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the embodiments, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels.

Further, in the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed with three game zones, but it may be configured with two game zones or a single game area 5a.
Further, in the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 is described as a part of the sorting device 4843, but this ball rolling member 4845 rolls the game ball in a state visible to the player within the game area 5a. If anything, it is not limited to the sorting device 4843 .

[Angular Position of D-Cut Surface Formed on Rotational Shaft of Stepping Motor]
Next, a rotating shaft of a first sorting stepping motor 4908 that swings the first electric sorting piece 4835 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that constantly reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the mechanical end on the right side). , the second electric dividing piece 4840 in a constant wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the upright (hereinafter referred to as "inverted vertically") mechanical end). The angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotary shaft of the swinging second distribution stepping motor 4909 will be described. FIG. 253 is a diagram showing D-cut angular positions formed on the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors. Here, since the angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are arranged in the same manner, the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 In the description of the method of arranging the angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed in , the reference numerals for the second distribution stepping motor 4909 are shown in parentheses following the reference numerals for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 .

The first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are unipolar stepping motors having phases of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2, and their rotating shafts are press-fitted to rotors. The first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909, which will be described in detail later, have their rotating shafts pressed into the rotor so that the rotational positions of the rotating shafts are determined according to the number of steps from the reference excitation phase. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, the position of the rotating shaft can be roughly grasped without providing a rotation angle sensor such as a rotary encoder for accurately measuring the angle of the rotating shaft.

As shown in FIG. 253(a), the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) has mounting holes 4908b (4909b) formed on the left and right sides of its rotating shaft 4908a (4909a). The left mounting hole 4908b (4909b), the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a), and the right mounting hole 4908b (4909b) are arranged on the same straight line and become the horizontal center line of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). ing. A straight line perpendicular to this horizontal center line and passing through the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) is the vertical center line of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). The diameter of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is 4 mm (φ4).

The rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) has a D-cut surface formed in advance. It is press-fitted into the rotor so that the cut surface is rotated counterclockwise by 10° (tolerance ±3°) from the horizontal center line. As a result, when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is horizontal. The D-cut angle position, which is the absolute position, is the position rotated counterclockwise by 10° (tolerance ±3°) from the center line of the direction.

The first electric sorting piece 4835 in the first sorting portion 4829a swings like a wiper that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position. When the first electric distributing piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, it is distributed to the right course flowing to the right side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 and descends spirally through the screw passage 4836 to the third While connected to the distributing portion 4829c, when the first electric distributing piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, it is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 and the second is connected to the distribution unit 4829b. In this embodiment, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotary shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position. In the first sorting stepping motor 4908, the rotation position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 that swings like a wiper by energizing (ON) the φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase is the mechanical end on the left side. or the position of the mechanical end on the right side. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

The second electric distributing piece 4845 in the second distributing portion 4829b connected to the left course of the ball passage 4834 of the first distributing portion 4829a constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertically inverted mechanical end position. It swings like a moving wiper. When the second electric dividing piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end, it is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842 . swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, it is connected to the third distributing portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841. In this embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position. In the second sorting stepping motor 4909, the rotation position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 that swings like a wiper by energizing (ON) φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, is the mechanical end on the left side. or the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

As described above, the third distribution part 4829c is the final stage in which the ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings until the position of the left mechanical end. When it reaches the ball passage 4834, it is distributed to the right course flowing to the right side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the spirally descending screw passage 4836. Therefore, the third distribution is performed. Distribution to the right path directly connected to the portion 4829c is desired by the player, and is distribution to an area advantageous to the player. Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution section 4829b connected to the left course of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution section 4829a swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, the right back passage 4841 is reached. Since it is connected to the third sorting section 4829c via the third sorting section 4829c, the sorting connected to the third sorting section 4829c is desired by the player, and the player is directed to an area advantageous to the player. It is distributed.

On the other hand, when the first electric dividing piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, it is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834 and connected to the second distributing portion 4829b. Therefore, in the second sorting section 4829b, although it is possible to obtain the opportunity of sorting connected to the third sorting section 4829c, the right path directly connected to the third sorting section 4829c and In comparison, the connection to the third sorting unit 4829c is sorted by the second sorting unit 4829b, and the probability of being connected to the third sorting unit 4829c decreases, which is advantageous for the player. It is difficult to say that it will be distributed to Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end, it is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842. is not connected at all to the sorting section 4829c of , and the sorting to an area that is advantageous to the player is not performed.

The connector 4908c (4909c) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is provided at a position rotated clockwise by 135° (tolerance ±3°) from the horizontal centerline. As shown, the 1st pin is assigned /φ2, the 2nd pin is assigned /φ1, the 3rd pin is assigned φ2C (common), the 4th pin is assigned φ1C (common), and the 5th pin is assigned φ1C (common). φ2 is assigned to the pin and φ1 is assigned to the sixth pin. Various voltages (voltage for actuation described later, voltage for stop described later) are applied to φ2C (common) assigned to the third pin, and toward φ2 assigned to the first pin or φ2 assigned to the fifth pin. current flows. Various voltages (voltage for actuation described later, voltage for stop described later) are applied to φ1C (common) assigned to the 4th pin. current flows.

The first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage according to the rotation state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2. It is

In this way, in the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) changes to The D-cut angle position is a position rotated counterclockwise by 10° (tolerance ±3°) from the horizontal center line. In this embodiment, there are eight combinations of excitation of the phases φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) (the phases φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 are ) exists, and the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined by these eight combinations of excitation of each phase. It's becoming

In this way, the excitation combination of each phase of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) , is not formed at all, for example, a sensor is provided so as to detect when the first electric distributing piece 4835 is at the mechanical end on the left side, and the rotation of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is detected. By rotating the shaft 4908a, a pushing operation is performed to move the first electric sorting piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side. There is a drawback that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence relationship with the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the piece 4835, and a sensor is provided so as to detect when the second electric distributing piece 4840 is at the position of the mechanical end on the left side. By rotating the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909, the second electric sorting piece 4840 is pushed in to move to the mechanical end position on the left side. There is a drawback that it is necessary to grasp the corresponding relationship between the phase and the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the second electric dividing piece 4840 .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) rotates the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON). ) is structurally determined so that the angle of the D-cut surface formed in ) is a position rotated counterclockwise by 10° (tolerance ±3°) from the horizontal center line, and further , 8 combinations of excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), the rotational position of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end), , the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (4840) (the except for the position.) and can be determined.

In addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the first excitation controls the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) to rotate the first electric sorting piece 4835 (4840). Even if the position differs from the assumed rotational position, the next excitation can control the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to match the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) to the intended rotational position. Therefore, recovery can be easily performed. This can also be applied when the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is out of step due to the current excitation, and the next excitation controls the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) to perform the first electric sorting. Since the rotational position of the piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotational position, the step-out recovery of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be easily performed.

Here, in this embodiment, the first electric dividing piece 4835 is used as an electric drive source that always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). A stepping motor is adopted, and the second electric dividing piece 4840 is electrically driven to constantly swing in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end). The reason for adopting a stepping motor as the source will be briefly explained.

The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 distribute the game balls according to the distribution ratio, and require accuracy. For this reason, if a solenoid is used as an electric drive source, there will be a difference between the plunger movement speed when the solenoid excitation drive is started and the plunger movement speed returned by the restoring force of the spring when the solenoid excitation drive is stopped. . In addition, since the plunger returns due to the restoring force of the spring, the moving speed of the plunger is not always constant, and the moving speed of the plunger varies depending on the solenoid due to variations in the spring. In addition, since the first electric dividing piece 4835 and the second electric dividing piece 4840 always swing like a wiper, as described above, if a solenoid is used as an electric drive source, the solenoid is not durable. The spring deteriorates over time, and it is difficult to continue the sorting operation by the first electric sorting piece 4835 and the second electric sorting piece 4840 according to the sorting ratio set at the time of design. Thus, when a solenoid is used as an electric drive source, it is difficult to accurately control the sorting operation by the first electric sorting piece 4835 and the second electric sorting piece 4840, and the sorting operation needs to be finely controlled. is difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an electric drive that is durable, has little deterioration over time, has little variation in performance between individual units, can accurately control the sorting operation, and can finely control the sorting operation. As a source, a first sorting stepping motor 4908, which is a stepping motor, is employed for the first electric sorting piece 4835, and a second sorting stepping motor 4909, which is a stepping motor, is employed for the second electric sorting piece 4840.

In this embodiment, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases are excited (ON) as described above. The angle of the D-cut surface is structurally determined so that the D-cut angle position is the position rotated counterclockwise by 10° (tolerance ± 3°) from the horizontal center line, and further, the first Correspondence between the 8 combinations of excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the rotary shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) is electrically determined, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (4840) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined without performing the pushing operation described above. ), and can be determined, such a mechanism can be used in other production devices in which a movable body operated by a stepping motor is provided. Such other effect device may be provided on the game board 5 or may be provided on the door frame 3 . When the other production device is controlled by the main control board 1310, the stepping motor that operates the movable body is driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the other production device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, it is movable. A stepping motor that moves the body is driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 .

[Voltage switching circuit]
Next, according to the rotation state of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), the voltage for operation and the voltage for stop are mutually changed as excitation to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2. A voltage switching circuit capable of switching to . FIG. 254 is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit.

The first sorting stepping motor 4908 always swings the first electric sorting piece 4835 like a wiper, and the second sorting stepping motor 4909 always swings the second electric sorting piece 4840 like a wiper. , the second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 must be driven all the time. However, when the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven all the time, the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 generate excessive heat, causing problems in the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909. or failure may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven all the time.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to swing the first and second electric sorting pieces 4835 and 4840 like wipers, the operating voltage is used. On the other hand, when driving the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 to stop the first and second electric sorting pieces 4835 and 4840, the voltage switching circuit is controlled to use the stopping voltage. and realized.

First, as shown in FIG. 254, the main control board 1310 has the first and second stepping motors 4908 and 4909 which can be switched between operating voltage and stopping voltage as voltages to be applied to the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 . It has two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p and first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q capable of driving the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. FIG.

Here, the first and second sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p have the same circuit configuration, and the first and second sorting stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q have the same circuit configuration. In the description of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p and the description of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, the reference numerals regarding the first distribution stepping motor 4908 are followed by the reference numerals regarding the second distribution stepping motor 4909. is shown in parentheses.

The first sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly comprises a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. It is The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is connected to a first electric dividing piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 1 (a second electric flip-flop (not shown) as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for switching the distribution piece voltage. The input terminal of this first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (second electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop) is the first electric distribution piece voltage switching output of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the terminal (the output terminal for switching the voltage of the second electric distribution piece).

The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) through the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. A gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to a source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via a resistor MR53 (MR63). A source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifying diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). . The anode terminal of diode MD50 (MD60) is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. The other end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of Zener diodes MD51 and MD52 (MD61 and MD62), respectively, and supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) +12V-. It is electrically connected to the terminal of connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) as a power supply line U (+12V-D).

The first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) incorporates four chipped NPN-type Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65) and the base of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66). Terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR57 (MR67).

The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) as the Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current that excites φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. and the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the connector 1310z ( 255.), and the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. ) is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255), and the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor receives a current that excites /φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). It is electrically connected to a terminal of connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) as a flowing U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line).

The other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, is the PD0 (PD4 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 (not shown)). there is The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (the φ1 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor, is PD1 (MR65) that instructs the start or stop of excitation of /φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. PD5) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 (not shown)). It is connected. The input terminal of the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (the /φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909) is the first sorting stepping motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the /φ1 output terminal of 4908 (the /φ1 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, is the PD2 (PD6 ) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 (not shown)). there is The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909) is connected to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (the φ2 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor, is PD3 (MR67) that instructs the start or stop of excitation of /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. PD7) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 (not shown)). It is connected. The input terminal of the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (the /φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second sorting stepping motor 4909) is the first sorting stepping motor of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the /φ2 output terminal of 4908 (the /φ2 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

The emitter terminal of the first NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The emitter terminal of the third NPN Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) has four built-in diodes. are placed in the package.

The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It is The cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN Darlington transistor. are electrically connected inside the package, and the cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected inside the package to the cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It is The cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

The first to fourth diodes convert into heat the back electromotive force generated when the excitation of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is stopped and removes it. This protects the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors.

The +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line that supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is connected to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the third pin φ2C (common) and the fourth pin φ1C (common) of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4908 (4909). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current that excites φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) through the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) and wiring (not shown). 4909) is electrically connected to the sixth pin φ1 of the connector 4908c (4909c). The U/φ1 line (D/φ1 line), through which the current for exciting /φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows, is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) through the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to /φ1 of the second pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current that excites φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) and wiring (not shown). 4909) is electrically connected to the fifth pin φ2 of the connector 4908c (4909c). The U/φ2 line (D/φ2 line) through which the current for exciting /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) through the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 255) and wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to /φ2 of the first pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909).

PD0 to PD3 instructing start and stop of excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, and excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909. When the main control MPU 1310a outputs the oscillation drive data PD0 to PD7, which is 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 for instructing the start and stop of the oscillation, the corresponding D-type flip-flops and each resistor to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q. The first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) selects the operating voltage or A current that excites φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is supplied by the voltage switched to the stop voltage.

Here, the operation of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. , the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned off, and the power supply line voltage of +12V-U (+12V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is pulled up to the +12V side by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). As a result, +12V is supplied to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of +12V-U (+12V-D) via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as an operating voltage. It should be noted that the +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line is not supplied to the +5 power supply line through the diode MD50 (MD60).

On the other hand, when the logic of the signal voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the voltage logic for stopping which is the inversion of the voltage logic for operation, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned ON. Then, the +12 V is cut off by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60), and the power supply line voltage of +12 V-U (+12 V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is generated by the diode MD50 (MD60). +5V is supplied to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a stop voltage as a +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). be done.

Here, a brief description will be given of the difference in temperature rise between the power consumption of the operation voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage. The power consumption W can be calculated according to Ohm's law: Voltage V×Voltage V÷Resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to the operating voltage of +12V is 144/resistance R, and the power consumption Ws due to the stopping voltage of +5V is 25/resistance R. Then, the power consumption Wo at +12 V, which is the operating voltage, is more than five times (5.76=144/25) the power consumption Ws at +5 V, which is the stop voltage, so the temperature rise is also about five times or more. becomes. This also applies to the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q).

In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem due to single (continuous) driving with the +12V operating voltage, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less by driving with the +5V stopping voltage.

The package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) includes heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), Heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) into heat is absorbed, and the absorbed heat is transferred to the outside air. (around the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q)). Since the island facilities of the game hall are arranged in a line with other pachinko machines facing each other, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is high due to the heat emitted from the power supply board, various control boards, etc. of the pachinko machine.

Therefore, even if the package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first sorting stepping motor can still be driven. When the ambient temperature of the IC 1310n (1310q), that is, the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air decreases, so heat is accumulated in the package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). It will happen. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) rises and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors rises to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors Transistors may fail.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first By continuously exciting the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 as much as possible, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 The number of times the excitation is stopped is reduced, and the counter electromotive force generated when the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 is stopped is reduced to the first to fourth It is possible to reduce the number of times the diode converts heat to remove it. As a result, the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes can be kept small, which can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors from being damaged by heat.

In this embodiment, the first sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) does not use a relay, but uses a semiconductor field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60). This is because it is difficult to accurately control the sorting operation due to the occurrence of a time lag in relays and the large variation in performance between individual relays.
[Polyswitch]

Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. FIG. 255 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of polyswitches.

The operating voltage or stopping voltage is supplied to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a +12V-U (+12V-D) power supply line. In the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature shows that the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature, causing the body to generate heat. When cooled, the conductivity returns and recovers, and if this is used, the current flowing to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is the load, is limited, and the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is the load, is controlled. ) can be protected. A fuse may be mentioned as a current limiter to the load. This fuse can cut off the current flowing to the load by melting when an overcurrent flows, but the fuse itself needs to be replaced with a new one.

However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent anyone from obtaining illegal game balls by illegally altering the important main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302. are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimped portion 1303 . This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and is provided in plurality. Main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism. must destroy its sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, if a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310 and the fuse blows, the caulked portion 1303 must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is played. become incapable of doing so.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a polyswitch is adopted as an element for limiting overcurrent, like the fuse. As a result, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the load can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the load by specifying the polyswitch. In other words, unlike a fuse, the polyswitch itself will not be destroyed by overcurrent, and there is no need to replace it. not at all.

The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a rectangular parallelepiped main body and a lead shape with two leads protruding downward from the bottom surface. In the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), as described above, in the relationship between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value increases sharply from a certain temperature, causing the main body to generate heat. When it is cut off and the main body cools down, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60), the two leads of the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60) are arranged in the vertical direction so that the thickness of the main body of the PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60) is increased. The smaller surface can be oriented vertically, facilitating upward convection of heat generated by the main body of PolySwitch MPS50 (MPS60).

Also, since a large current flows through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), the terminals for supplying power to the first power distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the phases (φ1, /φ1) of the first power distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) , φ2, /φ2) are arranged in the vicinity of a connector 1310z having terminals for exciting . This can contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) on other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. FIG.

In addition, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), it is possible to protect the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) from overheating.

In this embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909, 1310p of the main control board 1310, the polyswitch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310. 4, 9, 11 and corresponding terminals of the connectors 4908c, 4909c of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908, 4909, respectively. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909, Therefore, the polyswitch MPS 60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310. It may be configured such that one common polyswitch is dedicated to each of the +12V and +5V motor power supplies, or the voltages are supplied to the first and second sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. It may be configured such that one common polyswitch is dedicated only to the +12V motor power supply.

Further, for example, when driving other stepping motors together with the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n, and the other stepping motors are driven by other stepping motor drive ICs 1310n). 4908, the motor power supplied to the other stepping motors can be switched by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the common polyswitch for the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the other stepping motors is the polyswitch MPS50, and through this polyswitch MPS50, the motor power supply of +12V or +5V is applied to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the other stepping motors. respectively supplied to the motors.

Also, in this embodiment, unipolar stepping motors are used as the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909, but bipolar stepping motors may be used instead. In this case, one polyswitch is dedicated to each terminal to which the motor power of +12V and +5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In this embodiment, the polyswitch adopted as the resettable fuse is a PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature Coefficien) such as a thermistor.
However, even if a ceramic PTC (positive temperature coefficient) element or bimetal is used as the resettable fuse, the same effects as those of the polyswitch described above can be obtained.

[Drive control block for first and second sorting stepping motors]
Next, drive management blocks for the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described. 256 is a table for explaining the drive control block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and FIG. 257 is a table for explaining the drive control block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. FIG. Drive control blocks for the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a, in the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4909, the first and second distributed stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q are output with swing drive data PD0 to PD7. Signals of voltage switching 1 and 2 whose logic is set are output to the two-division stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p.

As described above, the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are excited (ON) with φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases. The D-cut angle position is obtained by rotating the angle by 10° (tolerance ±3°) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. In this embodiment, there are eight combinations of excitation of the phases φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 (each of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2). ) exists, and the rotational positions of the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a can be determined by combining the excitation of each of the eight phases.

In this embodiment, the eight combinations of excitation of the phases φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are as follows: Combination 1: φ1, φ2 excitation (ON); Combination 2: φ2 only excitation (ON), combination 3: φ2, /φ1 excitation (ON), combination 4: /φ1 only excitation (ON), combination 5: /φ1, /φ2 excitation (ON), combination 7: / Only φ2 is energized (ON), and the combination 8: /φ2, φ1 is energized (ON).

In this embodiment, the rotational directions and rotational positions of the rotary shafts 4908a and 4909a are defined as a drive management block composed of eight combinations of excitation of each phase. The main control MPU 1310a instructs PD0 to PD3 to start or stop excitation of φ1, /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, and φ1, /φ1, φ2, and φ1 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909. Of the oscillation drive data PD0 to PD7, which are 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing the start and stop of excitation for /φ2, PD0 to PD3 are output to the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n. and outputs PD4 to PD7 to the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets and outputs the logic of the voltage switching 1 signal to the first distributed stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m according to the drive management block, and outputs the second distributed stepping motor voltage. By setting the logic of the voltage switching 2 signal to the switching circuit 1310p and outputting it, the voltages switched to the operating voltage or the stopping voltage are used to control φ1, /φ1, φ2, and φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. /φ2 is applied to rotate the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 clockwise, counterclockwise, or stop rotating, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped. , /φ1, φ2, and /φ2 are supplied to rotate the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 clockwise, counterclockwise, or stop rotating. As a result, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 oscillates the first electric sorting piece 4835 to always swing like a wiper (like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). At the same time, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 oscillates the second electric sorting piece 4840 to form a constant wiper (a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end). shape).

[Drive control block of the first sorting stepping motor]
The drive control block of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, as shown in FIG. second (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the control number, No. 1 to No. Up to 20 are specified.

Management number No. In 1, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, indicated as "12" in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 stipulated. Management number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with 1, the first electric sorting piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and is sorted to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and the second sorting. 4829b.

When φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. The D-cut angle position is the position rotated by 10° (tolerance ±3°). In this embodiment, when the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distributing piece 4835 rotates toward the left mechanical end position, the first electric distributing piece 4835 is excited (ON) by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 which are set as the reference excitation phases. 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, and when the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end.

Management number No. 2, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. 2, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distributing piece 4835, and the first electric distributing piece 4835 moves from the position of the mechanical end on the right side to the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step ( That is, it rotates CCW (counterclockwise). Management number No. 1 to control number No. 2, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ2, /φ1. Management number No. 3, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 2 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 2 to control number No. 3, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 4, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ1 is defined. Management number No. 4, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a rotates to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 3 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 3 to control number No. 4, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 5, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 ( operating voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ1, /φ2 are defined. Management number No. 5, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 4 from the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. The position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated by 5 is the middle position in the range from the position of the mechanical end on the left side to the position of the mechanical end on the right side, and the first electric dividing piece 4835 is vertically inverted. be in a state to Management number No. 4 to control number No. 5, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 5, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the left side, the inertia of the first electric dividing piece 4835 is small, so the first electric dividing piece 4835 is vertically inverted. Immediately before, by weakening the torque of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, control number No. This is to prevent the first electric distribution piece 4835 from rotating further than the position defined by 5, and to ensure followability.

Specifically, when the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end on the left as measured by a high-speed camera, control number No. 4835 described later is detected. 9, before the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven, the first electric sorting piece 4835 reaches the mechanical end position on the left side. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence relationship with the rotational position of is broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric sorting piece 4835 becomes vertically inverted, that is, when the control number No. 5, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is defined to weaken the torque of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, thereby preventing the correspondence between the control number and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 from collapsing. I've come up with a technique that makes it possible.

Management number No. 6, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ2. Management number No. 6, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 5 from the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 5 to control number No. 6, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 7, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ2, φ1. Management number No. 7, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 6 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 6 to control number No. 7, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 8, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ1. Management number No. 8, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 7 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 7 to control number No. 8, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 9, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Management number No. 9, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a rotates to the gear mechanism (Fig. 237, 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and control number No. 8 from the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is distributed to the right course flowing to the right side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and descends spirally through the screw passage 4836 to the third distribution. 4829c. Management number No. 8 to control number No. 9, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

When φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. (Tolerance ±3°) to a position rotated to be the D-cut angle position. In this embodiment, when the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distributing piece 4835 rotates toward the left mechanical end position, the first electric distributing piece 4835 is excited (ON) by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 which are set as the reference excitation phases. 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, and when the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end. Management number No. 8 to control number No. 9, the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotary shaft 4908a is 10° (tolerance ±3°) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. ), which is the D-cut angle position.

Management number No. In 10, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 10, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to control number No. 10. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distributing piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state. The state of being connected to the third sorting portion 4829c via is maintained. Management number No. 9 to control number No. 10, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 continues to be maintained at two phases.

Management number No. 11, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 is defined. Management number No. 11, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 10 (control number No. 9) from the position of the mechanical end on the left, which is the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835, toward the position of the mechanical end on the right by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise) )Rotate. Management number No. 11, the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by control number No. 8 is the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 8. Management number No. 10 to control number No. 11, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 12, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ2, φ1 are defined. Management number No. 12, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 11 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 12, the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by control number No. 7 to the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 7. Management number No. 11 to control number No. 12, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 13 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ2. Management number No. 13, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 12 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. 13, the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by control number No. 6 is the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 6. Management number No. 12 to control number No. 13, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 14, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ1, /φ2 are defined. Management number No. 14, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 13 from the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. 14, the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by control number No. 5 is the position of the first electric distributing piece 4835 rotated in step 5, which is the middle position of the range from the position of the mechanical end on the right side to the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and the first electric distributing piece 4835 is vertically inverted. be in a state to Management number No. 13 to control number No. 14, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 14 stipulates excitation time (ms): 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position, the inertia of the first electric dividing piece 4835 is small, so the first electric dividing piece 4835 is vertically inverted. Immediately before, by weakening the torque of the first allocating stepping motor 4908, the first electric allocating piece 4835 has control number No. This is to prevent further rotation beyond the position defined by 14 and to ensure followability.

Specifically, when the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the right side, a control number No. 1, which will be described later, is detected by measurement using a high-speed camera. 18, before the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven, the first electric sorting piece 4835 reaches the mechanical end position on the right side. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence relationship with the rotational position of is broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric sorting piece 4835 becomes vertically inverted, that is, when the control number No. 14, the excitation time (ms): 0 (zero) is defined to weaken the torque of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, thereby preventing the correspondence between the control number and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 from collapsing. I've come up with a technique that makes it possible.

Management number No. 15 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage) and excitation phase designation: /φ1. Management number No. 15, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 14 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. 15, the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by control number No. 4 is the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 4. Management number No. 14 to control number No. 15, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 16 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, /φ1. Management number No. 16, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a moves to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 15 from the position of the first electric distributing piece 4835 to the position of the mechanical end on the right side (that is, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. The position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 16 is indicated by the control number No. 3 is the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 3. Management number No. 15 to control number No. 16, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 17 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. 17, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 16 from the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 17 is indicated by control number No. 2 is the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 2. Management number No. 16 to control number No. 17, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 18 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Management number No. 18, the rotating shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4908a rotates to the gear mechanism (FIG. 237). , FIGS. 244 and 245) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the control number No. 17 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the right side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 18 is indicated by control number No. 1 to the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 1. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distribution portion 4829b. Management number No. 17 to control number No. 18, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

When φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. (Tolerance ±3°) to a position rotated to be a D-cut angle position. In this embodiment, when the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) to be the D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distributing piece 4835 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the left side, the first electric distributing piece 4835 is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases. 4835 is at the left mechanical end position, and when the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotates toward the right mechanical end position, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON). As a result, the first electric dividing piece 4835 is positioned at the right mechanical end. Management number No. 17 to control number No. 18, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is positioned at the mechanical end on the right side, and management number No. 18 is reached. 1 to the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 1.

Management number No. 19 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 19, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to control number No. 19. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distributing piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is maintained in a stopped state, is distributed to the left path flowing to the left when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distributing portion 4829b. state is maintained. Management number No. 18 to control number No. 19, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 continues to be maintained at two phases.

Management number No. 20, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 324, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stopping), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 20, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to control number No. 20. 19 (management number No. 18), the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated is maintained. As a result, the first electric distributing piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the right side, is maintained in a stopped state, is distributed to the left course flowing to the left side when facing the front of the ball passage 4834, and is connected to the second distributing portion 4829b. state is maintained. Management number No. 19 to control number No. 20, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 continues to be maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12V, which is the operating voltage, to +5V, which is the stopping voltage.

Management number No. 20, the management number No. Direction of rotation at 19: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained while the voltage is switched from +12V (operating voltage) to +5V (stopping voltage). In addition, management number No. 19, the excitation time (ms): 12, whereas control number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 324. That is, the control number No. 20, the management number No. 19, the excitation time is 27 times longer, and the stopping time is longer. As a result, even if the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the first sorting stepping motor 4908 from generating excessive heat. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, management number No. 20, control number No. 1, control number No. 1 to control number No. 20, the first electric sorting stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven, and the first electric sorting piece 4835 swings in a wiper-like manner that constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position. move. The time during which the first electric distribution piece 4835 stops at the mechanical end position on the right side is given by control number No. 19 Excitation time (ms): 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 20: 324, and control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in No. 1: 12 is added to 348 ms. Excitation time (ms) stipulated in 10: Only 8, which is 8 ms. The operating voltage of +12V is switched to the stopping voltage of +5V.

Also, when the first electric sorting piece 4835 is stopped (that is, the rotary shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is stopped), the control number No. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 19, and control number No. Two phases are specified for the excitation mode of No. 20, and control number No. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 19, and control number No. .phi.1 and .phi.2 are specified for the excitation phase designation of No. 20, and control number No. 1, control number No. 10, and control number No. +12 V is specified for the voltage of No. 19, and control number No. 20 voltage is defined as +5V. That is, when the first electric distributing piece 4835 is stopped (when the rotary shaft 4908a of the first distributing stepping motor 4908 is stopped), regardless of the magnitude of the voltage, the excitation mode is always two-phase. φ1 and φ2 are specified, and the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven.

In addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the control number No. 1 to management number No. 20, control number No. 20, which is a control number defined as rotation direction: stop. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 19, and control number No. 20, starting from one control number, control number No. 20, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven one by one according to the conditions specified by the management number. And management number No. 20, control number No. 1, control number No. 2, . . . , the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to each condition specified by the management number immediately before the first management number, and the management number No. 1 is driven. 1 to management number No. 20, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven. "One management number" may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is obtained when power is restored, and a predetermined calculation is performed on the obtained random number according to the obtained random number. It may be determined based on the results obtained by the execution, or may be determined based on a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

It should be noted that the game backup information may include the control number immediately before the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including power outages and momentary power failures). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information when the power is restored, and starts driving the first sorting stepping motor 4908 according to the conditions defined by the read management number.

In this embodiment, when the rotating shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is rotating CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first sorting stepping motor 4908 φ1, φ2, /φ1, / Although the excitation to φ2 is performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, it may be performed as 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), excitation in the order of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 results in the first to fourth steps of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n. The diodes convert the back electromotive forces from φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the first distributed stepping motor 4908 into heat in the order of the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. diode. As a result, as described above, heat can be alternately generated by the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired. , can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors from being damaged by heat.

In this embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835. The excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 may be determined so as not to overlap. For example, when the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 moves to the first position through the gear mechanism (see FIGS. 237, 244, and 245). Since it is configured to be transmitted to the electric distribution piece 4835, in this gear mechanism, the gear ratio in the above-described embodiment (current gear ratio) is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap. In addition, the range in which the first electric sorting piece 4835 is constantly swung like a wiper (like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end) is set by the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. The phase and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined, and the drive control block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be defined.

[Drive control block of the second sorting stepping motor]
The drive control block of the second sorting stepping motor 4909, as shown in FIG. second (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the control number, No. 1 to No. 21.

Management number No. 1, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none ("-" symbol in the figure), pulse width (ms): none ("-" symbol in the figure), excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage, indicated as "12" in the figure, the same applies hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 stipulated. Management number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 1, the second electric sorting piece 4840 reaches the vertically inverted mechanical end position and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842 . As a result, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third sorting portion 4829c is closed.

When φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. The D-cut angle position is the position rotated by 10° (tolerance ±3°). In this embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, it is possible to determine the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Therefore, when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the left side, the second electric distributing piece 4840 is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases. 4840 is at the mechanical end position on the left side, and when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position that is vertically inverted, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric dividing piece 4840 is positioned at the mechanical end in which it is vertically inverted.

Management number No. 2, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. 2, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric dividing piece 4840, and the second electric dividing piece 4840 moves from the vertically inverted mechanical end position toward the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise direction)). clockwise)) rotate. Management number No. 1 to management number No. 2, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ2, /φ1. Management number No. 3, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 2 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 2 to control number No. 3, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 4, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ1. Management number No. 4, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 3 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 3 to control number No. 4, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 5, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ1, /φ2. Management number No. 5, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 4 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 4 to control number No. 5, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 6, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ2. Management number No. 6, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 5 from the position of the second electric dividing piece 4840 to the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 5 to control number No. 6, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 7, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: /φ2, φ1. Management number No. 7, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a is caused by the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 6 from the position of the second electric dividing piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 6 to control number No. 7, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 8, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ1. Management number No. 8, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 7 toward the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Management number No. 7 to control number No. 8, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 9, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage ), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Management number No. 9, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is rotated by one step CW (clockwise), and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 8 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 . In other words, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third sorting portion 4829c is opened. Management number No. 8 to control number No. 9, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. (Tolerance ±3°) to a position rotated to be the D-cut angle position. In this embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the left side, the second electric distributing piece 4840 is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases. 4840 is at the mechanical end position on the left side, and when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position that is vertically inverted, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric dividing piece 4840 is positioned at the mechanical end in which it is vertically inverted. Management number No. 8 to control number No. 9, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the mechanical end on the left side, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotary shaft 4909a is 10° (tolerance ±3°) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. ), which is the D-cut angle position.

Management number No. In 10, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 10, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to control number No. 10. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the third The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Management number No. 9 to control number No. 10, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained at two phases.

Management number No. In 11, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 32, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stopping), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 11, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to control number No. 11. 10 (management number No. 9), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the third The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Management number No. 10 to control number No. 11, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12V for operation to +5V for stop.

Management number No. 11, the control number No. Direction of rotation at 10: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained while the voltage is switched from +12V (operating voltage) to +5V (stopping voltage). In addition, management number No. 10, the excitation time (ms): 12, whereas control number No. 11, excitation time (ms): 32. That is, the control number No. 11, the control number No. 10, the excitation time is about 2.7 times longer, and the stopping time is longer. As a result, even if the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is constantly driven, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second sorting stepping motor 4909 from generating excessive heat. can be prevented from occurring.

Management number No. 12, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 12, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to control number No. 12. 11 (management number No. 10, management number No. 9), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side, is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the third The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is opened) state is maintained. Management number No. 11 to control number No. 12, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched again from the stop voltage of +5V to the operation voltage of +12V.

The reason why the voltage is switched again from the stop voltage of +5 V to the operation voltage of +12 V is that the second electric dividing piece 4840 has a larger size and larger inertia than the first electric dividing piece 4835. A strong torque is required when the second electric dividing piece 4840 starts to rotate from the mechanical end position on the left side (that is, the second electric dividing piece 4840 is tilted obliquely) toward the vertically inverted mechanical end position. This is because the control number No. 12, in preparation for this, the voltage is switched from the stopping voltage of +5V to the operating voltage of +12V.

Management number No. 13 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ2, φ1 are defined. Management number No. 13, the rotary shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotary shaft 4909a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 12 rotates from the position of the mechanical end on the left, which is the position of the first electric dividing piece 4835 rotated by 12, toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the first electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 13 is indicated by control number No. 8 instead of control number No. 7 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7. Management number No. 12 to control number No. 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained at two phases.

This is because, as described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and has greater inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835, so the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the left mechanical end (that is, This is because a strong torque is required when starting to rotate from the state in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 has fallen diagonally toward the position of the mechanical end in which it stands upside down in the vertical direction. 12 to control number No. 13, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and a strong torque can be obtained when starting rotation. And management number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in No. 8: 4, and control number No. Excitation time (ms): 8 stipulated in control number No. 7 is added to the excitation time (ms): 4. 13, the management number No. The position of the first electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 13 is indicated by control number No. 8 instead of control number No. 7 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7.

Management number No. 14 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ2. Management number No. 14, the rotary shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotary shaft 4909a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 13 toward the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 14 is indicated by control number No. 6 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6. Management number No. 13 to control number No. 14, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 14 defines an excitation time (ms) of 8, which means that the second electric distributing piece 4840 gradually rotates from the tilted state toward the vertically inverted mechanical end position. As a result, the state of being connected to the third distribution section 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution section 4829c is opened) is gradually closed. This is because it is possible to realize a mode of transitioning to a state where the

Management number No. 15 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: /φ1, /φ2 are defined. Management number No. 15, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 14 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 15 is indicated by the control number No. 5 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by . Management number No. 14 to control number No. 15, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 15, the control number No. The same excitation time (ms) defined in 14: 8 is defined, but as described above, this is the position of the mechanical end in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is vertically inverted from the state in which it is tilted obliquely. By creating a mode that gradually rotates toward , it is connected to the third distribution part 4829c via the right rear passage 4841 (that is, the right rear passage 4841 connected to the third distribution part 4829c is opened This is because it is possible to realize a mode in which the state (closed) gradually transitions to a closed state.

Management number No. 16, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage) and excitation phase designation: /φ1. Management number No. 16, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 15 toward the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 16 is indicated by control number No. 4 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4. Management number No. 15 to control number No. 16, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 17 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, /φ1. Management number No. 17, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 16 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated toward the position of the mechanical end vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 17 is indicated by control number No. 3 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3. Management number No. 16 to control number No. 17, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

Management number No. 18 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2. Management number No. 18, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a is shifted to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 17 toward the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 18 is indicated by control number No. 2 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2. Management number No. 17 to control number No. 18, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 2-phase to 1-phase.

Management number No. 19 has rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (for operation voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 are defined. Management number No. 19, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is turned CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 4909a moves to the gear mechanism (FIG. 238). ) to the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the control number No. 18 toward the position of the mechanical end that is vertically inverted by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Management number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by 19 is indicated by control number No. 1 to the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the vertically inverted mechanical end position and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842 . In other words, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third sorting portion 4829c is closed. Management number No. 18 to control number No. 19, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is switched from 1-phase to 2-phase.

When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line, as described above. (Tolerance ±3°) to a position rotated to be the D-cut angle position. In this embodiment, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so that it is rotated by 3°) and becomes a D-cut angle position.

In this embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position on the left side, the second electric distributing piece 4840 is excited (ON) by φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phases. 4840 is at the mechanical end position on the left side, and when the second electric distributing piece 4840 rotates toward the mechanical end position that is vertically inverted, φ1 and φ2, which are set as the reference excitation phases, are excited. By being turned on (ON), the second electric dividing piece 4840 is positioned at the mechanical end in which it is vertically inverted. Management number No. 18 to control number No. 19, the second electric dividing piece 4840 is vertically inverted to the mechanical end position, and control number No. 19 is reached. 1 to the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1.

Management number No. 20 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +12 (operating voltage), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 20, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to control number No. 20. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end, is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842 (that is, the third The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is closed) state is maintained. Management number No. 19 to control number No. 20, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained at two phases.

Management number No. 21, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 428, excitation mode: 2 phases, voltage (V): +5 (voltage for stopping), excitation phase Designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Management number No. 21, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to control number No. 21. 20 (control number No. 19) maintains the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the starting gate 4803 via the left front passage 4842 (that is, the third The right rear passage 4841 connected to the distribution portion 4829c is closed) state is maintained. Management number No. 20 to control number No. 21, the excitation mode of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 continues to be maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12V for operation to +5V for stop.

Management number No. 21, the management number No. Direction of rotation at 20: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained while the voltage is switched from +12V (operating voltage) to +5V (stopping voltage). In addition, management number No. 20, the excitation time (ms): 12, whereas control number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 428. That is, the management number No. 21, the management number No. 20, the excitation time is about 35.7 times longer, and the stopping time is longer. As a result, even if the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven all the time, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the second sorting stepping motor 4909 from generating excessive heat. can be prevented from occurring.

In addition, management number No. 21, control number No. 1, control number No. 1 to management number No. 21, the second electric dividing stepping motor 4909 is driven repeatedly, and the second electric dividing piece 4840 is a wiper that constantly reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertically inverted mechanical end position. It oscillates in shape. The time during which the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops at the vertically inverted mechanical end position is given by control number No. 20 Excitation time (ms): 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 21: 428, and control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 1: 452 ms with 12 added, the voltage is switched from +12 V for operation to +5 V for stop, and stops at the left mechanical end position. The time is the control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 10: 12, control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 11: 32, and control number No. Excitation time (ms) defined in 12: 4 plus 48 ms, and the voltage is switched from +12 V for operation to +5 V for stop voltage. As described above, although the stop time at the position of the left mechanical end differs from the stop time at the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops, the voltage is always the operating voltage. It is switched from a certain +12V to a stopping voltage of +5V.

Also, when the second electric sorting piece 4840 is stopped (that is, the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is stopped), the control number No. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 11, control number No. 12, control number No. 20, and control number No. Two phases are specified for the excitation mode of No. 21, and control number No. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 11, control number No. 12, control number No. 20, and control number No. .phi.1 and .phi.2 are specified for the excitation phase designation of No. 21, and control number No. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 12, and control number No. +12 V is specified for the voltage of No. 20, and the control number No. 11, and control number No. 21 is specified to be +5V. That is, when the second electric distributing piece 4840 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distributing stepping motor 4909 is stopped), regardless of the magnitude of the voltage, the excitation mode is always two phases. The second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven with φ1 and φ2 as designations.

In addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, the control number No. 1 to management number No. 21, control number No. 21, which is a control number defined as rotation direction: stop. 1, control number No. 10, control number No. 11, control number No. 12, control number No. 20, and control number No. 21, starting from one control number, control number No. 21, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven one by one according to the conditions specified by the management number. And management number No. 21, control number No. 1, control number No. 2, . . . , the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the conditions specified by the management number immediately before the first management number, and the management number No. 1 to management number No. 21, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven. "One management number" may be predetermined as an initial value (default), or a random number is obtained when power is restored, and a predetermined calculation is performed on the obtained random number according to the obtained random number. It may be determined based on the results obtained by the execution, or may be determined based on a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

It should be noted that the management number immediately before the pachinko machine 1 is turned off (including power outages and momentary power outages) may be included in the above-described game backup information. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information when power is restored, and starts driving the second sorting stepping motor 4909 according to the conditions defined by the read management number.

In this embodiment, when the rotating shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is rotating CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the second sorting stepping motor 4909 φ1, φ2, /φ1, / Although the excitation to φ2 was performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, it may be performed as 1-1 phase excitation or 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), excitation in the order of φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 results in the first to fourth steps of the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q. The diodes convert the back electromotive forces from φ1, φ2, /φ1, and /φ2 of the second distributed stepping motor 4909 into heat in the order of the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth diode. diode. As a result, as described above, heat can be alternately generated by the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired. , can contribute to reducing the temperature rise of the package of the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors from being damaged by heat.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The excitation phase of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 may be determined so as not to overlap. For example, when the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is transmitted to the second electric sorting piece 4840 via the gear mechanism (see FIG. 238). Therefore, in this gear mechanism, the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap, and the second electric distributing piece The range in which the 4840 is constantly swung like a wiper (like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end) is defined by the excitation phase of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 and the excitation phase of the second The rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined, and a drive control block for the second distribution stepping motor 4909 can be defined.

[Mounting method of field effect transistor]
Next, a method of arranging the field effect transistor MF50 of the first distributing stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m and the field effect transistor MF60 of the second distributing stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p will be briefly described. FIG. 258 is a schematic diagram of a method of implementing a field effect transistor.

The main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and houses the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 in this way, the distance dimension from the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 to the rear surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301 in this embodiment is 15.0 mm. It is necessary to mount various electronic components on the main control board 1310 within this distance dimension.

However, the package of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 adopted in the present embodiment is a so-called TO type package, and the height of the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is large and protrudes from the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60. If the various terminals to be connected are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 as they are, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 will interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 will be connected to the main control board box 1320. cannot be accommodated in

Therefore, in this embodiment, various terminals of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are bent at a predetermined angle using a predetermined jig and then mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310 while maintaining a predetermined distance d from each other. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the main control board box 1320 without the main body interfering with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, and the lower side of the main body of the field effect transistor MF50 which is in an obliquely inclined state. Through the transparent cover 1301, the resistors MR52 and MR53 (including the part number attached to the mounting surface), which are the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, can be seen through the transparent cover 1301, and the obliquely tilted field effect transistor An electric field in which the resistors MR62 and MR63 (including the part number attached to the mounting surface), which are electronic components mounted below the main body of the MF60, are arranged while maintaining a predetermined distance dimension d and are obliquely inclined. It can be seen through the transparent cover 1301 between the main bodies of the effect transistors MF50 and MF60.

[Countermeasures against confusion]
Next, vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 1 by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, and the vibration changes the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a to illegally enter the balls into various winning openings and gates. A circuit for detecting an error will be described. FIG. 259 is a circuit diagram showing a vibration detection circuit.

As shown in FIGS. 234, 235 and 238, the game board 5 is provided with an upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection switch 3006 at predetermined positions. A circuit capable of setting the sensitivity for detecting vibration is provided on the panel relay board 1710 . As shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 259, the panel relay board 1710 includes an upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za capable of setting the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and a vibration detection circuit by the lower vibration detection switch 3006. and a sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb for the lower vibration detection switch that can set the sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch.

Here, since the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb have the same circuit configuration, the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za In the description of the circuit 1710zb, the reference numerals for the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb are shown in parentheses following the reference numerals for the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za.

The upper vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006, are wired OR-connected signals in the panel relay board 1710 to detect vibration. It is transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a sensor and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the above-described main control side input circuit 1310b. The main control MPU 1310a reads the vibration detection sensor, which is a wired OR-connected signal, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interrupt process, this determination result (whether or not there is a dot) is output to the external terminal board 558 described above, and the peripheral of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board command transmission process, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to convey the determination result that a problem is occurring.

The panel relay board 1710 is supplied with +35 V from the main control board 1310 and has the same ground (GND) as the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 . The ground (GND) to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the panel relay board 1710 .

The upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za (1710zb) mainly consists of a shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80), resistors MR70 to MR73 (MR80 to MR83), a Zener diode MD70 (MD80), and an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80). there is The shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80) has reduced temperature drift due to ambient temperature, and can create and supply a regulated power supply that is maintained at a constant voltage to the load.

The other end of the resistor MR70 (MR80), one end of which is electrically connected to the +35V power supply line, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of a Zener diode MD70 (MD80) whose anode terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). and electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR71 (MR81). The other end of the resistor MR71 (MR81) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR72 (resistor MR82), and is also electrically connected to the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). 1 (vibration detection power source 2) is supplied to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 (3006). The line that supplies the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) whose negative terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) of the vibration detection power supply 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is removed and smoothed. The electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) also serves as a low-pass filter.

The other end of resistor MR72 (MR82) is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR73 (MR83), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage input of shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). It is electrically connected to the REF terminal which is a terminal. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80), is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

The vibration detection power supply 1 is determined by 2.5 V×(MR72+MR73)÷MR73, based on the resistance values of the resistors MR72 and MR73. As with the vibration detection power supply 1, the vibration detection power supply 2 is determined by 2.5V.times.(MR82+MR83).div.MR83 based on the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83.

The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 can vary the vibration detection sensitivity depending on the power supplied. The sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006, respectively.

In this embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006, are wired in the panel relay board 1710 as described above. It is OR-connected, transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a vibration detection sensor, and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit. This is because either or both of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not respond at all, or either one of them does not respond at all, depending on the manner (hitting position, hitting angle, hitting strength, etc.). This is because the vibration detection sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the vibration detection sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are mutually compensated because one or both may react excessively.

Through various tests, the resistances of the resistors MR72 and MR73 and the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83 are respectively selected, and the vibration detection sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the vibration detection sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are determined. , is set.

In the present embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006, are connected to the panel relay board 1710 as described above. , it was transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a vibration detection sensor and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b, but it was not wired OR connected in the panel relay board 1710 and remained as it was. It may be independently transmitted to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. By doing this, the combination of the upper vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the lower vibration detection sensor, which is the detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006, is used to main control the mode of the pounding. The MPU 1310 can discriminate and transmit to the outside (a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) from the external terminal board 558).

As the throbbing mode, for example, when both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not respond, the 0th (zero) hitting mode in which the throbbing is not performed, and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 responds. If the lower vibration detection switch 3006 does not react, there is a possibility that a thump is occurring. There is a second hitting mode in which there is a possibility that the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 both react, and a third hitting mode in which a thump occurs.

[Abnormality notification of various sorting parts]
Next, the abnormality notification of the first, second, and third sorting units 4829a, 4829b, and 4829c will be briefly described. As described above, the first distribution part 4829a is configured to be distributed to the right path flowing to the right side and the left path flowing to the left side of the ball passage 4834 depending on the swing timing of the first electric distribution piece 4835. It is As described above, the first electric dividing piece 4835 always swings like a wiper (like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end). An optical first motorized sorting piece sensor (not shown) is provided in the first sorting section 4829a for detecting whether or not the first electric sorting piece is in place. The second distributing portion 4829b is configured to distribute to the right back passage 4841 and the left front passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the second electric distributing piece 4840, as described above. As described above, the second electric dividing piece 4840 always swings like a wiper (like a wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the mechanical end on the left side and the position of the vertically inverted mechanical end). An optical second motorized sorting piece sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the disc is rocked is provided in the second sorting section 4829b. As described above, the third sorting unit 4829c is configured so that the rotating member 4846 of the ball turning type sorting device 4843 is always rotated, and an optical rotating member (not shown) that detects whether or not it is rotating. A sensor is provided in the third sorting portion 4829c.

Detection signals from the first and second electric distribution piece sensors and the rotating member sensor are input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. The main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 177, which is repeated every 4 milliseconds (ms). The detection signals s from the sensor and the rotating member sensor are read, and in the fraud detection processing of step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. and based on the detection signal from the rotating member sensor. Corresponding decorative lamps provided on the game board 5 indicate whether or not an abnormal swing operation of the piece 4835 has occurred, whether or not an abnormal swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 has occurred, or whether or not an abnormal rotational operation of the rotating member 4846 has occurred. 177, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. , the occurrence of an abnormal swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the occurrence of an abnormal rotation operation of the rotary member 4846) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a), when there is an abnormality in the swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the corresponding decorative lamp for the first electric distribution piece provided on the game board 5 lights up in red. However, when there is an abnormality in the swing operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, the corresponding decoration lamp for the second electric distribution piece provided on the game board 5 lights up in green, and an abnormality in the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846 occurs. Then, the corresponding rotating member decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 lights up in a blue light emission mode. By using one full-color LED, a red LED element indicates the presence or absence of an abnormality in the swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, and a green LED element indicates whether or not the second electric distribution piece 4840 has oscillated. It is also possible to report the presence or absence of abnormal operation in association with each other, and to report the presence or absence of abnormal rotational operation of the rotating member 4846 in association with the blue LED element.

The peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control board 1310 to notify that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has an abnormal swing operation, the second electric distribution piece 4840 has an abnormal swing operation, or the rotating member 4846 has an abnormal rotation operation. is received, based on the command, if there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, control is performed so that the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece is played from various speakers, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 When there is an abnormality in the swinging operation, control is performed so that the second electric sorting piece information sound different from the first electric sorting piece information sound is played from various speakers. Control is performed so that the rotary member notification sound, which is different from the first electric distribution piece notification sound and the second electric distribution piece notification sound, is played from various speakers. The first electric distribution piece notification sound, the second electric distribution piece notification sound, and the rotary member notification sound have different tones.

In this way, by notifying the occurrence of an abnormality in the swinging operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of an abnormality in the swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the occurrence of an abnormality in the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846, it is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred. It is possible to quickly inform the store clerk or staff member of the game hall. In addition, even if a fraudulent act of stopping the operations of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 with a wire, string, or the like is performed, the area will be advantageous to the fraudster. The distribution state can be quickly notified to the store clerk or attendant of the game hall.

In addition, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) may output a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 when there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835. When there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the external terminal plate 558. A signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the terminal board 558 . Such signals can be individually output and transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal plate 558. When an abnormality occurs (that is, it is impossible to specify the object in which the abnormality has occurred), a signal may be output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. .

Further, in the case where the game board 5 is provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control board 1510 detects that the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310 is abnormally swinging and the second electric distribution piece Upon receipt of a command indicating the occurrence of an abnormality in the swing operation of the rotating member 4840 or the occurrence of an abnormality in the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846, if there is an abnormality in the swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835 based on the command, that effect is notified. Control may be performed to display a message on the display device, or if there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, control may be performed to display a message to that effect on the display device. Alternatively, if there is an abnormality in the rotation operation of the rotating member 4846, control may be performed to display a message to that effect on the display device. In addition, when an abnormality occurs in any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, (Although it is not possible to specify the object in which the error occurred), control may be performed to display a message on the display device informing of the occurrence of the error.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 254 capable of controlling the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of FIG. ing. The main control board box 1320 is configured in a box shape from a transparent cover body 1301 in FIG. 255 and a transparent base body 1302 in FIG. The fixed state between the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302 can be released. The main control board 1310 has a polyswitch MPS50 of FIG. 254 which is a resettable fuse. The polyswitch MPS50 is heated by an overcurrent to the first sorting stepping motor 4908, thereby reducing its conductivity and cutting off the current. be.

In this way, when an overcurrent flows to the first sorting stepping motor 4908, the current is cut off by the polyswitch MPS50 and cooled, so that the current to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 can be automatically restored. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to destroy the crimped portion 1303, which is a fixed portion, due to an overcurrent to the first sorting stepping motor 4908, and it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from becoming unusable. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from becoming unusable due to overcurrent.

As described above, the embodiments include the following technical ideas.
"A game machine comprising a ball rolling member for rolling a game ball within a game area visible to a player,
The ball rolling member is
a ball flow path having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion and curved in an annular or arc shape so as to apply a centrifugal force toward the peripheral wall portion to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion;
a ball guiding part provided in the ball passage and capable of contacting a lower side than the center of the game ball rolling on the bottom wall and guiding the game ball to a position slightly separated from the peripheral wall. game machine. ”
According to this technical idea, it is possible to provide a game machine having a ball rolling member that can prevent actual damage caused by thumping.
In addition, in order to make the ball guide part more reliably slip under the game ball by vibration, the shape of the ball guide part is made to have a wedge-shaped cross section that slopes downward toward the point of contact with the bottom wall of the game ball. is good.

In view of the above, the embodiments include the following technical ideas.
"A game machine that performs a predetermined game using a game medium and is equipped with a display device for presentation in a game area,
The display device (third display device) is
a display member capable of variably displaying characters, figures, images, etc.;
a display frame that supports the display member;
The display frame is
a frame body mounted variably within the play area;
and a movable part attached to the frame body so as to be variable. ”
Such a game machine changes the position or posture of the display member by moving the frame main body within the game area while performing effects such as images on the display member of the display device, and furthermore, the movable portion is attached to the frame main body. By moving the display member, the performance of the display member can be effectively enhanced.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above. In the embodiments, the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818, which is an example of a display device, are connected to the lift device of the third display device 4818. 4897, but a drive source separate from the lifting device 4897 may be provided to make the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 operate independently. By doing so, a more complex production can be performed.

In addition, although a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine in the embodiment, it can be applied to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine and an arrangement ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates reels. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 260 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door 6002 and a main body 6004, as shown in FIG. Front door 6002 and body portion 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the body portion 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002 , and a projecting portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door 6002 , and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004 .

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 and production devices (not shown) are displayed through this display window. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

The above embodiments include the following technical ideas for solving the problems in the following background art.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, a game comprising a board box in which a game control board (control board) is stored in a storage member (cover body) in a base member (base body), and the base member and the storage member are fixed by a crimping part (fixing means). has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234125 (paragraph [0017], paragraph [0027], FIG. 7)).

[Problems in the Background Art]
By the way, in the game machine described in JP-A-2010-234125, if a game control board (control board) housed in a board box is provided with a fuse as a countermeasure against overcurrent, when the fuse blows, the base member (base Since the body) and the storage member (cover body) are fixed by the caulking part (fixing means), the fuse cannot be replaced and the game control board (control board) cannot be used. rice field.

In view of such circumstances, effective solutions for preventing the control board from becoming unusable due to overcurrent will be shown below.

(Solution 1)
A game machine in which a control board capable of controlling the excitation of a stepping motor is accommodated in a board box, the board box being configured in a box shape from a transparent cover body and a transparent base body, and fixed to each other. The fixed state between the transparent cover member and the transparent base member can be released by breaking the portion, and the control board is heated by overcurrent to the stepping motor. A game machine comprising a resettable fuse capable of interrupting a current due to a decrease in conductivity and then recovering the conductivity by being cooled.

In this gaming machine, a control board capable of controlling the excitation of the stepping motor is housed in a board box. The substrate box is configured in a box shape from a transparent cover and a transparent base, and the fixed state between the transparent cover and the transparent base can be released by breaking the fixed portion. It is possible. The control board has resettable fuses. This resettable fuse is heat generated by an overcurrent to the stepping motor, which lowers the electrical conductivity, cuts off the current, and then recovers the electrical conductivity by cooling.

In this way, when an overcurrent flows to the stepping motor, the resettable fuse cuts off the current and cools the stepping motor, thereby automatically restoring the current to the stepping motor. It is possible to prevent the control board from becoming unusable because there is no need to destroy the fixed portion due to overcurrent to the control board. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control board from becoming unusable due to overcurrent.

244 corresponds to the stepping motor, the main control board 1310 in FIG. 254 corresponds to the control board, and the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 255 corresponds to the board box. 255 corresponds to the transparent cover body, the transparent base body 1302 in FIG. 255 corresponds to the transparent base body, the crimped portion 1303 in FIG. A polyswitch MPS50 in FIG. 254 corresponds to a resettable fuse.

(Solution 2)
A game machine according to solution 1, characterized in that the game machine is a reel-type game machine.

In this solving means 2, since the game machine is a reel-type game machine, the effects of the solution means 1 can be obtained in the reel-type game machine. As a basic configuration of the reel-type gaming machine, after variably displaying a pattern information string (for example, a plurality of reel strings attached with a plurality of pattern information) consisting of a plurality of pattern information, the display result of the pattern information is stopped and displayed. In addition to having variable display means, the variable display of pattern information is started based on the operation of the operation means for starting (eg, starting lever), and based on the operation of the operation means for stopping (eg, stop button) or the passage of a predetermined time. to stop the variable display of the pattern information. Then, there is provided profit giving state generation means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and medals are used as game media to generate the profit giving state. It is configured so that a large amount of medals are sometimes paid out.

(Solution 3)
A game machine according to the solution 1, characterized in that the game machine is a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine are combined.

In this solution means 3, since the game machine is a hybrid game machine in which the pachinko game machine and the reel-type game machine are integrated, in the hybrid game machine in which the pachinko game machine and the reel-type game machine are integrated, the solution means 1 effect is obtained. As a basic configuration of a fusion game machine that combines a pachinko game machine and a reel-type game machine, a pattern information string consisting of a plurality of pattern information (for example, a plurality of reel strings with a plurality of patterns) is displayed in a variable manner. Later, a variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the pattern information is provided, and the variable display of the pattern information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the starting lever), and the stop operation means (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped. Then, there is provided a profit giving state generating means for generating a profit giving state (jackpot game state) on the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and a game ball is used as a game medium to generate the profit giving state. It is constructed such that a large number of game balls are put out when it occurs.

[Game setting change device]
As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 or a box-shaped main body fixedly attached to a gaming machine installation section (island facility) in a facility (game hall). 6004 or the like (hereinafter described with respect to the outer frame 2); a door frame 3 covering the front surface of the outer frame 2 and formed so as to be rotatable in a single-sided manner; a body frame 4 located on the rear side and formed so as to be rotatable in a single-sided manner with respect to the door frame 3 and the outer frame 2; A game setting change device is provided that can be changed within a predetermined range.
This game setting changing device is for changing the winning probability of the lottery for determining the winning or losing performed by the main control board 1310 described above. A change operation comprising a setting switching unit 131Xb for changing the set value of the winning probability by an operation such as rotation, a setting display unit 131Xc for displaying the set value of the winning probability, and a power switch 630a of the power unit 620c of the pachinko machine 1. have the means. It should be noted that it is possible to arbitrarily set what elements constitute the change operation means. For example, the power switch 630a may be excluded from the constituent elements, or an input key for entering a password may be added to the constituent elements. .

[Method of changing set values by change operation means]
Next, a method of changing the set value of the winning probability by the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described. As a premise for operating the changing operation means, an unlocking process for rotating the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is necessary, and the operation of the changing operation means including such an unlocking process will be described later.

First, the setting change key is inserted into the setting key switch 131Xa, and the power is turned off by the power switch 630a.
Next, the key of the setting key switch 131Xa is turned to switch from OFF to ON, and in this state the power is turned on by the power switch 630a. As a result, the main control board 1310 is switched to the setting change mode, and the current set value of the hit probability is visually displayed on the setting display section 131Xc by a 7-segment display or LED lighting. In addition, the hit probability of the game setting is, for example, "setting 1 = 1/20.0", "setting 2 = 1/19.8", "setting 3 = 1/19.6", "setting 4 = 1/19 4”, “setting 5=1/19.2”, and “setting 6=1/19.0”.
Next, while looking at the setting display section 131Xc, the setting switching section 131Xb is operated to change the set value of the probability of winning, and when the set value to be changed is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is turned off and pulled out. As a result, the set value of the hit probability is determined, the display of the set value by the setting display section 131Xc disappears, the setting change mode ends, and the game becomes ready for play.
To check the current set value, turn ON the setting key switch 131Xa with the setting change key while the power is on. The display of the set value on the display unit 131Xc disappears.
Of course, the procedure of the above change method is an example, and may be changed as appropriate according to the combination of elements of the change operation means.

[Specific example of change operation means]
Next, a specific example of the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 231, 233 and 249-252.

[Example 1]
231 and 233 are all installed in the upper left corner of the front structural member 1000 outside the game area 5a of the game board 5. FIG.
That is, the change operation means of the specific example 1 includes a setting display section 131Xc shared by the function display unit 1400, a setting key switch 131Xa arranged diagonally above near the function display unit 1400 along the game area 5a, It is composed of a power switch 630a arranged diagonally above the setting key switch 131Xa, and a push button type setting switching unit 131Xb arranged diagonally above the power switch 630a.
The game board 5 is detachably attached to the front surface of the body frame 4 and substantially constitutes a part of the body frame 4 . Therefore, in the game setting changing device shown in FIGS. 231 and 233, all the changing operation means for changing the set values are provided on the front side of the body frame 4. FIG.
Also, the power switch 630a is a relocated one provided in the power supply unit 620c, and the function of turning on/off the power remains the same.

A procedure for changing the setting values of the game setting changing device by means of the changing operating means of the first embodiment will be described.
First, in the pachinko machine 1, the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked by the locking unit 650 attached to the body frame 4 as described above, and the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are locked. The frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 via the body frame 4. - 特許庁
Therefore, before operating the changing operation means, the key is inserted from the front of the door frame 3 into the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130, and rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) to lock the door frame 3. After unlocking and rotating only the door frame 3 in the opening direction, the employee stands in front of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) with the opened door frame 3 viewed on the left (unlocking process).
Then, in that state, the setting value is changed by the change operation means of the game setting change device according to the procedure described above, and then the door frame 3 is returned and locked.
In addition, the game setting change device of all the specific examples is provided with a door frame opening switch 4a (see FIG. 252) on the door frame 3 to detect the opening of the door frame 3, and when the door frame 3 is opened, the setting change mode is entered. When the mode is switched, a loud voice “setting change in progress” is played from the body frame speaker 622 or the like, and a setting change in progress signal is transmitted from the external terminal board 558 . As a result, the setting change operation of the game setting change device is clearly communicated to the surrounding people and the administrator, so that unauthorized setting changes are less likely to be made. Depending on the degree of opening of the door frame 3, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 notifying that the setting is being changed may be set at a high volume when the opening of the door frame 3 is small. A difference in sound volume may be provided such that when the sound volume is larger than an angle (for example, an opening angle of 80 degrees or more) that is easy to check from , the sound volume is medium or less. By doing so, when the opening of the door frame 3 is small, fraud can be detected mainly by voice, while when the opening of the door frame 3 is large, fraud can be detected mainly by visual inspection. The stress caused by the sound can be reduced for normal setting change work that is performed with the door open.

The change operation means of the game setting change device of the above-described specific example 1 is provided in the upper left corner corresponding to the outside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, but in addition to this, although not shown, the upper right outside the game area 5a It may be provided in a corner, like the lower left corner, like the lower right corner. Also, as shown in FIGS. 249(a) and (b), it may be provided below the game board 5 of the main body frame 4. FIG.
In this case, the change operation means can be prevented from being illegally operated by a person with malicious intent who tries to secretly operate the change operation means by stealing the eyes of an employee who is dealing with a trouble such as ball jamming by opening the door frame 3. At least one element (preferably, the setting switching unit 131Xb for directly inputting the setting value) is provided in either the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the game board 5, or a plurality of elements are provided dispersedly in both (for example It is preferable that the setting key switch 131Xa is located at the upper right corner, and the setting switching section 131Xb is located at the upper left corner. If there is a change operation means in these positions, it is far from the player sitting on the chair, and the gesture of extending the hand is unnatural, and there is a high risk that employees will notice it. This is because it can be a psychological pressure to stop. For this reason, since it is difficult for the player to see it because it is located farthest from the player sitting on the chair and the employee who is working is obstructed by the player, all or all of the change operation means are placed in the upper left corner of the game board 5. It is best to provide a portion (preferably a key portion of the conversion operation).
Conversely, if the change operation means is provided below the game board 5 of the main body frame 4 as shown in FIGS. However, in order to solve such a crime prevention problem, the body frame 4 is formed with a hidden area 131Xd which is hidden and difficult to see when viewed from an oblique direction avoiding the open door frame 3. 131Xe may be provided, and all or part of the change operation means may be provided in the hidden area 131Xd. In FIGS. 249(a) and (b), the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe that is hidden from the above viewpoint (for example, obliquely from the open side (opposite side of the hinge) of the door frame 3 opened to cope with ball jamming). In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 249(a), a setting display section 131Xc is provided by LED by further providing a recess as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 249(a). The setting value is almost invisible from the . Of course, providing all of the change operation means on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe is most advantageous in terms of crime prevention, but even if only a part of the change operation means is provided on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe, fraud can occur. It is effective as a crime prevention measure because it is difficult to carry out. In particular, the setting display section 131Xc of the change operation means can be installed if there is a small stepped section 131Xe for arranging the LEDs in a line, so it is easy to secure an installation location.

[Example 2]
The change operation means of specific example 2 is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. Each element constituting the change operation means is as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.
If the change operation means is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is opened to deal with trouble as described above, the change operation means is positioned near the hand of the player as a result. However, in Example 2, by providing an openable and closable cover body 131Xg on the rear side of the door frame 3 to cover the change operation means, unauthorized operation can be easily performed. is not allowed.
A hinge portion 131Xh is provided on one side of the cover body 131Xg so that it can rotate in a single-sided manner. In addition, the change operation means is hidden from the player by forming a screen in the open state. Such a cover body 131Xg can also be applied to the above specific example 1, and by providing a hinge portion between the change operation means and the player, it is possible to protect the change operation means in the closed state, of course. , the change operation means can be hidden from the player's point of view by standing like a screen in the open state.

In concrete examples 1 and 2, there is a risk that a hole is made in the synthetic resin door frame 3 with a heated stick or the like, and that the change operation means is manipulated through the hole. It is advisable to provide a protective plate (for example, a metal plate) with excellent heat resistance and rigidity on the Of course, the cover body 131Xg may be made of a material having excellent heat resistance and rigidity to form an openable protective plate.

[Example 3]
The change operation means of specific example 3 is such that part of the change operation means of specific example 1 or 2 is provided on the rear side of the body frame 4 and/or on the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the body frame 4 in the closed state. It is what I did.
For example, the change operation means of the specific example 3 includes the power switch 630a integrated with the power unit 620c attached to the rear side of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. , 2 are provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 and the front side of the body frame 4. For example, the power switch 630a, which is one element of the change operation means, may be provided inside the outer frame 2 (fixed portion).
When changing the set value of the game setting change device by the change operation means of this specific example 3, as an unlocking step, the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 and turned in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise when viewed from the front). After the main body frame 4 is rotated to unlock the outer frame 2, the key inserted into the cylinder lock 130 is rotated in the opposite direction to unlock the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, and in this state. Each change operation means may be operated in the manner described above. The main body frame 4 is also provided with a main body frame open switch 4b (see FIG. 252) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4, similarly to the door frame 3, so that both the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are set to be open. When the mode is switched to the change mode, the body frame speaker 622 or the like plays a loud voice "setting change in progress" and the external terminal board 558 transmits a setting change in progress signal.

As described above, the change operation means of the specific example 3 needs to unlock the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 in order to execute the change operation. If fraud takes time, the risk of being discovered increases, so it is difficult for those who plan fraud to perceive it as a model that is difficult to attack and is less likely to be targeted.

[Setting auxiliary device for change operation means]
FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a setting auxiliary device 131Xi that can correspond to any of the change operation means of specific examples 1-3.
This auxiliary setting device 131Xi includes a portable size device case 131Xj, a setting changing key 131Xk that matches at least the setting key switch 131Xa, an auxiliary setting operating section 131Xl that operates a setting switching section 131Xb, and a game setting changing device. and an auxiliary setting visible display unit 131Xm that acquires and visually displays setting information.

A key 131Xk that matches the setting key switch 131Xa protrudes to the rear side of the device case 131Xj, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by an auxiliary key lever 131Xn that protrudes to the front side of the device case 131Xj.

The auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl that operates the setting switching unit 131Xb manually operates (rotates) the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo (hexagonal wrench) protruded to the rear side of the device case 131Xj, for example, and the auxiliary setting connection unit 131Xo. and an auxiliary input section 131Xp for In accordance with the auxiliary setting operating unit 131Xl, the game setting changing device on the pachinko machine 1 side has a structure in which the setting switching unit 131Xb can be rotated by a hexagonal wrench of the same standard as the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo. If the setting switching unit 131Xb and the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo of the game setting changing device are set to a combination of a special standard, the setting switching unit 131Xb cannot be changed without using the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo. , the crime prevention performance is improved.

The auxiliary setting visual display unit 131Xm, which acquires and visually displays the setting information of the game setting change device, converts the light signal acquired by the round shaft optical sensor 131Xq and the optical sensor 131Xq into a visible display. and auxiliary setting display means 131Xr for displaying. The setting display unit 131Xc of the game setting change device has a round hole shape into which the optical sensor 131Xq can be fitted, for example. The blinking light is acquired by the optical sensor 131Xq and converted into a visible display by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. Therefore, since the set values of the game setting change device can be seen only through the auxiliary setting visible display section 131Xm, those who do not have the setting auxiliary device 131Xi cannot understand the set values, thereby improving the crime prevention performance.

According to the setting auxiliary device 131Xi, when changing the setting value of the change operation means in the above-described manner, after the unlocking process for opening the door frame 3, if the key 131Xk of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is firmly inserted to the base, the long The auxiliary setting connecting portion 131Xo (hexagonal wrench) of the auxiliary setting operation portion 131Xl fits into the setting switching portion 131Xb, and the optical sensor 131Xq of the auxiliary setting visible display portion 131Xm fits into the round hole of the setting display portion 131Xc. If the optical sensor 131Xq is accommodated last while being guided by the key 131Xk and the auxiliary setting connecting portion 131Xo, damage to the delicate optical sensor 131Xq can be prevented.

Next, with the auxiliary setting device 131Xi set as described above, the power switch 630a (see specific examples 1 to 3 for the position of each power switch 630a), which is one element of the change operation means, is turned off. Turning the key 131Xk with the key lever 131Xn to turn on the setting key switch 131Xa, and turning on the power switch 630a in this state switches to the setting change mode. Then, the setting information emitted as a one-sided light signal from the back of the round hole of the setting display section 131Xc is read by the optical sensor 131Xq and visually displayed by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. The setting value is changed by manually turning the auxiliary input section 131Xp while visually confirming it with the means 131Xr.
Then, when the predetermined setting value is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is turned off, the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is removed from the pachinko machine 1, and the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is locked, and the setting operation is completed.

The illustrated setting auxiliary device 131Xi is provided with a schedule display section 131Xs for displaying setting values to be changed separately from auxiliary setting display means 131Xr for displaying current setting values. This set value to be changed is preliminarily entered in the internal data of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi together with the individual number of the pachinko machine 1 .
On the other hand, the setting display section 131Xc of the game setting changing device of the pachinko machine 1 transmits its own individual number as a light signal together with the current setting value, which is read by the optical sensor 131Xq of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi. As a result, the setting values scheduled to be changed for the target pachinko machine 1 are displayed.
Therefore, the person who changes the settings should keep the auxiliary input section of the auxiliary setting operation section 131Xl until the set value to be changed displayed on the schedule display section 131Xs matches the display of the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr showing the current set value. Since the 131Xp can be rotated, the setting work can be performed efficiently, and setting errors are less likely to occur.

Further, the auxiliary input section 131Xp of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is driven by an electric means (not shown), and in the setting change mode, at least the schedule display section 131Xs indicating the set value to be changed is hidden and the auxiliary input section 131Xp is automatically activated. If it is rotated and the fact that the setting change is completed is indicated by, for example, simultaneous lighting of the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr, the setting value of the winning probability is not known even by the person who performs the setting work, so the employee does not know the winning probability. There is no possibility that the information of the pachinko machine 1 with high security is leaked.

In the game setting changing device of specific examples 1 and 2, all the changing operation means for changing the set values of the game setting changing device are provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 and/or on the front side of the body frame 4 .

On the other hand, in the game setting changing device of specific examples 1 and 2, all of the changing operation means for changing the set values of the game setting changing device are provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 and/or on the front side of the body frame 4. , and thus correspond to embodiments of the following technical idea.
"A frame or box-shaped fixed part that is fixedly attached to the game machine installation part in the facility,
a door frame that covers the front surface of the fixed part and is formed so as to be rotatable in a single-sided manner;
a main body frame positioned on the rear side of the door frame and formed so as to be rotatable with respect to the door frame and the fixed portion in a single-sided manner, the game machine comprising:
A game setting changing device capable of changing the game setting of the probability of winning by lottery within a predetermined range is provided,
A gaming machine characterized in that all the changing operation means for changing the set values of the game setting changing device are provided on the rear side of the door frame and/or on the front side of the body frame. ”
[Problems to be solved]
This technical idea addresses the following problems in the game machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 4-2382).
"The game machine described in Patent Document 1 has a game setting change device in a well-known back mechanism that includes all main parts such as a ball tank and a prize ball payout device. Therefore, every time the setting is changed, It is necessary to rotate the back mechanism. There is a risk of disconnection in important wiring every time it is moved, and since the inside of the island equipment communicates with the outside every time the back mechanism is rotated, there is a risk of damage to the ball circulation equipment due to dropping foreign objects such as tools. In addition, there is a risk that the setting of the counter for out balls and safe balls may be misaligned by rotating the back mechanism, so there is a risk of data failure due to the misalignment of the counter setting. There is a risk of unauthorized parts being installed on the back side, and the back mechanism is extremely heavy due to the weight of the balls in the ball tank. There were problems such as the deterioration of the working environment.”
[The invention's effect]
According to the amusement machine described above, when changing the setting of the winning probability with the game setting changing device, it is sufficient to rotate the door frame provided with the parts for the performance, so that disconnection of the wire when rotating the door frame is sufficient. The risk is small, and even if the door frame is rotated, the inside of the island facility is blocked by the main body frame, so the risk of damage to the ball circulation facility due to dropping foreign objects such as tools is small. There is also a small risk of fraudulent parts being installed on the back side of the game machine by employees. In addition, even if the door frame is rotated, there is almost no possibility that the out ball/safe ball counter setting will be deviated, so there is almost no risk of data failure due to counter setting deviation. Since it is light because it does not have a power supply, there is an effect that the physical burden of changing the setting can be reduced.
Note that, even in the above-described specific example 3, when the main body frame 4 is opened and closed in order to execute the change operation, problems such as the disconnection risk pointed out here may occur, but in the specific example 3, a greater effect of improving the crime prevention performance is obtained. Moreover, this problem can be solved by installing the change operation means provided on the rear side of the body frame 4 or the fixed portion near the free end side of the body frame 4 . By doing so, the range of rotation of the body frame 4 during the change operation can be reduced, and the impact accompanying opening and closing and the physical burden required for opening and closing can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is of course not limited to the above embodiments. For example, the main control board 1310 automatically clears the internal RAM by switching to the setting change mode. It may be provided so that the maintenance of the gaming machine, including changing the winning probability, can be performed efficiently.

In addition, in the embodiment, the game setting change device allows the game setting of the probability of winning by lottery to be changed within a predetermined range. (Accessory lottery) may be changed.
Specifically, the management number No. in FIG. 20, the excitation time (ms) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is set to "setting 1=324", "setting 2=320", and "setting 3 to setting 6=316". Even if the excitation time (ms) of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 in 21 is set as "setting 1 to setting 3 = 428", "setting 4 = 420", "setting 5 = 416", "setting 6 = 412" good. By doing this, the stopping time of the first electric sorting piece 4835 or the second electric sorting piece 4840 changes, whichever is disadvantageous to the player, so that the probability of a ball entering a specific receiving port changes. It should be noted that the target of change in setting 1 to setting 3 is the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the change target in setting 4 to setting 6 is the second electric distribution piece 4840, thereby dispersing the locations where changes in movement appear. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the change due to the setting change.

In addition, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a mammoth ball machine, an arrangement ball machine, and the fusion machine. It can also be applied to slot machines that rotate drums (rotating drums or reels).

1 … Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 … Outer frame (fixed part)
6004 ... main body portion (fixed portion)
3 ... door frame 4 ... body frame 630a ... power switch (change operation means)
131Xa ... Setting key switch (change operation means)
131Xb ... setting switching unit (change operation means)
131Xc ... setting display section (change operation means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole and executes a predetermined winning game when a winning result is derived as a result of the lottery,
a setting-related operation section that can be operated by an administrator;
setting determination mode generation means for generating a setting determination mode capable of determining a setting value related to the probability of deriving the winning result based on an operation on the setting related operation unit;
with
The setting-related operation unit is provided on the back side of an opening/closing unit having a back surface that cannot be touched by the player,
The setting determination mode can be started when an operation is performed on the setting-related operation unit when the opening/closing unit is opened and the game machine is powered on,
During the setting determination mode, a specific sound is output from a predetermined sound output unit, and a specific external signal is output via a predetermined external terminal plate,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a game becomes possible when the setting value is determined and the setting determination mode ends.

Images